BW 3.0B Business Explorer Documentation

Business Explorer

AD

DO

N.N

DB

WR

E

Re lease 30B

SAP Online Help 13.05.02

Business Explorer 30B 2

Copyright

© Copyright 2002 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without priornotice.

Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary softwarecomponents of other software vendors.

Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are registeredtrademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

IBM®, DB2®, DB2 Universal Database, OS/2®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA, AIX®, S/390®,AS/400®, OS/390®, OS/400®, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, z/OS, AFP, Intelligent Miner,WebSphere®, Netfinity®, Tivoli®, Informix and Informix® Dynamic ServerTM are trademarks of IBMCorporation in USA and/or other countries.

ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.

UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.

Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®, VideoFrame®,MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.

HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide WebConsortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license fortechnology invented and implemented by Netscape.

SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow, SAP EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP, mySAP.com, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. MarketSet and Enterprise Buyer are jointly owned trademarks of SAP Markets and Commerce One. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective owners.



Icons

Icon Meaning

Caution

Example

Note

Recommendation

Syntax

Typographic Conventions

Type Style Description

Example text Words or characters that appear on the screen. These include fieldnames, screen titles, pushbuttons as well as menu names, paths andoptions.

Cross-references to other documentation.Example text Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles of graphics and tables.

EXAMPLE TEXT Names of elements in the system. These include report names,program names, transaction codes, table names, and individual keywords of a programming language, when surrounded by body text, forexample, SELECT and INCLUDE.

Example text Screen output. This includes file and directory names and their paths,messages, source code, names of variables and parameters as well asnames of installation, upgrade and database tools.

EXAMPLE TEXT Keys on the keyboard, for example, function keys (such as F2) or theENTER key.

Example text Exact user entry. These are words or characters that you enter in thesystem exactly as they appear in the documentation.

<Example text> Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that you replace thesewords and characters with appropriate entries.



Business Explorer.................................................................................................................................. 14

Query Design: BEx Query Designer .................................................................................................. 16

Functions of the BEx Query Designer............................................................................................ 18

Defining New Queries .................................................................................................................... 22

Restricting Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 25

Restricting Characteristics: Hierarchies...................................................................................... 27

Selecting Hierarchies.................................................................................................................. 29

Restricting Key Figures............................................................................................................... 30

Calculating Key Figures.............................................................................................................. 31

Percentage Functions ............................................................................................................. 32

Data Functions ........................................................................................................................ 34

Boolean Operators .................................................................................................................. 36

Technical Notes about the Formula Operators ....................................................................... 37

Defining Exception Cells............................................................................................................. 37

Using Variables: The Variable Wizard and the Variable Editor .................................................. 39

Variable Types ........................................................................................................................ 41

Variable Processing Types ..................................................................................................... 42

Manual Entry / Default Value............................................................................................... 43

Replacement Path ............................................................................................................... 43

Customer Exit ...................................................................................................................... 44

SAP Exit (delivered variables)............................................................................................. 45

Authorization........................................................................................................................ 46

Overview of Variable Types and Processing Types ............................................................... 46

Defining Variables with the Variable Wizard ........................................................................... 47

Details.................................................................................................................................. 48

Default Values ..................................................................................................................... 50

Replacement Path ............................................................................................................... 51

Replacement Path: Replacement with a Characteristic Value ........................................ 52

Replacement Path: Replacement with a Query............................................................... 54

Characteristic....................................................................................................................... 54

Currencies and Units ........................................................................................................... 55

Changing Variables in the Variable Editor .............................................................................. 55

Saving Queries ........................................................................................................................... 56

Query Properties ............................................................................................................................ 56

Properties of Query Components................................................................................................... 60

Characteristic Properties ............................................................................................................ 61

Attribute Properties ..................................................................................................................... 65

Structure Properties.................................................................................................................... 66

Selection/Formula Properties ..................................................................................................... 66



Selecting Constants ................................................................................................................ 70

Calculated Key Figure Properties............................................................................................... 71

Exception Reporting ....................................................................................................................... 73

Defining Exceptions .................................................................................................................... 75

Conditions/Exceptions: Inserting, Changing, Deleting Rows.................................................. 78

Displaying Exceptions: Alert Monitor .......................................................................................... 79

Conditions....................................................................................................................................... 80

Defining Conditions..................................................................................................................... 81

Using Conditions......................................................................................................................... 84

Tabular Query Display.................................................................................................................... 85

Displaying and Changing Existing Queries in the Query Designer................................................ 86

Creating Reusable Structures ........................................................................................................ 87

Deleting Query Objects .................................................................................................................. 88

Copying Queries between InfoCubes ............................................................................................ 89

Editing Sender/Receiver Assignments to the R/RI in BW.............................................................. 90

Creating InfoSet Queries as Receiver Reports .......................................................................... 92

Web Application Design: BEx Web Application Designer ................................................................. 93

BEx Web Application Designer ...................................................................................................... 95

Creating Web Applications with the BEx Web Application Designer ....................................... 100

Creating Web Applications with the Web Application Wizard .................................................. 103

Making Settings ........................................................................................................................ 105

Storage of Stylesheets and Icons............................................................................................. 106

From Web Template to Web Application.................................................................................. 107

Determining Web Template Properties .................................................................................... 109

Designing the Layout of Web Templates.................................................................................. 110

Working with the Library for Web Items.................................................................................... 112

Setting Up the BEx Web Application Designer......................................................................... 114

Web Items .................................................................................................................................... 115

General attributes ..................................................................................................................... 116

Resetting and Reinitializing Web Items.................................................................................... 118

Tables ....................................................................................................................................... 119

Charts ....................................................................................................................................... 122

Editing Charts........................................................................................................................ 124

Configuring Preview Windows........................................................................................... 125

Undoing Changes.............................................................................................................. 126

Formatting the Chart Background ..................................................................................... 126

Formatting Chart Plot Areas.............................................................................................. 127

Changing the Filling and Border of Surfaces .................................................................... 127

Changing the Size of Chart Elements ............................................................................... 129

Changing the Position of Chart Elements ......................................................................... 130

Removing Chart Elements ................................................................................................ 131



Chart Types ....................................................................................................................... 131

Editing Chart Types of Class 1 ...................................................................................... 134



Changing the Chart Type............................................................................................... 144

Axes and Gridlines ............................................................................................................ 145

Showing and Hiding Axes.............................................................................................. 146

Changing the Position of the Tick Marks ....................................................................... 146

Changing the Scale........................................................................................................ 147

Changing the Point of Intersection of Axes ................................................................... 148

Reversing the Order of Categories and Values............................................................. 149

Formatting Axes and Axis Labels .................................................................................. 149

Changing the Start and End Points of a Value Axis ...................................................... 150

Changing the Value Axis Interval................................................................................... 151

Changing Minor Tick Mark and Minor Tick Mark Label Intervals .................................. 151

Adding a Value Range................................................................................................... 152

Formatting Value Ranges .............................................................................................. 153

Formatting the Value Range Title .................................................................................. 153

Changing the Title and Values of a Value Range.......................................................... 154

Showing and Hiding Grid Lines ..................................................................................... 155

Editing Gridlines............................................................................................................. 156

Data Series and Data Points ............................................................................................. 156

Plotting a Data Series to a Secondary Axis................................................................... 157

Formatting Data Series .................................................................................................. 158

Smoothing Lines ............................................................................................................ 159

Adding, Changing and Removing Trendlines ................................................................ 160

Formatting Trendline Equations..................................................................................... 161

Adding and Removing Error Bars .................................................................................. 162

Editing Error Bars........................................................................................................... 163

Adding and Removing Normal Distributions.................................................................. 163

Editing a Normal Distribution ......................................................................................... 164

Formatting the Title of a Normal Distribution ................................................................. 165

Formatting the Tachometer Needle Label ..................................................................... 166

Changing the Value Range of a Tachometer ................................................................ 166

Rotating Pie and Ring Charts ........................................................................................ 167

Deactivating the Color Change for a Pie or Ring........................................................... 167

Changing the Ring Width............................................................................................... 168

Changing the Depth of 3D Charts.................................................................................. 168

Formatting Walls and Floors.......................................................................................... 169

Changing Quadrants...................................................................................................... 169

Showing and Hiding Drop Lines .................................................................................... 170



Formatting Data Points .................................................................................................. 171

Changing the Distance between Groups of Data Points ............................................... 171

Changing the Overlapping of Data Points ..................................................................... 172

Titles, Data Labels and Legends....................................................................................... 172

Adding and Removing Chart Titles ................................................................................ 173

Adding and Removing Axis Titles and Units.................................................................. 174

Formatting Chart Titles, Axis Titles and Units ............................................................... 175

Adding Data Labels........................................................................................................ 175

Formatting Data Labels ................................................................................................. 177

Removing Data Labels................................................................................................... 178

Changing Texts of Titles, Units and Data Labels .......................................................... 178

Adding and Removing Legends..................................................................................... 179

Formatting Legend Texts and Symbols ......................................................................... 180

Formatting the Legend Background .............................................................................. 181

Data Tables ....................................................................................................................... 181

Showing and Hiding Data Tables .................................................................................. 182

Formatting Data Tables ................................................................................................. 183

Changing the Page Layout................................................................................................ 183

Printing Charts................................................................................................................... 185

Dropdown Box .......................................................................................................................... 185

Radio Button Groups ................................................................................................................ 187

Checkboxes .............................................................................................................................. 190

Generic Navigation Block ......................................................................................................... 191

Hierarchical Context Menu ....................................................................................................... 193

Filters ........................................................................................................................................ 195

Label ......................................................................................................................................... 197

Text Elements........................................................................................................................... 198

List of Exceptions...................................................................................................................... 200

List of Conditions ...................................................................................................................... 200

Alert Monitor ............................................................................................................................. 201

Role Menu................................................................................................................................. 203

Ticker ........................................................................................................................................ 205

Maps ......................................................................................................................................... 206

Map Attributes ....................................................................................................................... 207

Attributes for Map Layers .................................................................................................. 210

Special Attributes for Color Shading.............................................................................. 211

Special Attributes for Bar Charts ................................................................................... 212

Special Attributes for Pie Charts.................................................................................... 213

Special Attributes for Pie Charts (split) .......................................................................... 214

Special Attributes for Dot Density .................................................................................. 215

Special Attributes for Symbols....................................................................................... 216



Special Attributes for Symbol (Size-dependent)............................................................ 217

Special Attributes for Symbol (Color-dependent) .......................................................... 219

Special Attributes for Line.............................................................................................. 220

Special Attributes for Line (Size-dependent) ................................................................. 221

Special Attributes for Lines (Color-dependent).............................................................. 223

Array Attributes ..................................................................................................................... 224

Map Renderer ....................................................................................................................... 225

Single Document ...................................................................................................................... 227

List of Documents ..................................................................................................................... 228

Ad-hoc Query Designer ............................................................................................................ 231

What If Prediction ..................................................................................................................... 235

ABC Classification .................................................................................................................... 236

BW Stylesheets ............................................................................................................................ 237

Print Stylesheet ............................................................................................................................ 242

Web Templates ............................................................................................................................ 243

Object Tags .............................................................................................................................. 244

Object Tag for the Properties of Web Templates ................................................................. 245

Object Tag for Data Provider ................................................................................................ 246

Object Tag for Web Items ..................................................................................................... 247

Command URLs ....................................................................................................................... 247

Calling up Web Templates .................................................................................................... 248

Calling Parameterized Web Templates............................................................................. 252

Switching Web Templates..................................................................................................... 253

Personalizing the Web Template .......................................................................................... 254

Removing Personalization .................................................................................................... 254

Creating Bookmarks.............................................................................................................. 254

Changing Icon Directory........................................................................................................ 255

Releasing a Web Template................................................................................................... 255

Calling up the Variables Screen............................................................................................ 256

Default Variables for Web Applications................................................................................. 256

Changing the Values of Variables......................................................................................... 259

Adjusting and Enhancing the Context Menu......................................................................... 259

Adjusting the Context Menu .............................................................................................. 259

Enhancing the Context Menu ............................................................................................ 265

Command Sequences........................................................................................................... 267

Using Forms ............................................................................................................................. 268

Language-Dependent Texts ..................................................................................................... 270

Creating ABAP Programs for Maintaining Language-Dependent Texts............................... 270

Data Provider ............................................................................................................................... 272

Stored Query Views ..................................................................................................................... 273

Properties of Query Views ........................................................................................................ 275



Resetting and Reinitializing Query Views................................................................................. 276

Displaying a Copy of a Data Provider on a New Page............................................................. 277

Calling Dialog Query Properties ............................................................................................... 278

Back, Forwards, and Back to Start ........................................................................................... 278

Filtering ..................................................................................................................................... 279

Removing Filters....................................................................................................................... 281

Calling Value Help .................................................................................................................... 282

Drilldown ................................................................................................................................... 283

Remove Drilldown..................................................................................................................... 283

Switching Characteristics/Structures ........................................................................................ 284

Swapping Axes ......................................................................................................................... 285

Setting the Navigational State .................................................................................................. 285

Sort ........................................................................................................................................... 286

Setting Properties of Display Attributes .................................................................................... 287

Results Row Position................................................................................................................ 288

Suppression of Result Rows..................................................................................................... 289

Define Display........................................................................................................................... 289

Calling Dialog Characteristic Properties ................................................................................... 290

Currency Translation ................................................................................................................ 291

Calling a Dialog for Currency Translation................................................................................. 291

Defining and Changing Exceptions .......................................................................................... 291

Calling a Dialog for Defining Exceptions .................................................................................. 293

Setting the Status of an Exception ........................................................................................... 293

Creating and Changing Conditions........................................................................................... 294

Calling a Dialog for Defining Conditions ................................................................................... 295

Setting the Status of a Condition .............................................................................................. 296

Displaying Documents .............................................................................................................. 296

Saving the Query View ............................................................................................................. 297

Properties of Value Cells .......................................................................................................... 298

Calling a Dialog for Cell Properties........................................................................................... 298

List Calculation ......................................................................................................................... 299

Operations for Display Hierarchies........................................................................................... 300

Calling Up Dialog Box for Formula Definition ........................................................................... 303

Goto using Report/Report Interface.......................................................................................... 303

Exporting Data .......................................................................................................................... 304

Use of JavaScript Functions......................................................................................................... 304

Sending Instructions ................................................................................................................. 305

Execute URL in the Same Window....................................................................................... 306

Executing an URL in a New Window .................................................................................... 306

URL from a New Window in the Opening Window ............................................................... 307

Closing Windows................................................................................................................... 307



Executing a Form in a New Window..................................................................................... 308

Executing a Form in the Opening Window............................................................................ 308

Enhancing the Context Menu with JavaScript .......................................................................... 309

Adding a Menu Entry using JavaScript ................................................................................. 309

Command Processing........................................................................................................... 311

Properties of Page Objects....................................................................................................... 313

Web Item Attributes............................................................................................................... 313

Characteristics of a Saved Query View ................................................................................ 314

Calendar for Date Filter......................................................................................................... 315

Logon Language....................................................................................................................... 316

Web Design API for Tables .......................................................................................................... 316

Table Interface.......................................................................................................................... 317

Attributes ............................................................................................................................... 318

Datasets ............................................................................................................................ 319

AXIS_INFO .................................................................................................................... 320

AXIS_DATA ................................................................................................................... 321

CELL_DATA .................................................................................................................. 323

TXT_SYMBOLS............................................................................................................. 324

Events ................................................................................................................................... 325

Manipulating Cell Contents ................................................................................................... 326

Headers ............................................................................................................................. 327

Scaling Factors.................................................................................................................. 328

Characteristic Values......................................................................................................... 328

Attribute Values ................................................................................................................. 329

Structural Components...................................................................................................... 330

Data Cells .......................................................................................................................... 331

Error Cells.......................................................................................................................... 332

Labeling Area of the Navigation Block .............................................................................. 332

Filter Area of the Navigation Block .................................................................................... 334

Service Methods ................................................................................................................... 335

Creating Navigation URLs................................................................................................. 335

Information on the Navigation Status ................................................................................ 336

Information on a Specific Cell............................................................................................ 337

Icons .................................................................................................................................. 338

Sending Messages ............................................................................................................ 339

JavaScript Functions ......................................................................................................... 340

Analysis & Reporting: BEx Web Applications .................................................................................. 340

Context Menu Functions .............................................................................................................. 341

Choosing a Filter Value ............................................................................................................ 345

Searching in Hierarchies ....................................................................................................... 347

Changing Filter Values.......................................................................................................... 348



Goto .......................................................................................................................................... 348

Currency translation.................................................................................................................. 350

Exporting as a CSV File / MS Excel 2000 File ......................................................................... 350

Setting Bookmarks.................................................................................................................... 351

Properties for a characteristic ................................................................................................... 352

Local Properties of a Key Figure .............................................................................................. 354

Local Properties of the Query................................................................................................... 355

Key Figure Definition ................................................................................................................ 357

Table............................................................................................................................................. 357

Generic Navigation Block ............................................................................................................. 359

List of Conditions.......................................................................................................................... 359

Defining and Changing Conditions ........................................................................................... 360

List of Exceptions ......................................................................................................................... 362

Defining and Changing Exceptions .......................................................................................... 362

Label............................................................................................................................................. 365

Dropdown Box, Radio Button Group, Checkbox, Hierarchical Context Menu ............................. 365

Ad-hoc Query Designer Functions ............................................................................................... 366

Ad-hoc Query Designer: Defining New Queries ....................................................................... 366

Characteristic Properties....................................................................................................... 370

Selection/Formula Properties................................................................................................ 372

Structure Properties .............................................................................................................. 374

Query Properties ................................................................................................................... 374

Ad-hoc Query Designer: Defining New Queries with the Wizard ............................................. 377

Ad-hoc Query Designer: Changing Queries ............................................................................. 379

Using Documents in Web Applications ........................................................................................ 380

Creating New Documents......................................................................................................... 381

Finding Documents ............................................................................................................... 382

Navigating in Maps....................................................................................................................... 383

Example of Interaction in Maps ................................................................................................ 384

Using What If Prediction in Web Applications .............................................................................. 385

Using ABC Classification in Web Applications............................................................................. 386

Using Variables in Web Applications ........................................................................................... 386

Variable Screens ...................................................................................................................... 387

Personalizing Variables ............................................................................................................ 388

Navigation Functions in the Standard Web Template.................................................................. 389

Accessibility in Web Applications ................................................................................................. 391

BEx Mobile Intelligence.................................................................................................................... 392

Creating a Mobile Application....................................................................................................... 395

Supported Web Items............................................................................................................... 395

Automatic Device Recognition.................................................................................................. 397

PDA Application........................................................................................................................ 400



WAP Application ....................................................................................................................... 401

Alert Scenario............................................................................................................................... 410

Offline Scenario............................................................................................................................ 410

Collaboration & Distribution: Enterprise Portal Integration .............................................................. 411

Drag&Relate................................................................................................................................. 411

Drag&Relate-Enabled Characteristics...................................................................................... 412

Analysis & Reporting: BEx Analyzer ................................................................................................ 419

BEx Toolbar Functions ................................................................................................................. 420

Opening .................................................................................................................................... 424

Saving ....................................................................................................................................... 424

Refreshing Queries................................................................................................................... 425

Changing Queries..................................................................................................................... 426

Goto .......................................................................................................................................... 427

OLAP Functions for Active Cells .............................................................................................. 429

Calculate Result As............................................................................................................... 434

Calculate Single Values As... ................................................................................................ 436

Formatting................................................................................................................................. 440

Layout ....................................................................................................................................... 441

Tools ......................................................................................................................................... 442

Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 444

Evaluating Query Data ................................................................................................................. 446

Navigation and Navigation Functions ....................................................................................... 446

Selecting Filter Values .............................................................................................................. 449

Filter Values: Formulating Selection Conditions ................................................................... 451

BEx Map ................................................................................................................................... 453

Geographical Data Analysis with BEx Map........................................................................... 454

Analyzing Data Geographically Using the BEx Map ......................................................... 455

Saving Query Variants.............................................................................................................. 459

Query Properties....................................................................................................................... 459

Working with Hierarchies .......................................................................................................... 462

Translating Currencies.............................................................................................................. 463

Information Functions ............................................................................................................... 463

Queries in Workbooks.................................................................................................................. 465

Cell Areas of a Query ............................................................................................................... 465

Creating Workbook Templates ................................................................................................. 467

Removing Queries from Workbooks......................................................................................... 468

Detaching Queries .................................................................................................................... 469

Positioning Query Cell Areas.................................................................................................... 469

Displaying Text Elements ......................................................................................................... 470

Background Information on Excel Functions ............................................................................ 471

Sheet Protection ....................................................................................................................... 473



Integration with Visual Basic for Applications........................................................................... 474

Formatted Reporting: Crystal Reports Integration ........................................................................... 478

Opening and Saving Objects in BW ................................................................................................ 483

The Open Dialog .......................................................................................................................... 483

The Search Dialog .................................................................................................................... 485

The Save Dialog........................................................................................................................... 485

Organizing: BEx Browser................................................................................................................. 486

Selecting and Opening Documents.............................................................................................. 487

Working with the Business Explorer Browser .............................................................................. 488

BEx Browser: Administration........................................................................................................ 489

Creating Logos and Folder Symbols ........................................................................................ 490

Business Explorer Browser on the Web....................................................................................... 492



Business ExplorerPurposeThe Business Explorer is the SAP Business Information Warehouse component that provides flexiblereporting and analysis tools for strategic analyses and decision-making support within a company.These tools include query, reporting and OLAP functions. As an employee with authorization for theBusiness Explorer, you can evaluate old and current data to varying degrees of detail and fromdifferent perspectives on the Web and also in MS Excel.

The Business Explorer allows a large spectrum of users access to the information in SAP BW. Usingthe Enterprise Portal (for example, through an iView that you can call up alongside the applicationsfrom which you extracted data), using the Internet (Web Application Design) or using mobile devices(WAP or iMode-enabled mobile telephones, Personal Digital Assistants).

IntegrationThe following graphic illustrates the integration of the Business Explorer as an analysis and reportingcomponent within the Business Information Warehouse:

FeaturesThe following overview shows the functional areas of the Business Explorer:



,

Business Explorer

•Query design usingthe Desktop or Web•Multi-dimensional(OLAP) analyses(MS Excel or Web-based)•Geographicalanalyses•Ad-hoc reporting•Alerts•Publishing iViews•Seamlessintegration of Web-and MS Excel-basedanalyses

Portal Integration,Collaboration &Distribution

Queries, Reportingand Analysis

Web Application Design

FormattedReporting Mobile Intelligence

Technical ComponentsITools

Key Functions/Functional Areas

•Layouts exact toone pixel•Wizard-basedlayout definition•Static, formattedreports•Form-basedreports•Pre-definedCrystal Reportsin BusinessContent•Publishing onthe Web•Convenientprinting options

•Online andoffline scenarios•WAP device andPDA support•Automatic devicerecognition•Publishing usingthe WebApplicationDesigner•Device-specificoutput•Alerts, charts•Integration intothe mobile portal

•Web ApplicationDesign•Interactive analyticalContent on the Web•Information cockpitsand dashboards•Basis for creatinganalytical applications•Creation of iViewsfor the portal•Wizard-basedvisualisation APIs foradditional, highlyindividual Web design

•Single point-of-access•Role-based dataretrieval

•Personalization ,collaboration,profile generation

•Integration ofunstructured data

Queries, Reporting and AnalysisThe data in the Business Information Warehouse is structured into self-contained business data areas(InfoProviders). BEx Query Designer [Seite 16]. By selecting and combining InfoObjects(characteristics and key figures) or reusable structures in a query, you determine the way in which younavigate through and evaluate the data in the selected InfoProvider.

Analyzing data on the basis of multi-dimensional data sources (OLAP reporting) makes it possible toanalyze several dimensions at the same time (like, for example, time, location, product) You have theoption of carrying out any number of variance analyses (for example, plan-actual comparison, fiscalyear comparison). The data, displayed in the form of a pivot table, serves as the start point for adetailed analysis to answer a variety of questions. A large number of interaction options, such assorting, filtering, swapping characteristics or recalculating values allow flexible navigation through datafor the runtime. You can also display data in graphics (for example, bar charts or pie charts). Inaddition, you can evaluate geographical data (for example, characteristics such as customer, salesregion, country) on a map. Furthermore, using exception reporting, you can establish those objectsthat deviate from the norm or are critical, send messages automatically (through backgroundprocessing in the Reporting Agent) about deviating values by email or SMS, or calculate the values ata glance in an alert monitor.

In the Business Information Warehouse, you can analyze data in the Business Explorer in thefollowing areas:

� In the BEx Analyzer [Seite 417] (MS Excel-based) in the form of queries

� In BEx Web Applications [Seite 338]

Integration of the two areas is seamless. You can display queries from the BEx Analyzer with one clickin a standard view in the Web browser. Similarly, you can export a Web application to MS Excel 2000.

Web Application DesignWeb Application Designs allows you to use the generic OLAP navigation in Web applications as wellas business intelligence cockpits for simple or highly individual scenarios. You can implement highlyindividual scenarios with customer-defined interface elements by using standard markup languagesand Web design APIs. Web application design comprises a broad spectrum of Web-based businessintelligence scenarios, which you can adjust to meet your individual needs using standard Webtechnologies.

Using the BEx Web Application Designer [Seite 95], the desktop application for creating Webapplications, you can create HTML pages that have BW-specific contents such as tables, charts or



maps. You can save the Web applications as a URL and access them from an intranet or on mobiledevices. In addition, you can save Web applications as iViews and integrate them into an enterpriseportal.

The Web application wizard is an assistant that is integrated into the Web Application Designer. Youcan use this to help you create Web applications using a step-by-step procedure and to simplifydesign activities.

Formatted ReportingThe integration of Crystal Reports into BW enhances the functional area of the Business Explorer.With Crystal Reports, you can now create formatted reports. For formatted reports it is important thatyou can specify the layout design to one pixel and also have convenient print options.

See Formatted Reporting: Crystal Reports Integration [Seite 476]

Mobile IntelligenceWith BEx Mobile Intelligence, you can call up Web applications, created with the Web ApplicationDesigner, on the move. The following devices are supported:

� PDA (Personal Digital Assistant) with Microsoft Windows CE 3.0 Operating System andPocket Internet Explorer

� WAP-enabled mobile telephone

� i-Mode-enabled mobile telephone

� Mobile device with an EPOC32 operating system (for example, Nokia Communicator 9210)

Handheld devices, such as Palm Pilots, are also supported to a certain extent. The type ofsupport depends on which browser is installed for the system.

The BW 3.0 Web Application Server automatically recognizes what kind of mobile device is beingused to call up the mobile application (WAP device, PDA, iMode or normal desktop browser). In thecase of PDAs, you can call up your mobile applications either online of, or use them offline in the formof static, precalculated HTML pages. The pages are pre-calculated using the Reporting Agent. Anadditional function of mobile intelligence is the ability to send a message using SMS to a mobileterminal as soon as a defined exception occurs in the mobile application.

See BEx Mobile Intelligence [Seite 390]

Query Design: BEx Query DesignerDefinitionIndependent desktop application for defining queries.

UseYou analyze the dataset of the Business Information Warehouse by defining queries for InfoProvidersin the BEx Query Designer . By selecting and combining InfoObjects (characteristics and key figures)or reusable structures in a query, you determine the way in which you navigate through and evaluatethe data in the selected InfoProvider.

IntegrationYou open the Query Designer from Start ### Programs ### Business Explorer ### Query Designer.

You can also call up the BEx Query Designer from the following components:

� BEx Analyzer

� BEx Web Application Designer



� Crystal Reports

FeaturesThe BEx Query Designer contains the following functions:

� You can use the queries that you define in the query designer for OLAP reporting and also fortabular reporting. For further information, see Tabular Query Display [Seite 85]

� You can parameterize the queries by defining variables for characteristic values, hierarchies,hierarchy nodes, texts of formulas. For more information, see Using Variables: The VariableWizard and the Variable Editor [Seite 39].

� You can select InfoObjects more precisely by:

� Restricting characteristics to characteristic values, characteristic intervals and hierarchynodes (see Restricting Characteristics [Seite 25]).

� Defining reusable calculated and restricted key figures (see Calculating Key Figures [Seite31], Restricting Key Figures [Seite 30]).

� Defining Structures for Reuse [Seite 87]

� Defining Exceptions [Seite 75]

� Defining Conditions [Seite 81]

� Defining Exception Cells [Seite 37]

The most significant components of the query definition are the filter and navigation:

� The selections in the filter have a limiting effect on the whole query. With the filter definition, youselect characteristic values from one or more characteristics or from a key figure. All of theInfoProvider data is aggregated using the filter selection of the query. The filter selection cannotbe changed by the navigation.

� For the navigation you select user-defined characteristics and determine the content of the rowsand columns of the query. You use this selection to determine the data areas of the InfoProviderover which you want to navigate. The arrangement of the contents of the rows and columns alsodetermines the default view of the query and, with it, the rows and columns axes in the resultsarea.

After it is inserted into the Web browser, a query is displayed in the default initial view. Bynavigating through the query, you can generate different views of the InfoProvider data, bydragging one of the user-defined characteristics into the rows or columns of the query, forexample, or by filtering a characteristic according to a single characteristic value.

With the definition of a query, the InfoProvider data can be evaluated specifically and quickly. Themore precisely the query is defined, the quicker its execution and navigation.

You define the queries by:

� Selecting an InfoProvider for which the query is defined

� Selecting reusable structures that already contain characteristic or key figure combinations (forexample, contribution margin schema)

Within a query definition you can use either no structures or a maximum of twostructures. Of these, only one can be a key figure structure.

� Selecting characteristics from the InfoProvider

� Restricting selected characteristics to characteristic values, characteristic value intervals, orhierarchy nodes

� Defining and using variables for characteristic values, formulas, and texts

� Selecting key figures from the InfoProvider

� Formulating calculated key figures



� Restricting key figures by combining them with characteristics

� Defining exception cells

� Arranging the characteristics and key figures in rows or columns and thereby establishing an initialview for the query analysis.

Functions of the BEx Query DesignerUseThis section contains an overview of the functions available in the BEx Query Designer.

FunctionsProceed as follows to create a query:� By clicking on the plus or minus symbol of the directories you can expand or compress the

directories. You can, for example, display the list of all of the key figures in the InfoProvider byexpanding the key figure node in the InfoProvider tree.

� Using drag and drop, you can drag characteristics and key figures from the InfoProvider into thedirectories of the Query Designer (filter, rows, columns, free characteristics).

� Using the right mouse button you call up all the functions that are available in the current contextmenu. First, select the query component you want to work with (for example, a characteristic) andthen, using the right mouse button, select a menu entry (for example, Properties) from the contextmenu.

� By double-clicking on an item of the Query Designer, you call up a dialog box containing afunction that is executed by default on this item. If, for example, you double-click on acharacteristic, the dialog box for restricting the characteristic appears. If you double-click on acalculated key figure, for example, then the Calculated Key Figure dialog box, in which you canmake changes, appears.

The standard functions for an element in the Query Designer are shown in the contextmenu in bold type.



Toolbar Functions

Quit and Use Query

Exit Query

Display Query on the Web

New Query

Open Query

Save Query

Save Query As...

Delete Query

Exception

Condition

Define Cells...

QueryProperties

Check Query

Query Where-Used List

Display� Change

TechnicalName

Context Menu

Help

Table Display

Change Query(GlobalDefinition)

Quit and Use QueryClick on this symbol to leave the Query Designer and use the query that you have defined. The formatin which the query is used depends on which tool you called the Query Designer from.

BEx Web Application Designer:

You called the Query Designer from the Web Application Designer using the path Tools � QueryDesigner and from there you defined or changed a query and saved it. If you now choose Quit andUse Query, the Query Designer session ends and you are able to use the defined query as a dataprovider.

See also:Creating Web Applications with the BEx Web Application Designer [Seite 98]

BEx Analyzer:If you have created or changed the query, you can insert it into a workbook to enable you to navigatein and analyze the query data.

The query is saved only locally in the workbook. If you want the query to be generally (publicly)available in the Business Information Warehouse you must save it using the function Save or Saveas....and give it a unique technical name.

See also:Evaluating Query Data [Seite 444]

Crystal Reports:

You called the Query Designer from Crystal Reports and defined or changed a query (in table display)and saved it. You can now use the query as a data source for a formatted report in the Crystal ReportsDesigner

Exit QueryChoose Exit Query if you want to leave the Query Designer. Your entries will not be saved.



Display Query on the WebWhen you have defined and saved your query, you can display it directly on the Web in a standardview. The query is embedded automatically into a standard Web template.

You determine the standard Web template in the SAP Reference IMG � Business InformationWarehouse � Settings Relevant for Reporting � Web-Based Settings � Determine StandardWeb Template.

New QueryIf you want to create a query, select the symbol for New Query. You reach the BEx Open dialog whereyou choose the InfoProvider whose data you want to use as the basis for your query. You can selectthe InfoProvider either from the InfoProviders in your history or from the list of all availableInfoProviders under InfoAreas.

See also:Defining New Queries [Seite 22]

Open QueryChoose Open Query to get to the BEx Open dialog. Here, all existing queries are available in yourhistory, favorites, roles or listed according to InfoArea. In InfoAreas, you get a list of all existing queriesin the Business Information Warehouse for which you have display authorization.

Saving QueriesIf you want to save a query, enter a new technical name, and a description for the name of the query.You can save the query in your favorites or roles. The query is saved in the list of queries in theBusiness Information Warehouse, and can be opened using Open Query .

See also:Saving Queries [Seite 56]

Save Query As...If you have changed a query, and want to save it under a new technical name or under the name of anexisting query, select Save query as.... Enter the new technical name. You can save the query in yourfavorites or roles.


Delete QuerySelect Delete Query, if you want to delete a query. You can only delete the query if it is no longerbeing used (that is, if it is not used in any workbook, Web template, Crystal Report or Reporting Agentsetting).

ExceptionYou can define exceptions for a query. Exceptions are variations in key figure values that you defineyourself. They are displayed in a different color in the query view. This allows you to see at a glance,any unusual deviations from the results you expect to get.

Under the small arrow next to the exception symbol , you can:

� Change exceptions

� Define new exceptions

See also:Exception Reporting [Seite 73]



ConditionChoose Condition, if you want to define conditions for a query. You can specify threshold valueconditions for the key figure values in every characteristic. For example, you can specify all salesfigures under or above a certain threshold value. In the query, the selected characteristics aredisplayed with the restricted key figures.

Under the small arrow next to the condition symbol , you can:

� Changing conditions

� Define new conditions

See also:Conditions [Seite 80]

Defining Cells...You can define formulas and selection conditions explicitly for cells in queries with two structures. Inthis way you can override the cell values that are created implicitly from the intersection of thestructure components. This function allows you to design much more detailed queries.

Defining Cells... is only available for queries with two structures. For queries with only onestructure, the symbol is deactivated.

See also:Defining Exception Cells [Seite 37]

Query PropertiesChoose Query Properties, if you want to change the description of the query, or you want to makesettings for the Results Position, Display Options, Number Display and Suppression of Zeroes for thequery. In the query properties, you can also set Release for OLE DB for OLAP. You can also reachany available documents about the objects used in the query from here.

See also:Query Properties [Seite 56]

Check QueryIf you have saved a new or changed query, you can check the query definition for errors using thisfunction.

Query Where-Used ListWith the Query Where-Used List, you can see the objects (workbooks, Web templates, CrystalReports or Reporting Agent settings) in which the query is used.

Query Display <-> ChangeUsing this function you can toggle between the display and change mode.

See also:Displaying and Changing Existing Queries in the Query Designer [Seite 86]

Change Query (Global Definition)Choose the function Change Query (Global Definition), if you are currently in the local query definition,and want to change to the global definition.

Table DisplayYou can design a query for OLAP reporting and also for tabular reporting by activating or deactivatingthe Table Display mode when you define a query.



See also:Tabular Query Display [Seite 85]

Technical NameYou can show or hide the technical names of the query components (InfoObjects, structures,variables, and so on) using this function.

Context MenuThe Context Menu function allows you to display the context menu without using the right mousebutton (for example, using a touch screen). Select a directory from the InfoProvider tree or the querydefinition, and choose the Context Menu function. The context menu for the item you highlightedappears.

HelpChoose Help to go to the Business Information Warehouse online documentation. The Query Design:BEx Query Designer section in the documentation for the Business Explorer is displayed automaticallythere.

Using the small arrow next to the help symbol under the entry About..., you can see the versionof the Query Designer with the number of the support package and the revision. You can give thisinformation to SAP in any problem messages.

Defining New QueriesPrerequisitesThe Business Information Warehouse must contain at least one InfoProvider.

You have called up the BEx Query Designer:

� From the menu path Start/Programs/Business Explorer/Query Designer

� From the Desktop symbolYou have called up the Query Designer from the BEx Web Application Designer, from the BExAnalyzer or from Crystal Reports:

� BEx Web Application Designer:

In the Web Application Designer, you chose Tools ��Query Designer and chose New Query from the Query Designer toolbar.

� BEx Analyzer:

In the BEx toolbar, you chose Open ��Queries and then, in the BEx Open dialog, you choseNew .

� Crystal Reports:

You called up the Query Designer and chose New Query from the Query Designer toolbar.

The InfoProvider selection in the Query Designer appears automatically in tabular displayform. The procedure for defining a query is aligned with the procedure for defining a queryin OLAP reporting. Therefore, note the differences for the tabular display [Seite 85] whenyou are defining a query for use in formatted reporting with Crystal Reports.

ProcedureYou reach the selection screen for all InfoProviders for which you can define a new query.



1. From your history, or from all available InfoProviders under InfoAreas, select the InfoProvider thatyou want to use as a base for your query data.

If you want to show the technical name of the InfoProvider, choose the symbol TechnicalName On/Off.

2. The available objects in the InfoProvider you selected are displayed as a directory tree in the leftpart of the Query Designer.

The right-hand area contains empty directories for the filter selection, the rows, the columnsand the free characteristics of the query. The preview of the results area for the query can befound bottom right. This area is also still empty.

Proceed as follows to create a query:

� By clicking on the plus or minus symbol of the directories you can expand or compressthe directories. You can, for example, display the list of all of the key figures in theInfoProvider by expanding the key figure node in the InfoProvider tree.

� Using drag and drop, you can drag characteristics and key figures from the InfoProviderinto the directories of the Query Designer (filter, rows, columns, free characteristics).

� Using the right mouse button you call up all the functions that are available in the currentcontext menu. First, select the query component you want to work with (for example, acharacteristic) and then, using the right mouse button, select a menu entry (for example,Properties) from the context menu.

� By double-clicking on a query component, you call up a dialog box containing a functionthat is executed by default on this query component. If, for example, you double-click on acharacteristic, the dialog box for restricting the characteristic appears. If you double-clickon a calculated key figure, for example, then the Calculated Key Figure dialog box, inwhich you can make changes, appears.

The standard functions for an element in the Query Designer are shown in the contextmenu in bold type.

3. Make the selections for the filter of the query. Note that the filter selection has a restricting effecton the entire query, meaning that all of the InfoProvider data is aggregated with the filter selection.Select the characteristics or the key figure upon which the query should be based from thedirectory tree of the InfoProvider.

� CharacteristicsExpand the required dimension directory and first select one or more characteristics of theInfoProvider that you wish to restrict to one or more values, a variable, a value interval ora hierarchy node. Expand this characteristic and, using drag-and-drop, put a single valuein the filter of the Query Designer. Or, using drag-and-drop, drag the characteristic into theFilter area of the Query Designer. Using the right mouse button select Restrict from thecontext menu. Now select a characteristic value interval or a hierarchy node (See also:Restricting Characteristics [Seite 25]).

� Key FiguresDecide whether all of the query data should refer to the number values of a key figure orwhether the query should be based on several key figures. If the query refers to thenumber values of one key figure, select the corresponding key figure of the InfoProvidertree and drag it to the Filter area of the query definition using drag-and-drop. You can alsouse a restricted or calculated key figure (see also: Restricting Key Figures [Seite 30] andCalculating Key Figures [Seite 31]).

4. Now determine which characteristics, key figures or structures you want to use for the navigatingon the query data. Using drag-and-drop, drag the corresponding directories of the characteristicsof the InfoProvider tree to the directories Rows, Columns or Free Characteristics in the right-handscreen area of the Query Designer or drag the structure directories into the rows or columns.



If you have not selected any key figures for the filter, then define one or more key figureseither in the rows or columns of the query. From the Key Figures directory of the InfoProvidertree, drag a key figure into a directory of the Query Designer using drag-and-drop (either Rowor Column). The key figure is stored in the new directory Key Figure.

You can also define a new calculated key figure and use it for the query. For example,instead of “Sales revenue”, define the key figure “Price” that is calculated using “Salesrevenue” divided by “Quantity”. Highlight the directory Key Figures in the InfoProvider tree andchoose New Calculated Key Figure from the context menu (right mouse click).

You can restrict key figures to characteristic values, characteristic value intervals orhierarchy nodes by highlighting the key figure and choosing Edit from the context menu (rightmouse click). A restricted key figure would be “Sales revenue in 1st quarter”, for example.

By placing the characteristics, key figures or structures either in the rows or columns directoryof the Query Designer, you configure the first navigational state of the query (start view). Inthe lower right area you can see a preview of the results area of the query in the start viewthat you selected.

You can change the arrangement of the key figures and characteristics in the rows andcolumns using drag-and-drop until the preview shows the results area you want.

5. When you have created the query, you can check the query definition by choosing Check Query from the toolbar.

6. Select the symbol for Query Properties from the toolbar if you want to change the Description,settings for Result Position, Display Options and Number Display, or Key Date for the query. Seealso Query Properties [Seite 56].

7. Save the query. Enter a Technical Name and a Description for naming the query. The TechnicalName must uniquely identify the query, meaning that the name is only allowed to appear onceacross all InfoProviders of the Business Information Warehouse. The technical name can be up to30 characters long and must begin with a letter.

ResultThe query has been saved and you can now:

� Add the query to a workbook in the BEx Analyzer: Choose Quit and Use Query

� Display the query in the Web browser in a standard view: Choose Display Query on the Web.

� Use the query in the Web Application Designer as a data provider for Web items.

� Use the query in the table display in Crystal Reports as a data source for formatted reports

You can analyze the query data in the Business Explorer.

See also:Creating Reusable Structures [Seite 87]

Query Properties [Seite 56]

Properties of the Query Components [Seite 60]

Functions of the BEx Query Designer [Seite 18]

Displaying and Changing Existing Queries in the Query Designer [Seite 86]

Authorizations for the Query Definition [Extern]



Restricting CharacteristicsUseWhen defining a query, you can restrict characteristics to single characteristic values, value ranges,hierarchy nodes or characteristic value variables.

PrerequisitesYou want to restrict a characteristic to one or more values in the query or restricted key figuredefinition. You have selected the characteristic and chosen Restrict from the context menu (rightmouse click).

ProcedureWhen you select characteristics in the query definition, you can use the same functions as the F4 Helpin the executed query. Select the Fixed Value tab and follow the notes in Selecting Filter Values [Seite447].

The following functions are the same:

Note that all values are displayed here that are available in the master data table, that is,all values, for which there are data records in the InfoProvider. There is no restriction onvalues with display authorization.

� Selecting single values

� Selecting value ranges

� Selecting hierarchy nodes

� Searching for values

� Deleting values from the selection window

� Excluding characteristic values

� Displaying value keysYou can choose from the following additional functions in the query definition:

Selecting variablesWhen you select characteristic values in the query definition, you can also select variables instead offixed values. These act as benchmarks and are only filled with fixed values when the query isexecuted.

Selecting single value variables1. Choose Single Value in the top left area of the selection field and (flat list) as hierarchy.

2. Select the Variables tab page.

3. Select one (or, in exceptional cases, more than one) variable from the list of available variablesdisplayed in the left-hand window, and drag the variable(s) into the Selection box on the right(alternatively, use the pushbutton with the arrow pointing to the right to move the values).

Selecting value range limits1. Choose Value Range from the top left of the selection field, and the operator that you want to use

(top right).


3. If you have chosen the operator Between, first select both the upper and lower interval limits fromthe list of available variables displayed in the left-hand window and drag them using Drag&Drop



(or using the arrow pointing to the right) in the Selection window on the right-hand side of thescreen.

If you choose one of the operators Is greater than or equal to, Is less than or equal to, Isgreater than, or Is less than, select a value from the list of available variables in the left-handwindow, drag it across, and drop it into the Selection window on the right (alternatively use thebutton with the arrow pointing to the right to move the variable across into the Selectionwindow).

Selecting intervals with variables and a fixed limit1. In the top left corner of the selection field, choose value range and between as operator.

2. Select the fixed limit on the Fixed Values tab.

3. Select the variable limit on the Variables tab.

4. Finally, choose the arrow button pointing to the right.

Selecting intervals whose upper and lower limits refer to the same variable1. In the top left corner of the selection field, choose value range and between as operator.

2. Select the required variable from the Variables tab page and drag it into the Selection box on theright (or use the arrow icon pointing to the right).

3. Now specify offsets for the upper and lower limits. (see below: Selecting variable offsets)

Please note that you cannot combine other values, hierarchy nodes or variables with avariable of the type Selection option or Query variable.

Selecting variable offsets

You can only use this function for characteristic value variables of the type single value.

1. Select the required variable in the right-hand window.

2. Choose variable offsets from the context menu (right mouse click). This brings you to the dialogwindow Entering Variable Offsets.

3. Enter the required offset.

4. Choose OK.

You want to select the period of the last 5 years for evaluating your data.

� In the top left corner of the selection field, choose value range and between asoperator.

� Select the variable current calendar year from the Variables tabstrip and drag it intothe Selection box on the right (or use the arrow icon pointing to the right).

� Choose variable offsets from the context menu (right mouse click). The Variables –Offsets popup appears for both the upper and lower interval limits.

� For the lower limit, enter the offset 5.

� Do not enter an offset for the upper limit.

� Choose OK.

Selecting fixed/variable hierarchies/hierarchy nodesYou can also restrict characteristics by hierarchy or hierarchy node, on a fixed or variable basis. SeeRestricting Characteristics: Hierarchies [Seite 27]



Direct entry

You cannot use this function if you want to restrict the characteristic. You cannot make adirect entry when you are selecting structure elements (for example, key figures) or valuesfrom a hierarchy.

1. In the entry field (bottom left) specify a characteristic value in external format.

Instead of characteristic values in external format, you can also enter variables in the form of&<variable name>& (ampersand (&) at the beginning and at the end of the entry, and withoutblank spaces).

2. Choose the button with the arrow pointing to the right.

The system checks whether this value exists. If the value does not exist, you get a warning.However, you can still use the value in the variable.

Note the following conventions for making entries for value ranges and intervals:

Value range: <operator><value>, for example, >= 1995

Intervals: <lower limit>;<upper limit>, for example, A01; B99

Interval with a variable limit, for example &VAR&; 2000

ResultYou have now restricted a characteristic by certain characteristic values. Choose OK. You return tothe query definition. Save your entries and execute the query.

If you have restricted a characteristic to a variable value, before the query is executed, adialog box appears for you to enter variable values manually (provided that the variable isflagged as ready for input). For more information, see Using Variables: The VariableWizard and the Variable Editor [Seite 39].

Enter the required values and choose OK. The query is now executed with the chosenvalues.

The query is created according to your selection conditions. The selected characteristic values aredisplayed in the filter cells, on the right, next to the corresponding characteristic. Only thecharacteristic values you selected are included in the results area.

Restricting Characteristics: HierarchiesUseIn the Query Designer, you can restrict characteristics by hierarchy or hierarchy node, on a fixed orvariable basis.

Choose from the following options:

� Fixed hierarchy node – fixed hierarchy

Report on department A (fixed hierarchy node) for the hierarchy valid for 1999 (fixedhierarchy)



� Variable hierarchy node – fixed hierarchy

Report on chosen department (variable hierarchy node) for the hierarchy valid for 1999(fixed hierarchy)

� Fixed hierarchy node – variable hierarchy

Report on department A (fixed hierarchy node) for the hierarchy valid for the currentcalendar year (variable hierarchy).

� Variable hierarchy node – variable hierarchy

Report on a chosen department (variable hierarchy node) for the hierarchy valid for thecurrent calendar year (variable hierarchy).

PrerequisitesYou use this function if hierarchies exist for the characteristic that you want to restrict.

For more information on hierarchies, see the Hierarchies [Extern] section of the AdministratorWorkbench documentation.

ProcedureFixed hierarchy – fixed hierarchy node1. In the top left of the selection field, choose Single values and the required hierarchy from the top

right corner.

2. Select the Fixed Values tab page.

3. In the list of available hierarchy nodes in the left-hand window, navigate to the hierarchy node youwant to use.

4. Select the required hierarchy node and drag it into the Selection box on the right (or use the arrowicon pointing to the right). Next to the name of the hierarchy node you see the name of thehierarchy in brackets.

Fixed hierarchy – variable hierarchy node1. In the top left of the selection field, choose Single values and the required hierarchy from the top

right corner.


3. Select the required variable from the list of available variables on the left-hand side.

4. Select the required variable and drag it into the Selection box on the right (or use the arrow iconpointing to the right).

Variable hierarchy – fixed hierarchy node1. In the top left of the selection field, choose Single values and a hierarchy that contains the

required hierarchy node, from the top right corner.

2. Select the Fixed Values tab page.


4. Select the required hierarchy node and drag it into the Selection box on the right (or use the arrowicon pointing to the right).

5. Highlight a hierarchy node in the right-hand box and choose Select variable hierarchy from thecontext menu (right mouse button). You reach the Select Variable for Hierarchy dialog box.



6. Select a variable hierarchy. See also: Selecting Hierarchies [Seite 29]

7. Choose OK.

Variable hierarchy – variable hierarchy nodes1. In the top left of the selection field, choose Single values and a hierarchy that contains the

required hierarchy node, from the top right corner.


3. Select the required variable from the list of available variables on the left-hand side.

4. Select the required variable and drag it into the Selection box on the right (or use the arrow iconpointing to the right).

5. Highlight a hierarchy node in the right-hand box and choose Select variable hierarchy from thecontext menu (right mouse button). You reach the Select Variable for Hierarchy dialog box.

6. Select a variable hierarchy. See also: Selecting Hierarchies [Seite 29]

7. Choose OK.

ResultYou have restricted a characteristic according to a node within a hierarchy. Choose OK. This takesyou back to the Query Designer. Save your entries and execute the query.

If you have restricted a characteristic to a variable hierarchy and/or a hierarchy node,before the query is executed, a dialog box appears for you to enter variable valuesmanually (provided that the variable is flagged as Ready for Input). For more information,see Defining Variables with the Variable Wizard [Seite 47].

Enter the required values and choose OK. The query can now be executed, with thevalues you have selected to fill the variable.

Selecting HierarchiesUseYou select hierarchies at the following stages in the query definition:

� When you select a variable hierarchy for a hierarchy node (see also: Restricting Characteristics:Hierarchies [Seite 27]).

� When you select a display hierarchy for a characteristic (see also: Properties of QueryComponents [Seite 60]).

PrerequisitesYou use this function if hierarchies exist for the characteristic that you want to restrict.

Further information on hierarchies is available in the Hierarchies [Extern] section of the AdministratorWorkbench documentation.

ProcedureSelecting Fixed Hierarchies1. Select the required fixed hierarchy from the list of available hierarchies.

2. Choose OK.



You need this function only when you are selecting a fixed display hierarchy for acharacteristic.

Selecting Variable HierarchiesA hierarchy becomes variable if at least one of its elements (name, version, key date) is variable.

1. Select a hierarchy from the list of available hierarchies.

2. Choose the Variables radio button from the field on the right (name, version, key date) accordingto which you want to select for the hierarchy. The selection list now displays the availablevariables.

3. Select the variable you want to use.

4. Choose OK.

Note that it is possible to fill the fields for version and key date, only if the characteristichas version-dependent or time-dependent hierarchies.

Restricting Key FiguresUseYou can define a query by using Drag&Drop to drag the key figure of the InfoProvider into the QueryDesigner directories.

You can also restrict the key figures of the InfoProvider in the Query Designer. Restricted key figuresare key figures for the InfoProvider that are restricted (filtered) by one or more characteristicselections. The key figures that are restricted by one or more characteristic selections can be basickey figures, calculated key figures or key figures that are already restricted.

Procedure1. Drag&Drop a key figure into a directory in the Query Designer. Alternatively, select the header of

the directories for Rows or Columns and, using the right mouse button, select New Structure fromthe context menu.

2. Select the structure directory, and, using the right mouse button, choose New Selection from thecontext menu. The New Selection screen appears.

The text field, in which you can enter a description of the restricted key figure, is found in theupper part of the screen.

You can use text variables in the description:

Choose to select an existing text variable.

If you have selected an existing text variable and want to change this, select the text variablein the Description field and click with the left mouse button on the selected text variable. Fromthe context menu that appears below the field, choose Change Text Variable. The variableeditor appears.

Creating new text variables:

i. In the Description field, enter an ampersand &.

ii. From the context menu that appears automatically, choose New Text Variable. Thevariable wizard appears.

Underneath the text field, on the left, is the directory of all the objects available in theInfoProvider. The empty field for the definition of the new selection is on the right-hand side ofthe screen.



3. Using Drag&Drop, choose a key figure from the InfoProvider, and restrict it by selecting one ormore characteristic values.

4. Choose OK. The newly restricted key figure is defined in the structure.

Calculating Key FiguresUseYou can recalculate the key figures of an InfoProvider in the Query Designer using formulas.Calculated key figures consist of formula definitions containing basic key figures, restricted key figuresor precalculated key figures.

Procedure1. Create a New Structure in the Rows or Columns of the Query Designer by highlighting the row or

column directory using the right mouse button and selecting New Structure in the context menu.

2. Using Drag&Drop, drag a (basic) key figure of the InfoProvider into the directory of the newstructure.

3. Select the structure directory, and choose New formula. The formula definition screen appears.

A text field in which you enter a description of the formula, is found in the upper part of thescreen.



If you have selected an existing text variable and want to change this, select the text variablein the Description field and click with the left mouse button on the selected text variable. Fromthe context menu that appears below the field, choose Change Text Variable. The variableeditor appears.


iii. In the Description field, enter an ampersand &.

iv. From the context menu that appears automatically, choose New Text Variable. Thevariable wizard appears.

The entry field for the formula is underneath the text fields. In the bottom left of the screenare all of the operands available for the formula definition. These are:

� The structure elements that you have already defined for the structure

� The cells that you have defined as exception cells

� All form variables

On the right-hand side of the screen, you see the functions that are available as operators:

� Basic functions

� Percentage functions [Seite 32]

� Data functions [Seite 34]

� Mathematical functions

� Trigonometric functions

� Boolean operators [Seite 36]

Between the operands and the functions are the symbols for the basic arithmetic operations.To the right of the functions is a number block.



Proceed as follows to define a formula:

� Choose the operands you want to use, and insert them in the entry field for the formula bydouble-clicking or by using Drag&Drop.

� Choose the calculation functions you want to use by either clicking on the symbols for thebasic arithmetic operations, double-clicking on the functions, or using Drag&Drop.

� Select the numerical values for the formula by clicking on the number block.

4. Define your formula using the available operands and operators.

If, when defining a formula, you want to use a variable that is not contained in theoperands, you must first create the variable. Highlight the Formula Variable entry andusing the right mouse button on the context menu, choose New Formula. You reach thevariable wizard that takes you through a step-by-step process for defining a new variable.

If you want to change a formula variable, select the variable and, from the context menu,choose Edit. The variable editor appears.

Note that when you execute a query, the key figures are always calculated as the sameunit. That is, a formula is semantically incorrect if, for example, a currency unit (forexample, USD) is added to a weight unit (for example, kg). If you want to calculate valuesregardless of the unit, use the function Value Without Dimension (Without Units). SeeData Functions [Seite 34].

5. Check the formula definition and choose Formula Syntax Check .

The Formula Syntax Check function checks only the correctness of the syntax in theformula. It does not check whether the formula makes sense semantically, for example, ifit contains the same units.

6. Enter a description for the formula column.

7. Choose OK. The newly calculated key figure is defined in the structure.

See also:Technical Notes about the Formula Operators [Seite 37]

Percentage FunctionsUseFunctions that you can use as operators for defining a calculated key figure.

FunctionsPercentage Deviation (%)<Operand1> % <Operand2>This gives the percentage deviation between operand 1 and operand 2 It is identical to the formula100 * (<Operand1> - <Operand2>) / abs(<Operand2>) , if <Operand2> does not equal zero and Div0if <Operand2> equals zero.



Plan Sales % Actual Sales, expresses, as a percentage, the difference between the plansales and the actual sales.

Percentage Share (%A)<Operand1> %A <Operand2>This gives the percentage share of operand 1 and operand 2 It is identical to the formula100 * <Operand1> / abs(<Operand2>), if <Operand2> is not equal to 0, and Div0, if <Operand2> isequal to 0.

Fixed Costs %A Costs expresses what proportion the fixed cost of a product is of the totalcost.

Percentage Share of the Result (%CT)%CT <Operand>This shows how high the percentage share is, with regard to the result. The result being the outcomeof aggregating the second highest level (interim result).

If a characteristic has been drilled down upon in both the rows and the columns, this relationship is notunique, causing the system to display the warning, and relevant symbol for, Data does not exist (seecustomizing table RSADMINC).

Year Region Sales %CT ‘Sales’

1999 North 30 50

South 30 50

Result for 1999 60 33.3333

2000 North 60 50

South 60 50

Result for 2000 120 66.6667

overall results 180 100

Percentage Share of the Overall Result (%GT)%GT <Operand>This shows how high the percentage share is, with regard to the overall result. The overall result beingthe outcome of aggregating the highest level. The dynamic filters (filters that have not beendetermined already in the query definition) also play a role in calculating the overall result.

Year Region Sales %GT ‘Sales’

1999 North 30 16.6667

South 30 16.6667

Result for 1999 60 33.3333

2000 North 60 33.3333



South 60 33.3333

Result for 2000 120 66.6667


Percentage Share of the Report Result (%CT)This is much the same as %GT.

Unlike the process of calculating the overall result, dynamic filters are not used whencalculating the report result. This means that, independently of the filter status and thenavigation status, the same value is always normalized.

Data FunctionsUseFunctions that you can use as operators for defining a calculated key figure.

FunctionsValue = 1 if operand <> 0, otherwise 0 (numerator)COUNT(<Expression>)Delivers the value 1 if the <Expression> is <> 0, otherwise 0.

Value = 1 if operand = 0, otherwise 0DELTA(<Expression>)Delivers the value 1 if the <Expression> is 0, otherwise 1.

The function is identical to the NOT operator and should no longer be used.

NDIVO (x): Equals 0 when divided by 0, otherwise xNDIV(<Expression>)Is 0 if the calculation of <Expression> causes a division by 0. Otherwise, the result if the value of theexpression.

It is used:

� To avoid error messages

� So that you can continue to calculate a defined result.

Values without Dimensions (without Units)NODIM(<Expression>)Delivers purely numerical values of <Expression> and suppresses units and currencies.

Using this function, you can avoid the “mixed currency” character (see customizing tableRSADMINC).



NOERR (x): Equals 0 for undefined calculations, otherwise xNOERR (<Expression>)Is 0 if the calculation of <Expression> leads to an arithmetical error. Otherwise, the result if the valueof the expression. It is used to avoid error messages or so that you can continue to calculate a definedresult.

NOERR(SQRT(-1)) = 0

ResultSUMCT <Operand>Delivers the result of the operands to all rows or columns (compared to Percentage Functions [Seite32] %CT).

Year Region Sales SUMCT “Sales”

1999 North 30 60

South 30 60

Result for 1999 60 180

2000 North 60 120

South 60 120

Result for 2000 120 180


Overall ResultsSUMGT <Operand>Delivers the overall results for the operands (compare to Percentage Functions [Seite 32] %GT).

Year Region Sales SUMGT “Sales”

1999 North 30 180

South 30 180

Result for 1999 60 180

2000 North 60 180

South 60 180

Result for 2000 120 180


Report ResultsSUMRT <Operand>Delivers the report results of the operands (for the difference between overall and report results, seealso Percentage Functions [Seite 32] %GT and %RT).



Boolean OperatorsUseFunctions that you can use as operators for defining a calculated key figure.

FunctionsRelational Operators (<, <=, <>, ==, >, >=)<Expression1> <Operator> <Expression2>The result is 1 if the relationship denoted by <Operator> between expression <Expression1> and<Expression2> holds (that is <Expression> <Operator> <Expression2> is true), otherwise the result is0. Only numerical values of <Expression1> and <Expression2> are compared without taking units intoaccount.

Example: Costs < Sales delivers 1 if sales are larger than costs and 0 if costs are largerthan or equal to sales.

Logical AND (AND)<Expression1> AND <Expression2>The result is 1 if <Expression1> and <Expression2> (both) do not equal 0. Otherwise the result is 0.Only the numerical values of <Expression1> and <Expression2> are considered, without taking unitsinto account.

Logical OR (OR)<Expression1> OR <Expression2>The result is 1 if <Expression1> or <Expression2> does not equal 0. Otherwise the result is 0. Only thenumerical values of <Expression1> and <Expression2> are considered, without taking units intoaccount.

Logical Exclusive OR (XOR)<Expression1> XOR <Expression2>The result is 1 if either <Expression1> or <Expression2> (but not both) does not equal 0. Otherwisethe result is 0. Only the numerical values of <Expression1> and <Expression2> are considered,without taking units into account.

Logical NOT (NOT)NOT <Expression>The result is 1 if <Expression> is 0, otherwise the result is 0. Only the numerical value of<Expression> is considered without taking units into account.

LEAFThe result is 0 for results rows or real (inner) nodes of a hierarchy, and the value 1 for elementaryrows or the leaves of a hierarchy.

This operator allows you to carry out various calculations on results rows and elementary rows.

Conditional Calculations (IF-THEN-ELSE)Conditional calculations can be made using Boolean operators An expression of the formIF<Logic Expression> THEN <Expression1> ELSE <Expression2> can also be made using a formulaof the form<Logic Expression> * <Expression1> + NOT <Logic Expression> * <Expression2>



Example: IF Actual Costs > Plan Costs THEN Plan Costs + Plan Deviation ELSEActual Costs

can be written as the following formula:

(Actual Costs > Plan Costs)* (Plan Costs + Plan Deviation) + (Actual Costs <= PlanCosts) * Actual Costs

or

(Actual Costs > Plan Costs)* (Plan Costs + Plan Deviation) + (NOT (Actual Costs > PlanCosts)) * Actual Costs

Technical Notes about the Formula OperatorsTest of <Expression> = 0The test for whether a mathematical expression is 0 is used to avoid problems based on roundingoperations through the inquiry abs (<Expression>) < 10**-6. In other words, all values in the interval [-10**-6, 10**-6] = [-0,000001; 0,000001] are taken as 0.

Result for Non-Defined Mathematical OperationsIf an operation which is not allowed or not defined mathematically (for example, division by 0, squareroots of negative values) is executed, the character for “division by 0” or “data does not exist” (seecustomizing table RSADMIN) is given and is not calculated further.

You can suppress this reaction that causes the expression to lead to errors by compounding theoperators NDIV0() or NOERR() (see Data Function [Seite 34]).

When you use these operators, check that the result can be interpreted meaningfully bythe user, even in the case of errors.

ABAP Coding for Calculating OperatorsIn problematic cases, take a look at the functions of the operators in the ABAP coding (includeLRRK0F10, form LOC_RECHNEN).

Defining Exception CellsUseWhen you define selection criteria and formulas for structure components and there are two structurecomponents of a query, generic cell definitions are created at the intersection of the structurecomponents that determine the values to be presented in the cell.

Cell-specific definitions allow you, along with implicit cell definition, to define explicit formulas andselection conditions for cells and in this way, to override implicitly created cell values. This functionallows you to design much more detailed queries.

In addition, you can define cells that have no direct relationship to the structure components. Thesecells are not displayed and serve as containers for help selections or help formulas.



PrerequisitesThe query contains two structures. You can define exception cells only for queries that have twostructures. In one structure you use, for example, the characteristic values and in the other, the keyfigures. If these prerequisites are fulfilled, you can define cells.

A cell is the intersection between two structure elements. The term Cells for thefunction Defining Exception Cells should not be confused with the term Cells in MS Excel.The formulas or selection conditions that your define for a cell always take effect at theintersection between two structure elements. If a drilldown characteristic has two differentcharacteristic values, then the cell definition always takes effect at the intersectionbetween the characteristic value and the key figure.

ProcedureIn the Query Designer toolbar, choose Define Cells... to get to the cell definition functions.

New Selection1. Select a cell in the Cell Definition dialog box and, from the context menu, choose New Selection.

2. Define your selection by, for example, dragging a key figure and the characteristic values by whichyou want to restrict the key figure (using Drag&Drop) to the right-hand area of the New Selectiondialog box.

You can use characteristic value variables instead of fixed characteristic values.

� If you want to change an existing variable, select the variable and, from the context menu,choose Edit. The variable editor appears. For more information, see Changing Variables in theVariable Editor [Seite 55].

� If you want to define a new variable, select the characteristic value and, from the contextmenu, choose New Variable. The variable wizard appears. For more information, see DefiningVariables with the Variable Wizard [Seite 47].

3. Enter a description for the selection column.



If you have selected an existing text variable and want to change this, select the text variablein the Description field and click with the left mouse button on the selected text variable. Fromthe context menu that appears below the field, choose Change Text Variable. The variableeditor appears. For more information, see Changing Variables in the Variable Editor [Seite 55].


In the Description field, enter an ampersand &.

From the context menu that appears automatically, choose New Text Variable. The variablewizard appears. For more information, see Defining Variables with the Variable Wizard [Seite47].

4. Choose OK.

New Formula1. Highlight a cell in the Cell Definition dialog box and, using the right mouse button, choose New

Formula from the context menu.

1. Define your formula using the available operands and functions. See also Restricting Key Figures[Seite 30].

2. Enter a description of the formula.

You can use text variables in the description. See the New Selection section above.

3. Choose OK.



New Cell ReferenceYou can use every cell that you define in a formula. If you want to reuse the value from the implicit,generic cell definition that is automatically created at the intersection of the two structure componentsof a query, select this cell in the Cell Definition dialog box and, using the right mouse button, chooseNew Cell Reference. An automatic description appears in the cell made up of the two structurecomponents. You can reference only to this cell. That is, you can reuse the implicit cell definition anddo not have to create these values manually in a new selection.

Functions of Explicitly Defined Cells:Select a defined cell and choose the required function from the context menu (right mouse button).

� Edit

� Delete

� Where-Used ListBefore you delete a cell, you can check in which formulas the defined cell is used in thewhere-used list.

� PropertiesChoose Properties if you:

� Want to change the description of the cell.

� Want to change the highlighting of the cell.

� Want to hide the cell. That is, if you do not want to see the values of the cell.

Additional CellsChoose Additional Cells, if you require additional cells for help selections or help formulas. You canuse the functions New Selection and New Formula that appear in the context menu to defineadditional cells that are not displayed in the query and only serve as objects for help selections andhelp formulas. For example, you define an invoice in an additional cell and use this in a “real” cell tocalculate a duplicated invoice.

In the additional cells that are already defined in the context menu, you can:

� Edit the cell definition

� Delete the cell definition

� Display the where-used list for the cell

� Change the description of the cell under Properties.

Using Variables: The Variable Wizard and the VariableEditorDefinitionVariables are parameters of a query that you defined in the Query Designer and that are filled withvalues when you execute the query or Web application. They serve as a store for characteristicvalues, hierarchies, hierarchy nodes, texts and formula elements, and can be processed in differentways.

The processing type [Seite 42] determines how a variable is filled with a value for the runtime of thequery or Web application.

There are different types of variables [Seite 41] depending on the object for which you want to definevariables. These types specify where you can use the variables.



Variables are reusable objects. This means that when you define a variable for a query inthe Query Designer, this variable can be used in all other queries. Variables are notdependent on the InfoProvider, only on the InfoObject. A variable that you define for anInfoObject is available in all InfoProviders that use this InfoObject.

UseVariables enable you to customize queries flexibly (parameterize the query) possible. If you usevariables in the Query Designer, do not select any fixed characteristic values, hierarchies, hierarchynodes, texts, or formula elements. Instead, set up variables as place holders. These are then filledwith values when the query is running (when you insert the query into a workbook, when you refreshthe workbook or when you execute the query on the Web. You can use one query definition as thefoundation for many different queries if you use variables.

You want to create one query for all the people responsible for customer groups, whoeach only evaluate the data for one customer group. In the Query Designer, you insert avariable for the characteristic ‘customer group’. Just before the query is executed, decidefor which customer group(s) you want the query to apply to.

There are two tools in the Query Designer for designing and changing variables.

The variable wizard takes you step-by-step through the process of defining a variable. Eachindividual step is context-sensitive and is adjusted according to the combination of variable andprocessing types. This means that the variable wizard only offers the selection options that arepermitted for the combination of variable and processing types used. For more information, seeDefining Variables with the Variable Wizard [Seite 47].

The variable editor dialog box offers all of the selection options for changing an existing variable. Theindividual fields in the dialog box show the settings affected in the variable. You can change thesesettings here. If you want to make the changes using a step-by-step process with explanatory texts,you can jump to the variable wizard using . For more information, see Changing Variables in theVariable Editor [Seite 55].

IntegrationThe variable wizard and the variable editor are functions in the Query Designer and are context-sensitive.

In principle, the two dialog boxes appear wherever you can enter constants (that is, values) in inputfields. One of these input fields is the Entry of Variables checkbox. If you select this option, thefollowing options for using a variable appear, instead of a fixed value:

� The variables that are available appear in the dropdown box for the input field. You can select avariable from the dropdown box.

� The symbol Change Variable appears next to the Entry of Variables checkbox. You canchange the variables using . The Variable Editor dialog box appears.

� The symbol New Variable appears next to the Entry of Variables checkbox. Choose if youwant to create a new variable. The Variable Wizard dialog box appears.

By way of an example, when defining conditions [Seite 81] for the value limit of thecondition, you can not only enter fixed values but also formula variables. Mark the Entry ofVariables checkbox and you can then use the options described above. The settings arecontext-sensitive so that the formula variables that only those formula variables that areavailable appear in the dropdown box. The variable wizard is set up automatically in thesame way for entering formula variables.

You can also get to the variable wizard and the variable editor from the context menu of those objectsfor whose values you can define variable placeholders. From the context menu, choose New Variable.



The variable wizard appears. In the context menu for variables that have already been defined, youcan choose Edit. The variable editor appears.

In the InfoProvider objects dialog box, you select a characteristic (for example, Order) andfrom the context menu, choose New Variable. You reach the variable wizard, which isalready set up for you to enter a characteristic value variable. The selected characteristicis automatically adopted as the reference characteristic of the variable. Therefore, thevariable relates to the characteristic and represents its characteristic values.

In the InfoProvider objects dialog box, you select a characteristic value variable and fromthe context menu, choose Edit. You reach the variable editor where you see all of thesettings for the variable. You can make changes to the variables here.

Variable TypesDefinitionThe type of variable being used. This determines the object that the variable represents as aplaceholder for a concrete value.

StructureThere are different types of variables depending on the object for which you want to define variables.These types specify where you can use the variables.

� Characteristic Value VariablesCharacteristic value variables represent characteristic values and can be used wherevercharacteristic values are used.

If you restrict characteristics to specific characteristic values, you can also usecharacteristic value variables. See, Restricting Characteristics [Seite 25].

� Hierarchy VariablesHierarchy variables represent hierarchies and can be used wherever hierarchies can beselected.

If you want to display characteristics in a hierarchy (presentation hierarchy), you can alsouse hierarchy variables. See Selecting Hierarchies [Seite 29]

� Hierarchy Node VariablesHierarchy node variables represent a node in a hierarchy and can be used wherever hierarchynodes are used.

If you restrict characteristics to specific hierarchy nodes, you can also use hierarchy nodevariables. See Restricting Characteristics: Hierarchies [Seite 27]

� Text VariablesText variables represent a text and can be used in descriptions of queries, calculated keyfigures and structural components.



You can use text variables in the description of calculated key figures, restricted keyfigures, selections and formulas when you create them. See Calculating Key Figures[Seite 31] and Restricting Key Figures [Seite 30].

You can change the descriptions in the properties dialog box. See Query Properties [Seite56] Calculated Key Figure Properties [Seite 71] Selection/Formula Properties [Seite 66].

� Formula VariablesFormula variables represent numerical values and can be used in formulas. See CalculatingKey Figures [Seite 31]

You can also use formula variables in exceptions and conditions. See Defining Exceptions[Seite 75] and Defining Conditions [Seite 81]

You can use a formula variable for the interest rate in order to process the current interestrate, after you have executed the query or Web application.

Variable Processing TypesUseThe of a variable determines how a variable is filled with a value for the runtime of the query or Webapplication.

FeaturesThe following processing types are available:

� Manual Entry / Default Value [Seite 43]

� Replacement Path [Seite 43]

� Customer Exit [Seite 44]

� SAP Exit [Seite 45]

� Authorization [Seite 46]

Depending on the type of variable used (context-sensitive), the possible processing typesare offered in the variable wizard. For more information about the possible combinationsof variable types and processing types, see Overview of Variable Types and ProcessingTypes [Seite 46].

ActivitiesIn the variable wizard, in the General Information dialog step, choose the required processing type.



Manual Entry / Default ValueUseThe processing type Manual Entry/Default Value enables you to enter a value manually or to use thedefault value when defining a variable. This value is then used for the variable when you execute thequery or Web application.

IntegrationThe processing type Manual Entry / Default Value is available for all variable types.

FeaturesIf you choose the processing type Manual Entry/Default Value for a variable, when you execute thequery, you can enter the required value for the variable manually in a dialog box (the VariablesScreen) provided that the variable is ready-for-input. Otherwise, the default value of the variable isused.

When you create the variable, you can enter a default value if you wish. If you enter a default value,this is shown in the input field of the variables screen for variables that are ready-for-input. Forvariables that are not ready-for-input, the default value is used as the variable value.

ActivitiesIn the variable wizard, in the General Information dialog step, choose the processing type ManualEntry/Default Value. In the Default Value dialog step, enter a value as required.

Replacement PathUseYou use the Replacement Path to specify the value that automatically replaces the variable when youexecute the query or Web application.

IntegrationThe processing type Replacement Path can be used with characteristic value variables, textvariables and formula variables.

FeaturesText and formula variables with the processing type Replacement Path are replaced by acorresponding characteristic value.

The variable wizard takes you automatically to the Characteristic dialog step, in which you select thereference characteristic for replacement. In the Replacement Path dialog step that follows, you choosewhether the variable is replaced by the From or the To Value and the Key or the Name of thecharacteristic value. You can also specify the offset start and offset length for the output.

Characteristic value variables with the processing type Replacement Path, are replaced by the resultsof a query. In the Replacement Path dialog step, select the query whose result you want to use as thevariable. You can now use the data result of the selected query as a variable in a different query.

The processing type Replacement Path takes place automatically, meaning it is neverready-for-input when executing.



ActivitiesIn the variable wizard in the General Information dialog step, choose the processing type ReplacementPath.

ExampleIf you specify a variable as a characteristic value, you do not have to give a text for the characteristicvalue right away. Instead, you can fill the text field dynamically, according to the characteristic that youuse for the variable when you execute the query. To do this, define a text variable with automaticreplacement.

Customer ExitUseIf you need to use a processing type other than manual entry / default value, replacement path, SAPexit, or authorization, then a customer exit gives you the option of setting up a processing type forvariables, tailor-made to your specific needs.

The customer exit is a preconceived enhancement that you can configure with customer-specific logic.You can find detailed information about customer exits and their use in the Enhancements to theStandard [Extern] section of the BC Changes to the SAP Standard documentation.

IntegrationYou can process all variable types (characteristic value variables, hierarchy node variables, hierarchyvariables, formula variables and text variables) using the Customer Exit processing type.

PrerequisitesYou have created a project in the CMOD transaction. You have selected SAP enhancement RSR0001and assigned it to the enhancement project. You have now activated the project.

In SAP Enhancement Help, you can get further information on working with the SAPenhancement for global variables in Reporting. Call up the transaction SMOD. Enter thename of the enhancement (RSR00001), choose Documentation and then Edit � DisplaySub-object.

You can get general information about working with customer exits under Help �Application Help in transaction CMOD.

FeaturesThe Customer Exit processing type for variables allows you to determine default values for variablesusing a function module exit. Here we are dealing with the function module EXIT_SAPLRRS0_001.

You want to move one characteristic value from another. The InfoProvider only containsthe calendar day. You now want to see the cumulated value of the relevant period(beginning with the first day of a quarter).

For the first day of the quarter, use a variable with customer exit processing. If you nowenter the current calendar day (11.15.2000, for example), the 11.01.2000 comes up in thecustomer exit as the start date, which means the cumulated value of this period can bedisplayed.

Item Sales 11.15.2000 Sales – 11.01.2000 -11.15.2000



A 5 263

B 7 157

C 2 67

ActivitiesIn the variable wizard, in the General Information dialog step, choose the processing type CustomerExit.

SAP Exit (delivered variables)UseThe SAP Exit processing type is contained in variables delivered by SAP BW within the BusinessContent framework.

IntegrationYou can find the delivered variables in the Metadata Repository [Extern] if you search for variablesusing the search function (see Find Metadata [Extern] ).

The technical name of a delivered SAP object always begins with a number.

PrerequisitesBefore you can use delivered variables you must first activate them. You can get further information onactivating the query objects under Installing Business Content [Extern].

FeaturesSAP delivers a number of variables. There are variables that are processed via automatic replacementusing a predefined replacement path (SAP Exit processing type).

If you want to define a query that only ever displays the data from the current month, dragthe delivered variable “current month” (technical name 0CMONTH) for the characteristicvalue “current month” (technical name 0CMONTH) into the query filter.

ActivitiesIn the variable wizard in the General Information dialog step, choose the processing type SAP Exit.

You can only create variables with the processing type SAP Exit in SAP Systems.Customers cannot create any variables with the processing type SAP Exit. For customers,variables with SAP Exit are a part of the delivered Business Information WarehouseBusiness Content.



AuthorizationUseThe processing type Authorization enables variables to be filled with values automatically from theuser authorization.

IntegrationThe processing type Authorization can be used with characteristic value variables and hierarchynode variables.

PrerequisitesYou have maintained the user authorizations [Extern] in transaction RSMM.

FeaturesWhen you create a variable, if you choose Process with Authorization, the variable is automaticallyfilled with the values of the user's authorization. When the user opens a query, the data is selectedautomatically according to his or her authorizations.

Note that when they are automatically filled, variables do not have to be ready-for-input,which means a variables screen does not necessarily appear when you open the query orWeb application. The user opens the query with the authorization variable, and can seeonly the data that corresponds to his or her authorizations.

ActivitiesIn the variable wizard in the General Information dialog step, choose the processing typeAuthorization.

Overview of Variable Types and Processing TypesUseIn the variable wizard, you choose a processing type that is dependent on the type of variable you areusing. Depending on the variable type, only certain processing types are useful. The variable wizardoffers you automatically only the possible processing types and takes you to the relevant settings forthe chosen processing type using different dialog steps.

FeaturesThe following table gives an overview of the possible combinations of variable types and processingtypes. The dialog steps that the variable wizard offers for each combination are also listed.

VariableType/Processing Type

Manual entry /default value

ReplacementPath

Customer Exitor SAP Exit

Authorization

CharacteristicValue Variable

Details [Seite 48]

Default Values[Seite 50]

ReplacementPath:Replacementwith Query [Seite54]

Details [Seite 48] Details [Seite 48]

Hierarchy Details [Seite 48] Details [Seite 48]



Variable Default Values[Seite 50]

Hierarchy NodeVariable

Details [Seite 48]


Details [Seite 48] Details [Seite 48]

Text Variable Details [Seite 48]


Characteristic[Seite 54]

ReplacementPath:Replacementwith aCharacteristicValue [Seite 52]

Details [Seite 48]

FormulaVariable

Details [Seite 48]

Currencies andUnits [Seite 55]Default Values[Seite 50]

Characteristic[Seite 54]

ReplacementPath:Replacementwith aCharacteristicValue [Seite 52]

Currencies andUnits [Seite 55]

Details [Seite 48]

Currencies andUnits [Seite 55]

Defining Variables with the Variable WizardUseThe variable wizard takes you through the process of defining a variable step-by-step.

ProcedureEach individual step is context-sensitive and is adjusted according to the combination of variable andprocessing types used. This means that the variable wizard only offers the selection options that arepermitted for that combination of variable and processing types. For more information, see Overviewof Variable Types and Processing Types [Seite 46].

IntroductionThe first dialog step in the variable wizard explains that you can define variables as placeholdersinstead of using fixed values. These placeholders are then filled during the query runtime.

If you do not want to see this step in the future, select Do not display this step in future.

General InformationThe second dialog step shows the type of variable. You determine the type of variable by calling upthe variable wizard in a specific context. If you have chosen, for example, New Variable in the contextmenu of a characteristic value, then Characteristic Value is shown automatically in the variable wizardas the variable type. For more information about context-sensitivity in the variable wizard, see UsingVariables: The Variable Wizard and the Variable Editor [Seite 39].

1. Enter a variable name and a description for the variable.



The variable name it the technical name of the variable and has to be unique across allqueries.

2. In the Processing by field, choose the processing type for the variable. Depending to the type ofvariable, only the processing types that are relevant for this variable type appear for you to choosefrom in the dropdown box. For more information, see Variable Processing Types [Seite 42].

The following dialog steps are context-sensitive:Depending on the variable type and processing type that you have chosen, the relevant dialog stepappears. This is where you can make the necessary settings.

� Details [Seite 48]

� Default Values [Seite 50]

� Replacement Path [Seite 51]

� Characteristic [Seite 54]

� Currencies and Units [Seite 55]

Saving VariablesIn the last dialog step, you get a summary of the settings for the variable.

Choose Exit. The system saves the variable and closes the variable wizard.

ResultYou have defined a variable. The changed variable can now be used in all queries.

DetailsDefinitionDialog step that appears for almost all variable types in the variable wizard. Only those variables withthe processing type Replacement Path do not require this dialog step.

StructureIn the Details dialog step, you can set the following options:

The individual options for settings here vary depending on the variable type andprocessing type. The following section lists all of the settings. The variable wizardautomatically displays only those settings that are useful and possible.

Variable RepresentsThis is where you choose the display area that the variable represents.

� Single ValueThe variable represents one value only.

� Multiple Single ValuesThe variable represents a number of single values. This setting is useful in hierarchy nodes,for example, to allow you to enter several single nodes.

� Interval



The variable represents a from and to value, that is, an interval.

� Selection OptionThe variable represents any combination of single values and intervals

� Precalculated Value SetThe variable represents a set of values that are staged persistently in a database table by theReporting Agent. For more information, see Defining the Value Set Setting [Extern].

Variable Value Is

� OptionalThis setting means that the variable does not have to be filled with a value during runtime.

� MandatoryThis setting means that at least one value has to be entered for the variable during runtime.The initial value (#) is permitted explicitly. The initial value # means “unassigned”, that is, youcan use it to explicitly select all data that has no booked values for this characteristic.

� Mandatory, Initial Value Not AllowedThis setting means that at least one value has to be entered for the variable during runtime.The initial value (#) is not permitted. That is, you have to enter one or more concrete values inthe variable screen to be able to execute the query.

Ready for InputYou can determine here whether the variable is ready-for-input or not when you execute the query orWeb application.

If the option Ready for Input is active (=default setting), when you execute the query or Webapplication a dialog box appears (the variables screen). You can then enter the values you want touse, confirm default values, or change default values.

You can deactivate the Ready for Input option if you want to fill the variable with a value beforehand.When you execute the query or Web application, this is filled automatically with a value.

If you set the variable as not ready-for-input, but have set the variable value as mandatoryand have not entered a default value, the system cannot execute the query and you getan error message.

‘Ready for input’ is available for the processing types, manual entry / default value, customer exit, SAPexit, and authorizations.

Changeable with Query NavigationIf you choose the option Changeable with Query Navigation, when you execute the query, you can notonly select the values that you entered in the variables screen, but you can also use other values asdynamic filters for the query: Selecting Filter Values [Seite 447]).

Note that this function is not possible if you are using the variable as part of a structure inthe query definition.

You can use this function for variables of characteristic values and hierarchy nodes.

Copy Personalization Data from the VariableEach user can personalize the variable values for variables that are ready-for-input. The personalizedvalues are saved for each variable and user.

If you want to use the same personalization data in more than one variable, in the input field, enter thenames of the variables under which the personalization data is saved.



Note that you enter the variable without an ampersand &.

You have defined a variable “Customer 1” that is Mandatory and Ready for Input. Younow define a variable “Customer 2” that is Mandatory (Initial Value Not Allowed), Readyfor Input and Can be changed in query navigation. By making the setting CopyPersonalization Data from Variable “Customer 1” in the variable “Customer 2”, you giveboth variables the same personalized value.

Length of Input FieldIn the dialog step Details for text variables, there is a setting for Length of Input Field.

Specify a number here. This determines the number of characters of text (which represents thevariable) that the user can enter.

Default ValuesDefinitionDialog step in the variable wizard for variables with the processing type Manual Entry / Default Value

UseYou specify one or more default values when you define a variable. These then appear in thevariables screen when you execute the query or Web application.

If the variable is ready-for-input, you can overwrite the default value in the variablesscreen and select a different value.

If the variable is not ready-for-input, the query is filled with the default value and youcannot change the value when you execute the query or Web application.

StructureDepending on which setting you have chosen in the Details [Seite 48] dialog step, the variable wizardoffers various fields in the Default Values dialog step.

� If the variable represents a single value, you can enter one default value here.

� If the variable represents several single values, you can enter or select a default value here.

a. Choose . The selection dialog box appears.

b. In the left window Fixed Values, highlight the value and select it by clicking on the arrowpointing to the right.

� If the variable represents an interval, you can enter a default value manually for the From Valueand a default value for the To Value, or select the default values using .

� If the variable represents a selection option, you have the following options for settings:

a. In the +/- Sign field, choose either Include Value or Exclude Value

b. In the Option field, select one of the following settings:

� Is equal to

� Is not equal to

� Is between (is in the interval)



� Is not between (is not in the interval)

� Is less than or equal to

� Is greater than

� Is greater than or equal to

� Is less than

� Contains the pattern

� Does not contain the pattern

Depending on the setting that you selected in the Option field, context-specific options aregiven for the default value.

c. Enter a default value manually or select it using .

If you have chosen the option Contains the pattern or Does not contain the pattern, do notenter a purely numerical value as the default value, but enter characters such as ABC or*.

Choose Include Value and Contains the pattern *. * appears as the default value.

Choose Exclude Value and Contains the pattern *. Everything but * appears as the defaultvalue.

� If the variable represents a precalculated value set, you can enter the name of a table thatcontains the required precalculated values from the background processing of the ReportingAgent as the default value. For more information about precalculated value sets, see Defining theValue Set Setting [Extern].

You can enter only one default value.

Replacement PathDefinitionA step in the variable wizard that appears for characteristic value, formula and text variables with theprocessing type Replacement Path.

StructureAccording to the type of variable, you can make different settings for the replacement path.

� Text and formula variables with the processing type Replacement Path are replaced by acorresponding characteristic value. See Replacement Path: Replacement with a CharacteristicValue [Seite 52].

� Characteristic value variables with the processing type Replacement Path, are replaced by theresults of a query. See Replacement Path: Replacement with a Query [Seite 54].



Replacement Path: Replacement with a CharacteristicValueDefinitionA step in the variable wizard that appears for formula and text variables with the processing typeReplacement Path.

UseText and formula variables with the processing type Replacement Path are replaced by acorresponding characteristic value.

The value of a formula variable has to be a number. The value of a text variable has to be a text.

StructureHere you choose the characteristic or attribute value with which the variable is replaced.

Replace Variable with

� KeyThe variable value is replaced with the characteristic key.

� External Characteristic Value KeyThe variable value is replaced with an external value of the characteristic (external/internalconversion).

� Name (Text)The variable value is replaced with the name of the characteristic.

Note that formula variables have to contain numbers in their names so that the variablerepresents a value in the end.

� Attribute Value The variable value is replaced with the value of an attribute. An additional field appears forentering the attribute.

When replacing the variable with an attribute value, you can create a reference to thecharacteristic for which the variable is defined. Choose the attribute Reference toCharacteristic (Constant 1). By choosing this attribute, you can influence the aggregationbehavior of calculated key figures and obtain improved performance during calculation. Formore information, see Calculated Key Figure Properties [Seite 71].

This setting is only available for formula variables.

� Hierarchy AttributeThe variable value is replaced with a value of a hierarchy attribute. An additional field appearsfor entering the hierarchy attribute.

You need this setting for sign reversal with hierarchy nodes. For more information, see SignReversal [Extern]

This setting is only available for formula variables.



For Intervals Use

� From-value

� To-value

� Difference

If the replacement value called is an interval, you use this setting to specify whether the lower intervallimit (from value) or the upper interval limit (to value) is used as the replacement value.

For formula variable, you can also choose the interval difference as the replacement value. Using thissetting, you can easily calculate the difference of period boundaries. The interval difference is the fromvalue minus the to value plus 1. For example, the period January to March gives a result of 3 (the tovalue 3, minus the from value 1, plus 1)

Offset Start and Offset LengthYou use this setting to specify the start and length of the text output.

You want to create a text variable for the fiscal year.

In the replacement path Dialog Box, choose the option Replace Variable with Key andenter the offset start at value 3 and the offset length as 2.

The fiscal year is four digits; the output of the value begins on the third digit and shows 2digits. Therefore, in the executed query, the text variable for fiscal year 1997 is replacedby the value “97”.

Evaluate as Boolean (Value 0 or 1)

This function is only available for formula variables.

If you select this setting, the formula variable is not replaced by a value (for example, the key value)but gives the existence of a value.

� The value of the variable is 0 when the value to be replaced is a string with only blank spaces or azero.

� The value of the variable is 1 when the value to be replaced is a string with characters that are notblank spaces or number > 0.

You want to calculate paid amounts only.

a. In the Replacement Path dialog step, choose the option Replace Variable with an AttributeValue.

b. Enter the attribute Paid. (The master data attribute Paid shows open invoices with a blankspace “ “ and paid invoices with the value “X”.)

c. Select Evaluate as Boolean (Value 0 or 1)

For empty spaces you get the a 0 and for the value “X” you get a 1. Multiplication by sucha formula variable means that all unpaid amounts are omitted from the query and you areonly calculated paid amounts.



Replacement Path: Replacement with a QueryDefinitionA step in the variable wizard that appears for characteristic value variables with the processing typeReplacement Path.

UseCharacteristic value variables with the processing type Replacement Path, are replaced by the resultsof a query.

Select the query whose result you want to use as the variable. You can now use the data result of theselected query as a variable in a different query.

ExampleYou want to insert the result for the query Top 5 products as a variable in the query Sales – Calendaryear / month.

1. Select the characteristic Product and from the context menu, choose New Variable. The VariableWizard appears.

2. Enter a variable name and a description.

3. Choose the processing type Replacement Path.

4. Choose Next. You reach the Replacement Path dialog step.

5. Enter the query Top 5 Products.

6. Choose Next. You reach the Save Variable dialog step.

7. Choose End.

You are now able to insert the variable into the query Sales – Calendar year / month. This allows youto determine how the sales for these five, top-selling products has developed month for month.

Every time you execute the query Sales – Calendar year / month, the query Top 5Products is executed beforehand (= pre-query). This can lead to long run times. If you donot need the pre-query to be executed, we recommend that you use a variable thatrepresents a precalculated value set.

For more information, see Details [Seite 48] and Defining the Value Set Setting [Extern].

CharacteristicDefinitionA step in the variable wizard for text and formula variables with the processing type ReplacementPath.

UseSome variables require a characteristic reference as a reference to the context in which they are used.The characteristic is usually determined from the context (for example, with characteristic valuevariables).

The characteristic reference is not shown for text and formula variables with the processing typeReplacement Path.



Therefore, you have to choose a characteristic here to which the variable relates.

Currencies and UnitsDefinitionA dialog step in the variable wizard for use with formula variables.

UseFormula variables usually represent numbers without dimensions. You can select a dimensionindicator so that the formula variable represents a dimension such as amount, quantity or price.Depending on the dimension, you can determine a currency or a unit.

StructureYou can choose from the following dimensions:

� AmountIf you choose Amount as the dimension, you can select a currency.

� QuantityIf you choose Quantity as the dimension, you can select a unit.

� PriceIf you choose Price as the dimension, you can select a currency and a unit. (Price =Currency/Unit)

� Number (=default setting)If you choose Number as the dimension, you do not need to make any further entries.

� DateIf you choose Date as the dimension, you do not need to make any further entries.

Changing Variables in the Variable EditorUseThe variable editor dialog box offers all of the selection options for changing an existing variable.

ProcedureThe individual fields of the dialog box reflect the steps in the variable wizard and show the currentsettings in the variable. Depending on the type of variable and the processing type (context-sensitive),only the relevant fields and settings are shown.

Make the required changes and choose OK.

If you want to make the changes using a step-by-step process with explanatory texts, youcan jump to the variable wizard using . For more information, see Defining Variableswith the Variable Wizard [Seite 47].



ResultYou have changed the variable. The changed variable can now be used in all queries.

Saving QueriesPrerequisitesYou have created a new query or changed an already existing one.

Procedure

1. Choose Save Query or Save Query As... from the toolbar.

2. Enter a technical name for the query. This name must uniquely identify the query, meaning thatthe name is allowed to appear only once in the entire Business Information Warehouse. Thetechnical name can be up to 30 characters long and must begin with a letter.

3. Enter a Description for the query. Save the query in your favorites or roles.

ResultThe query has been saved and you can now:

� Use the query in the Web Application Designer as a data provider for Web items.

� Insert the query into a workbook in the BEx Analyzer

� Use the query in the Crystal Report Designer as a data source for a formatted report

Query PropertiesUseIn the Query Properties dialog box, you can make various settings for the query.

FeaturesThe Query Properties dialog box is divided into three tab pages, each covering different settings.

Tab Page: GeneralTechnical NameThe technical name of the query is displayed.

InfoProviderThis is where the technical name of the InfoProvider, on which the query is based, is displayed.

DescriptionThe name of the query that you entered when saving the query appears automatically. You canchange the description.





If you have selected an existing text variable and want to change this, select the text variable in theDescription field and click with the left mouse button on the selected text variable. From the contextmenu that appears below the field, choose Change Text Variable. The variable editor appears. Formore information, see Changing Variables in the Variable Editor [Seite 55].


1. In the Description field, enter an ampersand &.

2. From the context menu that appears automatically, choose New Text Variable. The variablewizard appears. For more information, see Defining Variables with the Variable Wizard [Seite 47].

Key DateEach query has a key date. For time-dependent data, the key data determines for which time the datais selected. The default key date value is the date the query was executed, that is <Today>.

1. Choose . The Date Selection dialog box appears.

2. Choose a date from the calendar and use the arrow button to add it to the selection window on theright. If you select 01.01.1999 for example, time-dependent data is read up to 01.01.1999.

3. Choose OK.

You can also select a variable key date:

1. In the Date Selection dialog box, choose the Variables tab page.

2. Choose a variable and use the arrow button to add it to the selection window on the right.

In the selection, you may need to know the technical names of the queries as well as theirdescriptions. In the Description window on the left hand side, choose Technical Namesfrom the context menu (right mouse click).

If you want to create a new variable, in the Description window on the left-hand side, chooseNew Variables from the context menu (right mouse click). The Variable Wizard dialog boxappears, where you can Create New Variables [Seite 47] .

If you want to change a variable, in the Description window on the left-hand side, select thevariable and choose Change Variable from the context menu (right mouse click). The VariableEditor dialog box appears, where you can Change Variables [Seite 55] .

3. Choose OK.

The key date only applies to time-dependent master data.

Sequence of Entry VariablesAny entry variables the query contains are listed here. You can use the two arrow buttons to the rightof the field to determine the sequence in which the variables appear in the variable screen whenexecuting the query.

Last ChangedThis is where you can see details of the owner and person who last changed the structure, as well asthe corresponding data and time that the query was changed.

Tab Page: DisplayDisplay OptionsThe following settings are possible:

� Adjust Format after RefreshThe setting is useful in the BEx Analyzer and is thus the default setting.



Formatting for the query underlines the type of data contained in a cell, highlighting thestructure of the delivered results. As a rule, after refreshing the position and size of the cellarea in the results area of the query changes. The function Adjust Format After Refreshguarantees that the format is adjusted after the updated query data is refreshed.

You can deactivate the function for adjusting the format, for example, if you want to display thedata more quickly, or if you use a workbook with your own format template.

For more information, see Formatting [Seite 438]

� Suppress Repeated Key ValuesHere you can determine whether or not identical key figures are to be displayed in duplicate inthe query. The setting Suppress Identical Keys is active by default, so that only the first key isdisplayed for each characteristic and additional, identical keys are suppressed.

The key value is the value with which the characteristic is presented. This can be thecharacteristic description or the characteristic key. You can determine how thecharacteristic is to presented in the Characteristic Properties [Seite 61].

In the following example, the Suppress Identical Key Values is activated:

Region Order Sales

DE A 14,900 EUR

B 15,800 EUR

C 17,600 EUR

USA D 12,800 EUR

E 32,800 EUR

In the following example, the Suppress Identical Key Values is deactivated:

Region Order Sales

DE A 14,900 EUR

DE B 15,800 EUR

DE C 17,600 EUR

USA D 12,800 EUR

USA E 32,800 EUR

� Display Scaling Factors for Key FiguresKey figures can have scaling factors and units/currencies. Normally, units/currencies aredisplayed for every key figure, but not the scaling factors. If you activate the Display ScalingFactors for Key Figures, an additional header row is added in the row or columns header.Information about the scaling factor and currency/unit appears in this additional header row,as long as it is consistent (for example, 1,000 EURO).

This setting is deactivated by default.

In the following example, the Suppress Identical Key Values and Display Scaling Factorsfor Key Figures is activated:

Region Order Sales

1,000 EUR

DE A 14



B 15

C 17

F D 12

E 32

� Display Document LinksFor metadata, master data and InfoProvider data for a query, you can display links toDocuments [Extern] that you have created for these objects in the Administrator Workbench. Ifdocuments exist for these objects, the symbol appears next to these objects. If you click onthis symbol, you jump to where the document is displayed in the Web.

For more information, see Using Documents in Web Applications [Seite 378].

� Display Drag and Relate Links

When activating this setting, the symbol appears alongside the Drag&Relate-enabledInfoObjects in a Web application that serve as DataProviders for this query. This setting isnecessary for you to be able to recognize Drag&Relate-enabled InfoObjects in an EnterprisePortal and to use the Drag&Relate function. You can find additional information about theDrag&Relate function from Drag&Relate [Seite 409].

Number DisplayThe following settings are possible:

� Result PositionHere, you determine whether the result is displayed on the bottom right (=default), bottom left,top right or top left.

� Sign DisplayHere, you determine how the minus sign is displayed. The following display options areavailable for negative values:

� -X = the minus sign is positioned before the value (=default setting)

� -X = the minus sign is positioned after the value

� (X) = negative values are displayed in parentheses

� Display ZeroesThe following display options are available for displaying zeroes:

� Display Zeroes: Zeroes are displayed with the currency/unit, for example 0,00EUR. This is thedefault setting.

� Zeroes without Currency/Unit: Zeroes are displayed without a currency or unit entry, that is,0,00.

� Do Not Display Zeroes: Cells containing a zero value remain empty.

� Display Zeroes As...: Choosing this setting activates the Display Zeroes As field. You are nowable to enter the required value (character, number or letter), for example *. The cellscontaining a zero value are filled with this value.

Suppress Zero Rows/ColumnsYou can use this setting to determine whether columns or rows containing zeros are to be displayed.

If you select Suppress Zero Rows/Columns, the rows or columns whose result is zero are notdisplayed. The row or column contains, for example, the values 1, -1, 1, -1 and the result is 0.Activating this setting means that the whole row or column is not displayed.

If you do not select Suppress Zero Rows/Columns, the rows or columns with zero values aredisplayed.



Tab Page: Specific

Release for OLE DB for OLAP External Reporting tools that communicate via the OLE DB for OLAP interface use queries asDataSources. If you want to release this query as a DataSource for external Reporting tools, selectAllow External Access to this Query.

Note: Queries containing formulas with the operators %RT, %CT, %GT, SUMRT, SUMCT,SUMGT, and LEAF cannot be released for OLE DB for OLAP. These operators aredependent on how the list is displayed in the BEx Analyzer and the formulas would returnother unexpected values via OLE DB for OLAP or MDX.

For more information about using formula operators in calculated key figures, seeCalculating Key Figures [Seite 31].

Document pushbuttonYou can use the Documents button to get to the available documents that relate to the query in theAdministrator Workbench. Here, you are also able to create new documents for this query.

For more information, see Documents [Extern] and Creating Documents [Extern].

ActivitiesYou call up the properties dialog box for a query by clicking on the in the Query Designer toolbar.

Properties of Query ComponentsUseThe various components of a query have specific properties that depict important functions.

FeaturesThe following dialogs are available to set properties of query components:

� Characteristic properties [Seite 61]

� Attribute properties [Seite 65]

� Structural properties [Seite 66]

� Selection/formula properties [Seite 66]

� Calculated key figure properties [Seite 71]

ActivitiesYou call up the properties dialog box in the Query Designer from the context menu of a component ofthe query. Place the cursor over a query component and click the right mouse button and chooseProperties.



Characteristic PropertiesUseIn the Characteristic Properties dialog box for a specific characteristic, such as order type, you can seta range of functions. These settings then affect all key figures for this characteristic in a querydrilldown.

FeaturesDescriptionThe name of the characteristic appears automatically here. You can overwrite this text. The new textdiffers from the text provided in the InfoObject maintenance and is used for the query presentation.

Technical NameThe technical name of the characteristic is displayed here.

Display asYou can determine here whether and in which format you want to present the individual characteristicvalues of the characteristic.

� No Display: The characteristic display is hidden. This function is useful, for example, with theCurrency/Unit characteristic since the currencies are also shown in the key figures.

� Key and Name: The characteristic values are displayed as the technical key followed by theshortest available text.

� Name: The characteristic values are shown by their shortest available text.

� Key: The characteristic values are shown by their technical key.

� Name and Key: The characteristic values are displayed as the shortest available name followedby the technical key.

� Long Description: The characteristic values are shown by their long text.

� Medium Name: The characteristic values are shown by their mid-length text.

In the Display as dropdown box, the system offers only those texts for selection that werecreated for this attribute in the InfoObject characteristic maintenance [Extern]. SeeTabstrip: Master Data/Texts [Extern].

� No Display and Key are always offered.

� Key and Name, Name, Name and Key are offered additionally if a text (short, medium or long)has been created for this characteristic.

� Medium Name is offered if a mid-length text has been created.

� Long Name is offered if a long text was created.

Results DisplaySuppress Results Rows

Here you can choose whether to suppress the results rows Never, Always or Only for One Value. Onlyfor One Value means that only those results rows are suppressed that aggregate only one value, thatis, the value and the result are identical and the results row repeats the same value.

Normalize to

You can set the normalization for a specific characteristic here. The display affects the key figuresdisplayed in the drilldown by displaying the query data for the relevant result that you chose for thenormalization as normalized. That is, the percentage display in relation to the result is displayed. The



normalization process refers to a particular characteristic each time, and has various settingsindependently for each characteristic.

Normalization for the characteristic only has an effect when the characteristic is in thedrilldown.

You can choose from the following settings:

You can choose whether and for which result you want to normalize the values for this characteristic.

� No Normalization

� Result

All values are normalized to the result. The result equals the total result if there is only onecharacteristic in the drilldown.

� Overall Result

All values are normalized to the overall result. If there are several characteristics in thedrilldown, there are different results that are put together in an overall result.

� Query Result

All values are normalized to the query result. Each key figure for a query has a query result.This is the result of the key figure that results from the aggregation of all characteristics for thequery.

The overall result, and the query result, are identical to one another, provided that none ofthe characteristics are in the filter.

The values of the results row and the overall results row are not displayed as percentagesbut as absolute values.

Since the function Normalize to affects all key figures here, unwanted results are oftendelivered. To avoid this, we recommend that you set the function Normalize to for eachkey figure. For more information, see Calculate Single Values As... [Seite 434].

Cumulated

If you choose this function, the system sorts the list in ascending order according to key. All thestructure elements (key figures) are subsequently aggregated to the n+1 characteristic value, one afterthe other, for each of the nth characteristic values. With time characteristics, the missing characteristicvalues are included wherever necessary.

Values Cumulated Values

1 1

2 3

3 6

4 10

If, for this function, you subsequently choose a different sorting method, the numbersbecome difficult to make sense of.



Do not chose the cumulate output function to use with more than one characteristic.

Since the function Cumulated affects all key figures here, unwanted results are oftendelivered. To avoid this, we recommend that you set the function Cumulative for each keyfigure. For more information, see Calculate Single Values As... [Seite 434].

SortingHere you can set the sorting within the characteristic according to the Key or Name in Ascending orDescending order.

If a characteristic has attributes, you can sort the characteristic by attribute. To do this, you do nothave to choose the attribute for the display.

You want to sort your articles according to specific criteria. To do this, you create anattribute for the Article characteristic that contains these criteria and you can now sort thearticles by this attribute.

By default, the values are sorted as they are defined in the query definition. If you have not specified afilter value in the query definition, the system sorts the values according to the key.

Presentation Hierarchy

You can present the characteristic hierarchically. Choose to select a hierarchy [Seite 29]. Thehierarchy is flagged as an active presentation hierarchy automatically. When you deactivate the Activeselection box, the characteristic is displayed in the query not as a hierarchy but as a basic list.

If you restrict the characteristic to a hierarchy node [Seite 27], the hierarchy of the node isadopted automatically as the presentation hierarchy. You can deactivate the presentationhierarchy here if necessary.

You can set the sorting within the hierarchy according to the Key or Name in Ascending or Descendingorder. If you do not make any entries, the values are sorted as determined in the hierarchy.

Each hierarchy has certain properties that you specify in the hierarchy definition. You can override thefollowing hierarchy properties for the current hierarchy:

� Expand to Level

In the column B (user settings), select the checkbox and enter a numerical value for thehierarchy level that you want to expand the hierarchy to.

� Position of Child Nodes

In column B (user settings), select the checkbox and choose whether you want to positionchild nodes Down or Up. Choose At the Top if, for example, you want to see the overall resultat the bottom.

� Values of Posted Nodes

In column B (user settings), select the checkbox and choose whether you want to Display orSuppress the values of posted nodes.

In hierarchies, nodes always display the aggregated values of the subordinate nodes andleaves. If a node has a posted values, you cannot see this. To display this posted value, anadditional leave is inserted, which has the same name as the node. This leaf displays thevalue posted to the node.

In the following example, you can see that for cost center A1, an additional leaf has beeninserted and that the value of cost center A1 itself, namely 10, is displayed. This additionalleaf does not exist in the hierarchy. You can display or suppress this leaf (with the value ofthe posted node).



Cost Center A.1.

Cost Center A.1.1.1.

Cost Center A.1.2.

Cost Center A.1.1.






196

10

80

50

20

10

106

55

30

21

Cost Center A.1.

You can suppress this value

� Nodes with Only One Child

In column B (user settings), select the checkbox and choose whether you want to Display orSuppress the values of nodes with only one child. Suppressing nodes with only one childhelps you to reach the more detailed information quickly.

In the following example, Cost Center A and Cost Center A.1. contain the sameinformation since Cost Center A has only one child in the hierarchy. If you are interestedin the detailed data for the individual cost centers, you can suppress the uppermost nodewith only one kind as this does not contain any additional information.

Cost Center A.1.


Cost Center A.1.2.

Cost Center A

You can suppress this node

Cost Center A.1.1.






186

186

80

50

20

10

106

55

30

21



ActivitiesDrag a characteristic into a directory in the Query Designer (rows, columns, free characteristics orfilter), select it and from the context menu, choose Properties. The Characteristic Properties dialog boxappears.

Attribute PropertiesUseYou can set display functions in the Attribute Properties dialog box for a specific attribute for acharacteristic.

FeaturesDescriptionThe name of the attribute appears automatically here. You can overwrite this text. The new text differsfrom the text provided in the InfoObject maintenance and is used for the query presentation.

Display asYou can determine here whether and in which format you want to present the individual attributevalues of the attribute.

� No Display: The attribute display is hidden.

� Key and Name: The attribute values are displayed as the technical key followed by the shortestavailable text.

� Name: The attribute values are shown by their shortest available text.

� Key: The attribute values are shown by their technical key.

� Name and Key: The attribute values are displayed as the shortest available name followed by thetechnical key.

� Long Description: The attribute values are shown by their long text.

� Medium Name: The attribute values are shown by their mid-length text.

In the Display as dropdown box, the system offers only those texts for selection that werecreated for this attribute in the InfoObject maintenance [Extern]. See Tabstrip: Attributes[Extern]

� No Display and Key are always offered.

� Key and Name, Name, Name and Key are offered additionally if a text (short, medium or long)was created for this attribute.

� Medium Name is offered if a mid-length text was created.


Technical NameThe technical name of the attribute is displayed here.

ActivitiesSelect an attribute for a characteristic and choose Properties from the context menu (right mouseclick). You reach the Attribute Properties dialog box.



Structure PropertiesUseIn the Structure Properties dialog, you can change the description of a structure and get information onthe technical name and the last changes made to the structure.

FeaturesTechnical NameIf the structure has been saved as a reusable structure, the technical name of the structure isdisplayed here and you can no longer change it.

You can enter a technical name for local structures. However, this is optional.

Note that the technical name must be unique across all queries.

Access from external interfaces (such as Crystal Reports, from URLs or using OLE DB forOLAP), a technical name is necessary for structures, since the structure is considered atable field and has to be uniquely accessible. If you do not enter a technical name, theunique ID (UID) is used for access from external interfaces for uniquely identifying thestructure. However, the UID has 25 characters and can cause problems to arise when youchange queries.

You can change the technical name. When you do so, a warning appears that tells you that when youuse the structure in external interfaces, the references can be destroyed.

DescriptionThe name of the structure appears automatically here. You can overwrite this text.

Last ChangedThis is where you can see details of the owner and person who last changed the structure, as well asthe corresponding data and time that the structure was changed. This information can be useful sincestructures deal with reusable objects.

ActivitiesSelect the structure and choose Properties from the context menu (right mouse click). The StructureProperties dialog box appears.

Selection/Formula PropertiesUseIn the dialog box Selection/Formula Properties for a structural component, you can set a range offunctions. You can make the settings for both the columns and the rows.



FeaturesTechnical NameYou can enter a technical name for the structural component. However, this is optional.


For access from external interfaces (such as Crystal Reports, URLs or using OLE DB forOLAP), a technical name is necessary for structural components, since the structuralcomponent is considered a table field and has to be uniquely accessible. If you do notenter a technical name, the unique ID (UID) is used for access from external interfaces foruniquely identifying the structural component. However, the UID has 25 characters andcan cause problems to arise when you change queries.

You can change the technical name. When you do so, a warning appears that tells you that when youuse the structural component in external interfaces, the references can be destroyed.

DescriptionThe name of the key figure, the restricted key figure (selection) or the formula appears hereautomatically. You can change the description here.

In contrast to characteristics and attributes, structural components can contain several rows as thedescription.

The total number of all characters in all rows, including the line-end character is restrictedto 60 characters.



If you have selected an existing text variable and want to change this, select the text variable in theDescription field and click with the left mouse button on the selected text variable. From the contextmenu that appears below the field, choose Change Text Variable. The variable editor appears. Formore information, see Changing Variables in the Variable Editor [Seite 55].


1. In the Description field, enter an ampersand &.

2. From the context menu that appears automatically, choose New Text Variable. The variablewizard appears. For more information, see Defining Variables with the Variable Wizard [Seite 47].

LayoutHere you can choose whether you want to highlight the selection or formula. The type of highlightingdepends on the style used in the BEx Analyzer or in the Web application.

If you choose Hide, the selection or formula is not displayed.

Moreover, you can mark a selection as constant here. This means that the selection cannot bechanged by navigation or filtering for the runtime and can therefore be used as a reference size. Formore information, see Selecting Constants [Seite 70].

Number displayYou can set a scaling factor of 1 to a billion. If, for example, you set 1,000, the value 3,000 is shownin the report as 3.

You can set the number of decimal places. The number can have either no decimal places or up tonine decimal places (0, 0.0, 0.00... to 0.000000000).



Select Reverse +/- Signs if you want to display the numbers as negative values. A positive numberreceives a minus as a sign (for example, 85 becomes –85) or a negative number receives a plus (forexample, -38 becomes +38).

The reversal of plus and minus signs is purely a display function. If, for example, the keyfigure is added to a formula, it is calculated with its correct values.

CalculationsYou use this function to recalculate, according to particular criteria, the results rows and single valuesthat are displayed in the query.

Calculate Results As... [Seite 432]

Calculate Single Values As... [Seite 434]

CumulatedYou use this function to cumulate the individual cells in an area. The first value is added to the secondvalue, the result is added to the third value, and so on. In the columns, the cells are cumulated fromtop to bottom, and in the rows, the cells are cumulated from left to right. With blocks of single values,that is, a drilldown in both the rows and the columns, the values are cumulated from top to bottom andfrom left to right.

Also Apply to ResultsYou can also use the chosen recalculation on the results rows under Calculate Results as... orCalculate Single Result as...

Note that the following functions cannot be applied to hierarchy lists (active displayhierarchies), and cannot be used in conjunction with the characteristic containing thehierarchy.

� Calculate � Result as

� Calculate � Single Value as � Ranked list / Ranked list (Olympic)

� Calculate � Cumulative

Currency translation

The Currency Translation function is not offered in the formula properties dialog box.

You create the translation types for currency translation [Extern] in the Administrator Workbench. Formore information, see Creating Currency Translation Keys [Extern].

You can set a target currency for a structural component in the Query Designer.

Select a currency in the dropdown box for Currency Type. According to how the currency translationkey has been created in the Administrator Workbench, you have the following options:

� Select the target currency when converting

The target currency is not fixed in the translation key in the Administrator Workbench but canbe determined when converting. Select the required translation key and enter the TargetCurrency in the dropdown box. You can also select a currency from the dropdown box.

Moreover, you can also select, create or change a variable target currency.

Select Input Variables.

The variable target currencies appear in a dropdown box. Select a variable chain. You canchange the variables using . Entering variables offsets dialog box appears. For moreinformation, see Changing Variables in the Variable Editor [Seite 55].



Choose if you want to create a new variable target currency. The variable wizarddialog box appears. For more information, see Defining Variables with the Variable Wizard[Seite 47].

When you execute the query, the variable dialog box appears, in which you can choose thetarget currency.

� Fixed target currency

The target currency is determined in the translation key in the Administrator Workbench.Select the required translation key with the fixed target currency. In the Target Currencydropdown box, the fixed target currency for this translation key appears.

� InfoObject determines target currency

The target currency is determined in the translation key in the Administrator Workbench sothat it is determined from an InfoObject. Select the required translation key with the targetcurrency from the InfoObject.

Formula Collision

The Formula Collision function is offered ONLY in the formulas property window.

When you define two structures, which both contain formulas, it is unclear to the system how tocalculate the formulas at the point where both formulas intersect.

The following example clarifies the concept of formula collision:

Column 1 Column 2 Column 1 x Column2

Row 1 Value A Value B A x B

Row 2 Value C Value D C x D

Row 1 + Row 2 A + C B + D ? Formula Collision?

In this example, there are two rows and two columns with simple values, the third row is asimple summation formula and the third column is a simple multiplication. In the cell inwhich the row and column formulas meet, it is not clear which calculation should be made.

If you calculate according to the column formula in this cell, the cell contains (A+C)x(B+D).If you calculate according to the row formula in this cell, the cell contains (AxC)+(BxD).The result gives a different value.

If a formula collision occurs, as described in the example above, you can determine which formula isused in the calculation. You can make the following settings in the Formula Collision field:

� Nothing defined

If you do not make a definition, the formula that was set last takes priority in a formulacollision. Setting means that you defined and saved the formula.

� Result of this formula

The result of this formula has priority in a collision

� Result of competing formula

The result of a competing formula has priority in a collision

Collisions always occur when point and dash calculations or functions are mixed incompeting formulas. If there is only dash calculation or point calculation in both formulas,both calculation directions give the same result. Therefore, not settings are required forformula collision.



ActivitiesSelect the structural component and choose Properties from the context menu (right mouse click). Youreach the Selection/Formula Properties dialog box.

Selecting ConstantsUseIn the Query Designer, you use selections to determine which data you want to display for the reportruntime. You can then alter the selections during runtime using navigation and filters – that is, you canrestrict the selections further.

The function Constant Selection allows you to mark a selection in the Query Designer as constant.This means that navigation and filtering have no effect on the selection for the runtime. In this way,you can easily select reference sizes that you cannot change for the rest of the runtime.

IntegrationYou can use this function with selections in structural components, cells and restricted key figures.

You cannot select an entire restricted key figure as a constant, only its InfoObjects.

FeaturesYou can define entire selections as constants for structural components and cells.

Moreover, you can define components of selections, that is, single InfoObjects and their filter values,as constant. The selection remains constant only with regard to this InfoObject in navigation andfiltering.

ActivitiesYou can activate the Constant Selection setting for an entire selection in the Selection/FormulaProperties [Seite 66] dialog box.

You select an InfoObject of a selection as constant in the following way:

1. From the context menu of a selection, choose Edit or from the context menu of a structure, chooseNew Selection if you want to make the setting when you create the selection. The Edit Selection orNew Selection dialog box appears.

2. From the context menu of the InfoObject that you are using in the selection, choose ConstantSelection.

In the same way as with InfoObjects, you can also select a restricted key figure or a cell in a selectionas a constant.

The function Constant Selection is also available in the Ad-hoc Query Designer in arestriction. You can find more detailed information under Ad-hoc Query Designer: DefiningNew Queries [Seite 364].

ExampleMarket IndexYou do not want to see the absolute sales revenue in a product list (product is in drilldown), but anormalized sales revenue (that is, related to) a specific product group. Using the Constant Selection



function, you can select the sales revenue of a specific product group as the constant for the drilldown.You can now relate the sales revenue of the individual products in the group to the sales revenue ofthe product group and, for example, determine the revenue from each individual product salesrevenue as a proportion of the sales revenue for the group.

Plan/Actual ProblemThe actual values per month are in the InfoCube and you have the plan values for the entire year andhave assigned them to a period (for example, 12.2002). Now define a query with the period in thefilter, an ACTUAL column and PLAN column. Since the filter also affects the plan column, no planvalue is shown for, for example, period five (this is assigned to period 12). Using the ConstantSelection function, you can ensure that the filter has no effect on one of the columns.

In addition, this solves problems with the MultiProvider:

The MultiProvider has an InfoCube with the actual values and an InfoCube with the planvalues. If the characteristic Calendar Month is in the plan InfoCube, but not in the actualInfoCube, all data is displayed in a drilldown by Calendar Month under the value #(unassigned). You can define a constant selection for calendar month = # (unassigned). Indoing so, you select the yearly plan value as constant independently of the filter and it isdisplayed in each row, that is, for every month. You can now divide the yearly plan valueby 12. Then you can make plan/actual comparisons on a monthly basis, although thereare only yearly values in the plan InfoCube.

Calculated Key Figure PropertiesUseIn the Key Figure Properties dialog box, you can set a range of functions for a calculated key figure.

FeaturesYou can select the following functions in the Selection/Formula Properties dialog box:� Description

� Layout

� Number display

� Calculations

� Currency translationFor more information about these functions, see Selection/Formula Properties [Seite 66].

In addition, you can select the following functions in the Key Figure Properties dialog box.

Last ChangedThis is where you can see details of the owner and person who last changed the key figure, as well asthe corresponding date and time that the key figure was changed. This information can be useful sincecalculated key figures deal with reusable objects.

Aggregation BehaviorIn the Key Figure Properties dialog box, choose Enhance >>. The Aggregation Behavior field is addedto the dialog box.

In this field, you make settings for the aggregation of the calculated key figure and the time that thecalculated key figure is calculated. Depending on the complexity of the formula, you can make various



settings in the enhanced properties of the calculated key figure. The following types of calculated keyfigures with the corresponding formula complexity are available:

� AssignmentA formula has the complexity Assignment if it has the form =operand (for example,=invoicedquantity), where the operand consists of a basic key figure.

Formulas with the complexity Assignment are used to change the aggregation behavior of thekey figure (for example, the key figure is aggregated to the total, but you want to aggregate itto the average).

The Aggregation field is visible but not ready-for-input. The Exception Aggregation field isvisible and ready-for-input. The default value for both of these fields is made up of the valuesfrom the corresponding fields in the source key figure. You can change the exceptionaggregation.

You can select the following settings in the Exception Aggregation field.

� Summation

� Maximum

� Minimum

� Exception, if more than one record occurs

� Exception, if more than one value occurs

� Exception, if more than one value <> 0 occurs

� Average of all values

� Average of all values <> 0

� Average for calendar days

� Average for working days

� Counting all values

� Counting all values <> 0

� First value

� Last value

� Standard deviation

� Variance

If the fields Aggregation and Exception Aggregation have the same setting, the fieldReference Characteristic for Exception Aggregation is empty and not ready-for-input.

If the fields Aggregation and Exception Aggregation have different settings, you have tospecify the reference characteristic for the exception aggregation.

� SimpleA formula has the complexity Simple if it is made up exclusively of operands with the sameaggregation, where the operands basic key figures, constants or calculated key figures canhave the complexity Simple (for example, profit=sales minus revenue).

In the Time of Calculation field, you can choose whether the formula is calculated AfterAggregation or Before Aggregation.

If you choose to calculate the formula before aggregation, this can result in bad systemperformance as a large amount of data (single records) has to be calculated. Often informula calculations, the single record information for only one or two specificcharacteristics is required and the rest of the InfoProvider data can be aggregated



Therefore, we recommend that you use a formula variable that is replaced with theattribute Reference to Characteristic (Constant 1). Using this attribute, the reference tosuch a characteristic, which is not to be aggregated, can be created. The attributeReference to Characteristic (Constant 1) is available for all characteristics.

If you use such a variable in a formula (instead of in a calculated key figure), it is replacedwith a 1. However, this has no effect on the aggregation behavior since formulas arealways calculated after aggregation.

For more information about formula variables and replacing them with attribute values,see Replacement Path: Replacement with a Characteristic Value [Seite 52].

� ComplexAll other types of formula have the complexity Complex and are always calculated afteraggregation.

The various options for aggregation settings are not ready-for-input and the time of calculationis set to After Aggregation.

Most formulas are complex and are therefore calculated after aggregation.

ActivitiesIn the InfoProvider objects dialog box, select a calculated key figure and from the context menu,choose Properties. You reach the Calculated Key Figure Properties dialog box.

Exception ReportingUseIn exception reporting you select and highlight objects that are in some way different or critical. Resultsthat fall outside a set of predetermined threshold values (exceptions) are highlighted in color. Thisenables you to identify immediately any results that deviate from the expected results.

Exception reporting allows you to determine the objects that are critical for a query, both online, and inbackground processing.

IntegrationYou define exceptions in the Query Designer, and evaluate them online when you execute a query. Ifyou want to evaluate exceptions for a large number of queries, this is done in the background. Theseexceptions are scheduled for background processing in the Reporting Agent of the AdministratorWorkbench.



BExAnalyzer

Query-definition

Exception-definition

ReportingAgent:

Einstellung

Exceptionlog

ExceptionMonitor

ReportingAgent:

Einplanung

Mail,....

OLAP Server

Business Explorer

ReportingAgent

PrerequisitesYou have defined a query which you want to use for exception reporting.

FeaturesException reporting is made up of three functional areas: The exception definition, the onlineevaluation of exceptions, and the evaluation of exceptions in background processes.

� Defining ExceptionsExceptions are defined in the Query Designer and are valid globally for a particular query in allworkbooks.

The definition of an exception consists of:

� Determining threshold values or intervals that are given a priority (bad, critical, good). Thepriority given to an exception corresponds to pre-assigned colors that become more‘intense’ the greater the deviation. Up to 9 different shades of the traffic light colors red,yellow, and green are used. These traffic light colors are also used in the alert monitor todisplay the results of exception reporting. See also Displaying Exceptions: Alert Monitor[Seite 79]

� Determining cell restrictions. You use the cell restrictions to specify for which evaluation(cell area) you want the condition to apply.

See also:

Defining Exceptions [Seite 75]

� Evaluating Exceptions OnlineThe cell areas in the results area of an executed query are highlighted in color if they containvalues that do not fall within the exceptions you defined previously.

� Evaluating Exceptions in the BackgroundSettings that you make in the Reporting Agent are processed in the background. The result isdisplayed in the alert monitor, and logged in the exception log. If exceptions do occur, it ispossible to trigger a follow-up action in the Reporting Agent (a mail is sent to the personresponsible, for example).

The alert monitor is a component of the Business Explorer. It is available in:



� The BEx Analyzer toolbar Open dialog box

� Web applications in the alert monitor [Seite 199] Web item.

The number of exceptions that occur is displayed according to the selection of traffic lightcolors. You can specify that the system run an authorization check before displaying theexceptions. The exceptions are displayed in a hierarchy with the following levels: InfoArea,InfoProvider, query, view, and exception.

See also:

Reporting Agent [Extern]

Defining the Exceptions Setting [Extern]

Displaying Exceptions: Alert Monitor [Seite 79]

Defining Exceptions1. Choose New Exception. (You can find this menu path in the Query Designer toolbar under to

the right of Exception.) You get to the Defining Exceptions dialog box.

2. Give a name for the exception in the Description field.

If you only want to define the exception, and do not want to execute it actively in thequery, remove the check from the Active field that is there by default.

3. In the Evaluation for field, choose the structure elements, for which you want to evaluate theexception. Choose a structure element individually for every structure used, or use the everythingsetting to apply the exception to all the structure elements.

You want to evaluate the exception for the key figure Sales. Choose the value Sales fromthe selection field for the Key Figures structure.

4. Choose the Exception Values tab page.

Add one or more alert level rows to the list. See Conditions/Exceptions: Inserting, Changing,Deleting Rows [Seite 78]

An alert level row consists of:

� From-value

� To-value

� Alert Level

From and To Values

Specify floating point numbers for the from and to values. If you want to, you can leave eitherthe from or the to value blank.

The format depends on the country setting in the operative system.

The following convention makes it easier to handle numbers with many zeros:

An apostrophe after the number means multiplied by one thousand, a quotation markmeans multiplied by one million, and three apostrophe marks means multiplied by onebillion, for example 1.5” = 1.5 mil = 1,500,000.

You can use formula variables for the from and to values of the exception.




The formula variables appear in a dropdown box. Select a variable chain. You can change thevariables using . Entering variables offsets dialog box appears. For more information, seeChanging Variables in the Variable Editor [Seite 55].

Choose if you want to create a new formula variable. The variable wizard dialog boxappears. For more information, see Defining Variables with the Variable Wizard [Seite 47].

When you execute the query, the variable dialog box appears, in which you can choose thefrom and to values.

Alert Level

Assign the exception priority you want to use as an Alert level.

In the Excel formatting templates used as standard in the BEx Analyzer, a color ramp is usedto display the priority given to an exception (dark green = good 1,...yellow = medium 5,...darkred = bad 9). There are a total of nine color shades, corresponding to nine different levels ofpriority. If you want to assign your own colors, choose Formatting � Pattern from the BExtoolbar (see also Formatting [Seite 438].

The formatting for Web applications is defined in the BW stylesheet [Seite 235]. You canchange the colors for the exceptions in the stylesheet.

All sales below 1,000 are bad, all sales above 100,000 are good, and all sales betweenthese two values are medium. Define three Alert level rows to correspond to these threecategories:

From To Alert Level

1.000 9 (bad)

1.000 100.000 5 (medium)

100.000 1 (good)

For report data, the alert level rows are processed in order. The alert level that is relevantfor the report data goes to the first row.

5. Choose the Cell Restrictions tab page, if you want to define more precisely the data cells of thereport for which the exception is evaluated.

Add one or more cell restriction rows to the list. See Conditions/Exceptions: Inserting,Changing, Deleting Rows [Seite 78]

A restriction row consists of:

� A characteristic

� An operator

� A value (only with the operator Fixed Value as a characteristic value, and the operator Levelas a number)

Choose from any of the free characteristics, or any of the characteristics from the rows andcolumns that are used in a query. You cannot use characteristics that have already been usedin another restriction row in the list.

Choose from the following operators:

Operators Meaning

everything The cell context is not restricted. The exceptionis valid for every drilldown status of thecharacteristic.

totals only The exception is valid only for aggregatedvalues of the characteristic.



everything except totals The exception applies to all values of thecharacteristic apart from aggregated values.

fixed values The exception is valid for only one particularvalue of the characteristic (“spare parts” under“product group”, for example). Specify thecharacteristic value you want to use in externalnon-compounded display format or call thevalue help with to choose a characteristicvalue.

You can also use characteristic valuevariables.


The characteristic value variables appear in adropdown box. Select a variable chain. Youcan change the variables using . Enteringvariables offsets dialog box appears. For moreinformation, see Changing Variables in theVariable Editor [Seite 55].

Choose if you want to create a newcharacteristic value variable. The variablewizard dialog box appears. For moreinformation, see Defining Variables with theVariable Wizard [Seite 47].

When you execute the query, the variabledialog box appears, in which you can choosethe characteristic value.

Level The exception is valid only for a particularhierarchy level of the characteristic. Specify thehierarchy level you want to use as a number inthe Value field.

In the hierarchy for thecharacteristic Location, Country isthe second hierarchy level(continent – country – state –location). If you want the exceptionto be valid only for the hierarchylevel Country, put the number 2 inthe Value field. If you want theexception to be valid only for thehierarchy level State, put thenumber 3 in the Value field, sinceState is the third hierarchy level.

The standard default cell restriction Totals Only (Recommended with Absolute Values) is applied to allthose characteristics where you have not restricted the cells individually. This setting means that theexception is valid only for the aggregated values of this characteristic.

You can also use the default restriction Everything (Recommended for Relative Values) inthe field Default Operator Used for All Characteristics that Are Not Displayed. This settingmeans that the exception is valid independently of the drilldown status of a characteristic,whose cell context has not been restricted. This does not qualify as a restriction.



We recommend that you use this setting only with relative values (for example,percentage deviations).

3. Choose OK. You return to the query definition.

4. Choose Save.

Changing Exceptions1. Choose Change Exception. (You can find this menu path in the Query Designer toolbar under to

the right of Exception.) The dialog box for the exceptions that have already been definedappears.

2. Select the exception you want to use, and choose OK. The Defining exceptions dialog boxappears. Make your changes here.

3. In the Query Designer, choose Save.

Deleting Exceptions1. Choose Exception. The dialog box for the exceptions that have already been defined appears.

2. Select the exception you want to remove, and choose Delete.


ResultYou have defined or changed an exception for a query. Execute the query. The exception is evaluatedonline. The cells that are affected by the exception are displayed with the appropriate color shading inthe result area of the query.

The descriptions of the exceptions are displayed in the query view, where youactivate/deactivate them by double-clicking on them individually, or by choosing Layout �Display Exceptions from the context menu (right mouse click). The descriptions for theexceptions are inserted into the cell area below the filter cells.

Exceptions are evaluated in the background, if they involve a large number of queries, for example.You schedule the exceptions for background processing in the Administrator Workbench ReportingAgent.

See Reporting Agent [Extern], Defining the Exceptions Setting [Extern].

Conditions/Exceptions: Inserting, Changing, DeletingRowsUseWhen you define conditions, you must set up condition rows. When you defineexceptions, you can create alert level rows and restriction rows.

ProcedureInserting a new row1. Choose New.

2. Select the settings you want in the entry field under the list.

3. Choose Copy. A new entry appears in the list with the new settings. You can now immediatelycreate a new row in the entry field.



Changing rows1. Select the required row in the list.

2. Make the required changes in the entry field under the list.

3. Choose Copy. The row has now been changed accordingly.

Deleting rows1. Select the required row in the list.

2. Choose Delete.

The procedure applies when you are creating

� Condition rows (see Defining Conditions [Seite 81])

� Alert level and restriction rows (see Defining Exceptions [Seite 75])

Displaying Exceptions: Alert MonitorUseThe Alert Monitor lists and displays exceptions containing values outside the specified thresholdvalues.

IntegrationExceptions are displayed both in the BEx Analyzer and the Reporting Agent Scheduler of theAdministrator Workbench. In addition, you can display exceptions as alert monitors in a Webapplication (see Alert Monitors [Seite 199]).

PrerequisitesYou have defined one or more exceptions (see Defining Exceptions [Seite 75]) and chosen the follow-up action Alert Monitor for background processing in the Reporting Agent of the AdministratorWorkbench (see Defining the Exceptions Setting [Extern]).

FunctionsExceptions that trigger the follow up action Alert Monitor are logged in the exception log, and displayedin the Alert Monitor. If you activated the authorizations check when you set up the follow up action, thetype of recipient, and the recipient’s authorizations, are taken into account when the exceptions aredisplayed.

BEx Analyzer displayIn the BEx Analyzer, the exceptions are listed starting with the InfoArea level up to the individualviews, that is the drilldowns you ran in the background. Views are named according to:

� the characteristic values of the characteristics in the filter

� the name of the characteristic in the drilldown

Double clicking on a view jumps you from the Alert Monitor directly into the corresponding view in thequery. You get the information about the key figures from this view, and you can also continue tonavigate from here.

Note that data for this view is taken from the current dataset. The exceptions that appearin the Alert Monitor however, refer to the data status that was valid at the time of the last



batch run. The number of exceptions in the Alert Monitor may therefore be different to thenumber of exceptions in the query view.

Reporting Agent Scheduler displayThe Alert Monitor is displayed in the Reporting Agent up to the exceptions level. The number of red,yellow and green alerts is listed for each exception.

ActivitiesBEx Analyzer display1. Start the BEx Analyzer, and choose Open.

2. Choose Exceptions.

You can also display the alerts out of a workbook. Choose Goto � Exceptions from theBEx toolbar. You get a list of alerts for the exceptions of the particular query you arelooking at.

Reporting Agent Scheduler display

In the right-hand tree of the Reporting Agent Scheduler, choose All packets � Exception reporting �Alert Monitor.

ConditionsUseIn the Query Designer, you formulate conditions for efficient data analysis. In the results area of thequery, the data is restricted according to the conditions so that only the part of the results area thatyou are interested in is displayed.

Conditions do not affect the results lines, that is, the results lines correspond to the query results lineswithout this condition.

You can define several conditions for one query. You can link several conditions logically using AND,to make different conditions apply to the query at the same time, as long as they are all active.

PrerequisitesYou have defined and now want to define one or more conditions for this query.

FeaturesConditions help you restrict how you view query data in the following way:

� Absolute Conditions: A line is filtered independently of the other lines, when its reference valueexceeds a specified threshold value.

� Ranked Lists: Here, all lines of the displayed list are considered and their relationship to eachother decides whether the lines are displayed. Ranked lists are always sorted automatically.

The following operators help you to create rank lists:

� Top N, Bottom N: The ranked list is arranged according to a particular number.

Customers: Top 3 or bottom 5 sales volumes

You get a list of the three customers with the highest sales, and also the five customerswith the lowest sales.



� Top percent, bottom percent: The ranked list is arranged according to a particular percentage.

Material: Top 25% of sales revenue

You get a list of materials with the highest sales volume that account for 25% of the totalrevenue.

Material: Bottom 25% of sales revenue

You get a list of materials with the lowest sales volume that account for 25% of totalrevenue.

� Top total, bottom total: The ranked list is arranged according to a particular totals value.

Products: Top total 20,000 EUR of sales volume

You get a list of products with the lowest sales volume, whose combined sales volumemakes a total of 20,000 EUR. First, all sales volumes are sorted in descending order andthen totals are formed until the threshold value of 20,000 is exceeded. Those productsthat exceed the 20,000 EUR threshold are left in the list.

The ranked list for this condition might look like this:

Product Sales

A 11,000 EUR

B 7,000 EUR

C 5,000 EUR

Product C is included in the list, even though it means the total sum is greater than 20,000EUR. All the products that have a lower sales volume than product C are no longerdisplayed.

If you want to create a ranked list of the products with the lowest sales volume whosecombined sales total a certain amount, use the Bottom total operator.

See also:Defining Conditions [Seite 81]

Defining Conditions1. Choose New Condition. (You can find this menu path in the Query Designer toolbar under on

the right next to Condition). The Define Conditions dialog box appears.

2. Specify a name for the condition in the Description field.

If you want to just define the condition and do not want to execute it actively in the query,remove the check from the active field that is there by default.

3. You now have the following options:

� In the field Evaluate conditions below for, choose the option All characteristics independent indrilldown if you want to evaluate the lower condition rows separately for all the characteristicsin the drilldown.

The condition row is Sales Top Five.



If the characteristic Customer is the only one in the query, the top 5 customers as far assales are concerned are displayed because of the condition. If the characteristic Productin the query is the only one in the drilldown, the top five products with regards to sales aredisplayed. Additionally, if Customer and Product are in the drilldown, the top fivecustomers and the top five products with regards to sales are displayed, as well as all 25combinations of the two.

� In the field Evaluate conditions below for, choose the option Single characteristics orcharacteristic combinations if you want to evaluate only on certain drilldowns of definedcharacteristics or characteristic combinations. You can then make entries in the list ofcharacteristics which are used in the queries in rows, columns, or free characteristics.

a. If you only want to evaluate the condition if it is in the drilldown, select it with a check.


You have selected Customer as the only characteristic. The condition is only evaluated ifCustomer is in the drilldown. Only the top five customers with their sales are displayed.

b. Select several characteristics with a check, if you want to evaluate the condition forcharacteristic combinations.


You have selected the characteristics Customer and Product with a check. The conditionis only evaluated if Customer and Product are in the drilldown at the same time. Theoption All characteristics independent in drilldown displays the top five customer-productcombinations with sales, meaning only five rows instead of 25 (see above).

If you have defined several conditions for a query, there may be conflicting conditions thatrefer to the same characteristics. In this case, certain rules of priority apply. It is generallythe most specific condition that applies when there are conflicts.

One condition defines the top five sales for the characteristic Customer, and a secondcondition defines the bottom three sales in the customer-product combination.

If only the characteristic Customer is in the drilldown, only the first condition applies. So,only the condition top 5 sales is used for the characteristic Customer.

If Customer and Product are in the drilldown at the same time, you can use bothconditions according to their definitions. In this case, the second condition applies since itis more specific due to its reference to the characteristic combination.

4. In the field Present all values that fulfill at least one of the following conditions, enter one or morecondition rows into the list. See Conditions/Exceptions: Inserting, Changing, Deleting Rows [Seite78]

A condition row is always derived from the determination of an element for every structureused in the query (usually one or two structures), an operator, and a value that matches theoperator.

You can choose from the following operators for threshold conditions:

� Is equal to

� Is not equal to

� Is less than

� Is greater than

� Is less than or equal to



� Is greater than or equal to

� Is between (is in the interval)

� Is not between (is not in the interval)

These operators demand a floating point number as a value. For the operators is in intervaland is not in interval, you must enter a value area, that is, a lower and an upper thresholdvalue.

You can choose from the following operators for ranked list functions:

� Top N

� Bottom N

� Top percent

� Bottom percent

� Top sum

� Bottom sum

For Top/Bottom N you must enter a whole, positive number as the value. For Top/Bottompercent enter a number between 0 and 100. For Top/Bottom sum you can also enter a floatingpoint number (for example, 15.7).

The format depends on the country setting in the operative system.

The following convention makes it easier to handle numbers with many zeros:

An apostrophe after the number means multiplied by one thousand, a quotation markmeans multiplied by one million, and three apostrophe marks means multiplied by onebillion, for example 1.5” = 1.5 mil = 1,500,000.

You can also use formula variables as the reference value of the condition.


The formula variables appear in a dropdown box. Select a variable chain. You can change thevariables using . Entering variables offsets dialog box appears. For more information, seeChanging Variables in the Variable Editor [Seite 55].

Choose if you want to create a new formula variable. The variable wizard dialog boxappears. For more information, see Defining Variables with the Variable Wizard [Seite 47].

When you execute the query, the variable dialog box appears, in which you can choose thevalue limit of the condition.

A group of condition rows is logically linked with OR. This means that at least one of thecondition rows has to be filled for the entire condition to be filled for one characteristicvalue.

5. Choose OK. This takes you back to the query definition.

6. Choose Save.

Changing Conditions4. Choose Change condition. (You can find this menu path in the Query Designer toolbar under on

the right next to Condition). You reach the dialog box for the predefined conditions.

5. Choose the condition you want to use, and then choose OK. You get to the dialog box Definingconditions, where you make the changes.




Deleting Conditions4. Choose Condition. You get to the selection window for the conditions that have already been

defined.

5. Choose the condition you want, and then choose Delete.


ResultYou have defined or changed a condition for a query. Execute the query. Only those objects aredisplayed which fulfill the defined conditions.

Display the descriptions of the conditions in the query view, and activate/deactivate themwith a double-click or with the right mouse button. Choose Layout � Display conditions.

See also:Using Conditions [Seite 84]

Using ConditionsUseYou can define several conditions for a query. Activate/deactivate the conditions to create differentviews of the data for displaying in the BEx Analyzer.

PrerequisitesYou have defined several conditions for a query.

FunctionsDisplaying conditions as text elementsYou can display the descriptions of the conditions in the query view. In the BEx Analyzer, chooseLayout � Display conditions.

Using several conditions in a single viewIf you have set a condition to active in the definition, then the status active appears next to thedescription of the condition. Using several conditions at the same time can create a conflictingsituation, and the condition is deactivated automatically. The following status descriptions appear inthe display:

� cannot be appliedThe condition refers to:

� a characteristic that has not been drilled down

� a characteristic that has been drilled down with an active presentation hierarchy

You can use the condition by drilling down on the aggregated characteristic or the activepresentation hierarchy. The status active appears in the display.

� not usedThe condition refers to a characteristic that is already being used in another active condition.There is a collision. Only when you deactivate the other condition does this condition comeinto effect. The status appears as active in the display.



Condition 1: Customers: Top 3 or bottom 5 sales volumes

Condition 2: Customers and products: Purchase order value > 50,000

If the characteristics Customers and Products have been drilled down and condition 2 isactive, then condition 1 automatically has the status not used. If you deactivate condition2, condition 1 is automatically activated. If you activate condition 1, condition 2 isautomatically not used.

If you activate a condition for characteristic combinations (condition 2 in the aboveexample), then the results row is automatically omitted.

Activating /deactivating conditions

� If you have displayed the conditions as text elements, you can activate/deactivate the condition bydouble clicking on the corresponding status descriptions active and not active.

Alternatively, choose Activate condition or Deactivate condition from the context menu (rightmouse button on the status description).

� If you call the context menu for the results area (right mouse click in the results area), you have afurther option of activating/deactivating the conditions there under Conditions.

Tabular Query DisplayUseYou can use all queries defined in the BEx query designer for OLAP reporting and also for tabularreporting [Extern].

FunctionsBy (de) selecting the Tabular Display mode when defining a query, you can create a query for OLAPreporting and for tabular reporting. You get access to the OLAP reporting mode by default. When yousave the query, both display types are automatically saved in a query object in the databank.

If you define the query in one mode, the system automatically generates a standard presentation forthe other mode. In addition, all queries that already exist automatically have a default presentation forthe tabular display. Therefore, you can use all defined queries for OLAP reporting in the BEx Analyzerand in BEx Web applications and also for formatted reporting within the scope of Crystal Reportsintegration.

Queries that have two structures are only available in the multidimensional display andare only suitable for OLAP reporting.

Characteristics and key figures are displayed in the columns in the tabular display. Unlike with OLAPreporting, there are no free characteristics and no rows. You can use filters in the tabular display andassign characteristics, key figures and attributes freely in the columns. For example, you can put a keyfigure column between two characteristic columns. The column display is fixed and is determinedwhen the query is designed. In tabular reporting, the interaction options are limited to filters, filteringand drilling down according to, sorting according to and navigation in hierarchies Navigation functionsthat would change the geometry of the tabular list (that is the number and position of the columns),such as swapping or adding drilldowns, are not allowed in tabular reporting.



The tabular query display is particularly suitable for formatted and form-based reporting. For formattedreports it is important that you can specify the layout design to one pixel and also have convenientprint options.

Switching between the two display types:

When you switch a query defined for OLAP reporting to the tabular display, all InfoObjects are movedautomatically from the rows into the columns. Similarly, when you switch a query that was defined inthe tabular display to a multi-dimensional display, all characteristics are displayed in the rows and allkey figures are displayed in the columns. The filter settings remain the same in both cases. Freecharacteristics from the multi-dimensional display change to filters when you switch to tabular display.

If you remove an InfoObject from the query definition in one mode, the change is also made in theother mode. The InfoObject is also removed from the query there. In other words, changes to thedefinition effect both display types. If you change the position of the InfoObject in the columns inthe tabular display, this does not effect the multi-dimensional display for OLAP reporting. In otherwords, changes to the position of objects effect only the selected display type.

ActivitiesChoose in the Query Designer symbol list to switch between both modes.

You can find further information about the integration of formatted reporting, see Formatted Reporting:Crystal Reports Integration [Seite 476]

Displaying and Changing Existing Queries in the QueryDesignerPrerequisitesYou must have created at least one query.

Displaying QueriesYou open the Query Designer from Start ### Programs ### Business Explorer ### Query Designer.


� BEx Analyzer


� Crystal Reports

From the BEx Web Application Designer:

1. Choose Tools � Query Designer.

2. In the Query Designer symbol toolbar, choose Open Query. The BEx Open Dialog appears.

3. From here, select a query from the queries in your history, favorites or roles, or from queriesassigned to the InfoAreas.

You can display them in the Query Designer:

� By double-clicking on them

� By selecting them and choosing Change

From the BEx Analyzer:

1. Choose Open � Queries in the BEx toolbar. The BEx Open Dialog appears.

2. From here, choose a query from the queries in your history, favorites or roles, or from queriesassigned to the InfoAreas. Then select it.

3. Choose Change.



Changing Queries1. Display the query in the Query Designer.

2. You can now make changes in the query definition. The procedure for changing the query is thesame as for creating a new query (see also: Defining New Queries [Seite 22]).

3. You have two options for saving the query:

� You can save the changed query. From the toolbar, choose Save Query.

� You can save the changed query as a new query. From the toolbar, choose Save QueryAs. Enter a new technical name, a new short text and a new description.

4. You can also delete the query. From the toolbar, choose Delete Query. You can delete thequery only if it is no longer being used (that is, if it is not being used in any workbooks, Webtemplates, Crystal Reports or Reporting Agent settings).

Using the function Display <-> Change , you can toggle between the display andchange modes.


Functions of the BEx Query Designer [Seite 18]

Creating Reusable StructuresUseStructures are freely-definable reports that consist of combinations of characteristics and key figures(for example, as basic key figures, calculated or restricted key figures) of the InfoProvider. A structurecan be a plan / actual comparison or a contribution margin schema, for example.

You can use structures in several different queries. To do this, you have to save the InfoProvider thatyou want to use again. These structures are then called reusable structures.

So it is easier to tell the difference, structures that are not saved as reusable structuresare called local structures. Local structures are only used in one query.

PrerequisitesIn the Business Information Warehouse at least one InfoProvider that is filled with data must beavailable.

Procedure1. Start the Query Designer.

You open the Query Designer from Start/Programs/Business Explorer/Query Designer.


� BEx Analyzer


� Crystal reports



Business Explorer Analyzer:

In the BEx toolbar, choose Open � Queries. In the BEx Open Dialog, you access theselection screen displaying all available queries in your history, favorites and roles or assignedto the InfoAreas. Choose New

Web Application Designer:

In the menu toolbar in the Web Application Designer, choose Tools ��Query Designer.Choose New Query .

2. You get to the selection screen for all InfoProviders for which you can define a new query. Fromthe list of all available InfoProviders, select the InfoProvider for which you want to create thereusable structure. The available objects in the InfoProvider you selected are displayed as adirectory tree in the left hand side of the Query Designer.

3. In the Rows or Columns directory of the Query Designer, choose New Structure from the contextmenu (right mouse button).

4. Create a new structure. Select the characteristics and key figures of the InfoProvider that youwant to use in the new structure and drag them into the structure directory. Where necessary,restrict a characteristic or a key figure. Where necessary, define a new calculated key figure.

You can copy individual structural components within a structure. This enables you tocreate similarly structured structural components quickly and easily. For example, if youwant to use the formula for a calculated key figure (K1) in another calculated key figure(K2), you can copy K1 and continue to build the formula in K2.

From the context menu of the structural component, choose Copy and from the contextmenu of the structure, choose Insert. You can also copy structural components usingtemporary storage locations (Ctrl-C, Ctrl-V).

5. Highlight the new structure. From the context menu (right mouse-click), choose Save as... andenter a Technical name, and a Description.

ResultThe reusable structure is in the structure list of the InfoProvider tree and can be used when you createnew queries.

See also:Defining New Queries [Seite 22]

Deleting Query ObjectsPrerequisitesYou have already defined at least one query, or a structure, or a restricted or calculated key figure.

Procedure1. From the main menu, choose Business Explorer ��Delete Query Objects . This brings you to a

selection screen.

2. Choose the type of object to be deleted (query, structure, restricted key figure or calculated keyfigure).

3. Where necessary, restrict your search further, for example, to a certain InfoProvider, to certaintechnical names or to the last person to make a change..



4. Choose Execute. You get a list of all query objects, which match the selection criteria. The listcontains the technical name of the query objects, the name, and the long description of theInfoProvider, for which the objects are defined.

5. Choose Continue, if you want to delete all the query objects in the list. It is not possible todelete individual objects in this dialog window.

If you just want to delete individual query objects, you must either cancel, or make moreprecise restrictions in the selection screen.

Option of Deleting Workbooks after Deleting QueriesAfter you have deleted a query, you can decide whether you also want to delete all the workbooks thatcontained a query which has now been deleted. All users can delete workbooks in any of theirfavorites and roles. This means there is no risk of accessing workbooks with deleted queries in.

ResultThe query objects you specified are deleted.

See also:Removing Queries from Workbooks [Seite 466]

Copying Queries between InfoCubesUseWith this function you can copy queries and their subobjects (structures, calculatedkey figures and restricted key figures) between different InfoCubes.

The target InfoCube, that is, the InfoCube of the query copies, must contain all theInfoObjects of the source InfoCube (InfoCube of the original queries).

Procedure1. In the start menu, choose SAP Menu � Business Explorer � Copy queries. Double-clicking on

Copying Queries brings you to the popup Copying queries between InfoCubes.

2. Select the required source and target InfoCube.

3. Choose Continue. This brings you to a selection box with all the queries of the source InfoCube.

4. Select a query from all those available.

You have the following options for the multiple selection of queries.

� To make several selections from the list, select the required queries with a mouse click andthe ctrl key.

� If you want to select several queries that follow each other in the list, you can select wholeblocks with the Shift key.

5. Select Copy selections.



Make note of the following if you are working with reusable subobjects such as variables,structures, calculated key figures and restricted key figures:

� Variables are not dependent on InfoCubes, so variables are not copied.

� If you have selected several queries and they refer to subobjects that follow each other in thelist, only one copy is made for each of the subobjects. The references of the copied queriesremain.

� New subobjects are created when queries are copied again. This means the references to thealready copied queries are lost.

ResultThe copied queries and the copied subobjects have their own names. The newnames are derived from the name of the original object and the added elements_<number>.

This does not affect variables, since they are not copied.

ExampleThe queries weekly report, monthly report and annual report use company code as avariable and the calculated key figure contribution margin. If you now copy thequeries weekly report and monthly report into another InfoCube, the queries weeklyreport_1 and monthly report_1 as well as the calculated key figure contributionmargin_1 are created. The new queries now refer to the new key figure contributionmargin_1 and the variable company code.If you then copy the queries quarterly report and annual report, a new calculated keyfigure, contribution margin_2, has to be created as a copy of contribution margin.Quarterly report_1 and annual report_1 then refer to contribution margin_2 and notcontribution margin_1. Company code is still used as a variable.

Editing Sender/Receiver Assignments to the R/RI in BWUseMake the necessary settings for the sender/receiver assignment so that you can connect a BW queryto the Report-Report-Interface (RRI) in the BEx Analyzer. You can assign recipient reports to a senderreport, that is, a query in BW, within BW as well as in the R/3 System.

Creating Sender/Recipient Assignments1. In the main menu of the SAP Business Information Warehouse, select Business Explorer � Query

� Jump Targets. You reach the Sender/Receiver Assignment Maintenance screen.

2. Choose the relevant tab page and enter the required data.

Tab page What you need to know

Query Specify the technical name of the sender query. You can alsochoose a query using input help.



InfoCube If you want to assign the same jump target to all queries in anInfoCube, enter the technical name of the required InfoCube. Youcan also choose the InfoCube using input help.

3. Choose Create. You reach the Maintain Sender/Receiver Assignment dialog box.

4. Choose a Report Type You have the following options:

� BW BEx query

� BW Web application

� BW Crystal Report

� InfoSet query (see Creating InfoSet Queries as Recipient Reports [Seite 92] ).

� Transaction

� ABAP/4 Report

� Web address

5. Choose a Target System. You have the following options:

a. Local: The jump target is within BW.

b. Source system: The jump target is outside of BW

� A source system as a target system:

Specify the name of the source system. You can also choose the source system using inputhelp.

� All source systems as target systems:

Set the indicator in the All Source Systems checkbox. Specify the source system, in which youwant first want to choose a report

Log on to this source system.

6. In the Report field, enter a description for the recipient report. After you have saved your entry, thisdescription is displayed as the Report Title.

7. Choose Copy. You reach the Sender/Receiver Assignment Maintenance screen.

8. Save your entries.

Changing Sender/Receiver AssignmentsAfter you have created a receiver, you can make the following changes in those fields in the ALVGridthat are ready for input.

Group description What you need to know

Report title Specify a description.

Source System Choose the required source system using input help. You canassign all source systems by entering “*”.

InfoSource If an InfoCube is filled from several InfoSources, you can specifyfrom which InfoSource you want to extract data. In the InfoSourcecolumn, choose the InfoSource you want to use.

If you also want to change the Report Type, Target System or Report settings, choose Change.You reach the Sender/Receiver Assignment Maintenance screen. Make the required changes andchoose Transfer.

Maintaining Receiver Field Assignments IndividuallyIn some circumstances, you may want to maintain field assignments individually.



Calling up specific reports takes a long time if selections are missing.

When jumping in BW, you can stop a called report from being started if it does not fill certainconditions that you determined previously as mandatory entries.

1. Select the relevant target entry in the Receiver table.

2. Choose Assignment Details. You get to the Field Assignments dialog box.

3. When you want to make changes for the individual fields, choose the required settings from thedropdown box for the respective cell:

Group description Standard settings Alternative

Type Generic � V Variable

� I InfoObject

� 3 Table Field

� P URL parameters

� Delete X

Selection type * � P Parameters

� E individual values

� I Interval

� S Selection option

� H Hierarchy Nodes

Required entries no (empty checkbox) yes (indicator set)

When the system calls up the recipient, the settings made in the Field Assignments dialog boxare set. The system suggests all other field assignments generically.

4. Choose Close.

Deleting Sender/Recipient Assignments1. If you want to delete an assignment, select the corresponding row entry in the Recipient table.

2. Choose Delete. The system deletes the selected assignment.

ResultThe assigned jump targets are shown in the BEx Analyzer in the context menu of the Goto function.

See also:Goto [Seite 425]

Creating InfoSet Queries as Receiver ReportsUseYou can assign an InfoSet query as a receiver report to a sender query in BW

PrerequisitesOn the Maintain Sender/Receiver Assignment screen, you have created a sender/receiver assignmentfor a query or for an InfoCube and have chosen InfoSet Query as the receiver report type.



Creating InfoSet Queries as Receiver Reports within BW1. If you want the receiver query to be stored within BW, choose Local as the Target System.

2. The Report field is not ready for input. Call up the F4 help for this field. You reach the Add ABAP/4Query

3. Choose the query area. We recommend that you choose the global area in BW. If you do not setthe indicator in the relevant checkbox, you work in the standard area, which has limited functionsin BW.

4. Specify the name of the user group. You can also choose a query using input help.

5. Specify the name of the query. You can also choose a query using input help.

6. Specify the name of the variant, if necessary. You can also choose the variant using input help.

7. Choose Copy. You reach the Maintain Sender/Receiver Assignment dialog box. The systemhas copied the selected query.

8. Choose Copy. You reach the Sender/Receiver Assignment Maintenance screen. The receiverquery is run in the table.


Creating InfoSet Queries as Receiver Reports outside of BWIf you want the receiver query to be outside BW, choose one source system or all source systems asthe Target System. (See Editing Sender/Receiver Assignments for the R/RI in BW [Seite 90])

The procedure now continues as above (with the exception of step 6).

Web Application Design: BEx Web ApplicationDesignerUseWeb application design allows you to use generic OLAP navigation for your BW data in Webapplications as well as in business intelligence cockpits for simple or highly individual scenarios.

IntegrationThe following graphic shows Web application design as a central functional area of the BusinessExplorer:



,

Business Explorer

•Query design onthe desktop or inthe Web publisher•Multidimensional(OLAP) analyses(Web-based orMS Excel)•Geographicalanalyses•Ad-hoc reporting•Alert•Publishing iViews•Seamlessintegration of Weband MS Excel-based analyses


Query, Reportingand Analysis


Formatted Reporting Mobile Intelligence

Technical Components/ BI ToolsKey Functions/

Functional Area

•Layouts exactto one pixel•Wizard-basedlayout definition•Static, for-matted reports•Form-basedreports•PredefinedCrystal Reportsin BusinessContent•Publishing onthe Web•Practicalprinting options

•Online andoffline scenarios•WAP-device andPDA support•Automatic devicerecognition•Publishing usingthe WebApplicationDesigner•Device-specificoutput•Alerts, charts•Integration intothe mobile portal

•Web ApplicationDesign•Interactive analy-tical Content on theWeb•Information cockpitsand dashboards•Basis for creatinganalyticalapplications•Creation of iViewsfor the Portal•Wizard-based vi-sualization•APIs for additional,highly individualWeb design

•Single point-of-access•Roll-based dataretrieval

•Personalization,collaboration,profile generation


FunktionsumfangThe following graphic illustrates the basic concept of Web Application Design with the Web ApplicationDesigner as the central tool:

BW Server(using mySAP WebApp Server Technology)

HTMLTemplatesData

Base BW Charting Engine

Any WebDesign Tool

BEx Analyzer

OLAP Processor

Any WebBrowser

http

• save HTML Templates inWeb Content Management

• generate URL automatically

BEx Web ApplicationDesigner

BW WebService

BEx QueryDesigner

createQueries /

Views

Usingthe BEx Web Application Designer [Seite 95], the desktop application for creating Webapplications, you can create HTML pages that have BW-specific contents such as tables, charts ormaps. These objects, which retrieve BW data from a data provider and place it in a Web application asHTML, are known as Web items. For more information on the Web items available, see Web Items[Seite 113].

You can save the Web applications as a URL and access them from an intranet or on mobile devices.In addition, you can save Web applications as iViews and integrate them into an enterprise portal.



The Web application wizard [Seite 101] is an assistant that is integrated into the Web ApplicationDesigner. You can use this to help you create Web applications using a step-by-step procedure and tosimplify design activities. The Web application wizard helps you to work with Web application designconfidently and create your first Web applications.

Business Explorer Web application design also allows you to create highly individual scenarios withuser-defined interface elements by using standard markup languages and Web design APIs. You canadjust and enhance Web templates [Seite 241](the HTML pages that determine the structure of Webapplications) individually. For further information, see:

Object Tags [Seite 242]

Command URLs [Seite 245]

Using Forms [Seite 266]

Data Provider [Seite 270]

Query Views [Seite 271]

Using JavaScript Functions [Seite 302]

In addition, using a Web design application programming interface (Web design API), you can changethe display of tables or navigation blocks in Web applications. See Web Design API for Tables [Seite314]

Web application design comprises a broad spectrum of Web-based business intelligence scenarios,which you can adjust to meet your individual needs using standard Web technologies.

BEx Web Application DesignerDefinitionThe BEx Web Application Designer is a desktop application for creating Web applications with BW-specific contents. Using the BEx Web Application Designer, you create an HTML page that containscontents such as various tables, graphics or maps. This HTML page (shown below as a Webapplication) provides the basis for not only Web applications with complex interaction, but also for Webcockpits and iViews.

UseFor a detailed guide explaining how to create Web applications, see Creating Web Applications withthe BEx Web Application Designer [Seite 98] or, if you are creating a Web application for the first time,see Creating Web Applications with the Web Application Wizard [Seite 101]. You can find backgroundinformation under From Web Template to Web Application [Seite 105].



Structure



As well as menu bars and application toolbars, the BEx Web Application Designer consists of threebasic screen areas:

� The Web Items window

� The Template window

� The Properties window

The Web Items WindowThe Web Items window offers a pool of Web items [Seite 113] that you can use to create your Webapplication.

A Web item is the visualization type (for example, tables, maps, graphics) used to displaydata from a data provider [Seite 270].

The window is made up of two areas:

� In the top part of the window, divided onto two tabstrips, are the selection option categories forWeb items.

� Selection from master Web items

� Selection from Web items saved in the library. See also Working with the Library for WebItems [Seite 110].



You can create documents for your library, or display or edit existing documents. To dothis, choose the Library tab page from the Web Items window. Choose context menu � Open Library. Select the library that is opened and, using the context menu, chooseDocuments. You can find additional information under Documents [Extern] and CreatingDocuments [Extern].

You can create documents for each individual Web item in your library and display or editexisting documents. To do this, open the library as described above, select a Web itemand, using the context menu, choose Documents.

� Below the document selection, you see the help area with descriptive text for the Web item thatyou selected in the above area.

The Template WindowThe Template window contains the Web templates that you edited in the design process and that formthe basis for your Web applications.

The HTML page published on the Web is called a Web application. A Web template [Seite241] is the HTML page that you use to determine the structure of the Web application.

At the bottom of the Template window there are three tab pages that you can use to change the viewof the template or the current HTML editor.

� Layout

You determine the layout of the Web application in the layout view. See Designing the Layoutof Web Templates [Seite 108] for the available options.

� HTML

The HTML view displays the HTML that corresponds to the layout view

In the HTML view, the syntax is colored.

Syntax element Color

Comment gray

HTML blue

String constants black

BW-specific contents such as BW object tags,SAP BW URLs, SAP BW texts

red

In the HTML view, you can edit the HTML of a Web template directly. Alternatively, youcan also edit the HTML with an external HTML editor. You can find additional informationabout editing HTML under Creating Web Applications with the BEx Web ApplicationDesigner [Seite 98].

� Overview

In the overview view, all of the Web items are listed with information about the master Webitem, the data provider and the query or view.



You can create documents for Web templates or display or edit existing documents. To dothis, choose Web Template � Documents. You can find additional information underDocuments [Extern] and Creating Documents [Extern].

The Properties WindowIn the Properties window, you define the properties of Web templates and Web items. It is divided intothree areas:

� In the header of the window in the dropdown box, you see the selection for which you want todefine properties – for the Web template or for specific Web items.

� In the middle area, you specify the properties for Web templates or for specific Web items –depending on the dropdown box settings.

� The lower screen area displays context-sensitive help.

Creating Web Applications with the BEx WebApplication DesignerUseYou can use the BEx Web Application Designer to create a BEx Web application (an HTML page withBW-specific content) quickly and easily.

You can find background information on the following steps under From Web Template ToWeb Application [Seite 105].

We recommend that you create your first Web application with the BEx Web Application wizard inorder to familiarize yourself with the Web Application Designer. See Creating Web Applications withthe Web Application Wizard [Seite 101].

Procedure1. Create a Web template

To create a new Web Template [Seite 241], choose or Web Template � New. (When youstart the Web Application Designer, a new Web template is created).

2. Insert a Web item [Seite 113]

a. Drag a Web item from the Standard tabstrip of the Web Items window and drop it into the Webtemplate. The Web item appears in the Web template.

When you select a Web item from the Web Item window, you get an explanatory text inthe area underneath the Web item.

b. Give the Web item a name by overwriting the default text under Name on the General tab stripin the Properties window.

3. Set the data binding.

a. In the Properties window, on the General tab page, in the DataProvider area, describe thedata provider [Seite 270]. Overwrite the existing text under Name, or select a new dataprovider using the pushbutton and overwriting the proposed text.

b. Select a query with or a view with respectively to assign a data provider to the Webitem.



To create a new query, call the Query Designer by choosing Tools � Query Designer

To create a view on the basis of a query or another view, choose Tools � View Definition� Based on a Query or Based on Another View. In the BEx Open dialog box, select anexisting query or an existing view. The standard template appears in a separate browserwindow. Define your view there, enter the Description and Technical Name and chooseSave View. You can now use this view as a data provider.

4. Make settings for the Web items.

a. In order to make special settings for the Web item, choose the tabstrip Web Item.

For the chart and map Web items, you can also call up the dialog for changing attributesusing the symbols or on the toolbar.

b. Specify the properties by

� Selecting the relevant checkbox

� Manually entering a value (for example, with Heading)

� Manually changing the default value

� Double-clicking the default value and choosing another value from the dropdown box thatautomatically appears

� Choosing values from a list

� Creating values in a list in tabular form

Click on each property for a description of the individual properties. The descriptions areshown in the area underneath the properties.

5. Add further Web items.

Repeat steps 2 – 4 to integrate further Web items.

Note the position of the cursor in your template when adding further Web items. Thecursor position determines where the new Web item is added. See also Designing theLayout of Web Templates. [Seite 108].

Make sure that you execute the data binding and Web-item-specific settings for thecorrect Web item. To make changes to a Web item, select the item in the layout view. Inthe header of the Properties window, the system displays the Web item for which you canchange the settings. As an alternative to selecting the individual Web items, you can usethe dropdown box to toggle between the properties of individual Web items.

6. Design the layout of the Web template

In the Web Application Designer, you can create your Web template in the same way as infamiliar HTML editors. See also Designing the Layout of Web Templates. [Seite 108].

7. Change the Web template properties.

To change the Web template properties, select the Web template in the header of theProperties window from the dropdown box. See Determining Web Template Properties [Seite107], for a description of the settings you can make.



8. Store and execute the Web template

a. To save your Web template, choose or Web Template � Save.

b. To view your Web application in the Browser, choose or Web Template � Publish inBrowser.

You have to save the Web template before publishing it on the Web. You are thereforeasked to save the template when you execute it, if you have not already done so. Seealso From Web Template to Web Application [Seite 105].

To assign a Web template to a role, choose Publish � In Role...

To place the URL of a Web template on a clipboard, choose Publish � Copy URL toClipboard. To do this, you must have saved the template once already.

ResultThe browser is started and the Web application you created is opened.

If you want to print your Web application, you can enter a print stylesheet for therespective Web template. You can see the selection of print stylesheets only in the HTMLview. For further information, see Print Stylesheets [Seite 240].

Processing Web Templates FurtherYou have the following options for editing the HTML source of a Web template:

1. You can edit the Web template directly in the HTML view of the Web Application Designer. To dothis, in the Web Application Designer Template window, choose the HTML tab.

� Edit the HTML.

� Choose Undo in the lower-right area of the Template window in order to withdraw the changesyou have made.

or

� To check the edited HTML, in the lower right area of the Template window, choose Validate.

The changes made to the Web template are not transferred to the Web template at thisstage.

The system starts the Web template validation automatically when you:

a. Choose the Layout or Overview tab.

b. Change the properties in the Properties window on the Web Item tab.

c. Save the Web template

The Web Application Designer dialog box appears. This is where you are asked totransfer the HTML changes or correct any errors.

� Choose Yes if you want to transfer the changes to the Web template permanently.

The changes are transferred into the Web template.

or

� Choose No to reject the changes.



or

� Choose Cancel to continue editing the HTML.

2. You can also edit the Web template with an external HTML editor.

� To process a Web template further using an external HTML editor, choose Web Template �Export to File... Your Web template, that is the HTML file, is stored on a file system of yourchoice. You can call it up from there with your HTML editor.

If you have selected an HTML editor in the Web Application Designer using Tools �Settings, this is started automatically.

� To call up a Web template that you have edited in the HTML editor (that is, the edited HTMLfile) in the Web Application Designer again and edit it there, store the file on your file systemagain. In the Web Application Designer, choose Web Template � Import from File... andspecify the names and location of the saved file.

� To download a Web template directly from the server, that is, without opening the WebApplication Designer, choose Web Templates � Download File from Server. The Webtemplate (the HTML file) is stored on your file system.

� To upload a Web template that you edited in an HTML editor directly to the server, that is,without opening it in the Web Application Designer, store the file on your file system again. Inthe Web Application Designer, choose Web Template � Upload File to Server and specify thename and location of the saved file.

Creating Web Applications with the Web ApplicationWizardUseYou can use the Web application wizard to create a Web template quickly and easily. You can publishthis template as a Web application in the Internet browser. The Web template is an HTML documentwith BW specific placeholders that determines the structure of a Web application.

You can use the Web application wizard to create Web templates but not change them. Ifyou want to change your Web template, you use the Web Application Designer. SeeCreating Web Applications with the BEx Web Application Designer [Seite 98].

PrerequisitesYou have called up the BEx Web Application Designer.

Procedure1. Choose or Tools � Wizard, to call up the Web Application Designer.

2. Select a Web item from the list and choose Next.

The Web item determines how the source data is displayed. Using different Web items, youcan visualize your data in different ways. For example, you can display your data in a table, ina chart or in a map. The dropdown box, checkboxes, and radio button group Web items areused to filter characteristic values. You can find additional information about the Web itemsavailable under Web Items [Seite 113].

3. Select a query or a query view.



In the DataProvider field, either select a DataProvider using input help or use for a newDataProvider. The DataProvider provides data for one or more Web items.

You can select either a query or a query view as a DataProvider for the Web item. Chooseeither (Select Query) or (Choose View). This brings you to the Open Query / Viewdialog box.

From here, select the required query or query view from your history, favorites, or roles.Choose Next.

You can also manually alter the name of the Web item here. The name identifies the Web itemwithin the template.

4. Set the attributes for the Web item. You can edit the attributes by:

� Selecting the checkbox

� Manually entering a value (for example, with Heading)

� Manually changing the default value

� Double-clicking the default value and choosing another value from the dropdown box thatautomatically appears

� Choosing values from a list

� Creating values in a list in tabular form

Choose Next.

5. Arrange the Web items that you created in the list.

The sequence of Web items in the list is the same as the sequence of Web items in the Webapplication.

Use the two arrow buttons on the right-hand side to change the order of the Web items. Hereyou can also

Delete Web items Select the Web item you want to delete andchoose Delete.

Add a new Web item Choose Add Item.

Edit Web items Select the Web item you want to edit andchoose Back.

6. Before saving the Web template, you can make the following settings:

� Use the pushbutton next to the Stylesheet field to choose the stylesheet that you want to usefor your Web application. The Choose Stylesheet dialog box appears. Select a stylesheet fromthe list. If you would rather use a stylesheet that is not on the list, one that is on your Webserver, for example, mark the checkbox and enter the URL. Choose OK.

� If you select Display Variables, a variables screen appears in the Web application, from whichyou can select the required values. If you do not select Display Variables, the Web applicationis displayed without a variable screen.

� If you select Status-free Navigation, the system closes the connection to the server. Thismeans you do not use any of the server’s storage capacity. If you then navigate in the Webapplication, the connection to the server is reopened and remains open for the duration of thenavigation. If you do not select Status-free Navigation, the system maintains the connection tothe server.

� Choose Settings to do the following:

a. In the General tab page, you can change the stylesheet that is used to format the Webapplication or set the default stylesheet.

Choose the pushbutton with the three dots (Change Settings). The Choose Stylesheetdialog box appears. Proceed as outlined in step 6 above.

b. In the Directories tab page, you can change the following path specifications



� Path for the Web browser

� Path for the HTML editor

You can find additional information about making settings under Making Settings [Seite 103].

� Choose Save once you have made all the required settings for your Web template.

7. You can now publish your Web template.

Here you can see the URL for your completed Web template. You can now publish the Webtemplate directly in the Web, or you can integrate it as an iView in your Enterprise Portal.

You have the following options for using the Web template again:

� Choose to display the Web template in the Web browser.

� Choose to save the Web template as an iView in a role.

� Choose to save the Web template as an iView file locally, so it can be used in the iViewstudio.

Then choose Exit to close the BEx Web application wizard. The Web template appears in theBEx Web Application Designer. You can now continue to edit the template as required.

Making SettingsUseIn the Web Application Designer or the Web application wizard, you can make and save generalsettings. You can select a default stylesheet used to display your Web application and determine thepath for the Web browser and the HTML editor. You reach the dialog for making general settings in theWeb Application Designer through Tools � Settings.... In the Web application wizard you makegeneral settings in the Save Web Template window using the Settings pushbutton. If you want to saveyour general settings, mark the relevant checkbox in the Settings dialog box.

You can determine a different stylesheet for each Web template separately from thegeneral settings. See Determining Web Template Properties [Seite 107]. If you do notmake separate settings, the system uses the general settings.

ProcedureSelecting a Stylesheet1. From the Web Application Designer menu bar choose Tools � Settings..., or in the Web

application wizard in the Save Web Template window, choose the pushbutton Settings.

2. On the General tab page, choose the pushbutton with the three dots (Change Settings).

3. Select a stylesheet from the list You see an HTML document in the preview window on the rightwhich applies to the selected stylesheet.

Only those stylesheets stored on the BW server are displayed in the selection list. If youwant to use a stylesheet that is not in the list, for example one that is stored on your Webserver, select the checkbox beneath the selection list and enter the URL.

3. Choose OK.

Determining the Path for the Web Browser and the HTML Editor1. From the Web Application Designer menu bar choose Tools � Settings..., or in the Web

application wizard in the Save Web Template window, choose the pushbutton Settings.



2. On the Directories tab page, use the pushbutton with the three dots next to the Change Settingsentry field, to specify the required path.

� Path for the Web browser

You reach the Open dialog box, in which you specify the path.

� Path for the HTML editor

You reach the Open dialog box, in which you specify the path.

3. Choose OK.

Storage of Stylesheets and IconsUseYou want to use stylesheets in your Web templates that exchange icons or supplement the Webtemplate with other MIME objects such as images, icons or logos.

PrerequisitesYou have adjusted the stylesheet [Seite 235] or icons to your settings.

ProcedureYou find stylesheets and other MIME objects in the MIME Repository on the Web Application Server.To reach the MIME Repository, in transaction SE80 (ABAP Development Workbench) choose MIMERepository.

Storage of Own Stylesheets

You can find the stylesheets delivered with BW under SAP� Public� BW � BEx � Stylesheets andSAP � Public � BW � BCT � Stylesheets. You can also select these stylesheets in the WebApplication Designer [Seite 95]. To change your stylesheets proceed as follows:

1. Copy a stylesheet as a template to your computer. To do this, select the stylesheet, and with theright mouse button choose Export � As a Copy.

2. Edit the stylesheet in an editor.

3. Store the changed stylesheet under SAP � Public � BW � Customer � Stylesheets byselecting the Stylesheets folder and, using the right mouse button, choosing Import � MIMEObject. Choose a name for the stylesheet.

For each theme (that is, color specifications) In the MIME Repository, there is a stylesheet without asuffix and 4 stylesheets with the suffix _ie4 (for Internet Explorer 4), _ie5 (for Internet Explorer 5), _n47(for Netscape Navigator 4.7) and _n60 (for Netscape Navigator 6.0). The stylesheets are optimized foreach browser and are linked to the relevant browser when you start a Web application. That is, forexample, if there is a stylesheet with the ending _n47, this is used when you start a Web application inNetscape Navigator 4.7. If there is no stylesheet available with the corresponding suffix, the stylesheetwithout the suffice is embedded.

This is only relevant for changed stylesheets if you are using several types of browser.You can optimize the stylesheet for each browser. If you are only using one type ofbrowser, optimize the stylesheet without the suffix for this browser. To do this, use thestylesheet with the browser-specific suffix as a template.

Storing Changed IconsIf you want to change icons that are used by default in the Web application, proceed as follows:



1. Delete the relevant icon in SAP � Public � BW � BEx � Icons by selecting the icon andchoosing Delete from the context menu.

2. Save your new icon under the same name as the original icon by selecting the Icons folder andwith the right mouse button, choosing Import � MIME Object.

Storing Your Own MIME Objects (for example, images and icons)To include your own images and icons in your Web application, your have to store them in the MIMERepository. Proceed as follows:

� In general, you can store your MIME objects anywhere under SAP � Public � BW.

� You insert MIME objects by selecting a folder and choosing with the right mouse button Import� MIME Object.

� You create new folders by selecting a folder and choosing with the right mouse button Create� Folder.

� So that your images are displayed in the Web Application Designer, we recommend that you storethem under SAP � Public � BW � Customer � Images. You can include images that you savein this folder in the Web Application Designer without having to manually edit the HTML.

Including Icons in the Web Template

� If you have stored your images under SAP � Public � BW � Customer � Images, you do nothave to do anything else after you have included them in your template.

� If your image is in another folder under SAP � Public � BW you have to maintain the pathmanually in the HTML.

If the image Picture1.gif is in SAP � Public � BW � Customer � MyPictures you haveto access the image under Mime/Customer/MyPictues/Picture1.gif.

� If you want to use the image as a background screen, you have to access it through the stylesheetby specifying the background image in a stylesheet class. You enter the relative path for storingthe stylesheet.

You want to give a specific area a background. You have stored the picture for this underSAP � Public � BW � Customer � MyPictures. You stylesheet is saved under SAP �Public � BW � Customer � Stylesheets. You add the specification background-image_url (..\MyPictures\Picture.gif) to the affected class in the stylesheet.

From Web Template to Web ApplicationThe purpose of the design process is to create an HTML page with BW-specific content, called theWeb application.

The Web page executed in the browser is described as a Web application.

Creating a Web TemplateThe starting point is the Web template. The Web template [Seite 241] is an HTML document that isused to define the structure of a Web application and that contains placeholders for Web items, DataProviders and BW URLs [Seite 245].



A Web template is referred to as a Web application only when the data is actuallydisplayed in the Web browser.

A look at the HTML view shows that the basis of the template is an HTML page and an object tag hasbeen created for the template.

In the course of the design process, you change this Web template by embedding placeholders forWeb items and Data Providers. You can make these changes in the HTML view.

Integrating Web Items and Changing the Settings and LayoutThe Web items [Seite 113] on the standard tabs are used as templates. By dragging it into your Webtemplate, it becomes a concrete version of a Web item, called an object. The Web item has a nameand certain standard properties that you can change as required.

You see the changes in the HTML view. An object tag was integrated as placeholder in the HTML forthe Web item and the data provider. Change the name and select a data provider. In the HTML view,you can see that your settings have been written to the object tag.

Your layout is also copied to the HTML in the usual manner for HTML editors.

Describing Data Binding and Selecting a Query/ViewThe data provider [Seite 270] provides the data for your Web item. You can assign a data provider tomultiple Web items.

The data provider is a dynamic object that delivers current data for one or more Webitems at runtime. You define the start view of the data provider by selecting a query orstored query view.

The data provider concept makes it possible to exchange the data source for a Web item easily. Bymeans of navigation, that is changing the drilldown, the Web item always displays the current drilldowndata. If a particular data provider is assigned to more than one Web item, the changes affect all theWeb items involved.

Storing and Publishing the Web TemplateExecute the Web template in the browser. When it is executed, the Web template becomes a Webapplication, that is, the template is saved on the Web Application Server and a URL is generated forthis Web application.

The object tags are replaced with the information as defined by the Web item and data providersettings at runtime (triggered by the URL call). The Web template on the Web Application Server isaccessed. This means that you must save your Web template before you execute it.

Overwriting Web TemplatesIf you have authorization for deleting Web templates, you can also overwrite existing Web templatesthat are saved in your favorites or roles.

To do this, create a new Web template. To overwrite the existing Web template with the new Webtemplate, from the Web Application Designer menu bar, choose Web Template � Save As In theSave Web Template dialog box, select the Web template that you want to overwrite from yourfavorites or roles. Choose Save. In the Do you want to overwrite <Name of selected Web Template>?dialog box, choose OK.

You cannot overwrite Web templates that are open in the Web Application Designer.



Determining Web Template PropertiesUseYou can specify the properties for your Web application in each Web template.

ProcedureSelect the Web template from the dropdown box in the header of the Properties window.

Tabstrip: General� Under Description, you can give the template a description of your choice.

� Under Stylesheet, the stylesheet that is to display the Web application is shown. Choose thebutton with the three dots (Select Stylesheet) to select another for your Web application.

� The list of stylesheets is given on the left-hand side of the Select Stylesheet dialog box. Selecta stylesheet to see it in the preview window on the right-hand side.

� To select a stylesheet for your Web application, select the required stylesheet and choose OK.

Only those stylesheets stored on the BW server are displayed in the selection list. If youwant to use a stylesheet that is not in the list, for example one that is stored on your Webserver, select the checkbox beneath the selection list and enter the URL. Choose OK.

Tabstrip: Web Items� Under General, you can give the Web application the following properties:

� Status-Free Navigation

By selecting Status-Free Navigation, the status on the server is removed after everynavigation step in the Web application. This is only recommended for Web applications inwhich you rarely navigate.

� Use Personalized Template, if Available

� Do Not Display System Messages

� Do Not Display Warning Messages

� Always Display Variable Screen

If Always Display Variable Screen is not selected, the variable screen is only displayed whenthe mandatory variables are not filled. By selecting the Always Display Variable Screen, thevariable screen is displayed at all times.

� Reset Variable Values to Default Values

� Display Same Variables Only Once

This ensures that the same variables for different queries are displayed only once.

� Open Dialogs in New Windows

� Read Mode for Data

� Output Optimization (Device-Dependent)

By selecting Output Optimization (Device-Dependent), you arrive at an automatic, device-specific optimization of item settings for the runtime (for example, chart size for PDAs).

� In the Entries in the Context Menu column, all possible context menu entries are listed. You candecide whether each context menu entry is

� Not displayed (No Display)

� Always displayed in the basic context menu (Always Display)



� Or displayed in the enhanced menu (Enhanced Menu)

.

See also Modifying the Context Menu [Seite 257]. The letters X (for Always Display) and E(for Enhanced Menu) describe the values for the corresponding parameters for modifyingthe context menu.

Storing Settings in the Library� As well as saving the settings you determine for Web items, you can also save the properties of a

template in a library. Choose Save in Library in the lower area of the Web Item tabstrip. For detailsof how to save your properties and for creating new libraries, see Working with the Library for WebItems [Seite 110].

� The saved Web template properties are treated in the same way as the Web items you saved inthe library, meaning that you can find your saved Web template properties in the Web Itemswindow on the Library tabstrip. Once you have saved your Web template properties, you havecreated a model for further Web templates.

Applying Settings to the Current Web Template� To copy properties to other Web templates, proceed as follows:

a. In the Web Items window, on the Library tabstrip, with the right mouse button choose the Webtemplate property that you want to copy.

b. Choose Transfer Properties for Current Template.

The properties for the Web template are transferred. You can see this in the changed settingsfor the Web template in the Properties window.

� To reassign the standard settings to the current Web template, choose Web Template � ResetProperties

In the Properties window, the standard settings are now reset.

Designing the Layout of Web TemplatesUseYou can change the layout of your Web template - the HTML page with BW-specific contents - as youare familiar from HTML editors.

Arranging Web Items on the Page� You can change the size of the placeholders. You can see what effect resizing a Web item in a

Web application has by looking at the values, which are shown in the HTML view by theparameters Height and Width for the corresponding item.

� You can align the Web items horizontally.

� Choose to left-justify the Web item.

� Choose to center the Web item.

� Choose to right-justify the Web item.

� To regroup the Web items, drag a Web item to the required position with Drag&Drop.

� To place several Web items one next to the other you have to set the width of the Web template toits optimal value.



You have arranged a Web item on your Web template and want to arrange a second onenext to it. If the Web template is wide enough for the second Web item, it is placed to theright of the first one. If it is not wide enough, the second Web item is placed below the firstone since the browser makes a line feed as for standard HTML.

To align the individual Web items in your Web template in the best possible way, use anHTML table.

Arranging Web Items using an HTML TableTo arrange Web items next to and below one another you can use an HTML table. You can apply thisgrid as you need to.

1. Choose or Insert � Table � Insert Table.

� In the Insert Table dialog box enter the Number of Rows and Number of Columns.

� In the Table Tag Attribute and Cell Tag Attribute fields you can make settings that are written tothe corresponding tags in HTML. The table is displayed in the layout view as defined by thesetags.

� You can give the table a title under Title.

� You can show and hide the frame during the layout process by choosing Layout � DisplayFrame.

� To show the HTML tags in the layout view choose Layout � Display HTML Tags.

� You can change the table with Insert � Table �

� Insert Rows

� Insert Columns

� Insert Cells

� Delete Rows

� Delete Columns

� Delete Cells

� Merge Cells

� Split Cells

You can change the size of the complete table but not of individual cells.

2. Drag different Web items to the individual table cells, depending on whether you want to arrangeyour Web item horizontally or vertically.

Enhancing Web Templates with TextsAs well as inserting and arranging Web items, you can also enhance the Web template with texts andformat them.

1. Place the cursor on a position in the Web template and enter a text of your choice.

2. You can format it by selecting the text passage and selecting one of the following options:

� Change Font

� Change Font Size

� Bold Character ( )



� Italic Character ( )

� Underlined Character( )

� Character Settings ( )

� Numbering ( )

� Bullets ( )

� Reduce Indentation ( )

� Enlarge Indentation ( )

� Left-justified ( )

� Centered ( )

� Right-justified ( )

Enhancing Web Templates with ImagesAs well as inserting and arranging Web items and texts, you can attach image, such as companylogos for example, to your Web templates. These images are store in the MIME Repository on the BWserver. The system supports the formats GIF, JPG and BMP.

1. Position the cursor where you want to insert an image in the Web template.

2. Choose Insert � Image and select the image file that you want to insert. Choose OK.

If you want to use an image that is not in the list, for example, one that is stored on your Webserver, mark the checkbox beneath the selection list and enter the URL of the image. Formore information about inserting images in Web templates, see Stylesheet and Icon Store[Seite 104].

Working with the Library for Web ItemsUseIf you integrate a Web item in your Web template from the templates under Standard and you havedefined your settings, you might want to use this Web item again in this form in other Web templateswithout having to define all the settings over again. The BEx Web Application Designer enables you touse your own version of a Web item as the Web template for other items. You store this Web item as atemplate and insert it in a library that you can organize yourself. You can then access your Web itemsin the Web Item window using the Library tabstrip.

PrerequisitesYou have integrated a Web item in your Web template and defined your settings on the Web Itemtabstrip in the Properties window.

Storing Web Items in the Library

You save the properties that you created on the Web Item tab page in the library. TheseWeb items have template characters and can be altered. Data binding is not stored inrelation to this Web item.



1. Choose Save in Library in the lower part of the Web Item tabstrip to store your Web item as atemplate.

2. Select a library in the Add Web Item to Library dialog box.

� To create a new library choose .

a. In the Create New Library dialog box, define whether you want to store your library in yourfavorites or in a role.

b. Select the folder in which you want to store your library.

c. Define a meaningful Description that will appear later on in your library.

d. In the Technical Name field, enter a unique name.

e. Choose Save.

� To select an existing library choose .

a. In the BEx Open dialog box, select the place where you stored the library – History, Roles,Workbooks.

b. Select a library and choose OK.

3. Define a meaningful Description that will appear later in your library as text for your personalmaster Web item.

4. In the Technical Name field, enter a unique name.

5. Choose Save.

Your Web item is now saved in the library.

Using Web Items from the LibraryYou can find the libraries you created containing your personal Web items on the Library tabstrip in theWeb Items window. Your libraries and the Web items assigned to the libraries are displayed here in atree-like structure.

� To place your Web items in Web templates, drag them using Drag&Drop to your Web template inthe same way as you do with standard items.

� To change the settings for your saved Web item, select the relevant Web item and with the rightmouse button choose Change Web Item. The settings for changing the item are offered in theChange Web Item dialog box.

� To delete a Web item from the library, select the Web item and with the right mouse button chooseDelete Web item.

Managing LibrariesIf you do not yet have any libraries, proceed as follows: Click on Context Menu and choose one of theoptions.

� Open Library to add a library.

� Create New Library to create a new library (on the database).

To manage your existing libraries, select the appropriate library with the right mouse button andchoose one of the following options:

� Open Library to add a library to your collection of libraries in the Web Item window.

� Close Library to remove a library from your collection of libraries in the Web Item window.

� Create New Library to create a new library (on the database).

� Delete Library to delete a library (from the database).

� Change Description to change the description of the library.

� Documents to create documents for your library, or to create or edit existing documents. You canfind additional information under Documents [Extern] and Creating Documents [Extern] .



� Publish Library in Role to add your library to a role.

Overwriting LibrariesYou can overwrite libraries that you have created and saved.

1. In the Web Items window of the Web Application Designer, choose the Library tab page.

2. Using the context menu, choose Create New Library. You reach the Create New Library dialogbox.

3. In you favorites or roles, select the library that you want to overwrite and choose Save.

You can overwrite those item libraries that contain Web items that are not currently in usein Web templates or that you are not open in your Web Application Designer.

4. The Overwrite Object dialog box appears.

5. Choose Yes.

Setting Up the BEx Web Application DesignerUseThe Web Application Designer has a set appearance the first time you start it. See BEx WebApplication Designer [Seite 95]. As an MDI application, however, you can adjust your workingenvironment to your requirements. The object on which you are working, namely the Web template, ishandled differently from the tools and help windows with which you are working.

Showing and Hiding Screen AreasYou can hide the Web Items and Properties windows by clicking on the x in the title bar.

To show the window again choose View � Web Items or View � Settings.

You close the template by closing Template window.

To show and hide the tool bar or status bar, choose View � Toolbar or View � Status bar.

Moving Screen AreasYou can move the toolbar and the Web Items and Settings windows anywhere. Depending on whereyou move the object to, it is anchored or it appears freely as a toolbox.

Template WindowAn individual template window can be:

� Open

� Closed

You can close a template window but not hide it.

� Minimized

� Maximized

You can open and manage different windows in parallel with Web templates. You can also arrange thewindows differently.



� To arrange the different windows to overlap choose Window � Cascading.

� To arrange the different windows next to each other choose Window � Horizontal.

� To arrange the different windows below each other choose Window � Vertical.

Web ItemsDefinitionWeb items are objects that obtain data from data providers [Seite 270] and make the data available asHTML. Web items have attributes such as header, width, height, and create navigation links. You useparameters or specific commands to change these attributes.

If the data, the navigational status, or the attributes change, the HTML for the Web item isregenerated. A Web item must always be assigned to a data provider.

StructureThe following Web items are used in Web applications:

� Table [Seite 117]

� Chart [Seite 120]

� Dropdown Box [Seite 183]

� Radio Button Group [Seite 185]

� Checkbox [Seite 188]

� Generic Navigation Block [Seite 189]

� Hierarchical Context Menu [Seite 191]

� Filter [Seite 193]

� Label [Seite 195]

� Text Element [Seite 196]

� List of Exceptions [Seite 198]

� List of Conditions [Seite 198]

� Alert Monitor [Seite 199]

� Role Menu [Seite 201]

� Ticker [Seite 203]

� Map [Seite 204]

� Single Document [Seite 225]

� List of Documents [Seite 226]

� Ad-hoc Query Designer [Seite 229]

� ABC Classification [Seite 234]

� What If Prediction [Seite 233]

IntegrationIn the BEx Web Application Designer or the BEx Web Application wizard, on the Standard tab, youcan use the Web items listed above as Master Web Items [Extern] You choose a master Web item



from the list, assign a data provider to the Web item and edit the attributes. You have now createdyour own Web item that your can add to your Web template or save in the library to be used again.

General attributes

UseGeneral attributes are attributes that are valid for all Web items in Web applications.

FeaturesThe following general attributes are available:

Attributes Description

Logical name of a Web item (ITEM or NAME) As well as the Web item key (ITEMID) that isassigned when the Web item is created in theWeb Application Designer, you also have toassign a logical name when using the Webitem in Web application. This enables you touse the same Web item several times in a Webapplication. If commands are sent to this Webitem, you always have to specify the name ofthe Web item as the parameter ITEM.

You cannot change this attributewith a command URL.

Web item key (ITEM_ID) (option 1) You create a Web item for a Web applicationbased on a Web item setting that you havemade in the Web Application Designer.


Class name for the Web item class(ITEM_CLASS) (option 2)

Name of the ABAP object class that generatesthe output. This corresponds to the use of non-reusable Web items (standard Web items) inthe Web Application Designer. Web items arecreated with the default values for the attribute.

The class name for the table is, for example,CL_RSR_WWW_ITEM_GRID

Logical name of the Data Provider for theWeb item (DATA_PROVIDER)

You have to assign every Web item to (exactly)one data source. The Web item gets the dataand metadata from this Data source that isneeded to generate the output as well ascommands.

Height (HEIGHT) You can only specify the height in pixels.

This attribute is not used in tables.

The parameters ITEMID and WBID (ITEM_WBID) used in BW 2.x are still supported. Werecommend, however, that you no longer use these.



In the BEx Web Application Designer, in the Properties area, you can set the following attributes in theWeb Item tabpage, under General:


Caption (CAPTION) You can enter a caption. If you do not enter acaption, then an appropriate value issuggested.

Generate caption (GENERATE_CAPTION)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

By activating this attribute, an additional rowcontaining the Web item is generated in thetable. The text you have entered under Captionis displayed in this table.

The SAPBEXTableCaption style isused for the caption.

Width in pixels (WIDTH) You can only specify the width in pixels. Youcan use the suggested width or determine anew width using Change Attribute...

Note that the Web browserautomatically increases the widthsof the table if the one you havechosen is too small.

Border type(BORDER_STYLE)'BORDER' = With border

‚NO_BORDER’ = Without border

‚FORM’ = Form

Here, you can choose the following displaytypes for the Web item:

� With border

Set as default value for table, genericnavigation block, Alert Monitor, filter,text elements, menu, list of conditions,and list of exceptions.

The border is only displayed ifGENERATE_CAPTION=X.

� Without border

Set as default value for maps, charts,and individual documents.

� For form

The content of the Web item isnormally displayed with a bluebackground. Set as default value fordocument list, hierarchical contextmenu, label, dropdown box, radiobutton group, and checkboxes.

The standard value settings represent therecommended display type for the Web item.



Closed (CLOSED)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

You can close the Web item (CLOSED=X): TheWeb item is not displayed. Only the captionremains (if there is one) and the open/closesymbol for this Web item. By clicking on theopen/close symbol, you can make the Webitem visible or invisible.

To be able to see the caption, youhave to activate the attributesGenerate Caption and Objects withNavigation Links.

Hide object (HIDDEN)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

You can hide the Web item (HIDDEN=X):Although the Web item is embedded in theWeb template, it is not visible. The Web itemand the caption with the open/close symbol arenot shown.

Objects with navigation links(GENERATE_LINKS)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

This attribute creates the open/close symbol,with which you can open or close the Webitem. Behind this symbol is a link that calls upthe Web application with the correspondingparameters.

If you do not want the user of theWeb application to be able tonavigate within it or if you want theuser to be able to print the display,then deactivate this function.

Web item controls different data providers(TARGET_DATA_PROVIDER_I) (optional)For many Web items, this attribute appearsunder the respective special attributes. TheseWeb items obtain their data from a view.

If a Web item is to control several dataproviders, for example, a navigation block, itcan be expressed by this parameter. If it is notspecified, the Web item always controls its owndata provider. The values specified under thisparameter are the logical names of the dataproviders, for example, references using wildcards. You do not have to specify the dataprovider belonging to the Web item. If it ismissing, the Web item does not control its owndata provider.

The Web item output generation is alwaysbased on the item’s own data provider anddoes not include the others. The commandsare forwarded to the target data provider.

Resetting and Reinitializing Web ItemsUseYou use this command to reinitialize an existing Web item. The Web item is recreated according to theparameters and takes the data provider [Seite 270] and the logical name of its predecessor. This



allows you, for example, to create a graphic easily from a table without having to create both objects inthe Web template.

You can use this command for creating almost every kind of Web item. However, the MapWeb item is an exception. It cannot be created consistently using this command.

FunctionsCMD RESET_ITEM

Parameter Description

All parameters from the previous item Technical name of the InfoCube

Converting the item “Item1” to a table without alternate rows:<SAP_BW_URL ITEM='Item1' CMD='RESET_ITEM'ITEM_CLASS='CL_RSR_WWW_ITEM_GRID' ALT_STYLES=''>

Converting the item “Item1” to a pre-defined chart item:<SAP_BW_URL ITEM='Item1' CMD='RESET_ITEM' ITEM_ID='myChart'>

When combined with a select box (an HTML form), you can display several charts in oneplace by leafing through the select box.

TablesDefinitionA Web item that obtains data from a query view to create a table for a Web application. There arenavigation links that go along with the table.

UseThe Web item Table displays the value of a query view in the Web application in the form of atable. The same list geometry that is used in the BEx Analyzer is supported. Characteristics andstructures can be displayed in both the rows and the columns.

StructureAs well as its general attributes [Seite 114], the Web item Table has the following attributes:


Alternating styles for table rows(ALT_STYLES)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

In the rows, the formats SAPBEXstdData andSAPBEXstdDataOdd are used alternately todisplay numerical values. These formats areadjusted in the CSS file that is assigned to thetemplate.

Totals cells are removed from thisdisplay.



Only hierarchy navigation(ONLY_HIERARCHY_NAVIGATION)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Only allow hierarchy navigationThe context menu is hidden in this mode, andyou can only expand and collapse from the list.

Suppress repeated texts(SUPPRESS_REPETITION_TEXTS)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Suppressing repeated textsIf you set this attribute toe ‘ ‘, the cells in thetable are not merged and the texts and keysare repeated.

If you do not specify a value for this attribute,the texts are suppressed.

Number of data rows displayed at one time(BLOCK_SIZE)

Specifying this parameter allows you todetermined the number of data rows that aredisplayed after which an area for scrolling isinserted.

If the value is set to 0, thecomplete table is displayed,regardless of the number of datarows.

The parameter is set to 100 bydefault.

Number of data columns displayed at onetime (BLOCK_SIZE_COLUMNS)

Specifying this parameter allows you todetermined the number of data columns thatare displayed after which an area for scrollingis inserted.

If the value is set to 0, thecomplete table is displayed,regardless of the number of datacolumns.

The parameter is set to 0 bydefault.

Table: Scrolling area top(SHOW_PAGING_AREA_TOP)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Display the scrolling area at the start of thetableThe parameter is set to ‘ ’ by default.

Table: Scrolling area bottom(SHOW_PAGING_AREA_BOTTOM)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Display the scrolling area at the end of thetableThe parameter is set to ‘X’ by default.

Display column headers(SHOW_COLUMN_HEADER)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Display the labels above the dataThe parameter is set to ‘X’ by default.

Display column headersSHOW_ROW_HEADER)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Display the labels to the left of the dataThe parameter is set to ‘X’ by default.

Display data cells (SHOW_DATA_CELLS)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

The data cells are shown by default. That is,the parameter is set to ‘X’ by default.



Affected DataProvider(TARGET_DATA_PROVIDER)

List of data providers to which all tablecommands are sent.

Display data from value row(DATA_ROW_FROM)

Data row after which data is displayedThe parameter is set to 1 by default.

Display data to value row (0=to the end)(DATA_ROW_TO)

Data row to which data is displayedThe parameter is set to 0 by default. If thevalue is 0, the system tries to display all of therows. If there are too many, a scrolling area isinserted. If the value is not 0, data is displayedup to the specified row and there is no scrollingarea.

Display data from value column(DATA_COLUMN_FROM)

Data column after which the data isdisplayedThe parameter is set to 1 by default.

Display data to value column (0=to the end)(DATA_COLUMN_TO)

Data column to which data is displayedThe parameter is set to 0 by default. If thevalue is 0, the system tries to display all of thecolumns. If there are too many, a scrolling areais inserted. If the value is not 0, data isdisplayed up to the specified column and thereis no scrolling area.

Attributes that cannot be set in the Web Application Designer:

MODIFY_CLASS ABAP class that changes the table contentsBy using the Web design API for tables, youcan adjust the contents of the table cellsindividually.

See also:

Web Design API for Tables [Seite 314]

Display the table with a maximum of 5 visible data columns and 10 visible datarows. Start at row 30 and show a scrolling area above and below the values<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’>



<param name=’CMD’ value=’GET_ITEM’><param name='ITEM' value='Table'><param name='ITEM_CLASS' value='CL_RSR_WWW_ITEM_GRID'><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 ><param name='DATA_ROW_FROM' value='30'><param name='SHOW_PAGING_AREA_TOP' value='X'><param name='SHOW_PAGING_AREA_BOTTOM' value='X'><param name='BLOCK_SIZE' value='10'><param name='BLOCK_SIZE_COLUMNS' value='5'>

ITEM :Table

</object>

Display only the 3 data rows without headers<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’GET_ITEM’><param name='ITEM' value='Table'><param name='ITEM_ID' value='MYTABLE'><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 ><param name='DATA_ROW_FROM' value='3'><param name='DATA_ROW_TO' value='3'><param name='SHOW_COLUMN_HEADER' value=' '>

ITEM :Table

</object>

ChartsDefinitionA Web item that obtains data from a query view to create a graphic for a Web application.

UseUsing the Chart Web item, you can display data graphically in your Web application.

StructureAs well as its General Attributes [Seite 114], the Chart Web item has the following attributes:


Edit Graphic See Editing Charts [Seite 122].

Suppress Totals(SUPPRESS_SUMS)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

The totals rows/columns of the source dataprovider are not displayed in the chart. Thismeans that you do not have to change the dataprovider to suppress totals which may affectcharts adversely.



Swap Display Axes(SWITCHMATRIX)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

With this attribute you can swap the chart axesin the display, without changing thenavigational state of the query view itself.

You get the same effect if youswap the two free characteristicswith one another in the initial queryview.

Hide Expanded Hierarchy Nodes(SUPPRESS_OPENHIERARCHIENODES)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

You can remove open nodes when you creategraphics in active presentation hierarchies.This ensures that the total of the valuesdisplayed is the overall result.

Affected Data Providers(TARGET_DATA_PROVIDER)

List of data providers to which all commands ofthe chart are sent.

Automatic display of units and currencies(AUTOMATIC_LABELS)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

If the units and currencies in the query are thesame as other settings, and you select theattribute, just these units, currencies, andsettings are displayed automatically on thechart.

However, you can set the display of units andcurrencies yourself. See Editing Charts [Seite122] and Adding and Removing Axis Titles andUnits [Seite 172].

Diagram title (language-dependent)(TITLE)

Entry of language-dependent text for diagramtitle. See Language-Dependent Texts [Seite268].

Section Axis (X): Title (Language-Dependent)(TITLE_CATAGORIES)

Language-dependent text for section axis (X).See Language-Dependent Texts [Seite 268].

Size Axis (Y): Title (Language-Dependent)(TITLE_VALUES)

Language-dependent text for size axis (Y). SeeLanguage-Dependent Texts [Seite 268].

Secondary Section Axis (X): Title(Language-Dependent)(TITLE_SEC_CATOGORIES)

Language-dependent text for secondarysection axis (X). See Language-DependentTexts [Seite 268].

Secondary Size Axis (Y): Title (Language-Dependent)(TITLE_SEC_VALUES)

Language-dependent text for secondary sizeaxis (Y). See Language-Dependent Texts[Seite 268].

Note the following for the Heading attribute under General (generic attribute):

Title You can enter a header for the chart. Thisheader is not a part of the chart.

Under Edit graphic there is also theoption of specifying a header,though this is then a part of thechart.

The header is only displayed if theattribute Generate header isactivated at the same time.



Editing ChartsUseCharts display rows of numbers visually and make it easier for users to interpret business data.

Drawing AreaTitle of Chart Background

Title of Axis

Grid Lines

MoscowLondonBerlin

Washington

Paris

Legend

Legend Symbol

Sales Revenue Development for Branches

Sale

s

Mio USD

Unit

January2000

February2000

March2000

April2000

May2000

June2000

Data Rows

Value Axis (Y)

Category Axis (X)

Data Point Legend Text

PrerequisitesYou can edit a chart in the Web Application Designer or in the Web Application Wizard.

Editing in the Web Application DesignerYou created a new Web item of the type Chart or selected an existing Web item of the type Chart. Inthe Properties window on the Web Items tabstrip in the Special category, you called up Edit Graphicusing the pushbutton with the three dots (see also Creating Web Applications with the BEx WebApplication Designer [Seite 98]).

Editing in the Web Application WizardYou created a new Web item of the type Chart and then in the step Editing Attributes in the Specialcategory, you called up Edit Graphic using the pushbutton with the three dots.

Process1. Before you begin publishing a chart you should define which chart type [Seite 129] you want to

display. You can find out how the data provider should be built based on the class of the charttype.

2. Select an existing query or formulate a new query with which the suitable view on the data can becreated. This is the suitable data provider.

3. Start the publishing process and create a new Web item of type Chart.

4. It is normally advisable to configure the properties of the Chart [Seite 120] Web item as follows:

� Expanded hierarchy nodes should be hidden.



� Totals should be suppressed.

� If you want to swap the columns and rows of the data provider in the chart, you should assignthe chart the property Axes for display. The columns and rows are then swappedautomatically when the chart is generated. You need not change the view on which the chartis based.

5. When you edit the chart, the Web Application Designer or Web Application Wizard first shows thedefault setting, that is, a bar chart.

� First configure the preview window so that the number of data series and data pointsdisplayed corresponds to your data provider (see Configuring the Preview Window [Seite123]).

� Assign the chart the required chart type and format the chart as you like.

� You can select all the functions of a chart in the context menu with the right mouse key.Different functions are available in the context menu depending on the element you marked inthe chart.

6. Check your formatting by publishing the chart immediately after making a change. In this way youcan see if your chart is correctly formatted in the Web version.

Configuring Preview WindowsUseWhen you edit a chart you can see the current format of the chart in a preview window. The previewwindow shows five data series with six data points each, irrespective of how the data provider is setup.

You can adjust the size of the preview window. To do this, drag the right-hand corner of the bottomline down and to the right. At the same time, the system calculates the size and width of the graphic inpixels. The minimum size is 10x10 pixels.

Change the preview window settings so that the number of data series and data points corresponds tothe data provider. For chart types of class 1, the uppermost data series in the legend corresponds tothe first table row, the next data series corresponds to the second table row, and so on.

The preview does not correspond to the actual results after publishing. The data seriesand data points are only sample data used to show you what the effects of formatting are.You see the actual data only after it has been published.

Procedure1. In the window in which you are editing the chart, enter the number of data series contained in the

data provider in the Number of data series field.

2. In the Number of Data Points field, enter the number of data points in a data series.

3. Choose Apply.

The chart in the preview window is changed according to your entries.

See also: Data Series and Data Points [Seite 154]



Undoing ChangesUseWhen you edit a chart, all the changes you make to the chart are recorded. If you are not satisfied withthe results of the changes, you can undo the changes step by step.

You can reset the chart to the standard setting (bar diagram). All the changes you made to the chartare lost.

ProcedureUndoing Changes1. Click with the right mouse key on any area of the chart.

2. To undo the last command, choose Undo in the context menu.

The name of the menu options shows you which command is being undone. For example,if you last changed the chart type, the menu option is Undo Chart Type. If there is nocommand that can be undone, the menu option is Undo Not available.

Resetting the Chart to the Standard Setting

In this step all the changes you made to the chart are lost.

Select the Reset function in the window in which you are editing the chart.

Formatting the Chart BackgroundUseYou can change the background of the entire chart. You can choose another filling and change theborder as you like.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the outermost area of the chart.

2. In the context menu choose Format Chart.

The Format Chart Area dialog box appears.

3. Select the formatting for the filling and border. See Changing the Filling and Borders of Surfaces[Seite 125].

4. Choose OK.

See also:Formatting Chart Plot Areas [Seite 125]



Formatting Chart Plot AreasUseYou can format the plot area of the chart as you like. You can change the filling and borders of thesurface between the X and Y axes. You can also format the border surrounding the entire plot area,including the axes and labels.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the plot area, for example on a free area within the X and Y

axes.

2. In the context menu choose Format Plot Area.

3. The Format Plot dialog box appears.

4. Make the changes described below and choose OK.

Changing the Filling and Borders of the Area between the X and Y Axes

In a pie or ring diagram, this area is a rectangle enclosing the circle.

1. Choose tabstrip Pattern.

2. Select the formatting for the filling and border. See. Changing the Filling and Borders of Surfaces[Seite 125].

Changing the Border of the Entire Plot Area1. Choose tabstrip Line.

2. If you want to copy the default formatting, choose Automatic.

3. If you want to set up your own formatting, choose Custom. Select the required type and color forthe lines.

See also:

� Changing Quadrants [Seite 167]

� Formatting the Chart Background [Seite 124]

Changing the Filling and Border of SurfacesUseYou can change the filling and border of the surface of elements having the form of a surface. If youselect the corresponding element and call the dialog box for formatting the element, tabstrip Patternwill offer you several formatting options.



PrerequisitesThe element to be formatted is itself a surface (for example the plot area or the columns in a two-dimensional column chart) or it consists of surfaces (for example the columns in a three-dimensionalcolumn chart).

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the element you want to format.

2. In the context menu, select the function for formatting the element, such as Format Plot Area forthe plot area.

A dialog box appears.



Changing the FillingYou can change the filling with the fields in the Fill area.

AutomaticIf you want to copy the default formatting, choose Automatic.

Color1. To change the color of the filling, select Color.

2. Select the required color or None if the surface should not be colored.

Pattern1. If you want to give the surface a pattern, select Pattern.

2. Select one of the patterns and the colors for the foreground and background of the pattern.

Texture1. If the background of the surface is to be textured, select Texture.

2. Choose the texture you want to use.

Gradient1. If you want to fill the surface with a gradient, choose Gradient.

2. Select the direction for the gradient, for example starting at the lower left corner and going updiagonally.

3. Also select the colors between which the gradient should be created.

Image1. If you want to store an image in bmp or jpeg format as background, select Image.

2. Choose a color for the background of the image.

3. Under Image Style, define how the image should be inserted. For example you can define that theimage should keep its original size or be scaled proportionally to the size of the surface.

4. With Browse Image now select the image file.

Transparent1. To display the entire surface transparently, select Transparent.

You can also see any surfaces lying underneath. This option is normally marked for a normaldistribution so that the normal distribution does not hide the data series.

2. With Pattern you can define the pattern to be used to display the surface.



Changing BordersYou can change the borders of a surface with the fields in the Border area.

� If you want to copy the default formatting, choose Automatic.

� If you want to set up your own formatting, choose Custom. Under Style select the required type ofline or None if you do not want a border. Also select the color and width of the border.

Changing the Size of Chart ElementsUseYou can change the size of the entire chart by specifying the width and height in pixels or by pullingthe chart to the desired size with the mouse.

You can also change the size of the plot area within the chart and the size of the legend.

ProcedureDefining the Width and Height of the Entire Chart1. Enter the desired values in fields Width and Height of the window in which you are editing the

chart. The entries should be in pixels.

2. Choose Apply.

The size of the entire chart is changed according to your specifications.

Changing the Size of the Entire Chart with the Mouse1. Point to the border of the preview window with the mouse.

The cursor becomes a double arrow.

2. Click on the border and pull the preview window to the required size.

3. The size of the entire chart is changed when you let go of the mouse key.

Changing the Size of the Plot Area or the Legend with the Mouse1. Click on the element whose size you want to change (plot area or legend).

The element is enclosed in a move handle.

2. Point to one of the move handles with the mouse.


If the cursor does not become a double arrow, you might not have selected the rightelement, for example the chart area instead of the plot area. In this case click again on theelement whose size you want to change.

3. Click on the move handle and keep the mouse key pressed.

The cursor becomes a cross.

4. Pull the element to the desired size.

5. The size of the element is changed when you let go of the mouse key.



Avoid stretching the plot area over the whole area of the chart. The outermost border ofthe plot area disappears from the visible area in this case and cannot be clicked on again.You cannot change the size of the plot area. If you made the plot area too large byaccident, you can undo it with the menu option Undo in the context menu. You can resetthe plot area to its original size with Reset, but you will lose all the changes you made tothe chart.

Changing the Position of Chart ElementsUseYou can change the position of the following elements directly in the chart:

� Plot area

� Data label

� Axis title

� Axis unit

� Value range title

� Normal distribution title

You can change the position of the chart title if you permitted this when you added the title. SeeAdding and Removing Chart Titles [Seite 171]. You can change the position of the legend directly inthe chart if you permitted this when you added the legend. See Adding and Removing Legends [Seite177].

ProcedureChanging the Position of a Data Label1. Click on the data label whose position is to be changed.

2. Click again on the data label, keeping the mouse key pressed.

3. Pull the data label to the required position.

4. Let go of the mouse key.

Changing the Position of Other Elements1. Click on the element whose position is to be changed. Keep the mouse key pressed.

2. Pull the element to the new position.

3. Let go of the mouse key.

You can also change the position of the legends by clicking on the outermost border of thelegend with the right mouse key and choosing Format Legend in the context menu. Youcan then select the desired position on the Legend tabstrip.



Removing Chart ElementsUseYou can remove the following elements directly in the chart:

� Chart title

� Axis title

� Axis unit

� Axis including its title and corresponding unit

� Complete value range

� Gridlines

� Complete legend

� Data label for a data series

� Normal distribution

Procedure1. Click on the element you want to remove.

2. Press <Del>.

You can also remove legends, value ranges and normal distributions by clicking on theelement with the right mouse key and choosing Delete in the context menu.

Chart TypesDefinitionThe chart type defines how your data will be edited graphically.

The chart types for stock, milestone and multicolorbars are not supported at the moment.

The chart types can be divided into four classes when they are edited. With chart types of the sameclass, the rows and columns of the underlying table (that is of the data provider) are editedimmediately.

The class to which each chart type belongs is given below. Before you begin publishing a chart, youshould define which chart type you want to display. You can find out how the data provider should bebuilt based on the class of the chart type. You can then select an existing query or formulate a newquery with which the suitable view on the data can be created. This is the suitable data provider.



Column ChartsComparisons between individual elements are shown in a column. Categories are arrangedhorizontally and values are arranged vertically.

To show changes within a certain time interval, you can use either column charts or XY scatter charts.

The relationship between indivdidual elements and the entire chart is shown in stacked columns.

Column charts are chart types of class 1 [Seite 132].

Bar ChartsComparisons between individual elements are shown in a bar chart. Categories are arranged verticallyand values are arranged horizontally. The emphasis is on the comparison of values and not ondisplaying a change during a period of time.

The relationship between indivdidual elements and the entire chart is shown in stacked bars.

Bar charts are chart types of class 1 [Seite 132].

Line ChartsData trends are shown in a line chart. The data is entered at regular intervals. Categories such asmonths are normally entered on the X axis and values such as income in dollars on the Y axis.

Line charts are chart types of class 1 [Seite 132].

Profile ChartsIn a profile chart the lines are arranged vertically and not horizontally as in a line chart. Otherwise theprofile chart corresponds to the line chart.

Profile charts are chart types of class 1 [Seite 132].

Pie ChartsIn a pie chart, the proportional part of elements of a data series are displayed in a whole. This charttype has only a single data series and is used primarily to highlight a particularly important element.

You can use the subtypes to define if the pie segments should be displayed next to each other orseparately.

Pie charts are chart types of class 1 [Seite 132].

XY Scatter ChartsIn an XY scatter chart, either the relationship between numeric values is displayed in several dataseries or two groups of numbers are entered as a row of XY coordinates. This chart type displaysirregular intervals (clusters) and is normally used for scientific data.

Both axes of an XY scatter chart are value axes. In other chart types, the X axis is used to showcategories.

XY scatter charts are chart types of class 2 [Seite 140].

Area ChartsThe area between the axes and the data series are filled in an area chart. Otherwise the area chartcorresponds to the line chart.

An area chart also represents the sum of the entered values and can thus illustrate the relationship ofparts to the entire amount.

Area charts are chart types of class 1 [Seite 132].

DoughnutsAs in a pie chart, the relationship between parts of a whole are displayed in a doughnut. In contrast tothe pie chart, the doughnut can represent more than one data series, where each ring corresponds toa data series.



You can use the subtypes to define if the rings should be displayed next to each other or separately.

Doughnuts are chart types of class 1 [Seite 132].

Radar ChartsIn a radar chart, each category has its own value axis emanating from the middle. The values of a dataseries are linked with lines.

Radar charts can be used to compare data series: the data series with the highest values occupies themost space.

Radar charts are chart types of class 1 [Seite 132].

PortfoliosA portfolio displays the position of an object (enterprise, product, etc.) in a four-field matrix. Theposition of the object is defined with two dimensions.

Portfolios are used mainly in enterprise and product comparisons. For example, a portfolio can besorted like the products of an enterprise by their dimensions economics and strategic significance.

Portfolios are chart types of class 3 [Seite 141].

Surface ChartsData sets are entered in the form of a surface in a surface chart. A surface chart differs from a linechart in that the points of a data series are displayed one after the other for each category.

As in a topographical map, the colors and patterns represent areas with the same value range.

Surface charts are chart types of class 1 [Seite 132].

Cylinders, Cones and PyramidsCones, cylinders and pyramids only differ from bar and line charts in their form. Each of these charttypes has subtypes that display the values horizontally or vertically.

Cones, cylinders and pyramids are chart types of class 1 [Seite 132].

Step ChartsIn a step chart, values are entered in the form of steps and not points on a curve. Each valuecorresponds to a horizontal line. The vertical lines link the individual values. For example, the step-by-step development of fix costs can be represented with a step chart.

The X axis is defined as the value axis in step charts. In other chart types, the X axis is used to showcategories.

Step charts are chart types of class 2 [Seite 140].

HistogramsThe frequency of a characteristic is displayed in a histogram, for example the distribution of theincome within an enterprise. The frequency is divided into classes, where each class corresponds to acolumn in the histogram.

Categories and value ranges are entered on the X axis and the corresponding values on the Y axis ina histogram. The normal distribution is also shown in the histogram depending on the subtype.

Histograms are chart types of class 2 [Seite 140].

TachometersIn a tachometer, one or more key figures are displayed in the form of a pointer. The tachometer isdivided into several value ranges and the user immediately sees the value range in which the pointeris currently positioned.

Tachometers are chart types of class 1 [Seite 132].



QuadrantsIn a quadrant, two objects are positioned in a four-field matrix. One object is displayed as a cross, thesecond object is displayed as a point and positioned relative to the cross.

Quadrants are chart types of class 3 [Seite 141].

Editing Chart Types of Class 1Chart TypesClass 1 includes the following chart types:

� Bar and column charts

� Area charts

� Line charts

� Cylinders, cones and pyramids

� Pie charts and doughnuts

� Radar charts

� Surface charts

� Profile charts

� Tachometers

Structure of the Data Provider for a Pie ChartIn a pie chart, the underlying table has only one row. The values in the row result from the piesegments of the chart.

If the table contains more than one row, the additional rows are ignored when the table isconverted into a chart.

Structure of the Data Provider for a TachometerIn a tachometer, the underlying table has only one data column. Each value in the data column isdisplayed in the chart as a pointer. The tachometer will be readable if the data column does notcontain too many values.

If the table contains more than one data column, the additional columns are ignored whenthe table is converted into a chart.

Structure of the Data Provider for the Other Chart TypesYou build the underlying table of the other chart types of class 1 as follows:

� The data columns correspond to the categories.

� The rows contain the values for each category. Each row is converted into a data series in thechart.

Example for Bar and Column ChartsThe following graphic shows a data provider that is used as the basis for the chart types describedbelow.



Values(Dataseries)

Category

Sales Organization No. Order Items

Frankfurt 118

Berlin 87

Birmingham 158

Paris 191

New York 181

San Francisco 55

Toronto 191

Bar Chart

Frankfurt

Berlin

Birmingham

Paris

New York

San Francisco

Toronto

No. Order Items

0 50 100

150

200

Column Chart

Frankfu

rt

Berlin

Birming

ham

Paris

New York

San Fran

cisco

Toronto

No. Order Items



3D Column Chart

Frankfu

rt

Berlin

Birming

ham

Paris

New York

San Fran

cisco

Toronto

No. Order Items

Example for Area ChartThe following graphic shows a data provider that is used as the basis for an area chart.

Values(Dataseries)

Category

Organization Unit No. Employees

Board D 510

Board UK 274

Board US 423

Board CAN 13

Below you see an area chart that is based on the data provider.



No. Employees

Board D Board UK Board US Board CAN

Example of a Pie ChartThe following graphic shows a data provider that is used as the basis for a pie chart.

Values(Dataseries)

Category

Organization UnitPercentage Distributionof Employees

Board D 41.8 %

Board UK 22.5 %

Board US 34.7 %

Board CAN 1.1 %

Below you see a pie chart that is based on the data provider.

1.1 %

Percentage Distribution of Employees

Board D

Board UKBoard US

Board CAN

41.8 %

22.5 %

34.7 %



Example of a Line and Profile ChartThe following graphic shows a data provider that is used as the basis for a line and profile chart.

Values(Dataseries)

Category

CalYear/Month No. Order Items

01.2001 69

02.2001 65

03.2001 81

04.2001 67

05.2001 83

06.2001 80

07.2001 80

08.2001 22

09.2001 102

10.2001 114

11.2001 120

12.2001 98

Line Chart

20

30

40

50

60

80

70

No. Order Items

01.20

01

02.20

01

03.20

01

04.20

01

05.20

01

06.20

01

07.20

01

08.20

01

09.20

01

10.20

01

11.20

01

12.20

01

90

100

110

120



Profile Chart

01.2001

02.200103.2001

04.2001

05.2001

07.200106.2001

No. Order Items

20 40 60 80 100

120

08.2001

09.2001

10.2001

11.2001

12.2001

Example of a Radar ChartThe following graphic shows a data provider that is used as the basis for a radar chart.

CalYear/Month\Sales Organization Frankfurt Munich

JAN 2001 $ 353,505.57 $ 2,043,054.25

FEB 2001 $ 353,505.57 $ 681,884.52

MAR 2001 $ 1,445,213.95 $ 595,241.00APR 2001 $ 74,513.43 $ 595,241.00

MAY 2001 $ 590,042.39 $ 577,912.29

JUN 2001 $272,927.09 $ 713,942.62

JUL 2001 $ 368,234.97 $ 1,262,396.12

AUG 2001 $ 242,601.86 $ 238,269.69

SEP 2001 $ 1,292,721.35 $ 1,262,396.12

OCT 2001 $ 454,661.88 $ 1,054,451.67

NOV 2001 $ 230,904.99 $ 1,232,937.32

DEC 2001 $ 76,246.30 $ 1,143,477.88

Category

Values(Dataseries)

Below you see a radar chart that is based on the data provider.



Frankfurt Munich

JAN 2001

FEB 2001

MAR 2001

APR 2001

MAY 2001

JUN 2001

JUL 2001

AUG 2001

SEP 2001

OCT 2001

NOV 2001

DEC 2001

Example for SurfacesThe following graphic shows a data provider that is used as the basis for a surface.

Category

Values(Dataseries)

CalYear/Month\Ordering Party

BeckerAG

BooktreeInc.

BushDisribution

CaloradoInc.

01.2001 210 ST 520 ST 640 ST 510 ST

02.2001 210 ST 1020 ST 640 ST

03.2001 610 ST 220 ST 1240 ST 1010 ST

04.2001 610 ST 620 ST 1040 ST 1010 ST

05.2001 1120 ST 620 ST 830 ST 1010 ST

06.2001 1230 ST 520 ST 1130 ST 510 ST

07.2001 1230 ST 520 ST 730 ST 510 ST

09.2001 1520 ST 20 ST 1130 ST 510 ST

10.2001 1520 ST 20 ST 830 ST 510 ST

11.2001 1520 ST 20 ST 1730 ST 510 ST

12.2001 1020 ST 20 ST 1350 ST 510 ST

Below you see a surface chart that is based on the data provider.



01.20

01

02.20

01

03.20

01

04.20

01

05.20

01

06.20

01

07.20

01

09.20

01

10.20

01

11.20

01

12.20

01Becker AG

200 ST400 ST600 ST800 ST

1000 ST1200 ST1400 ST1600 ST1800 ST

Booktree Inc.

Bush Distribution

Calorado Inc.

Example of a TachometerThe following graphic shows a data provider with one data column that only contains one value. Thisvalue results in the pointer.

Pointer

Sales Organization Fulfillment Rate %

New York 95%

Below you see a tachometer that is based on the data provider.

Fulfillment Rate %



Editing Chart Types of Class 2Chart TypesClass 2 includes the XY scatter, step and histogram chart types.

Structure of the Data ProviderYou build the underlying table of a chart type of class 2 as follows:

� The first data column contains the values to be entered on the X axis.

� The remaining data columns are assigned the Y values. These data columns are converted intodata series. The number of data series in the chart is thus computed from the total number of datacolumns minus 1.

The X value of a data point is always defined by the first data column. The Y value of a data point isdefined in one of the remaining data columns, depending on the data series to which the data pointbelongs.

Example for XY Scatter ChartThe following graphic shows a data provider that is used as the basis for an XY scatter chart.

X values

DUNS US 1987 Sic Cod Penetration % Potential Sales Sales

ODB87SIC1 9.75 % $ 62,264,964.20 $ 68,995,325.63

A 7.23 % $ 1,174,812.94 $ 1,266,360.63

B 6.82 % $ 47,301.42 $ 50,762.50

C 8.49 % $ 5,342,923.87 $ 5,838,424.38

D 8.14 % $ 6,462,629.13 $ 7,035,273.13

E 8.53 % $ 2,645,798.36 $ 2,892,398.13

F 8.22 % $ 4,597,710.86 $ 5,009,276.25

G 9.84 % $ 15,111,527.82 $ 16,760,058.13

H 8.65 % $ 2,842,611.88 $ 3,111,659.38

I 12.22 % $ 23,243,258.36 $ 26,478,784.38

J 10.39 % $ 494,921.35 $ 552.328,75

Y values

Below you see an XY scatter chart that is based on the data provider.



Penetration [%]

Pote

ntia

l sal

es [$

]Pot. sales Sales

Editing Chart Types of Class 3Chart TypesThe portfolio and quadrant chart types have class 3.

Structure of the Data Provider for a PortfolioYou build the underlying table for a portfolio as follows:


� The second data column contains the values to be entered on the Y axis.

� The third data column is relevant for the bubble size.

� You can add further pairs of data columns to the table. The first data column of a pair alwayscontains the Y values and the second data column the bubble size.

The X value of a data point is always defined from the first data column. The Y value of a data point isdefined from the second, fourth, etc. data column, depending on the data column to which the datapoint belongs. The X and Y values together give you the center of the bubble.

Structure of the Data Provider for a QuadrantA quadrant simply relates two data points to each other. The first data point is displayed as a cross.The second data point is displayed as a point and arranged with respect to the cross. Since only twodata points are required, the underlying table should only have two rows.


� The second data column contains the values to be entered on the Y axis.

If the table contains more than two rows, the additional rows are ignored when the table isconverted into a chart.

Portfolio ExampleThe following graphic shows a data provider that is used as the basis for a portfolio.



X values

DUNS US 1987 Sic Cod Penetration % Potential Sales Sales

ODB87SIC1 9.75 % $ 62.264.964,20 $ 68.995.325,63

A 7.23 % $ 1,174,812.94 $ 1,266,360.63

B 6.82 % $ 47,301.42 $ 50,762.50

C 8.49 % $ 5,342,923.87 $ 5,838,424.38

D 8.14 % $ 6,462,629.13 $ 7,035,273.13

E 8.53 % $ 2,645,798.36 $ 2,892,398.13

F 8.22 % $ 4,597,710.86 $ 5,009,276.25

G 9.84 % $ 15,111,527.82 $ 16,760,058.13

H 8.65 % $ 2,842,611.88 $ 3,111,659.38

I 12.22 % $ 23,243,258.36 $ 26,478,784.38

J 10.39 % $ 494,921.35 $ 552,328.75

Y values Bubble size

Below you see a portfolio that is based on the data provider.

Penetration [%]

Pote

ntia

l Sal

es [$

]

Changing the Chart TypeUseA chart is normally displayed as a bar chart. You can change the chart type [Seite 129] for the entirechart.

You can also combine multiple chart types in the same chart by changing the chart type of a singledata series. For example you can display the planned turnover of several subsidiaries and show theaverage current turnover as a line.



ProcedureChanging the Chart Type of an Entire Chart1. Click on the chart with the right mouse key.

2. In the context menu choose Chart Type.

This brings you to the Chart Options dialog box.

The field Assign to all data rows is selected and inactive. This shows you that the charttype is changed for the entire chart and not only for a single data series.

3. First select the type and then the required subtype.

4. Choose OK.

Changing the Chart Type of a Single Data Series1. Click with the right mouse key on the data series whose chart type you want to change.

2. In the context menu choose Chart Type.


3. First select the chart type and then the required subtype.

If you mark the field Assign to all data rows, the chart type is changed for the entire chart,even if you only marked a single data series.

4. Choose OK.

Axes and GridlinesDefinitionMost of the chart types have two axes: a value axis and a category axis. With most chart types, thevalues of a data series are plotted along the value axis and the categories along the category axis.Normally the value axis corresponds to the Y axis and the category axis to the X axis.

Three-dimensional chart types such as cone and pyramid charts also have a third (Z) axis.

Gridlines are vertical and horizontal lines that divide up the plotting area. They improve the readabilityof the individual chart values.

UseThe properties that you can define for axes are listed below. The properties that you can definedepend on the chart type you selected.

� Showing and Hiding Axes [Seite 144]

� Changing the Position of the Tick Marks [Seite 144]

� Changing the Scale [Seite 145]

� Changing the Point of Intersection of Axes [Seite 146]

� Reversing the Order of Categories and Values [Seite 147]



� Formatting Axes and Axis Labels [Seite 147]

You can only use the following functions for value axes:

� Changing the Start and End Points of a Value Axis [Seite 148]

� Changing the Value Axis Intervals [Seite 149]

� Adding a Value Range [Seite 150]

� Formatting a Value Range [Seite 151]

� Formatting the Value Range Title [Seite 151]

� Changing the Title and Values of a Value Range [Seite 152]

You can change the minor tick mark and tick mark label intervals [Seite 149] for category axes.

You can choose from the following functions for gridlines:

� Showing and Hiding Gridlines [Seite 153]

� Editing Gridlines [Seite 154]

Showing and Hiding AxesUseYou can decide whether to display axes in a chart and which axes should be displayed.

Pie charts and doughnuts do not have axes.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on any area of the chart.

2. In the context menu, choose Chart Options.

This brings you to the dialog box with the same name.

3. Choose tabstrip Axes.

4. Select the axes you want to show. Deselect the axes you want to hide.

Primary axis describes the normal axis in the coordinate system and Secondary axisdescribes the opposite axis.

5. Choose OK.

Changing the Position of the Tick MarksUseYou can show or hide tick marks for the axes. You can also define if the tick marks should bedisplayed outside, inside or on both sides of the axes. You can define these settings separately for themajor and minor tick marks. Minor tick marks are a subdivision of the major tick marks.



You can make all the settings separately for each axis.

PrerequisitesThe axis to be changed is displayed. See Showing and Hiding Axes [Seite 144].

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the axis you want to change.

2. In the context menu choose Format Axis.


3. Choose tabstrip Line.

4. Define the Major tick mark type and Minor tick mark type.

� None: Do not show any tick marks

� Outside: Show tick marks outside the axis

� Inside: Show tick marks inside the axis

� Cross: Show tick marks both outside and inside the axis

5. Choose OK.

Changing the ScaleUseYou can choose one of the following scales when you use value axes:

� Linear

� Logarithmic

You can only change the scale for value axes, but not for category axes. It does notmatter if the X axis or the Y axis is the value axis.

The time scale type is not relevant in Web Publishing.

PrerequisitesThe axis to be changed is a value axis.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the value axis you want to change.



3. Choose tabstrip Scale.

4. In the Type field choose the required type of scale.

5. Choose OK.



Changing the Point of Intersection of AxesUseYou can change the point where the axes cross in a chart. You can also define if the point ofintersection should always lie between categories or on a category.

ProcedureChanging the Point of Intersection for the Category Axis1. Click with the right mouse key on the category axis (normally the X axis).




4. Enter the desired setting. Your setting moves the position of the value axis (normally the Y axis) inthe chart:

� If you want the point of intersection to lie on a certain category, select Custom in the Value axiscrosses at list and enter the number of the category.

� If you want to move the value axis to the right border of the chart, select Maximum in the Valueaxis crosses at list.

� If you want to move the value axis to the right border of the chart, select Maximum in the Valueaxis crosses at list.

� To compute the point of intersection automatically, select Automatic in the Value axis crosses atlist.

5. Choose OK.

Positioning a Point of Intersection on a Category or between CategoriesThe point of intersection for value axes and category axes lies between the categories by default.However, you can also define that the point of intersection should lie exactly on a category.

1. Click with the right mouse key on the category axis (normally the X axis).




4. Choose the setting you want to use.

� If you want the point of intersection of the value axis and the category axis to lie between thecategories, select the Value axis crosses between categories field. With this setting, the major tickmarks of the category axis are displayed between the categories.

� If you want the point of intersection to lie exactly on a category, deselect this field. With thissetting, the major tick marks of the category axis are displayed directly below the categories.

5. Choose OK.

Changing the Point of Intersection for the Value Axis1. Click with the right mouse key on the value axis (normally the Y axis).






4. Enter the desired setting. Your setting moves the position of the category axis (normally the Xaxis) in the chart:

� If you want the point of intersection with the category axis to lie at a certain value, select Customin the Category axis crosses at list and enter the desired value.

� If you want to move the category axis to the upper border of the chart, select Maximum in theCategory axis crosses at list.

� To move the category axis back to the lower border of the chart, select Minimum in the Categoryaxis crosses at list.

� To calculate the point of intersection automatically, select Category axis crosses at.

5. Choose OK.

Reversing the Order of Categories and ValuesUseYou can reverse the order of the categories and the values in most of the chart types. This is notpossible for radar charts.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the axis you want to change.




4. Select the appropriate field for the axis.

� To reverse the order of the categories on the category axis, select field Categories in reverseorder.

� To reverse the order of the values on the value axis, select field Values in reverse order.

5. Choose OK.

Formatting Axes and Axis LabelsUseYou can format the line of each axis individually.

You can also change the formatting of the axis labeling for each axis. You can also change the fontproperties and alignment of the axis labeling. You can define the format of the numbers that aredisplayed in the axis label. For example, you can select a percentile display or display the values withtheir currency. You can also display numbers with decimal places.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the axis whose line or axis label you want to change.






Changing Lines1. Choose tabstrip Line.

2. Select the required formatting for the type of line, the color and the axis width.

Changing Font Properties1. Choose tabstrip Font.

2. Select the required font properties for the axis label: font name, style (bold, italic, etc.), the size inpoints and the color.

Changing the Number Format1. Choose tabstrip Number.

2. In field Category choose the required category, e.g. Date for date formats.

3. In field Number formats choose the required format within the category.

4. If you are not yet satisfied with the format, you can change it directly in field Number format.

Changing the Alignment1. Choose tabstrip Alignment.

2. Select the required arrangement of the axis label, e.g. from left to right, from top to bottom orrotated by 90 degrees.

Changing the Start and End Points of a Value AxisUseYou can determine the start and end points of a value axis automatically or define them manually.

PrerequisitesThe axis to be formatted is a value axis and not a category axis.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the value axis (normally the Y axis).





Defining the Start and End Points Automatically1. To define the start point automatically, select field Minimum in column Auto.

2. To define the end point automatically, select field Maximum in column Auto.

Changing the Start and End Points Manually1. Deselect field Minimum or Maximum in column Auto.



2. Enter the required value in field Minimum or Maximum.

Changing the Value Axis IntervalUseYou can change the interval for the value axes, that is define the interval for the tick marks. You canchange these values separately for the major and minor tick marks.

PrerequisitesThe axis to be formatted is a value axis with a linear or logarithmic scale. See Changing the Scale[Seite 145].






Changing the Interval Manually1. Deselect field Major unit for the major tick marks or Minor unit for the minor tick marks.

2. Enter the interval you want in fields Major unit or Minor unit.

You can only see the change if the major tick marks or minor tick marks are displayed.See Changing the Position of the Tick Marks [Seite 144].

Defining the Interval AutomaticallySelect field Major unit for the major tick marks or Minor unit for the minor tick marks.

Changing Minor Tick Mark and Minor Tick Mark LabelIntervalsUseEvery category on the category axis is labeled and is separated from the other categories with tickmarks (major tick marks).

You can define the intervals in which the category axes should be labeled. Normally every category islabeled, but you can for example label only every second or third category.

You can also define that more than one category should be displayed between the tick marks so thatthe category axis has fewer tick marks. Normally exactly one category is displayed between two tickmarks (major tick marks) on the category axis.



Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the category axis (normally the X axis).




4. To change the distance between the labels, enter the appropriate value in field Number ofcategories between tick mark labels. Enter 1 to label each category, enter 2 to label every secondcategory, and so on.

5. To change the distance between the tick marks, enter how many categories there should bebetween two tick marks in field Number of categories between tick marks.

6. Choose OK.

Adding a Value RangeUseYou can define a value range that should be highlighted in the chart. You can define a minimum,optimum and maximum value within the value range. These values are displayed in the chart with aline and can be assigned a title.

PrerequisitesThe axis to which the value range belongs is a value axis and is displayed in the chart. See Showingand Hiding Axes [Seite 144].


2. In the context menu choose Add Value Range.

You go to the Format Value Range dialog box.

3. Repeat the following steps for all the values (minimum, optimum, maximum) you want to mark inthe chart:

4. Enter a title for the relevant value.

5. Define where the value should lie:

� If you want the position of the value to be defined automatically, select Automatic.

� If you want to predefine a value, select the Value field and enter the minimum, optimum ormaximum value.

� If you do not want to mark a value in the chart, select the Invisible field for the correspondingvalue.

6. Choose OK.



Formatting Value RangesUseEvery value range can have a minimum, optimum and maximum value. You can format the lines thatrepresent these values. You can also define a filling for the entire value range.

PrerequisitesYou already added a value range. See Adding a Value Range [Seite 150].

ProcedureClick with the right mouse key on the upper or lower border of the value range you want to format.

1. In the context menu choose Format Value Range.



Changing the Filling and Border1. Choose tabstrip Pattern.

2. Select the formatting for the filling and for the upper and lower borders of the value range. SeeChanging the Filling and Borders of Surfaces [Seite 125].

The upper border normally corresponds to the maximum value of the value range and thelower border corresponds to the minimum value.


2. Select the required formatting for the type of line and the color of the line within a value range.

This setting only refers to the line within a value range. This is normally the line for theoptimum value. The upper and lower lines of the value range can be formatted with thePattern tabstrip.

Formatting the Value Range TitleUseEvery value range can have a minimum, optimum and maximum value. You can format the titles forthese values individually.

PrerequisitesYou already added a value range and defined titles for the values. See Adding Value Ranges [Seite150].

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the title of the value you want to format.

2. In the context menu choose Format Value Range Title.





You can change the titles of all the values of the current value range with tabstrip ValueRange. However, all formatting selected in the other tabstrips only refer to the title youselected before calling the dialog box.


2. Choose the required formatting for the filling and for the border of the box surrounding the title.See Changing the Filling and Border of Surfaces [Seite 125].


2. Select the required font properties for the title: font name, style (bold, italic, etc.), the size in pointsand the color.


2. Select the required arrangement of the title, e.g. from left to right, from top to bottom or rotated by90 degrees.

Changing the Title and Values of a Value RangeUseYou can change a value range after defining it. The minimum, optimum and maximum values can bechanged as well as the relevant titles for these values.

PrerequisitesYou already added a value range. See Adding a Value Range [Seite 150].

ProcedureChanging the Values of the Value Range from a Dialog Box1. Click with the right mouse key on the upper or lower border of the value range you want to

change.



3. Choose tabstrip Value Range.

4. Enter the new value.

5. Choose OK.

Changing Values of the Value Range Directly in the ChartIf you entered the values yourself when you added the value range, you can change the valuesdirectly in the chart. If you defined the values automatically, you can only change them from theFormat Value Range dialog box.



To change the values directly in the chart:

1. Click on the upper or lower border of the value range.

The value range is selected.

2. Point to the line representing the value to be changed.


3. Click on the line and keep the mouse key pressed.

4. Pull the line to the required value and let go of the mouse key.

Changing Titles of Values1. Click on one of the titles in the value range with the right mouse key.

2. In the context menu choose Format Value Range Title.

3. This brings you to the dialog box with the same name.

4. Choose tabstrip Value Range.

5. Enter the new title.

You can change the titles of all the values of the current value range with tabstrip ValueRange. However, all formatting selected in the other tabstrips only refer to the title youselected before calling the dialog box.

6. Choose OK.

Showing and Hiding Grid LinesUseYou can make it easier to read values by displaying major and minor gridlines for both the X and Yaxes. You can also define the axes (main axis, secondary axis) for which the grid lines should bedisplayed.

PrerequisitesThe chart is neither a pie chart nor a doughnut.




3. Choose tabstrip Gridlines.

4. Select the Major gridlines and Minor gridlines you want to display.

5. Deselect the gridlines you want to hide.

6. Choose OK.



Editing GridlinesUseYou can format the type of line, color and width of the gridlines individually. You can define theseproperties separately for each type of gridline, for example you can format the major gridlines of the Xaxis differently from those of the Y axis.

For the gridlines you can also change the scaling of all the properties that you can change for theaxes. Which properties these are depends on whether you are editing gridlines of the category axis orof the value axis.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the gridlines you want to format, for example the major gridlines

of the X axis.

2. In the context menu choose Format Gridlines.




2. Select the required formatting for the type of line, the color and the gridline width.

Changing Other Properties1. Choose tabstrip Scale.

2. Make the required changes.

Gridlines always has the same scaling properties as the corresponding axis. All thechanges you make in tabstrip Scale therefore directly affect the corresponding axis. Forexample, if you change the interval of the minor gridlines for the value axis, the interval ofthe value axis is also changed appropriately.

Data Series and Data PointsDefinitionA data series consists of related data points. Each data series is uniquely identified by its own color orpattern. In a pie chart, only one data series is displayed. In other chart types you can display morethan one data series.

A data point is a single element of a data series. For example, a data point is displayed by a slice of apie, a point or a bar.

UseYou have a number of formatting options for data series and data points. Note that the previewwindow only shows sample data. You only see the actual data once it has been published.

You should change the preview window settings so that the number of data series and data pointscorrespond to the data provider. You can then change the formatting of individual data series. For



chart types of class 1, the uppermost data series in the legend corresponds to the first table row, thenext data series corresponds to the second table row, etc.

You can edit data series as follows:

� Plotting a Data Series to a Secondary Axis [Seite 155]

� Formatting Data Series [Seite 156]

� Smoothing Lines [Seite 157]

� Adding, Changing and Removing Trendlines [Seite 158]

� Formatting Trendline Equations [Seite 159]

� Adding and Removing Error Bars [Seite 160]

� Editing Error Bars [Seite 161]

The following functions are only available for pie charts and ring charts:

� Rotating Pie and Ring Charts [Seite 165]

� Deactivating the Color Change for a Pie or Ring Chart [Seite 165]

� Changing the Ring Width [Seite 166]

The following functions are only available for histograms:

� Adding and Removing Normal Distributions [Seite 161]

� Editing a Normal Distribution [Seite 162]

� Formatting the Title of a Normal Distribution [Seite 163]

The following functions are only available for tachometers:

� Formatting the Tachometer Needle Label [Seite 164]

� Changing the Value Range of a Tachometer [Seite 164]

The following functions refer to 3D charts:

� Changing the Depth of 3D Charts [Seite 166]

� Formatting Walls and Floors [Seite 167]

In a portfolio or quadrant chart you can change the position of the quadrants [Seite 167]. If required,you can add drop lines [Seite 168] to a surface, profile or line chart.

You can edit the data points of a data series as follows:

� Formatting Data Points [Seite 169]

� Changing the Distance between Groups of Data Points [Seite 169]

� Changing the Overlapping of Data Points [Seite 170]

Plotting a Data Series to a Secondary AxisUseIf the value ranges of data series vary considerably or if mixed data types are used, you can plot oneor more data series to a secondary axis (Y axis). For example, you can plot the number of houses soldon the left Y axis (main axis) and the average price on the right Y axis (secondary axis).



Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the data series for which you want to plot a secondary axis.

2. In the context menu choose Format Data Series.


3. Choose tabstrip Axes.

4. Select option Secondary axis.

5. Choose OK.

Formatting Data SeriesUseYou can format each data series in a chart individually. Data series are displayed as lines, as surfacesor, in the case of a tachometer, as tachometer needles, depending on the chart type. The optionsavailable depend on how the data series is displayed.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the data series you want to format.


You can also select the data series to be formatted in context menu Format Data Seriesand in the submenu.

This brings you to the dialog box with the same name. Depending on the chart type, tabstripPattern, Line or Pointer is displayed.


Changing Surfaces1. If the data series is to be displayed as a surface (e.g. for bar or pie charts),choose tabstrip Pattern.

2. Select the formatting for the filling and for the border of the surfaces. See Changing the Filling andBorders of Surfaces [Seite 125].

Changing Lines1. If you want to display the data series as a line (e.g. for line charts or radar charts), choose tabstrip

Line.

2. Select the required formatting for the type of line, the color and the line width.

3. With Marker you can also define the symbol with which the individual data points should bedisplayed and how the symbol should be formatted.


� If you do not want to mark the data points, choose None.

� If you want to set up your own formatting, choose Custom. In the Style list, choose the symbol tobe used to display the data points. If required, change the colors of the symbol and define the sizeof the symbol in field Size.



Changing the Tachometer Needle1. For a tachometer, choose tabstrip Pointer.

2. Under Line select the required formatting for the tachometer needle. You can define the type ofline, color and breadth of the tachometer needle. You can also give the tachometer needle anarrowhead and define its size.

3. With Marker you can also define the symbol to be displayed on the tachometer needle and howthe symbol should be formatted.


� If you do not want to display a symbol, choose None.

� If you want to set up your own formatting, choose Custom. In the Style list, choose the symbol tobe displayed on the tachometer needle. If required, change the colors of the symbol and definethe size of the symbol in field Size.

4. If you want to label the tachometer needle, select the Label field under Pointer Label and enter thetext.

Smoothing LinesUseFor data series that have the form of a line (for example in line or profile charts), an interpolated curveis drawn between related data points. You can smooth the curve if necessary. This does not changethe underlying data.

PrerequisitesThe chart to be formatted is a line chart, radar chart, profile chart or point chart.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the data series you want to format.



3. Choose tabstrip Line.

4. Select Smooth.

5. Choose OK.



Adding, Changing and Removing TrendlinesUseYou can visualize the trend of a data series using a trendline for a number of chart types. You can alsoextend the trendline past the data series in the chart in order to forecast future values and derive pastvalues. There are the following types of trendlines:

� Linear: A linear trendline is an optimized straight line that is suitable for linear datasets. A datasetis linear if the pattern of data points resembles a line. A linear trendline normally displays aconstant increase or decrease in values.

� Logarithmic: A logarithmic trendline is an optimized curve that is ideal if the rate of changes to thedata first increases or decreases sharply and then stays nearly the same. A logarithmic trendlinecan use negative and/or positive values.

� Potential: A potential trendline is a curve. It should be used for datasets that comparemeasurements that increase with a certain rate (for example, the acceleration of a racing car in 1second intervals). You cannot add a potential trendline if your data contains null or negativevalues.

� Exponential: An exponential trendline is a curve that is suitable for data values that increase ordecrease with an increasing tendency. You cannot add an exponential trendline if your datacontains null or negative values.

� Floating average: The floating average smoothes out data fluctuations and therefore can show atrend or pattern more clearly. The floating average consists of a series of averages that arecomputed from elements of the data series. A floating average uses a certain number of datapoints, computes there mean value and then uses this mean value as a point in the curve.

You can change all the properties of a trendline that you can define when you add the trendline. Youcan delete a trendline that you do not need.

PrerequisitesThe chart is a two-dimensional bar, surface, line, portfolio, profile, point or column diagram or ahistogram.

ProcedureAdding Trendlines1. Click with the right mouse key on the data series for which you want to compute the trend.

2. In the context menu choose Add Trendline.

The Format Trendline dialog box appears.

3. On the Trendline tabstrip, choose the type of trend you require.

4. The type of trendline and the name of the data series is displayed as legend text in the legend. Ifyou want to use a different legend text, deselect field Trendline name Automatic and enter therequired text.

5. Not for floating average: The trendline can also display past and future developments. Enter howfar in the future (field Forward) and past (field Backward) the trendline should be displayed.

6. Not for floating average: If you want to display the equation on which the trendline is based in thechart, select field Display equation on chart.

7. Only for floating average: Enter the number of data points to be used to compute the averagevalue in field Periods. The average values are then used as points of the trendline.

8. If you want to change the line type and color of the line, choose the required options on tabstripLine.

9. Choose OK.



Changing Trendlines1. Click with the right mouse key on the trendline you want to change.

2. In the context menu choose Format Trendline.

3. Change the properties and choose OK.

Removing Trendlines1. Click on the trendline you want to remove.

2. Press <Del>.

You can also remove trendlines by clicking on the trendline with the right mouse key andchoosing Delete in the context menu.

Formatting Trendline EquationsUseWhen you add a trendline, you can decide if the equation on which the trendline is based should bedisplayed in the chart. If you display the equation, you can change the formatting of the equation.

PrerequisitesYou added a trendline and defined that the equation should be displayed in the chart.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the equation you want to format.

2. In the context menu choose Format Trendline Label.




2. Choose the required formatting for the filling and for the border of the box surrounding theequation. See Changing the Filling and Border of Surfaces [Seite 125].


2. Select the required font properties for the equation: font name, style (bold, italic, etc.), the size inpoints and the color.


2. In field Category choose the required category, e.g. Number for number formats.






2. Select the required arrangement of the axis label, e.g. from left to right, from top to bottom orrotated by 90 degrees.

Adding and Removing Error BarsUseError bars graphically show possible errors or unclear data points. This is particularly relevant forcharts that show the results of scientific investigations. The selected chart type determines whether ornot you can add error bars and defines the axis that the error bar refers to.

You can delete error bars that you do not need.

PrerequisitesYou can add error bars for either the Y axis or the X axis for bar charts, surface charts, line charts,profile charts and vertical bar charts as well as for histograms and tachometers. This depends onwhich of the two axes is the value axis.

You can add error bars for both the X axis and the Y axis for portfolio, point, quadrant and step charts.

ProcedureAdding Error Bars1. Click with the right mouse key on the data series for which you want to add error bars.



3. Choose tabstrip X Error Bars or Y Error Bars, depending on the chart type and the axis for whichyou want to add the error bars.

4. Under Display choose whether and in which direction the error bars for the X axis or Y axis shouldbe displayed:

� Plus and minus error bars

� Only plus error bars

� Only minus error bars

� No error bars

5. Under Error amount choose the method to be used to locate the error.

� If you want to use a constant error amount, select Fixed value and enter the value.

� If you want to use a percentile value for the individual data points, select Percentage and enter thevalue.

� If you want to use a certain number of standard deviations from the mean of the values displayedgraphically, select Standard deviation and enter the number.

� If you want to use the standard error, select Standard error.

� If you want to define the error yourself, select Custom. Enter the deviation up and down in thefields + and – .



6. Choose OK.

Removing Error Bars1. Click with the right mouse key on the error bars of the data series you want to delete.

2. Press <Del>.

Editing Error BarsUseYou can format the error bars of a data series individually. You can also change all the properties youdefined when you added error bars.

PrerequisitesYou already added error bars to a data series.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the error bars of the data series that you want to format or

change.

2. In the context menu choose Format Error Bars.



Formatting Error Bars1. Choose tabstrip Line.

2. Under Line choose the required formatting for the type and color of the line.

3. Under Marker define whether the error bars should be displayed delimited with lines or withoutlines.

Changing Error Bars1. Choose tabstrip X Error Bars or Y Error Bars, depending on the chart type and the axis for which

you want to change the error bars.

2. Change the properties as required. You have the same options as for adding error bars, seeAdding and Removing Error Bars [Seite 160].

Adding and Removing Normal DistributionsUseIf you assign chart type Histogram, you can select a subtype that automatically displays the normaldistribution for each data series. You can also add normal distributions afterwards.



You can delete a normal distribution that you do not need.

PrerequisitesThe chart is a histogram.

ProcedureAdding a Normal Distribution1. Click with the right mouse key on the data series for which you want to display the normal

distribution.

2. In the context menu choose Add Normal Distribution.

The normal distribution is displayed in the chart. You can also change the properties of the normaldistribution if needed. See Editing the Normal Distribution [Seite 162].

Removing the Normal Distribution1. Click on the normal distribution you want to remove.

2. Press <Del>.

You can also remove a normal distribution by clicking on it with the right mouse key andchoosing Delete in the context menu.

Editing a Normal DistributionUseYou can edit every normal distribution that is displayed for a data series in a histogram. You candefine the mean value and standard deviation. You can also define a title for the normal distributionand format the curve.

PrerequisitesThe chart is a histogram. Either you selected a subtype that automatically also displays normaldistributions or you added normal distributions afterwards.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the normal distribution you want to edit.

2. In the context menu choose Format Normal Distribution.



Changing the Mean Value1. Choose tabstrip Normal Distribution.

2. Enter the new mean value.

Changing the Standard Deviation1. Choose tabstrip Normal Distribution.



2. Enter the new standard deviation.

Displaying Titles in Charts1. Choose tabstrip Normal Distribution.

2. Select field Display name on chart if you also want to display the title displayed in field Distributionname in the chart.

Changing Titles1. Choose tabstrip Normal Distribution.

2. Deselect field Automatic.

3. Change the title in field Distribution name.

Formatting Curves1. Choose tabstrip Pattern.

2. Select the formatting for the filling and border of the curve. See Changing the Filling and Bordersof Surfaces [Seite 125].

Formatting the Title of a Normal DistributionUseIf the title of a normal distribution is displayed in the chart, you can format the font properties and titlealignment individually.

PrerequisitesYou assigned chart type histogram and selected a subtype that also displays the normal distribution.You also defined that the title of the normal distribution should be displayed in the chart.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the title of the normal distribution you want to format.

2. In the context menu choose Format Normal Distribution Label.




2. Select the required font properties for the title: font name, style (bold, italic, etc.), the size in pointsand the color.


2. Select the required arrangement of the title, e.g. from left to right, from top to bottom or rotated by90 degrees.



Formatting the Tachometer Needle LabelUseIf you defined that a tachometer should have a tachometer needle label, you can format the labelindividually.

PrerequisitesYou assigned the tachometer needle a label with the Format Data Series [Seite 156] function.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the label you want to format.

2. In the context menu choose Format Pointer Labels.




2. Select the required font properties for the text: font name, style (bold, italic, etc.), the size in pointsand the color.


2. Select the required arrangement of the text, e.g. from left to right, from top to bottom or rotated by90 degrees.

Changing the Value Range of a TachometerUseA tachometer is normally divided into several value ranges that are displayed in different colors. Youcan change the start and end of a value range as well as its color.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the value range you want to change.



3. Enter the start and end for the value range in fields From and To.

4. Select a color for the value range.

5. Choose OK.



Rotating Pie and Ring ChartsUseYou can change the angle of the first segment of a pie or ring chart, thus rotating the entire pie or ringcharts.

PrerequisitesThe chart is a pie or ring chart.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the pie or on one of the rings of the ring chart.



3. Choose tabstrip Options.

4. In field Angle of first slice, enter the number of degrees by which you want to rotate the pie or ringsclockwise.

5. Choose OK.

Deactivating the Color Change for a Pie or Ring UseIn pie charts and ring charts, each data point is normally displayed in a different color. However, youcan define that all data points of a data series should have the same color. In this case, all thesegments of a ring chart are displayed in the same color. All the segments of a slice of the ring charthave the same color in a pie chart.

PrerequisitesThe chart is a pie chart or ring chart.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the pie chart or on a slice of the ring chart.




4. Deselect field Vary colors by point.

5. Choose OK.



You can also change the color of the pie chart or doughnut slices. See Formatting Data Series [Seite156].

Changing the Ring WidthUseIn a ring chart, the data series are arranged in rings around an inner circle. The inner circle does notrepresent a data series. You can define how large the inner circle should be and thus how wide eachring should be. The larger the inner circle, the narrower the rings will be displayed.

PrerequisitesThe chart is a ring chart.

Procedure1. Click on one of the rings with the right mouse key.




4. In the Doughnut hole size field, enter the percentage the inner circle should occupy in relationshipto the entire chart. You can enter a value between 10 and 90 percent.

5. Choose OK.

Changing the Depth of 3D ChartsUseYou can change the diagram depth of 3D charts with the following options:

� You can change the depth of the data points, for example the depth of the cone or cylinder.

� You can change the distance from the data points to the back wall.

PrerequisitesThe chart is a 3D column, 3D bar, cone, pyramid or cylinder chart.

Procedure1. Click on the row of data with the right mouse key.






4. To change the depth of the data points, enter the required value in field Chart depth. The largerthe value, the greater the depth.

5. To change the gap between the back wall and the data points, enter a value between 0 and 500 infield Gap depth. The larger the value, the greater the gap.

Formatting Walls and FloorsUseIn a 3D chart, two walls are displayed as the background for the data series and the data series areplaced on a floor. You can choose any filling and border as well as walls and floor you like.

PrerequisitesThe chart is a 3D chart, for example a pyramid, cylinder or cone diagram.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on one of the walls or on the floor, depending on which surface you

want to format.

If you cannot select the floor, you should temporarily hide the axis in front of it. SeeShowing and Hiding Axes [Seite 144]. It is then easier to select the floor. Once you haveformatted the floor, you can show the axis again.

2. In the context menu choose Format Walls or Format Floor.



4. Choose OK.

Changing QuadrantsUseIn a chart of type portfolio or quadrant, the plot area represents four areas (quadrants): normally a redand a green quadrant as well as two yellow quadrants. Normally red symbolizes a negative quadrant,green a positive quadrant and yellow a neutral quadrant. The data points are arranged in thesequadrants. As a result, one can immediately see how the turnover of a subsidiary should be evaluated.

You can change the color of the quadrants and define where the transition between the quadrantsshould be. You can also deactivate display of the quadrants.



PrerequisitesThe chart is a portfolio or a quadrant.

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the plot area, for example on a free area within the X and Y

axes.

2. In the context menu choose Format Plot Area.

The Format Plot dialog box appears.

3. Click on the legend with the right mouse key.

4. Select tabstrip Quadrants.

5. To change the transition between the quadrants, enter the new values in fields X-Axis and Y-Axis.

6. To change the colors, select under Colors the colors for the Top-Left, Top-Right, Bottom-Left andBottom-Right quadrants.

7. If you do not want to display any quadrants, deselect the Visible field.

8. Choose OK.

Showing and Hiding Drop LinesUseIn surface and line charts you can display drop lines that go from the data point to the X axis. Thisshows you the position of the individual data points, especially in surface charts.

If you do not want to display drop lines, you can hide them.

PrerequisitesThe chart is an area, profile or line chart.

Procedure1. Click on the data series with the right mouse key.




4. If you want to display drop lines, select field Drop lines. If you do not want to display drop lines,deselect this field.

5. Choose OK.



Formatting Data PointsUseYou can format each data point in a chart individually. The options available depend on the chart type.

Procedure1. Click on the data series to which the data point to be formatted belongs.

The entire data series is selected.

2. Click on the data point to be formatted.

Only the data point is selected.

3. Click on the data point with the right mouse key.

4. In the context menu choose Format Data Point.

This brings you to the dialog box with the same name. Depending on the chart type, tabstripPattern, or Line is displayed.


Changing Surfaces1. If you want to display the data point in the form of a surface (e.g. for bar or pie charts), choose

tabstrip Pattern.

2. Select the formatting for the filling and for the border of the surfaces. See Changing the Filling andBorders of Surfaces [Seite 125].

Changing Lines1. If the data point lies on a line (e.g. for line charts or radar charts), select tabstrip Line.

2. Select the required formatting for the part of the line that belongs to the selected data point. Youcan define the type of line, color and width of the line.

The formatting of the rest of the line is not changed by this setting.

3. With Marker you can also define the symbol to be used to display the data point and how thesymbol should be formatted.


� If you do not want to mark the data point, choose None.

� If you want to set up your own formatting, choose Custom. In the Style list, choose the symbol tobe used to display the data point. If required, change the colors of the symbol and define the sizeof the symbol in field Size.

Changing the Distance between Groups of Data PointsUseThe data points are arranged in groups for chart types representing data series for example ascolumns, bars or cylinders. You can change the distance between the groups if required.



PrerequisitesThe chart is a column, bar, cone, profile, pyramid or cylinder chart.

Procedure1. Click on the data series with the right mouse key.




4. Enter a distance between 0 and 500 in field Distance. The larger the value, the larger the distancebetween the groups.

5. Choose OK.

Changing the Overlapping of Data PointsUseYou can change how data points overlap for chart types that display data series as columns or bars.Normally data points of a group are arranged next to each other without overlapping.

PrerequisitesThe chart is a column or bar chart.

Procedure1. Click on the row of data with the right mouse key.




4. Enter a value between -100 and 100 in field Overlap. The larger the value, the greater theoverlapping. The smaller the value, the larger the gap between the data points.

5. Choose OK.

Titles, Data Labels and LegendsDefinitionA title for the entire chart as well as for each individual axis in the chart can be displayed in a chart.

A data label gives supplementary information for example about a data series or a data point.



The legend explains the colors, patterns and symbols used in a chart.

UseYou can add chart titles, axis titles and data labels and change their formatting. You can also removeall the elements you added:

� Adding and Removing Chart Titles [Seite 171]

� Adding and Removing Axis Titles and Units [Seite 172]

� Formatting Chart Titles, Axis Titles and Units [Seite 173]

� Adding Data Labels [Seite 173]

� Formatting Data Labels [Seite 175]

� Removing Data Labels [Seite 176]

� Changing Texts of Titles, Units and Data Labels [Seite 176]

You can add and format legends. You can also remove legends if required:

� Adding and Removing Legends [Seite 177]

� Formatting Legend Texts and Symbols [Seite 178]

� Formatting the Legend Background [Seite 179]

You can change the position of the chart title and legend directly in the chart if you permitted this whenyou added the corresponding element. You can change the position of axis titles, units and data labelsdirectly in the chart. See Changing the Position of Chart Elements [Seite 128].

Adding and Removing Chart TitlesUseYou can give the entire chart a title in order to give a brief explanation of the contents of the chart.

You can delete the chart title if it is not required.

ProcedureAdding a Chart Title1. Click with the right mouse key on any area of the chart.



3. Choose tabstrip Title.

4. Enter the chart title in field Chart title.

5. If you want to be able to change the chart title directly in the chart, select field Editable.

6. If you want to be able to change the position of the chart title, select field Moveable.

7. Choose OK.

You can change the formatting of the chart title that has been added, see Formatting the Chart Title,Axis Title and Units [Seite 173].



Deleting the Chart Title1. Click on the chart title.

2. Press <Del>.

Adding and Removing Axis Titles and UnitsUseYou can give the X and Y axes a title. You can also enter the units to be displayed on the axes, forexample mill. US $.

If you do not need an axis title or unit, you can delete these elements.

PrerequisitesThe axis to be given an axis title or whose unit you want to enter is displayed, see Showing and HidingAxes [Seite 144].

ProcedureAdding an Axis Title or Unit1. Click with the right mouse button on any area of the chart.


This brings you to the dialog box of the same name.

3. Choose tabpage Title.

4. If you want to add a title or unit to the main axes, enter them in the corresponding fields underCategory (X) axis and Value (Y) axis.

5. If you also want to assign a title or unit for the secondary axes, enter these values in thecorresponding fields under Secondary category (X) axis and Secondary value (Y) axis.

6. Choose OK.

You can change the formatting as required once you have added the axis title and units, seeFormatting Chart Titles, Axis Titles and Units [Seite 173].

In special cases, you can also display units and currencies automatically. To do this, you have tohighlight the special attribute Automatic Display of Units and Currencies (AUTOMATIC_LABELS) forthe Web item chart in the Web Application Designer. See also Chart [Seite 120].

Removing the Axis Title or Unit1. Click on the axis title or unit to be deleted.

2. Press the <Del> key.



Formatting Chart Titles, Axis Titles and UnitsUseYou can format the chart title and each axis title individually. If you added the axis units, you can alsochange their formatting.

You can change the filling and border of the box surrounding a title or unit. You can also change thefont properties and alignment.

PrerequisitesYou already added a chart title, axis title or axis unit, see Adding and Removing Chart Titles [Seite171] and Adding and Removing Axis Titles and Units [Seite 172].

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on the element you want to format.

2. In the context menu choose Format Chart Title, Format Axis Label or Format Axis Title Unit.

The dialog box Format Chart Title or Format Axis Label appears.



2. Select the required formatting for the filling and for the border of the box surrounding the text. SeeChanging the Filling and Border of Surfaces [Seite 125].


2. Select the required font properties for the text: font name, style (bold, italic, etc.), the size in pointsand the color.


2. Select the required arrangement of the text, e.g. from left to right, from top to bottom or rotated by90 degrees.

Adding Data LabelsUseYou can display data labels in a chart as required and use them, for example, to display the absolutevalue for all data points. You can add data labels for all data series, for a single data series or for asingle data point.

ProcedureAdding Data Labels to all Data Series1. Click with the right mouse button on any area of the chart.





3. Choose the Data Labels tab page.

4. Choose the required option from those described below.

5. Choose OK.

Adding Data Labels to One Data Series1. Click with the right mouse button on the data series for which you want to add a data label.





5. Choose OK.

Adding Data Labels to a Data Point1. Click on the data series to which the data point belongs.

The entire data series is selected.

2. Click on the data point to which you want to add a data label.

Only that data point is selected.

3. Click on the data point with the right mouse button.

4. In the context menu choose Format Data Point.




7. Choose OK.

Options for Data LabelsThe options you can use in the Data Labels tabstrip depend on the type of chart you selected. Youhave the following options:

None: Do not display a data label

Show Value: Display absolute value

Show Percentage: Show the percentile value (only for pie charts and ring charts)

Show Label: Display the text

Show Label and Value: Display the text and the absolute value

Show Label and Percentage: Display the text and the percentile value (only for pie charts and ringchart)

Show Bubble Size: Display the size of the bubble (only for portfolio charts)

Show Label and Bubble Size: Display the text and the size of the bubbles (only for portfolio charts)

The options Show Bubble Size and Show Label and Bubble Size are not supported inSAP BW 3.0.



Formatting Data LabelsUseYou can format the data labels of a data series individually.

PrerequisitesYou already added data labels, see Adding Data Labels [Seite 173].

Procedure1. Click with the right mouse key on one of the data labels belonging to the data series.

2. In the context menu choose Format Data Labels.




2. Choose the required formatting for the filling and for the border of the box surrounding the datalabels. See Changing the Filling and Border of Surfaces [Seite 125].


2. Select the required font properties for the data labels: font name, style (bold, italic, etc.), the size inpoints and the color.


2. In the lists Horizontal and Vertical, select how the text should be arranged within the boxsurrounding the text.

3. In the list Position, select where the data label should be displayed with regard to the data point.

� Outside end: At the outmost end of the data point, e.g. directly above a column

� Inside end: At the innermost end of the data point, e.g. directly below the upper edge of a column

� Center: Centered within a data point

� Inside base: At the base of a data point, e.g. directly at the beginning of a column

4. Under Orientation select the required arrangement of the title, e.g. from left to right, from top tobottom or rotated by 90 degrees.







Removing Data LabelsUseYou can delete data labels that you do not need. You can delete data labels of all the data series or ofa single data series.

ProcedureRemoving Data Labels for All Data Series1. Click with the right mouse key on any area of the chart.



3. Choose tabstrip Data Labels.

4. Choose the option None.

5. Choose OK.

Removing the Data Label of a Single Data Series1. Click with the right mouse key on the data series whose data label you want to delete.



3. Choose tabstrip Data Labels.

4. Choose the option None.

5. Choose OK.

You can also delete the data label for a single data series by clicking on the data label andpressing <Del>.

Changing Texts of Titles, Units and Data LabelsUseYou can change the text of the following elements directly in the chart:

� Axis title

� Axis unit

� Title of value ranges

� Data titles

You can change the chart title directly in the chart if you permitted this when you added the title. SeeAdding and Removing Chart Titles [Seite 171]. You cannot change the title of a normal distributiondirectly in the chart. You can only change it in the properties of the normal distribution. See Editing theNormal Distribution [Seite 162].



Procedure1. Click on the text to be changed.

2. Click on the selected area.

The cursor is displayed as a vertical line.

You might have to click more than once on the selected area for data labels.

3. Change the text.

4. Click on any area of the chart to leave text editing mode and close your changes.

You can also change the chart title, axis titles and axis units by clicking on the elementwith the right mouse key and choosing Chart Options in the context menu.

Adding and Removing LegendsUseYou can add a legend and define the position in the chart where it should be displayed. In a portfoliochart you can also decide if the legend should show two reference bubbles. These are used forcomparison purposes to be able to better estimate the size of the bubbles displayed in the chart.

You can delete a legend that you do not need.

ProcedureAdding Legends1. Click with the right mouse key on any area of the chart.



3. Select tabstrip Legend.

4. Select the position where the legend should be displayed.

5. If the position of the legend may be changed directly in the chart, select field Moveable.

6. If the legend should only be displayed as a symbol, select field Show on demand.

In this case you can click on the legend symbol in the chart to display the legend. If you clickon the legend again, it is displayed again as a symbol.

You can use the options Moveable and Show on demand when you edit the chart. But inthe Web these options cannot be used, i.e. these options are ignored when you publishthe graphic.

7. To display reference bubbles in a portfolio, select field Visible in the Reference Bubbles area. Alsodefine the diameter of the larger reference bubble.

8. Choose OK.



Removing Legends1. Click on the legend.

2. Press <Del>.

You can also remove legends by clicking on the outermost border of the legend with theright mouse key and choosing Delete in the context menu.

Formatting Legend Texts and SymbolsUseYou can change the font properties of all the legend texts or of a single legend text. The fontproperties include the font type, style (bold, italic, etc.), size in points and color.

You can also format the border and the filling of the legend symbols as you like. Changing the symbolaffects the corresponding data series.

PrerequisitesYou already added a legend. See Adding and Removing Legends [Seite 177].

ProcedureFormatting All Legend Texts1. Click on the outermost border of the legends with the right mouse key.

2. In the context menu choose Format Legend.


3. Select tabstrip Font and enter your font properties.

4. Choose OK.

Formatting Individual Legend Texts1. Click with the right mouse key on the legend text you want to format.

2. In the context menu choose Format Legend Index.


3. Choose the required font properties.

4. Choose OK.

Formatting Legend Symbols1. Click with the right mouse key on the legend symbol you want to format.

2. In the context menu choose Format Legend Key.


3. Select the formatting for the filling and for the border of the legend symbol. See Changing theFilling and Borders of Surfaces [Seite 125].



The formatting of the corresponding data series also changed.

4. Choose OK.

Formatting the Legend BackgroundUseYou can format the background of the entire legend. You can choose another filling and change theborder surrounding the legend.

Procedure1. Click on the outermost border of the legends with the right mouse key.

2. In the context menu choose Format Legend.




5. Choose OK.

Data TablesDefinitionA data table contains the values on which the data points in the chart are based.

UseIf you also want to show the table values in the chart, you can display the data table (see Showing andHiding Data Tables [Seite 180]). This option only makes sense for chart types that have a categoryaxis.

You can format the data table as you like (see Formatting Data Tables [Seite 181]).



Showing and Hiding Data TablesUseYou can define whether or not you want to integrate the underlying data table in the chart for somechart types.

PrerequisitesYou can only display a data table for bar charts, surface charts, line charts, vertical bar charts andtachometers.

ProcedureShowing the Data Table1. Click with the right mouse key on any area of the chart.



3. Choose tabstrip Data Table.

4. Select the field Show data table.

5. If you also want to display the legend keys in the data table, also select the field Show legendkeys.

6. Choose OK.

The data table is displayed below the graphic.

Hiding Legend Keys in the Data Table1. Click with the right mouse key on any area of the chart.




4. Deselect the field Show legend keys.

5. Choose OK.

Hiding the Data Table1. Click with the right mouse key on any area of the chart.




4. Deselect the field Show data table.

5. Choose OK.



Formatting Data TablesUseYou can format the lines of the data table and change the font properties of the table texts. You canalso change the number format for the displayed numbers.

PrerequisitesThe data table is displayed in the chart, see Showing and Hiding Data Tables [Seite 180].

Procedure1. Click on the data table with the right mouse key.

2. In the context menu choose Format Data Table.




2. If you want to copy the default formatting, choose Automatic.

3. If you want to set up your own formatting, choose Custom. Select the required type and color forthe lines.


2. Select the required font properties for the table texts: font name, style (bold, italic, etc.), the size inpoints and the color.





Changing the Page LayoutBefore you printout the draft phase of a chart, you can change the page layout. You can adjust thepaper format, page borders and chart scaling for the printout.

Changes to the page layout only affect the draft phase of the printout and not how the chart ispublished in the Web.


2. In the context menu choose Print Preview.

3. Click again with the right mouse key on any area of the chart.



4. In the context menu choose Page Setup.

The Setup page dialog box appears.


Changing the Paper Format, Orientation and Arrangement1. Choose tabstrip Page.

2. Under Paper size, choose the required paper format.

3. Under Orientation define if the chart should be printed Vertical or Horizontal.

4. You can change the position of the chart with Center. Normally the chart is output centeredhorizontal and vertical.

� To make the chart left-justified, deselect Horizontally.

� To position the chart at the upper edge of the page, deselect Vertically.

Changing the Print Quality1. Choose tabstrip Page.

2. With Print quality you can define the quality in which the chart should be printed. The larger thenumber of dpi (dots per inch), the higher the quality and longer the printing.

Changing the Print NumberingYou can decide if you want to output page numbers and define the number with which numberingshould begin.

1. Choose tabstrip Page.

2. You can change the page numbering with the First page number field.

� If you do not want to number the pages, delete the field.

� If you want to begin page numbering with a certain number, enter this number.

� If you want to start page numbering with 1 and to continue numbering automatically, enterAuto.

Changing the Page Borders1. Choose tabstrip Page Borders.

2. Under Border choose the left, right, top and bottom page borders.

3. Under Margins define the distance between the Header and Footer and the top and bottom pageborders. If you do not want to use a header or footer, enter 0 in the corresponding field.

Changing the Scaling1. Choose tabstrip Options.

2. To make the pages for the printout larger or smaller, select field Scale and enter the desiredscaling in percent of the original size. The page is enlarged for a value greater than 100 and isreduced in size for a value under 100.

3. The chart is printed on one or more pages depending on its size. If required, you can also definethe number of pages on which the chart should be printed. Select field Fit to and enter the desirednumber of pages. The chart is scaled accordingly and distributed on the given number of pages. Ifyou entered a number greater than 1, you can also decide if the chart should be dividedhorizontally or vertically.



Printing ChartsUseYou can print a chart from the normal preview window during the draft phase. If you want to checkwhat the chart looks like before printing it, you can first display the print preview. In contrast to thenormal preview, the page borders are also displayed in the print preview.

ProcedureCalling the Print Preview1. Click with the right mouse key on any area of the chart.

2. In the context menu choose Print Preview.

The preview in the Chart window is replaced with the print preview. The current page bordersare displayed with thin lines. If required, you can change the page layout [Seite 181] and printthe chart.

You can change the page borders directly from the print preview. Place the mouse on oneof the border lines and pull the line to the new position. The page border is adjusted whenyou let go of the mouse key.

Closing the Print Preview1. Click with the right mouse key on any area of the print preview.

2. In the context menu choose Close Print Preview.

Printing ChartsYou can print the chart from either the normal preview window or from the print preview.

1. Click with the right mouse key on any area of the chart.

2. In the context menu choose Print.

3. To change the page layout click on Page Setup. You can also change the paper format, pageborders and chart scaling for the printout, see: Changing the Page Layout [Seite 181].

4. To start the printing, click on OK.

Dropdown BoxDefinitionThe Web item Dropdown Box allows you to filter characteristic values from a Web application in adropdown box.

UseWhen you select a value, the assigned query view is filtered according to this value. If a differentmethod is used to select a filter value for the characteristic in the dropdown box, the current filter valueappears in the dropdown box.



StructureAs well as its general attributes [Seite 114], the Dropdown Box Web item also has the followingattributes:


Index in the filter command (INDEX) Must have a clear value for all dropdown boxesand radio button groups [Seite 185] within theform tag.

This attribute must be changedonly if the ONLY_VALUESattribute is active.

Characteristics / Structure (IOBJNM) Name of characteristic / structure accordingto which you want to filterSpecify the technical name of the characteristic(for example, 0COUNTRY) or the structure (25characters) here.

The technical name of thecharacteristic is stored in the querydefinition. In the BEx toolbar,choose Change Query View �Change Query (Local View) or(Global View) � . The technicalnames of the InfoObjects aredisplayed.

Note that the characteristic youhave chosen must be included inthe query that the Web applicationis based on.

Read mode (BOOKED_VALUES) Specifies which values in the master data tableare copied to the Checkboxes Web item asfilter values:

� M: All values from the master data table.

Values that do not appear in the DataProvider under the current filterconditions and that produce the resultNo suitable data found upon filteringmight also be displayed However, thisprocess might not be the fastest undercertain conditions.

� D: Values that are basically posted,whereby the current drilldown status is notfully taken into consideration.

Q: Only values that are also posted in the DataProvider under the currently valid filterconditions are displayed. It can take a longtime under certain circumstances.



Maximum number of values in thedropdown box (MAXVALUES)(optional)

Contains the maximum number of values thatare displayed in the dropdown box.

If this attribute has the value 0, allthe available values are written inthe dropdown box.

Label (SHOW_LABEL)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Use BW description as labelIf this attribute is activated, the long text of thecharacteristic is written as a label in front of thedropdown box. In addition, you can use thecontext menu related to the description of thecharacteristic in this label.

Display values only (ONLY_VALUES)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

(optional)

Create dropdown box onlyIf you activate this attribute, only the HTMLform Web item for the value list is created. Youhave to create the form, in which the dropdownbox is contained, by hand in this case.

This attribute is suitable forcreating forms [Seite 266] thatcontain several dropdown boxes.

Do not display entry All values(NO_REMOVE_FILTER)'X' = “All values” not offered,

' ' = Display entry “All values”

If this field is not blank, the entry All values isnot set as a selection option in the radio buttongroup.

Data provider affected(TARGET_DATA_PROVIDER)

Contains a list of all data providers to which thefilter commands are sent.

If you filter according to acharacteristic and then activate thisattribute, the different dataproviders for the Web item arenotified. For further informationabout this attribute see GeneralAttributes [Seite 114].

Radio Button GroupsDefinitionThe radio button group Web Item allows you to filter characteristic values in a group of radiobuttons.



UseWhen you select a value, the assigned query view is filtered according to this value. If you select afilter value in another way for the characteristic of the radio button group, the current filter value isselected.

StructureAs well as its general attributes [Seite 114], the Radio Button Group Web item has the followingattributes:


Characteristics / Structure (IOBJNM) Name of the characteristic / structure thatyou want to filter bySpecify the technical name of the characteristic(for example, 0COUNTRY) or the structure (25characters) here.

The technical name of thecharacteristic is stored in the querydefinition. In the BEx toolbar,choose Change Query View �Change Query (Local View) or(Global View) � . The technicalnames of the InfoObjects aredisplayed.

Note that the characteristic youhave chosen must be included inthe query that the Web applicationis based on.

Read mode (BOOKED_VALUES) Specifies which values in the master data tableare copied to the Checkboxes Web item asfilter values:




� Q: Only values that are also posted in theData Provider under the currently valid filterconditions are displayed. It can take a longtime under certain circumstances.



Maximum number of displayed values(MAXVALUES)(optional)

Contains the maximum number of values thatare displayed in the radio button group.

If you set the value to 0, all the available valuesin the radio button group are displayed.

Label (SHOW_LABEL)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Use BW description as labelIf this attribute is activated, the long text of thecharacteristic is written as a label in front of theradio button group. In addition, you can use thecontext menu related to the description of thecharacteristic in this label.

Entries next to one another(HORIZONTAL_ALIGNMENT)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

If this attribute is activated, the differentcharacteristic values are grouped vertically. Ifthis attribute is deactivated, the characteristicvalues are grouped horizontally.

Number of entries next to oneanother/below one another(HORIZONTAL_NUMBER)

Contains the number of entries listed next toone another or below one another, dependingon the attribute settings forHORIZONTAL_ALIGNMENT.

Display values only (ONLY_VALUES)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Create radio button group onlyIf you activate this attribute, only the HTMLform Web item for the radio button group iscreated. Here, you have to create the form, inwhich the radio button group is contained, byhand.

This attribute is suitable forcreating forms [Seite 266] thatcontain several radio buttongroups.

Do not display entry All values(NO_REMOVE_FILTER)'X' = “All values” not offered,

' ' = Display entry “All values”

If this field is not blank, the entry All values isnot set as a selection option in the radio buttongroup.

Affected DataProvider(TARGET_DATA_PROVIDER)

List of data providers to which all selectionbutton commands are sent.

Index in the filter command (INDEX)(optional)

Must have a clear value for all dropdown boxes[Seite 183] and radio button groups within theform tag.

This attribute must be changedonly if the ONLY_VALUESattribute is active.



CheckboxesDefinitionCheckboxes is a Web item that places characteristic values for filtering in a group of checkboxes.

UseThe Checkboxes Web item can be used to easily filter a connected saved query view according to acertain characteristic.

You can set or remove filter values in the Web application by setting one or more indicators.

StructureAs well as its general attributes [Seite 114], the Checkboxes Web item has the following attributes:

Attribute Values Description

Characteristic/structure

(IOBJNM)

Selection list Select the technical name ofthe characteristic.

Characteristics and structuresare read from data providers.The characteristic values areprovided in a dropdown box inthe Web application as filtervalues.

Read mode

(BOOKED_VALUES)� Master data table (M)

� Dimension table (D)

� Posted values (Q)

Standard setting “Dimensiontable”

Specifies which values in themaster data table are copiedto the Checkboxes Web itemas filter values:

� M: All values from themaster data table.

Values that do notappear in the DataProvider under thecurrent filter conditionsand that produce theresult No suitable datafound upon filteringmight also bedisplayed However,this process might notbe the fastest undercertain conditions.

� D: Values that arebasically posted, wherebythe current drilldownstatus is not fully takeninto consideration.

� Q: Only values that arealso posted in the DataProvider under thecurrently valid filterconditions are displayed. Itcan take a long time undercertain circumstances.

Maximum number Default value: “0” Maximum number of displayed



(MAXVALUES)filter values If "0", all valuesare displayed.

Maximum length

(MAXLENGTH)

Maximum number ofcharacters in the label.

Label

(SHOW_LABEL)

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Default setting: ‘X’ = Yes

If this attribute is activated, thelong text of the characteristicis written as a label in front ofthe control box.

Affected DataProvider

(TARGET_DATA_PROVIDER)

Selection list List of data providers to whichall checkbox commands aresent.

Entries next to one another(HORIZONTAL_ALIGNMENT)

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Default setting: ‘ ‘ = No

Order entries next to oneanother

If this attribute is activated, thedifferent characteristic valuesare grouped vertically. If thisattribute is deactivated, thecharacteristic values aregrouped horizontally.

Number of entries nextto/under one another(HORIZONTAL_NUMBER)

Default value: 1 Contains the number of entrieslisted next to one another orbelow one another, dependingon the attribute settings forHORIZONTAL_ALIGNMENT.

Generic Navigation BlockDefinitionA Web item that obtains data from a query view to create a generic navigation block for a Webapplication. This block contains keys that you can use to transfer characteristics, for example, intorows or columns.

UseThe Web item Generic Navigation Block displays the navigational state of a query view in the Webapplication in the form of a table. All characteristics and structures in the query view are listed in thetable and their filter values are displayed. You can change the navigational status of the query view.You can transfer characteristics and structures to an axis (rows or columns) or from axes. You canfilter according to single values and remove the filter again.

StructureAs well as its general attributes [Seite 114], the Generic Navigation Block Web item has the followingattributes:




Read mode (BOOKED_VALUES)(BOOKED_VALUES_N)

“Master data table”

“Dimension table”

“Posted values”

Specifies which values in the master data tableare copied to the Checkboxes Web item asfilter values:




� Q: Only values that are also posted in theData Provider under the currently valid filterconditions are displayed. It can take a longtime under certain circumstances.

Read mode for filter items

The “master data” read mode may lead tomany unposted values being displayed; the“posted values” read mode may be slow.

Order entries next to one another(HORIZONTAL_ALIGNMENT)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

As well as arranging the characteristics belowone another, you can also display them next toone another. In many cases, this makes betteruse of the display area and there is a strongervisual link between, for example, the table andthe navigation block.

Entries next to one another(HORIZONTAL_NUMBER)Default value: 3

Describes the maximum number ofcharacteristics that can be displayed next toone another. If the navigation block containsmore than the specified number ofcharacteristics, then it is automaticallydisplayed in more than one row, where thenumber of characteristics per row is optimizedregarding the equal distribution of rows and therequired number of characteristics.

This attribute is only included whenHORITONTAL_ALIGNMENT(Define entries next to oneanother) is activated.

Maximum filter value length(FILTER_VALUE_LENGTH)Default value: 80

You specify the number of characters,according to which filter value is indicated, by�Number�.

If you set the value to 0, then the complete filtervalue is displayed.



Frame name for input help(TARGET_HELP_FRAME)(optional)

You can display input help in a different framefrom the data. If you do not activate thisattribute, then input help is displayed in thesame window.

This parameter is not offered in theWeb Application Designer and canonly be used for parameterizationin the Web template.

List of characteristics with read mode(IOBJNM_LIST)

This attribute contains a list of characteristicswith read mode. You can select a characteristicof a structure and activate the read mode for it.

Affected DataProviders(TARGET_DATA_PROVIDER)

Contains a list of all data providers to which thenavigation block is sent.

If you filter according to a characteristic andthen activate this attribute, the different dataproviders for the Web item are notified. Forfurther information about this attribute, seeGeneral Attributes [Seite 114].

List of navigation block entries(ITEM_NAV_BLOCK_IOBJNM_N)(optional)

In the WAD, this attribute isdisplayed using the List ofCharacteristics with Read Modeattribute (IOBJNM_LIST).

Listing the names of characteristics andstructures enables you to determine whichentries appear in the navigation block, and inwhich order.

If you do not specify thisparameter, all characteristics andstructures in the navigation blockare displayed.

Attributes that cannot be set in the Web Application Designer:

MODIFY_CLASS ABAP class that changes the content of thenavigation blockBy using the Web design API for tables, youcan adjust the cell content individually in thenavigation block.

See also:

Web Design API for Tables [Seite 314]

Hierarchical Context MenuDefinitionWeb item that creates a context menu from the hierarchy of a characteristic or structure. Thehierarchy nodes appear as context menu entries and can be set as a filter.

UseYou can filter a query view by hierarchy nodes using the hierarchical context menu.



StructureAs well as its general attributes [Seite 114], the Web item Hierarchical Context Menu has the followingattributes:


Reload level dynamically

(DYNAMIC)

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No


Reload from levels underneaththe start level.

If this attribute is set, the levelsbelow the start level arereloaded dynamically, ifrequired. Otherwise, they arenot offered.

Characteristic/structure

(IOBJNM)

Selection list Select the technical name ofthe characteristic/structure.

The hierarchy and structurenodes are read from the DataProvider and can be used asfilter values in the contextmenu.

Hierarchy name

(HIERARCHY_NAME)

Selection list Technical name of thehierarchy which should beused for filtering nodes. If thefield is blank, the system usesthe hierarchy that is currentlyset.

Version

(HIERARCHY_VERSION)

Selection list Version of the hierarchy thatshould be used for filteringnodes. If the field is blank, thecurrent version of thepresentation hierarchy is used.

Key Date

(DATE)

Key date for which thehierarchy is evaluated.

The hierarchy is used as itexisted on the given date. Ifthis field is blank, the key dateof the query is used.

You can removethe key date usingthe Delete Datepushbutton.

Drill level

(DRILL_LEVEL)

Default value: “3” Maximum drill level of thecontext menu (blank= drilllevel corresponding to querydefinition)



List of DataProviders to whichall hierarchy commands aresent.



FiltersDefinitionA filter is a Web item that displays the filter values resulting from navigation for a query view in theWeb application.

UseThe Web item Filter displays the filter values that have been generated by navigating in a queryview in a Web application. You also use filters to select individual values.

StructureAs well as its general attributes [Seite 114], the Filter Web item has the following attributes:


Display Filter ValuesPRESENTATION (optional)PRESENTATION_N (optional)'KEY' = key

'TEXT' = Descriprtion

'KEY_TEXT' = Key and description

'TEXT_KEY' = Description and key

The filter value is displayed in accordance withthe setting. If no display is specified for anindex, the index 0 display (no index) is used.

If this parameter is not specified,the display, which is valid for thecharacteristic, is used.

List of characteristics(ITEM_LIST)

List of characteristics with display

Maximum filter value length(FILTER_VALUE_LENGTH)Default value: 0

You specify the number of characters,according to which a filter value is indicated, by“...”.

If you keep the value as 0 (default),the complete filter value isdisplayed.

Only display values(ONLY_VALUES)"X" = Yes, " " = No

When you activate this attribute, the filtervalues are displayed without any labeling, andthe formatting is separated using semi-colons.



List characteristics and structures(ITEM_FILTER_IOBJNM_N)(optional)

This attribute is displayed in theWeb Application Designer in theattribute list of the characteristic(ITEM_LIST).

Listing the names of characteristics andstructures enables you to determine whichentries appear in the filter and in which order.Only those entries for which a filter value existsare displayed. The remaining entries areskipped over.

If you do not specify thisparameter, all the characteristicsand structures that are filtered aredisplayed.

If you combine ONLY_VALUES=X and ITEM_FILTER_IOBJNM=MyInfoObject, it is possible to identifya single filter value in the Web template. This is also useful in headers, for example.

Displaying filter values for the characteristic Calendar year without formatting<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’GET_ITEM’><param name=’ITEM’ value=’Filter’><param name='ITEM_ID' value='FILTER'><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 ><param name=’ONLY_VALUES’ value=’X’><param name=’ITEM_FILTER_IOBJNM’ value=’0CALYEAR’>ITEM :Filter

</object>

Input field for filtering according to Calendar year with preassigned dynamic filters(only works with single value filters)<form action="<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View 1'FILTER_IOBJNM='0CALYEAR'>" method="post">

Calendar year: <input name="FILTER_VALUE_EXT" size=4 maxlength=4 value="

<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’GET_ITEM’><param name=’ITEM’ value=’Filter’><param name='ITEM_ID' value='FILTER'><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 ><param name=’ONLY_VALUES’ value=’X’><param name=’ITEM_FILTER_IOBJNM’ value=’0CALYEAR’><param name='PRESENTATION' value='KEY'>ITEM :Filter

</object>

<input type=submit value="Submit"><input type=reset value="Reset">

</form>



LabelDefinitionThe Label Web item allows you to display the descriptions of characteristics, attributes, orstructural components. You can also create a link to the context menu of these characteristics,attributes, or structural components.

UseThis Web item, together with the Web items Dropdown Box [Seite 183] and Radio Button Group [Seite185], can be used to configure a comfortable cockpit. You can create navigation blocks by puttingdifferent labels for characteristics and structural components into a table.

StructureAs well as its general attributes [Seite 114], the Label Web item has the following attributes:

Attribute Description

Context menu (CONTEXT_MENU)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

If this attribute is activated, a link to the contextmenu of the characteristic or the structuralcomponent is displayed in the description ofthe characteristic.

Characteristics / Structure (IOBJNM) Name of the characteristic/structureSpecify the technical name of the characteristic(for example, 0COUNTRY) or the structure (25characters) here.

The technical name of the characteristic isstored in the query definition. In the BExtoolbar, choose Change Query View �

Change Query (Local View) or (Global View) �. The technical names of the characteristics

are displayed.

Structural component(STRUCTURE_MEMBER)

Structural component whose text or contextmenu is displayed.

Attribute name (ATTRINM) Technical name of the attribute whose headeris to be displayed as a label.

Only display values(ONLY_VALUES)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Unformatted displayOnly the link to the context menu is generated.

If this attribute is activated, only the link to thecontext menu is displayed. The label isdisplayed without formatting. You candetermine in the Web template how you wouldlike to put the link underneath.

If you would like to add a label for a structural component in your Web application, thenyou have to enter the technical name of the structure under InfoObject and enter the filtervalue of the structure under Structural Component (STRUCTURE_MEMBER). The correctvalues are determined as follows:

a. Execute a Web application that contains the structural component.



b. Filter according to the structural component in question: Choose Keep as filter value in thecontext menu of the structural component.

c. Copy the parameter value FILTER_IOBJNM from the URL into the clipboard.

d. Choose the attribute in the Web Application Designer and enter the value that was saved inthe clipboard.

e. Copy the parameter value FILTER_VALUE from the URL into the clipboard.

f. Choose the attribute Structural component from the Web item Label in the Web ApplicationDesigner and enter the value that was saved in the clipboard.

g. Save your entries.

Text ElementsDefinitionWeb item that the text items display for a query view in a Web application.

UseThe Web item Text elements displays the query information that the query view and the Webapplication are based on. It is also possible to choose text elements individually.

StructureThe text elements are similar to the text elements in the BEx Analyzer and are made up of thefollowing parts:

� common text elements:

� technical name of the query (REPTNAME)

� description of the query (REPTXTLG)

� InfoProvider (INFOCUBE)

� key date for the query (SRDATE)

� accuracy of the data (date and time) (ROLLUPTIME)

� the person who wrote the query (AUTHOR)

� the last time the query was changed (date and time) (MODTIME)

� the last person to make changes to the query (MODUSER)

� current user (SYUSER)

� the last time the query was refreshed (date and time) (SYUZEIT)

� variables

� static filter values

As well as its general attributes [Seite 114], the Text Elements Web item has the following attributes:


Display common text elements(SHOW_COMMON_ELEMENTS)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

If you activate this attribute, the common textelements are displayed.



Display static filter values(SHOW_FILTERS)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

If you activate this attribute, the filter valuesthat you determined in the filter area of thequery definition are displayed.

Display variable values(SHOW_VARIABLES)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

If you activate this attribute, the variable valuesfor the query (on which the Web application isbased) are displayed.

List of text elements (ELEMENT_NAME_N) By listing the text element names incombination with their typeELEMENT_TYPE_N, you are able todetermine which entries appear as text itemsand the order in which they appear. Withgeneral text elements the name corresponds toone of the values listed above (under GeneralText Items). With variables the namecorresponds to the variable name, and withfilters the name corresponds to the name of thecharacteristic.

If you do not specify this parameter, all thefiltered characteristics and filteredstructures are displayed.

List of the types of text elements(ELEMENT_TYPE_N)

Both attributes, List of TextElements (ELEMENT_NAME_N)and List of Text Element Types(ELEMENT_TYPE_N), areaddressed in the Web ApplicationDesigner in the Element List(ITEM_LIST) attribute that liesbelow.

See above: List of Text Elements

COMMON = Common text element

FILTER = Static filter value

VARIABLE = Variable value

VARIABLE_KEY = Key for variable value

List of items(ITEM_LIST)

This attribute contains a list of text items withtype and name. You can choose the type oftext item from the list or enter the name of theitem manually.

Only display values(ONLY_VALUES)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

If you activate this attribute, the values for thetext elements are displayed without anylabeling, and the formatting is separated bysemi-colons.

The combination of ONLY_VALUES=X, ITEM_TYPE =COMMON, and ITEM_NAME=REPTXTLG,makes it possible to access a text element directly in the Web template, here for example, the queryname. The name is used in a title, for example.

Display of validity of data, filter value for cost center and values for 2 variables<object>

<param name='OWNER' value='SAP_BW'><param name='CMD' value='GET_ITEM'><param name='ITEM' value='Text'>



<param name='ITEM_CLASS' value='CL_RSR_WWW_TEXT_ELEMENTS'><param name='ELEMENT_TYPE_1' value='COMMON'><param name='ELEMENT_NAME_1' value='ROLLUPTIME'><param name='ELEMENT_TYPE_2' value='FILTER'><param name='ELEMENT_NAME_2' value='0COSTCENTER'><param name='ELEMENT_TYPE_3' value='VARIABLE'><param name='ELEMENT_NAME_3' value='myFirstVariable'><param name='ELEMENT_TYPE_4' value='VARIABLE'><param name='ELEMENT_NAME_4' value='mySecondVariable'><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='MyDataProvider'>

ITEM :Text

</object>

List of ExceptionsDefinitionA Web item that lists the available exceptions for a stored query view, along with their status(active/not active) in the Web application.

UseThe List of Exceptions Web item displays the status of the exceptions for a stored query view in theWeb application, in the form of a table. For each exception, the status of the exception (active/notactive) is also displayed. You can activate or deactivate the exceptions by clicking on the symbol.

StructureThe Web item List of Exceptions has only general attributes.

See General Attributes [Seite 114]

List of ConditionsDefinitionA Web item that displays all the available conditions including their corresponding statuses (active/notactive/not applicable/not used) for a stored query view in the Web application.

UseThe List of Conditions Web item displays the status of conditions for a stored query view in theWeb application, in the form of a table. All the conditions that can be applied to the current navigationstatus for the query view are listed. With every condition that is displayed, the status of the condition isalso displayed (active/not active/not applicable/not used). You use the symbol toactivate/deactivate the conditions.

See also:Using Conditions [Seite 84] in the BEx Analyzer



StructureThe Web item List of Conditions only has general attributes.


Alert MonitorDefinition Reporting Agent [Extern].

UseWith the help of the Alert Monitor Web item, you can go to the query views generated in theException Reporting [Seite 73] and Reporting Agent processes and see at a glance any noticeable,deviating key figures from defined threshold values. You can also set filters.

Since there is only one data source for the Alert Monitor, there is no need to set up theAlert Monitor Web item as a separate data provider. The Alert Monitor Web itemgenerates a suitable data provider for itself and transfers the filter operations to this dataprovider automatically.

StructureAs well as its general attributes [Seite 114], the Alert Monitor Web item has the following attributes:


Query (FILTER_QUERY) You can use this attribute to filter according toentries that come under a specific query. If youdo not specify a query, no filter applies.

Display minimal view list (MINIMAL_VIEW)(optional)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

When you go to the detail view, only the keyfigure columns are displayed for whichexceptions can arise.

If you do not specify the parameter, the keyfigures are shown as scheduled.

InfoCube (FILTER_INFOCUBE) You can use this attribute to filter according toentries that come under a specific InfoCube. Ifyou do not specify an InfoCube, no filterapplies.

InfoArea (FILTER_INFOAREA) You can use this attribute to filter according toentries that come under a specific InfoArea. Ifyou do not specify an InfoArea, no filterapplies.

Red entries (FILTER_RED)"X" = Yes, " " = No

If you activate this attribute, you see the rowswith at least one red entry.

Yellow entries (FILTER_YELLOW)"X" = Yes, " " = No

If you activate this attribute, you see the rowswith at least one yellow entry.

Green entries (FILTER_GREEN)"X" = Yes, " " = No

If you activate this attribute, you see the rowswith at least one green entry.



Display highest alert level(DISPLAY_MAX_LEVEL)"X" = Yes, " " = No

Instead of displaying red, yellow, and greenentries with their frequency for each queryview, you can display just the entry with thehighest alert level. This may make the displayeasier to study.

Number of rows in table (BLOCK_SIZE)Default value: 10

Number of rows displayed at once in the table.

With the help of this attribute, you candetermine the number of entries you want todisplay at the same time.

We recommend that you restrictthe number of entries, especiallywhen the number of alerts is high.

If you set the value to 0, all entriesare displayed.

If there are more rows with alerts,an index is added for you to scrolldown.

Display as hierarchy (HIERARCHY)"X" = Yes, " " = No

If you activate this attribute, the alerts aredisplayed in a hierarchy, starting with the levelof InfoArea, InfoProvider, and query, and goingup to the individual query views. If youdeactivate this attribute, the alerts aredisplayed as a flat list. This means only thequery views are displayed (no InfoAreas,InfoProviders, or queries).

Template for display(TARGET_TEMPLATE_ID)(optional)

Web template, on which the detail view displayis based.

List display(LIST_FOCUS_LEVEL)

This setting only affects the non-hierarchicaldisplay. You can choose between INFOAREA,INFOCUBE, QUERY, VIEW, CELL, andEXCEPTION. Only lines of this type aredisplayed, according to the selection.

List of columns with labels(COLUMN_LIST)

You can structure the columns however youwant and display headers for the individualcolumns.

This attribute compounds theattributes COLUMN_NAME andCOLUMN_CAPTION.

Display column captions(DISPLAY_COLUMN_CAPTION)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

If you do not activate this attribute, then thecolumn headings are not displayed.

Display toolbar(DISPLAY_TOOLBAR)

If this attribute is specified, then the user canuse it to control the parameters FILTER_RED,FILTER_YELLOW, FILTER_GREEN,HIERARCHY, and LIST_FOCUS_LEVEL.



Display DataProvider(DISPLAY_DATA_PROVIDER)(optional)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

The detail view for an entry can also bedisplayed in the same Web template. To dothis, the logical name of the DataProvider to beused for the display must be specified. TheWeb items that retrieve your data from thisDataProvider display the detail view for theAlert Monitor entry automatically.

Detail frame (TARGET_FRAME) Name of the frame for the detail viewIf you do not specify a detail frame, the detailview is displayed using pure HTML in the samewindow and opens a separate window usingactivated Java Script.

The parameters JUMP_WBID and JUMP_PAGEID used in BW 2.x are still supported.However, we recommend you no longer use these.

Role MenuDefinitionThe Role Menu Web item displays user favorites and/or roles in a tree.

UseYou can restrict the role menu to user favorites and roles or to a particular role. No menu entries areshown if the user is not assigned to this particular role. You can filter the menu entries according tovarious categories. A menu entry is a URL in a BEx Web application, for example. You can use theattribute TARGET to define in which window the URL is executed.

StructureAs well as its general attributes [Seite 114], the Role Menu Web item has the following attributes:


Role name(ROLE)

Restriction to favorites and/or roles or to aparticular role.When ROLE is empty, the user favorites androles are displayed. The favorites can bedisplayed with ROLE=SAP_BW_FAVORITES_(with two _ between SAP_BW andFAVORITES_). Enter the technical name of therole when you want to restrict the display to aparticular role.

Number of levels.(LEVEL)‘0’ = all levels

Number of levels that are initially read.The role menu is loaded initially with thespecified levels. Further levels are readdynamically by expanding folders. All levels areread for LEVEL=0.



Filters(FILTER)

Filter menu entries according to typeYou can filter according to the following typesor type combinations.

� 'U' = URLs

� 'P ' = Web templates

� ‘Y’ = Queries

� 'R ' = Crystal Reports

All entries for these types are displayed when afilter is not specified.

For example, the filter ‘UP’ showsall URLs and Web templates withreference to ROLE.

Name of the target frame(TARGET)

Name of the frame for executing menuentries.The URL is executed in the specified framebehind a menu entry.

Scrollbar presentation(SCROLL_STYLE)“Auto” = Automatic scrollbar presentation

“Yes” = Scrollbar always displayed

“No” = Scrollbars never displayed

Scrollbar presentationScrollbars are displayed either dependently onthe size of the contents (Auto) or independentlyof the size, either always (Yes) or never (No).

Display with IFrame(IFRAME)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Display as IFrameYou can display the Role Menu Web item in anIframe (a frame imbedded in HTML) or in aFrameset. On the one hand, the combinationfrom other Web items with the Role Menu Webitem is possible for an IFrame. On the otherhand, Netscape 4.7 and PDAs do not supportIFrames. Only the Role Menu Web item isdisplayed for the Frameset. The other Webitems are ignored.

The advantage of IFrames is that they allowyou to structure the HTML page for the rolemenu freely, for example, with text, logos, orother Web items. The role menu in the frameset is created generically and cannot bechanged externally.

If a role menu is called up withIFrame on Netscape 4.7 or on aPDA, the IFrame is ignored and aframeset is automatically sent tothe Web browser.

Display with frames and IFrame(IFRAME_STYLE)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Displaying the frame around the IFrameA frame border is displayed around the IFrame.The proposed value is ‘ ‘ = No.



User and logo display(DISPLAY_USER)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

User and logo displayAbove the role menu, the user name isdisplayed along with a logo.

Path of the logo icon(ICON_LOGO)

Path of the logo iconThe path of the icon in the MIME repositorythat is displayed as a logo. You can only usethis attribute in the context of DISPLAY_USER.For example: ‘Bex/Icons/s_logo.gif’

TickerDefinitionThe Web item Ticker enables you to display the content of a table as a ticker.

UseTo use the ticker, you need a Web browser that enables JavaScript.

StructureAs well as its general attributes [Seite 114], the Role Menu Web item has the following attributes:


Create invisible form(ONLY_VALUES)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Create invisible form.

You can create an invisible form so that youcan further process the ticker text.

Separator(SEPARATOR)

Separator between two ticker rows.

Separators are added when the data for a newdata row is displayed.

Speed in milliseconds.(SPEED)Default value: 200

Time in milliseconds until the ticker movesagain.

Width of the ticket text in characters(TICKER_SIZE)Default value: 60

Width of the ticket text in characters.

Place title at start of ticker text(USE_CAPTION)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No


Place title at start of ticker text.

Delay in milliseconds(DELAY)Default value: 3000

Delay in milliseconds until the ticker starts run.



MapsPurposeMany characteristics in the Business Information Warehouse, for example, customer, sales region,and country, contain important geographical characteristics. The geographical information can beevaluated in a map together with the business-orientated, relevant key figures.

Use maps to visualize business-oriented connections and distributions. You can clearly displayspecific key figures as color shading, pie charts, or bar charts for a country, a region, or a city.

You have the option to change the view of a map in which you either zoom in to display a detailedview or zoom out for an overall view. In this way, it becomes easier to view, for example, the salesanalysis of a specific product that refers to a specific region or a country You can recognize thepotential or dangers of a market all at a glance.

IntegrationMaps help you with reporting geo-relevant data. By using the map Web item, you determine ageographical display in the BEx Web Application Designer for your business-oriented data for the Webapplication.

Geo-relevant InfoObjects are stored and maintained in the Metadata Repository. The master data forgeo-InfoObjects is equipped with geo-attributes. Assigning the range of geographic to business-oriented data (mapping/geocoding) using an external tool: ArcView from ESRI (EnvironmentalSystems Research Institute).

FunctionsWith maps you prepare and evaluate data of a geographical nature (characteristics such as customer,sales region, and country, for example). The geo-relevant data is displayed graphically on a map.Using enhanced navigation options (“geographical drilldown”), regional information can be evaluatedmore easily at different levels of detail. A map shows the spatial proximity of places and regions,allowing geographical connections to be more clearly represented.



ProcessThe following graphic illustrates the geographic evaluation of data run by the system:

Business Explorer

BW Server

Administrator Workbench

Staging EngineStaging Engine

BAPIBAPI

InfoCubesMaster DataInfoCubesInfoCubes

Master DataMaster Data

AnalyzerAnalyzer

Grid Data Grid Data Map DataMap Data

APIAPI

OLAP ProcessorOLAP Processor

BrowserBrowser

Meta DataRepositoryMeta DataRepository

GeoCoding

GISInfoObject

GeoCoordinates

1. In the InfoObject maintenance, flag the geo-relevant characteristics (country, for example) that youwant to use as geo-characteristics.

2. You load the corresponding shapefiles [Extern] into the BW system. You maintain the assignmentof shape file and master data (mapping between geo-characteristic and shape file). SeeMaintaining the SAPBWKEY for Static Geo-Characteristics [Extern]

If you want to use the maps to report on geo-characteristics that show information in pointform (customer, plant, sales office, for example) you have to geocode these characteristics.See Geocoding [Extern].

3. In the BEx Web Application Designer you include a map in your Web application and connectthese with a data source and a previously-defined query. By using these attributes, you determinethe map display and the business-oriented data.

Finally, you publish the application on the Web. You navigate in the map to report further onthe geo-relevant data.

Map AttributesDefinitionThe Map Web item consists of the objects Map and Map layer. They are used to display business datageographically.

UseYou use the Map object to define a map’s basic display.

The Map Layer object is used to define the different map layers; map layers are components, withwhich you construct a map.

Attributes control how a map and its layers are displayed in the Web application.



You can find informationen about layer attributes under Attributes for Map Layers [Seite 208].

The following section looks at attributes for the Map object.

StructureThe map object has two kinds of attributes, as do all other Web items:

1. General attributes that are fundamental to all display types.

The general attributes for the Map object are the same as the general attributes [Seite 114] forall Web items. The Map object also has some additional general attributes. In the WebApplication Designer, you can find the general attributes in the Properties window, on the Webitem � General tab page.

2. Special attributes which depending on the individual Web item.

In the Web Application Designer, you can find the special attributes in the Properties window,on the Web item � Special tab page.

General attributes


Title (CAPTION) Title of the map

Generate title

(GENERATE_CAPTION)� ‘X’ = Yes

� ‘ ‘ = No

Default setting ‘X’ = Yes

Setting the indicatorautomatically generates a titlefor the map as in"SAPBEXTableCaption".

Width in pixels

(WIDTH)

Input in pixels

Standard setting “300”

Width of the map and legendin pixels

Map height

(HEIGHT)

Input in pixels


Height of the map in pixelstaking geographic relationsinto consideration

Compute map heightautomatically

(IGNORE_HEIGHT)

� ‘X’ = Yes

� ‘ ‘ = No


Ignores the height setmanually (map heightattribute) and calculates theheight automatically using theheight/width relationship in theunderlying map.

(BORDER_STYLE) � With border

� Without border

� For form

Default setting “No borders”

Type of border drawn aroundobject.

Collapsed

(CLOSED)� ‘X’ = Yes

� ‘ ‘ = No

Default setting ‘ ‘ = No

Setting the indicator meansthe map is collapsed when theWeb application is opened.

Hide object

(HIDDEN)� ‘X’ = Yes

� ‘ ‘ = No

Default setting ‘ ‘ = No

If the indicator is set, neitherthe map nor the title isdisplayed in the Webapplication.

Objects with navigation links

(GENERATE_LINKS)� ‘X’ = Yes

� ‘ ‘ = No


When the indicator is set, a animage map is generated formap which enables navigationwithin it. At the same time, the



corresponding attributes of allthe levels belonging to themap are also set to ‘X’ = Yes.

Special attributes


Map layers

(LAYERS)

This attribute defines whichlayers and the number oflayers from which your mapshould be built.

Geo-functions

(GEO_FUNCTIONS_POS)� Do not display

� Top

� Bottom

� Left

� Right

Default setting: "Do notdisplay"

Position of the geographicfunction bar in relation to themap.

Legend position

(LEGEND_POSITION)� Left of the map

� Right of the map

� no legend

Default setting "Right of themap"

Position of the legend inrelation to the map.

Legend size

(LEGEND_SIZE)

Input in pixels


Size of the legend in pixels

Visible map area

(MAP_EXTENT)� Data with associated

geography

� data only

� Data and the allavailable geography

Default setting: “Data withassociated geography”

Specifies which areas of amap are displayed in the Webapplication. This depends onthe stored data in theapplication.

“Data with associatedgeography”, the defaultsetting, allows you to displaydata taking the correspondinggeographic context intoaccount.

Map background transparent

(CART_COLOR_TRANSPARENT)

� ‘X’ = Yes

� ‘ ‘ = No


Setting the indicator meansthat the "Map backgroundcolor" attribute is ignored andthe background appears astransparent in the Webapplication.

Background color

(CART_BACKGROUND_COLOR)

Color value Background color of the map.

The color values are selectedin a color selection dialog.

Fill color (no data) Color value Fill color of a region if it is notstored with data.



(CART_FILL_COLOR) The color values are selectedin a color selection dialog.

Map outline color

(CART_OUTLINE_COLOR)

Color value Color of the map outline.


Map outline width

(CART_OUTLINE_WIDTH)

Input in pixels


Width of the map outline inpixels.

Attributes for Map LayersDefinitionObjects that define the different layers in a map.

UseThe layers of a map contain different geographic and business information. The individual layers arelaid over one another in the Web application and, in this way, make up the overall view of the map.You can show or hide individual layers and change the information contained in a map.

For each map layer, you must define how the data is displayed in this layer. Do this by selecting a MapRenderer [Seite 223].

StructureThe Map Layer object has two kinds of attributes, as do all other Web items:

1. General attributes that are fundamental to all display types.

The general attributes for the Map Layer object are the same as the general attributes for allWeb items. In the Web Application Designer, you can find the general attributes in theProperties window, on the Web item � General tab page.


2. Special attributes that vary according to the selected map renderer.

Special attributes appear in the Web Application Designer depending on the map renderer, inthe Web item � Special tabpage.

You can select the map renderer from the selection list of the Renderer for a Map on theWeb Item � Special tabpage.

You can find additional information about the special attributes for the individual map rendererunder

Special Attributes for Color Shading [Seite 209]

Special Attributes for Bar Charts [Seite 210]

Special Attributes for Pie Charts [Seite 211]

Special Attributes for Pie Charts (split) [Seite 212]



Special Attributes for Dot Densities [Seite 213]

Special Attributes for Symbol [Seite 214]

Special Attributes for Symbol (Size-dependent) [Seite 215]

Special Attributes for Symbol (Color-dependent) [Seite 217]

Special Attributes for Line [Seite 218]

Special Attributes for Line (Size-dependent) [Seite 219]

Special Attributes for Lines (Color-dependent) [Seite 220]

Special Attributes for Color ShadingDefinitionA map renderer, with which you determine how BW data is displayed in a map layer.

UseThe color shading map renderer allows you to display color classes that correspond to special valueclasses.

StructureAttribute Values Description

Number of classes

(CLASSES)

Number of color levels(variable “n”)

Initial color

(COLOR_START)

Color value Defines the color of thesymbol that represents thesmallest data value in theconnected data source.


End color

(COLOR_END)

Color value Defines the color of thesymbol that represents thelargest data value in theconnected data source.


Individual values

(CS_DYN)

List Individual values entry forcolor and class boundaries.

Color interpolation

(COLOR_INTERPOLATION)

RGB (Color value)

HSB (color area)

You can determine the colorinterpolation method here.Colors between the start andthe end color are interpolatedlinearly.

Color (if no data)

(COLOR_NONE)

Color value Defines a color value for fillingall the regions of a map thatdo not have data in the



connected data source.


ToolTip for map layer

(GENERATE_TOOLTIP)

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No


This attribute allows you todisplay tooltips for the maplayer.

Map Layer Label

(LABEL)

“No Label”

“Text as label”

“Key as label”

Default setting: “No Label”

This attribute allows you tolabel the map.



List List of data providers to whichall commands of the map layerare sent.

Map interaction control

(IMAGEMAP_PATTERN)

“Normal context menu afterclicking on map”

“Filtering for data providersafter clicking on map”

How the map interactionappears. You can use thisattribute to determine whichaction is to take place whenclicking on the map, as analternative to the contextmenu.

You can find additionalinformation about this attributein the WEB API Reference,section Web Item � Map��Map Layer.

Special Attributes for Bar ChartsDefinitionA map renderer, with which you determine how BW data is displayed in a map layer.

UseYou can display values in the form of bars with the bar chart map renderer.


Bar height

(BAR_HEIGHT)

Input in pixels

Default value: “30”

Defines the maximum heightof a bar in the diagram. Thisheight corresponds to thelargest value of the connecteddata source.

Bar width

(BAR_WIDTH)

Input in pixels

Default value: “10”

Defines the width of the bar inthe diagram.



Individual color values

(COLOR_VALUE)

Entry for individual colorvalues


(GENERATE_TOOLTIP)

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No



Map Layer Label

(LABEL)

“No Label”

“Text as label”

“Key as label”







(IMAGEMAP_PATTERN)

“Normal context menu withclick on map”

“Filtering for data providerswith click on map”


You can find additionalinformation about this attributein the WEB API Reference,section Web Item® Map ®MapLayer.

Special Attributes for Pie ChartsDefinitionA map renderer, with which you determine how BW data is displayed in a map layer.

UseYou can display values in the form of pie charts with the pie chart renderer.


Individual color values

(COLOR_VALUE)

Entry for individual colorvalues

Pie diameter (maximum)

(PIE_MAX)

Input in pixels Defines the largest diameter ofa circle in the diagram. Thisdiameter is the sum of all themaximum values displayed inthe Web application.

If you set "circle diameter



(minimum) = circle diameter(maximum)“, all the circles inthe Web application aredisplayed with the samediameter.

Pie diameter (minimum)

(PIE_MIN)

Input in pixels Defines the smallest diameterof a circle in the diagram. Thisdiameter is the sum of all theminimum values displayed inthe Web application.

If you set "circle diameter(minimum) = circle diameter(maximum)“, all the circles inthe Web application aredisplayed with the samediameter.


(GENERATE_TOOLTIP)

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No



Map Layer Label

(LABEL)

“No Label”

“Text as label”

“Key as label”







(IMAGEMAP_PATTERN)





Special Attributes for Pie Charts (split)

DefinitionA map renderer, with which you determine how BW data is displayed in a map layer.



UseYou can use the split pie chart renderer to display values in the form of split pie charts. In a split piechart, the split occurs automatically if there is a "change of group" (that is from sales for the 1st quarterof 2001 to the sales for the 2nd quarter of 2001).

StructureThe special attributes of the split pie chart renderer are identical with the special attributes of the piechart renderer.

See Special Attributes for the Pie Chart Renderer [Seite 211].

Special Attributes for Dot DensityDefinitionA map renderer, with which you determine how BW data is displayed in a map layer.

UseYou can use the dot density renderer to display values in a map using dot densities.


Dot base value

(BASE_VALUE)

Describes the basis value for adot (symbol). Example: Whenchoosing the value 1000 forthe BASE_VALUE(“BASE_VALUE = 1000”),and the data value for France,say, is 7400, the systemproduces the result7400/1000= 7.4 (rounded to7). 7 dots appear in the Francemap area, and these dots aredistributed randomly.

Color (COLOR) Color value Dot color (symbols)

The color value is selected viaa color selection dialog box.

Maximum density, per cent

(DENSITY)

Input in percent Defines how dense the pointsshould be displayed in aregion for the largest value ofthe connected data source.

The attributes "Value for asymbol" and "Maximumdensity in %" are self-exclusive and may not beused at the same time.

Size/With

(SIZE)

Input in pixels Defines the size of the points(symbols).

Symbol type “Circle” Defines the symbol with whichthe data is displayed in a



(STYLE) “Rectangle”

“Triangle”

“Cross”

layer.


(GENERATE_TOOLTIP)

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No



Map Layer Label

(LABEL)

“No Label”

“Text as label”

“Key as label”







(IMAGEMAP_PATTERN)




You can find additionalinformation about this attributein the Web API Reference,section Web Item� Map�Map Layer.

Special Attributes for SymbolsDefinitionA map renderer, with which you determine how BW data is displayed in a map layer.

UseYou can display values using symbols with the Symbol renderer.


Color

(VALUE)

Color value Symbol color as RGB value


Size/With

(SIZE)

Input in pixels Defines the size of thesymbols that represent thedata.

Symbol type Circle Defines the symbol with which



(STYLE) Rectangle

Triangle

Cross

the data is displayed in alayer.


(GENERATE_TOOLTIP)

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No



Map Layer Label

(LABEL)

“No Label”

“Text as label”

“Key as label”







(IMAGEMAP_PATTERN)





Special Attributes for Symbol (Size-dependent)DefinitionA map renderer, with which you determine how BW data is displayed in a map layer.

UseYou can use the symbol (size-dependent) renderer to display values using size-dependent symbols.The renderer takes the location and data values for this location into consideration. The size of thesymbols depends on the data.


Number of classes

(CLASSES)

Number of size levels (variable“n”)



Color

(COLOR)

Color value Symbol color


Individual values

(SG_SYM_DYN)

List Individual values entry forsymbol sizes and classboundaries.

Symbol (end size)/

Line (end width)

(SIZE_END)

Input in pixels Defines the symbol size / linewidth that represents thelargest data value in theconnected data source.

Symbol (starting size) /

Line (starting width)

(SIZE_START)

Input in pixels Defines the symbol size / linewidth that represents thesmallest data value in theconnected data source.

Symbol type

(Style)

“Circle”

“Rectangle”

“Triangle”

“Cross”

Defines the symbol with whichthe data is displayed in alayer.


(GENERATE_TOOLTIP)

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No



Map Layer Label

(LABEL)

“No Label”

“Text as label”

“Key as label”







(IMAGEMAP_PATTERN)




You can find additionalinformation about this attributein the WEB API Reference,section Web Item� Map�Map Layer.



Special Attributes for Symbol (Color-dependent)DefinitionA map renderer, with which you determine how BW data is displayed in a map layer.

UseYou can display values using color-dependent symbols with the Symbol (color-dependent) renderer.The renderer takes the location and data values for this location into consideration. The color of thesymbols depends on the data.


Individual values

(CG_SYM_DYN)

Individual values entry forcolor values and classboundaries.

Number of classes

(CLASSES)


End color

(COLOR_END)



Color interpolation

(COLOR_INTERPOLATION)

RGB

HSB

Color interpolation method

Defines the method with whichthe color values that liebetween the starting and endcolors are interpolated. Thesecolor values represent thedata that lies between thesmallest and largest values ofthe data source.

Initial color

(COLOR_START)



Size/With

(SIZE)

Input in pixels Defines the size of thesymbols that represent thedata.

Symbol type

(STYLE)

Circle

Rectangle

Triangle

Cross

Describes how a symbol isdisplayed.


(GENERATE_TOOLTIP)

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No



Map Layer Label “No Label” This attribute allows you to



(LABEL) “Text as label”

“Key as label”


label the map.





(IMAGEMAP_PATTERN)





Special Attributes for LineDefinitionA map renderer, with which you determine how BW data is displayed in a map layer.

UseThe Line renderer displays values with a line going from a starting to an end point.


Color

(COLOR)

Color value Line color.


Layer (starting points)

(FROM_LAYER)

Layer for starting points

Defines the layer on which theline’s starting points lie.

All starting points must lie onone layer.

Line type

(LINE_STYLE)

“Continuous”

“Dotted”

“Dashed”

Defines how the lines aredisplayed.



Size/With

(SIZE)

Input in pixels Defines the width of the line.

Layer (end points)

(TO_LAYER)

Layer for end points

Defines the layer on which theend points of the lines lie.

All end points must lie on onelayer.


(GENERATE_TOOLTIP)

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No



Map Layer Label

(LABEL)

“No Label”

“Text as label”

“Key as label”







(IMAGEMAP_PATTERN)

“Normal context menu afterclicking on map”

“Filter data providers afterclicking on map”



Special Attributes for Line (Size-dependent)DefinitionA map renderer, with which you determine how BW data is displayed in a map layer.

UseYou can use the bar chart map renderer to display values in the form of bars.


Number of classes Number of size levels (variable



(CLASSES)“n”)

Color

(COLOR)

Color value Line color.


Line type

(LINE_STYLE)

“Continuous”

“Dotted”

“Dashed”


Individual values

(SG_LI_DYN)

Entry of individual values forline width and class boundary.

Symbol (end width) / line (endwidth)

(SIZE_END)

Symbol/line end width

Symbol (start width) / line(start width)

Symbol/Line start width


(GENERATE_TOOLTIP)

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No



Map Layer Label

(LABEL)

“No Label”

“Text as label”

“Key as label”







(IMAGEMAP_PATTERN)







Special Attributes for Lines (Color-dependent)DefinitionA map renderer, with which you determine how BW data is displayed in a map layer.

UseThe line (color-dependent) renderer displays values with a line from the starting to the end point. Thedata values define the color of a line.


Individual values

(CG_LI_DYN)

Individual values entry forcolor values and classboundaries.

Number of classes

(CLASSES)


End color

(COLOR_END)



Color interpolation RGB

HSB

Defines the method with whichthe color values that liebetween the starting and endcolors are interpolated. Thesecolor values represent thedata that lies between thesmallest and largest values ofthe data source.

Initial color

(COLOR_START)



Line type

(LINE_STYLE)

“Continuous”

“Dotted”

“Dashed”


Size/With

(SIZE)

Input in pixels Defines the width of the line.


(GENERATE_TOOLTIP)

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No



Map Layer Label

(LABEL)

“No Label”

“Text as label”

“Key as label”









(IMAGEMAP_PATTERN)





Array AttributesUseSome map attributes are the so-called array attributes. You can recognize these attributes by thesuffix “(n)“ (see to Map Attributes [Extern]).

This section describes the function of array attributes.

The following are array attributes:

� Symbol size (n)

� Class boundary (n)

� Color value (n)

� Line width (n)

� Bar color (n)

� Segment color (n)

The variable n is the number of classes. You can set this variable with the attribute classnumber

ExampleUse the above attributes to change the default settings in the system. The default settings provide alinear calculation of the interim values for each class.

For example: symbol size (n)

If the attribute symbol size (n) is not set, the size of the symbols displayed in a map, starting withstarting value A and ending with end value B, are distributed linearly across the number of classes. Ifyou have for example 4 classes, a starting size of 8 and an end size of 20 points, you would get thefollowing values for the individual class sizes:

� Class 1 -8 points






You can adjust this automatic assignment by manually setting the values for the attribute symbol size(n), for example, in the following way:





The attributes symbol size (n), color value (n) and line width (n) are always bound to theattribute class boundary (n). That is, when you set one of these attributes, you also needto set a value for the corresponding class boundary.

For further information about the use of these objects, go to the SAP Service Marketplace on the BWpages under Documentation � Documentation Enhancements � Web API Reference in the sectionWeb Items � Maps.

Map RendererDefinitionWith a map renderer, you determine how BW data is displayed on a map layer.

StructureThere are 11 different map renderers in the BEx Web Application Designer. These renderers aredivided into three different classes:

Class 1: Renderers that relate to polygonal areas (static geo-characteristics). They display thefollowing:

� Color shading (COLORSHADING or CS)

� Bar charts (BAR)

� Pie charts (PIE)

� Pie charts (divided) (SPLITPIE)

� Pixel density (DOTDENSITY or D_DENSITY)

For these renderers, the static geo-characteristic must appear in the related data provider inthe rows and the values to be displayed in the renderer must be in the columns. You can usehierarchies in both cases. You cannot have any other characteristic other than the geo-characteristic, or any key figure in the rows. You can use several characteristics or key figuresin the columns.

Class 2: Renderers that relate to locations (dynamic geo-characteristics). They display the following:

� Symbol (SYMBOL)

� Symbol (size-dependent) (SIZEGRADUATEDSYMBOL or SG_SYMBOL)



� Symbol (color-dependent) (COLORGRADUATEDSYMBOL or CG_SYMBOL)

� Bar charts (BAR)

� Pie charts (PIE)

� Pie charts (divided) (SPLITPIE)

For these renderers the dynamic geo-characteristic must appear in the data providerbelonging to it in the rows. You must have also selected the Longitude and Latitude displayattributes to be displayed. You cannot have any other characteristics or key figures in therows. Only the first column is considered by the symbol renderers. The renderers bar chart,pie chart and pie chart (divided) consider all columns.

Class 3: Renderers that display relationships between locations (dynamic geo-characteristics):

� Line (LINE)

� Line (size-dependent) (SIZEGRADUATEDLINE or SG_LINE)

� Line (color-dependent) (COLORGRADUATEDLINE or CG_LINE)

It is important to have at least three map layers for these renderers. You define Start Point inone map layer and the End Point in another map layer. The prerequisites described in class 2are also valid for both of these map layers. The third map layer contains the relationshipbetween the dynamic geo-characteristics Start Point and End Point, that is, bothcharacteristics must be in the rows. The same prerequisites are valid for the columns asdescribed in class 2.

For those map renderers that have a long technical name, you can specify a shorter,alternative name (for example, COLORGRADUATEDLINE or CG_LINE). Both variationsare supported.

IntegrationSo that you can present the BW business data on individual map layers graphically, you have toassign a map renderer to each map layer in the BEx Web Application Designer and determine theproperties for this renderer.

Example of a Renderer in Class 3Map layer query view that describes the relationship

Sales Office Sales Representative Sales

A 1 100 $

A 2 150 $

A 3 120 $

B 11 90 $

B 12 80 $

Map layer query view that describes the start point

Sales Office Longitude Latitude # Employees

A 2.3 3.4 120

A 2.3 3.4 15

A 2.3 3.4 120

B -3.5 -2.0 87

B -3.5 -2.0 80



Map layer query view that describes the end point

SalesRepresentative

Longitude Latitude # Customers

1 2.8 4.7 12

2 2.6 5.7 11

3 2.4 6.7 13

11 -3.8 -1.2 23

12 -3.4 -1.8 21

Single DocumentDefinitionWeb item allowing you to display single documents that you created in the Administrator Workbenchor in master data maintenance for master data in the Web application.

UseYou can create the documents in different formats and versions (see Documents [Extern]). Forexample you can add several documents such as route directions and a picture of the local office foreach value of a characteristic, such as Business partner. You can use the document type attribute todecide which document you want to display in the Web application.

StructureAs well as its general attributes [Seite 114], the Web item Single document has the followingattributes:


Characteristics (IOBJNM) Name of the characteristic which the Web itemSingle document should reference.

Give the technical name of the characteristichere (25 character string).



Document type (WWW_DOC_TYPE) If you created several documents for acharacteristic in the Administrator Workbenchor in the master data maintenance screen, thedifferent document types that reference thecharacteristic are displayed here for selection.

If you do not make an entry here,the system assumes that there is adocument for the selectedcharacteristic.

If this is not the case you get amessage

� that no document was found or

� that the document is not unique (thereis more than one)

Default picture (DEFAULT_PICTURE_URL) Absolute or relative URL for a picture. Thispicture is displayed in a Web item if nodocument has been found, or if the documentis not consistent. Pictures from the MIMERepository can be selected here using arelative address.

Document display style (IS_INPLACE)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

You can define if the single document isdisplayed

� in the Web application (“X”)

� in a separate window (" ")

with this attribute.

Inplace ("X") is especially suitable for screensand short texts.

Links to document display(LINK_TO_BROWSER)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

You can use this attribute to determine whetheryou can link from the document to the generaldocument display.

If the value is set to X, clicking on the picturedisplays all documents for the currently filteredcharacteristic value (or all documents for thecharacteristic master data, if no value is in thefilter) in a separate window.

List of DocumentsDefinitionWeb item that displays a list of documents in the Web application. You can also create newdocuments [Seite 379] yourself in the Web application.



UseThe Web item List of Documents enables you to call or create context-sensitive information about thetransaction data used in the Web application. If you navigate in the Web application and, for example,restrict a characteristic to a certain characteristic value, the list of documents is automatically adjusted.This means that only the documents that are relevant for the restricted navigation status appear.

The documents for the characteristics that were set as the Document Properties in theAdministrator Workbench appear automatically in the list.

StructureThe Web item List of Documents has the following structure:

� ContextThe context is the counterpart to the navigation block and shows the characteristics that areDocument Properties and are contained in the basic data provider (query or query view), andtheir values.

If you have already inserted a navigation block into your Web template, you do not needthe context information in the list of documents if you want to see only those documentsthat refer to the numbers of the table.

The context is adjusted dynamically depending on the navigation in the Web application. Thismeans that the list of documents displays only those documents that refer to the requesteddata in the table. If the context can be changed, you can also focus on the documents and, forexample, display all the documents that refer to the InfoProvider.

You can set the following in the Web Application Designer using attributes:

� Whether or not you want to display the context

� Whether or not you can change the context in the Web report

� Further FunctionsYou can also:

� Create a new document [Seite 379]

� Set whether or not the characteristics of the documents are to be displayed

� Choose all the selections. In the context, all the characteristics for which you can restrict thelist of documents or a new document are displayed.

� List of DocumentsThe links to the documents are listed here in alphabetical order.

In addition to its general attributes [Seite 114], the List of Documents Web item has the followingattributes:




Display Properties(SHOW_PROPERTIES)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

This attribute indicates if the documentproperty is to be displayed. The documentproperties tell you about how the documentsare assigned, for example base planning object4711, month of May. The context to which thedocument was restricted determines theassignment.

If a document property is identicalfor all selected documents, thisproperty is not displayed under thedocument link.

You define the initial display with the DocumentProperties attribute. Using Further Functions,you can toggle the display of the properties inthe Web application.

Furthermore, in thePROPERTY_LIST attribute youcan set which additional documentproperties need to be displayedhere.

Context Information(SHOW_CONTEXT)'X' = is changeable

'N' = is not changeable, but is displayed

' ' = is not displayed

With this attribute you can indicate whether thecontext, meaning the selection conditions forthe documents for the List of Documents Webitem, is displayed, as well as whether theseselection conditions are changeable.

Number of Rows in the Table(BLOCK_SIZE)

With this attribute you can define the number ofrows (document links and properties) that aredisplayed at one time. If there are not enoughrows, an index for scrolling appears in thebottom row.

Maximum Number of Displayed Values(MAXVALUES)

With this attribute you can define the maximumnumber of characteristic values to be displayedin the dropdown box of the context.

Document Changeable(DOCUMENTS_ARE_CHANGEABLE)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

With this attribute you can define whetherdocuments can be created, changed, ordeleted.



Frame for Display(TARGET_FRAME)

Here, you can specify an HTML frame in whichthe individual documents that you call from thelist of documents is displayed.

The HTML frame must beintegrated in the Web template.

If you use the Web template withina frame set, you can also integratethe List of Documents Web item inanother frame of this set.

If you do not define an HTML frame, theindividual documents are displayed in separatewindows.

Additional Properties(PROPERTY_LIST)

Additional document properties that aredisplayed for each document displayed in theWeb item. Here, you can set the followingproperties:

LAST_CHANGED_BY: Last person to makechanges

LAST_CHANGED_AT: Change time

CREATED_BY: Creator

CREATED_AT: Creation time

CHECKOUT_USER: Editor

LANGUAGE: Language

Ad-hoc Query DesignerDefinitionA Web item that enables you to create and change queries in a Web application on an ad-hoc basis.

UseYou can use the Ad-hoc Query Designer Web item in the Web Application Designer to structureWeb applications in which you create or change queries. The Web item is as a tool for designing ad-hoc queries in a Web environment.

In particular it enables you to:

� Create queries by assigning characteristics from an InfoProvider to rows, columns, filters, and freecharacteristics, and including key figures from the InfoProvider in the key figure structure of thequery.

� Restrict or filter key figures and characteristics

� Use predefined key figure structures and restricted or calculated key figures in the query

� Set or change query properties and key figure/characteristic properties in the query

� Create or change conditions and exceptions

When compared with the BEx Query Designer [Extern], the Ad-hoc Query Designer Web item has thefollowing restrictions when creating or changing queries:



� You cannot integrate variables into the query directly.

However, you can use variables in reusable structures, or restricted or calculate key figures,which are used in the Ad-hoc Query Designer

� The query can contain only one structure. This structure has to be the key figure structure and bein the rows or columns of the query.

� You cannot use key figures or key figure structures in the filter.

� You cannot define exception cells, since this requires two structures.

You cannot create reusable structures or restricted or calculated key figures in the Ad-hocQuery Designer Web item.

You can edit existing queries in the Ad-hoc Query Designer Web item, if the queriesadhere to the restrictions laid out above The Ad-hoc Query Designer checks theserequirements when loading a query. If the query is too complex, the query can be loadedinto the Ad-hoc Query Designer but you cannot change it there. You then receive theappropriate message. You can still check and execute the query.

StructureAs well as its generic attributes [Seite 114], the Ad-hoc Query Designer Web item has the followingattributes:


InfoProvider Name (INFOCUBE) Technical name of the InfoProvider used tostart the Ad-hoc Query Designer.

Double-click on the empty value cell next to theattribute InfoProvider Name. The BEx Opendialog box appears. Select the InfoProviderthat you want to use from your history or fromthe complete list under InfoAreas.

Name of Query (QUERY) Technical name of the query used to start theAd-hoc Query Designer.

Double-click on the empty value cell next to theattribute Name of Query. The BEx Open dialogbox appears. Select the query from yourhistory, favorites or roles of from the completelist under InfoAreas.

Template for Output(TARGET_TEMPLATE_ID)optional

Name of the Web template used to display thequery result.

Double-click on the empty value cell next to theattribute Template for Output. The BEx Opendialog box appears. Select the Web templatefrom your history, favorites, roles, or the list ofworkbooks.

If you do not specify a Webtemplate, the default Web templateis used.



Frame for Query Output (TARGET_FRAME)optional

Frame in which the query is displayed whenexecuted.

If you specify a frame, the query output iscontrolled within this frame. Otherwise thequery is displayed in a new browser window.

Prerequisites for specifying a frame:

You have created a frameset in an externalHTML editor or manually (in Notepad).

Action on Execution(ON_EXECUTE)

You can use this attribute to determine whathappens to the Ad-hoc Query Designer Webitem in the Web Application after clicking on theExecute pushbutton in the Ad-hoc QueryDesigner.

The following options are available:

� No change to the itemThe query is executed.

No change is made to the Ad-hocQuery Designer Web item.

� Item is hiddenThe Ad-hoc Query Designerdisappears when executing the query.

If you want to open the Ad-hoc QueryDesigner again, while using thestandard Web template, click on inthe symbol toolbar.

If you are using a different Webtemplate, you need to install the optionof calling up the Ad-hoc QueryDesigner again manually in the Webtemplate.

� Item is compressed The Ad-hoc Query Designer iscompressed when executing the query.You now see the Web item with acompressed arrow and title.

If you want to open the Ad-hoc QueryDesigner again, use the arrow to openit.



Action on closing(ON_CLOSE)

You can use this attribute to determine whathappens to the Ad-hoc Query Designer Webitem in the Web Application after clicking on theClose pushbutton in the Ad-hoc QueryDesigner.

The following options are available:

� No change to the itemAfter closing, the query is closed in thead-hoc query designer. The individualfields (rows, columns, filter, freecharacteristics) are now empty. Thereis no change to the Web item itself.

� Item is hiddenThe Ad-hoc Query Designerdisappears when closing.

If you want to open it again in thestandard Web template, click on inthe symbol toolbar.

If you are using a different Webtemplate, you need to install the optionof calling up the Ad-hoc QueryDesigner again manually in the Webtemplate.

� Item is compressed The Ad-hoc Query Designer iscompressed when closing. You nowsee the Web item with a compressedarrow and title.

If you want to open the Ad-hoc QueryDesigner again, use the arrow to openit.

Display Data Provider(DISPLAY_DATA_PROVIDER)optional

Data provider through which you want todisplay the query in the current Web templateafter you have executed it.

Specify the name of the DataProvider withwhich you want to display the query in the Webtemplate. By double-clicking on an empty valuecell next to the Data Provider Display attribute,a dropdown box containing a list of the dataproviders available appears.

If you specifyDISPLAY_DATA_PROVIDER butnot TARGET_FRAME orTARGET_TEMPLATE_ID, whenyou execute the query the displaydata provider specified is replacedin the current Web template.



If you do not specify the optional attributes DISPLAY_DATA_PROVIDER,TARGET_FRAME and TARGET_TEMPLATE_ID, the query results are displayed in a newbrowser window in the default Web template.

IntegrationYou can work with all queries in the BEx Query Designer, regardless of the tool they were createdwith.

What If PredictionDefinitionThe What If Prediction web item enables you to perform online prediction for a single customer recordon models defined under services such as Decision Tree, Scoring and Clustering.

UseThe prediction for prospective customer behavior is based on specific attributes of that customer. Forexample, when a customer applies for a loan, you can predict if the customer is creditworthy or not,based on certain attributes such as income, profession or transaction history.

StructureThe What If Prediction web item has the following specific attributes:




MODEL_NAME (optional) Name of the mining model The name of the model that would be used to perform theprediction.

If you do not enter a model name, a drop down boxcontaining the names of all the models that are ready forprediction in the selected service would appear in the webitem.

If you specify a model name, but do not specify thecorresponding service name to which it belongs, an error willbe generated.

SERVICE_NAME (optional) Name of the serviceThe name of the service for the web item.

If you do not enter the service name, you can choose theservice from a drop down box containing the list of servicesthat support What If Prediction.

If you specify the service name and the model name, thenthe web item will be for that particular service and modelonly.

If you specify the service name but do not specify the modelname, then the web item will be published for that service.You can choose the name of the model from the drop downbox.

DISPLAY_MODEL"X" = Yes, " " = No

Display Model NameSpecifies whether the model name should be displayed inthe web item.

This option is relevant only if you have specified the modelname. Otherwise, it will not have any effect.

DISPLAY_SERVICE"X" = Yes, " " = No

Display Service NameSpecifies whether the service name should be displayed inthe web item.This option is relevant only if you have specified the servicename.

DISPLAY_CHART_OPT"X" = Yes, " " = No

Display Chart CustomizeSpecifies whether the option to customize the what ifprediction analysis chart must be displayed or not.

ABC ClassificationDefinitionThe ABC Classification web item allows you to classify objects (Customers, Products orEmployees) based on a particular measure (Revenue or Profit) using certain classification rules.



StructureThe ABC Classification web item has the following specific attributes:


ABC_NAME (optional) Name of the ABC Classification

The name of the ABC Classification model that would be used.

If you do not enter a model name, a drop down box containing thenames of all the models that are ready for prediction in the selectedservice would appear in the web item.

SHOW_ABC_CLASSIFICATION"X" = Yes, " " = No

Show ABC ClassificationSpecifies whether the drop down box for selecting ABCClassification should be displayed in the web item.

This option is relevant only if you have specified the ABCClassification. Otherwise, it will not have any effect.

SHOW_STAT"X" = Yes, " " = No

Display StatisticsSpecifies whether statistical information about the selected ABCClassification should be displayed in the web item.

SHOW_CHART"X" = Yes, " " = No

Display ABC Classification Chart Specifies whether the selected ABC Classification should bedisplayed as chart in the web item.

SHOW_MODEL"X" = Yes, " " = No

Display Model NameSpecifies whether meta data (which Info Object is classified bywhich key figure from which Query) about the selected ABCClassification should be displayed in the web item.

BW StylesheetsDefinitionCascading stylesheets that are stored in the MIME repository under the name BWReports.css.

UseCascading stylesheets add to the basic functions of HTML by enabling you to determine differentformats. You use CSS classes in HTML (which is created by the BEx Web items). The styles areidentified in the generated HTML using class attributes according to the HTML standard.

You can change the styles and thereby influence how the BW contents are displayed.

Note that a stylesheet always has to be included in a Web template.

StructureThe following classes are identified when HTML is generated:

CSS classes UseContainer for Web items

SAPBEXBorderFlexBoxTtl Title area for Web items with borders

SAPBEXBorderlessFlexBoxTtl Title area for Web items without borders and those with form



characters

SAPBEXBorderFlexBox Web items with borders

SAPBEXBorderlessFlexBox Web items without borders and those with form characters

SAPBEXFlexBoxStdBg Background

SAPBEXFlexBoxFormBg Background for Web items with form characters

Group Boxes

SAPBEXGrpTtl Title

SAPBEXGrpBdy Background

Table

SAPBEXstdData Numerical value in the data cells

SAPBEXstdDataOdd Even, alternate rows

SAPBEXaggData Aggregated numerical values in data totals cells

SAPBEXstdDataEmph Emphasized numerical values in data cells

SAPBEXstdDataEmphOdd Even, alternate rows with emphasized numerical values

SAPBEXaggDataEmph Aggregated emphasized numerical values in data totals cells

SAPBEXstdItem Structure component, characteristic value, attribute

SAPBEXKeyAttr Numerical attribute

SAPBEXaggItem Aggregated structure component, characteristic value sumtotal, attribute sum total

SAPBEXchaText Caption for characteristics and attributes

SAPBEXformats Formatting cell (scaling factors)

SAPBEXexcGood1 Exception with priority good 1



SAPBEXexcCritical4 Exception with priority critical 4



SAPBEXexcBad7 Exception with priority bad 7



SAPBEXundefined Numerical value cannot be defined, or is invalid, such asdivision by zero

SAPBEXTableGrid Color of grid lines

SAPBEXCellspacing Grid lines on/off

Navigation Block, Filter

SAPBEXNavigatorChaTxt Description of characteristics

SAPBEXNavItem Characteristic values in navigation block and filter

Alert Monitor

SAPBEXAlertItem Represented as a list

SAPBEXAlertToolbar Toolbar



SAPBEXAlertHead Title

SAPBEXAlertLevel0 Hierarchy level 0



SAPBEXPageDspl Index for displaying values on several pages

Text Elements

SAPBEXTElemName Text element name

SAPBEXTElemVal Text element value

Exceptions

SAPBEXExcName Description of exception

SAPBEXExcStatus Status of exception (active/inactive)

Conditions

SAPBEXConName Description of condition

SAPBEXConStatus Status of exception (active/inactive)

Legend

SAPBEXMapLgdHeading1 Title

SAPBEXMapLgdHeading2 Area title

SAPBEXMapLgdLine Values for color legend

SAPBEXMapLgdBorder Formatting of color legend

SAPBEXMapLgdMinmax Minimum or maximum

SAPBEXMapLgdLegend Values for symbol legend

Context Menu

SAPBEXCtxtMenuItem Entries in the context menu

SAPBEXCtxtMenuHeader Entry selected from the context menu

Calendar

SAPBEXCalBg Background

SAPBEXCalBorder Border

SAPBEXCalLink Left

SAPBEXCalSkipMonth Leaves in the monthly and yearly display

SAPBEXCalCurrentDate Monthly and yearly display

SAPBEXCalWeekday Name of week day (Mon, Tues,...)

SAPBEXCalDay Number of the day (1,...)

SAPBEXCalDaySelectedNormal

Selected day

SAPBEXCalDaySat Saturday

SAPBEXCalDaySelectedSat Selected Saturday

SAPBEXCalDaySun Sunday

SAPBEXCalDaySelectedSun Selected Sunday



SAPBEXCalNoDay Week day without day number

SAPBEXCalWeek Calendar week

SAPBEXCalMonth Month in high-speed navigation

SAPBEXCalCurrentMonth Selected month in high-speed navigation

Dialogs

SAPBEXDialogBorder Border

SAPBEXDialogBg Background

SAPBEXDialogTtl Title

SAPBEXDialogAreaTtl Area title

SAPBEXDialogOffset Horizontal and vertical spacing in dialogs

Menu

SAPBEXMenuLogo Header area

SAPBEXTreeLevel0 Tree level 0




Hierarchies

SAPBEXHLevel0 Hierarchy level 0




Messages

SAPBEXMessage Messages

SAPBEXSystemMessage System messages

SAPBEXTicker Ticker

Links, Text, Buttons

SAPBEXLnk Standard links

SAPBEXMarked Highlighted link

SAPBEXTxtStd Standard text

SAPBEXTxtStdBold Bold standard text

SAPBEXBtnStd Standard button (background)

SAPBEXBtnStdIe4 Standard button (Internet Explorer 4)

SAPBEXBtnStdBorder Standard and disabled button (border)

SAPBEXBtnEmph Emphasized button (background)

SAPBEXBtnEmphIe4 Emphasized button (Internet Explorer 4)

SAPBEXBtnEmphBorder Emphasized button (border)

SAPBEXBtnStdDsbl Disabled button (background)

SAPBEXBtnEmphDsbl Emphasized disabled button (background)

Controls & Indicators



SAPBEXDdl Dropdown Box

SAPBEXChb Checkbox

SAPBEXRb Radio button

SAPBEXTxtFld Input field

SAPBEXTxtFldright Right-aligned input field

SAPBEXTxtFldDsbl Inactive input field

SAPBEXTextArea Multi-line input area

SAPBEXTxtLbl Indicator for input field

SAPBEXWhlOffset Horizontal and vertical spacing

Loading Dialog Box *

SAPBEXPopUpOuterBorder 3D border: Outer border

SAPBEXPopUpInnerBorder 3D border: Inner border

SAPBEXPopUpBg Background

SAPBEXPopUpHeader Title

Standard Template

SAPBExTitle Title

SAPBEXNavLine Navigation bar

SAPBEXNavLineBorder Navigation bar border

Tree Query Designer

SAPBEXTreeLevel0Bg Background, tree level 0

SAPBEXTreeLevel0Ttl Expandable items, tree level 0

SAPBEXTreeLevel0Item Items, tree level 0










SAPBEXTreeBorder Tree border

Tabs

SAPBEXTbsLnk Link in selectable tab page

SAPBEXTbsTab Tab to be selected

SAPBEXTbsTabSel Selected tab

SAPBEXTbsBdyEdg Tab area border

SAPBEXTbsBorder Tab page frame (Netscape 4.7)

Breadcrumbs Query



Designer

SAPBEXBrdCrBoxContBgColor

Background color of column and row area

SAPBEXBrdCrBoxBorder Color of border for column and row area

SAPBEXBrdCrArea Formatting of column and row area

SAPBEXBrdCrIna Labeling of inactive navigation path

SAPBEXBrdCrAct Labeling of active navigation path

SAPBEXBrdCrDiv Formatting of navigation path

Listen Query Designer

SAPBEXLicWhl Formatting of list area

SAPBEXLicTtl Display area header

SAPBEXLic Bulleted list introduction

SAPBEXLicBul Bullets

SAPBEXLicItem Individual list entries

SAPBEXLicItemLnk Individual list entries with links

* Not relevant for Netscape browser 4.7

Print StylesheetUseWhen wanting to print out a Web application, you can apply a stylesheet to the print out. This differsfrom the stylesheet for the screen display. This proves useful if you only want to change the font sizefor the printout, for example.

PrerequisitesOnly Internet Explorer is able to attach a stylesheet to printouts.

Procedure1. To attach a stylesheet to your Web application, choose Insert � Print Stylesheet.

2. You can find the range of stylesheets in the Select Print Stylesheet dialog box. Select astylesheet to see it in the preview window on the right-hand side.

3. To select a stylesheet for your Web application, select the required stylesheet and choose OK.

Only those stylesheets stored on the BW server are displayed in the selection list. If youwant to use a stylesheet that is not in the list, for example, one that is stored on your Webserver, mark the checkbox beneath the selection list, enter the URL and choose OK.

ResultYour Web application HTML now contains the additional tag:

<link href="MIME/BEx/StyleSheets/BWReports_print.css" type="text/css" rel="stylesheet"media="print">

Although a stylesheet is set for the screen display by default, you must explicitly use Insert� Print Stylesheet to attach the print stylesheet.

As a result, the printed Web application is formatted according to this stylesheet.

Web TemplatesDefinitionA Web template determines the structure of a Web application. You use the Web Application Designer toinsert placeholders into a HTML document for Web items [Seite 113] (in the form of object tags [Seite242]), data providers [Seite 270] (in the form of object tags) and BW URLs. The HTML document with theBW-specific placeholders is called a Web template. Web templates are checked into the Web ApplicationDesigner. The HTML page that is displayed in the Internet browser is called a Web application.Depending on which Web items you have inserted into the Web template, a Web application contains oneor more tables, an alert monitor, charts, maps, and so on.

StructureThe Web template is the keystone of a Web application. It contains placeholders for Web items andcommand URLs [Seite 245]. Data providers, Web items, and command URLs are generated for Webapplications.

In the Web template, you determine from which data provider and it what way (Web items) the BWdata is displayed. You also determine which additional options there are (BW URLs).

When a request is sent from a Web application to the SAP Web Application Server, a template objectis generated. The structure of the requested HTML page is derived from this object. The followingobjects are generated on the basis of this template:

� Data Provider

� Web Item

IntegrationAs of BW 3.0, Web templates are stored on the SAP Web Application Server.

The option to store Web templates (for BW 2.0B or BW 2.1C, for example) on the ITS isstill possible. We recommend, however, that you use the SAP Web Application Server.

ExampleThe following is an example of a simple Web template with a navigation block [Seite 189] and a table[Seite 117]:

<html>

<head>

<link rel="stylesheet" href="Bex/StyleSheets/BWReports.css">

<title>New Page 1</title>

</head>

<body>



command (filter, change attribute) or a command sequence [Seite 265] to the data provider. Theparameters needed to send the command are attached to the object tag (see example).

StructureAn object tag starts with “<object...>” and ends with “</object>”. The SAP_BW object tags areidentified by the parameter “owner”, and the value “SAP_BW”. Only this type of object is replaced inthe Web template. All other types of object are transferred unchanged into the Web application.

It is possible to set parameters at the start of an object tag<object WIDTH=’350’ HEIGHT=’234’ owner=’SAP_BW’ ...></object>

or within the object tag, as a parameter tag.<object>

<param name=’owner’ value=’SAP_BW’>...

</object>

Object tags are also displayed in non-HTML code mode in many HTML editors. Some HTML editorsalso give you the option of changing the size, and maintaining the parameters of the object tag. It isusually possible to use the drag and drop function to move the object tags around a page.

The following object tags play an important role in BEx Web Applications:

Object Tag for Properties of Web Templates [Seite 243]

Object Tag for Data Provider [Seite 244]

Object Tag for Web Items [Seite 245]

Object Tag for the Properties of Web TemplatesDefinitionObject Tag for defining the properties of Web templates.

UseThe properties of a Web template can be defined in an object tag. The properties include all theparameters that can be passed by URL when a Web template is called. This includes all the propertiesof the context menu.

Parameter 'CMD' must be set to 'SET_PROPERTIES' to indicate that these are theproperties of the Web template.

ExamplesDisplay template with variable input<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name='CMD' value='SET_PROPERTIES'><param name='VARIABLE_SCREEN' value='X'>

</object>

Context menu should not contain an enhanced menu<object>



<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name='CMD' value='SET_PROPERTIES'><param name='MENU_ENHANCED' value=' '>

</object>

Object Tag for Data ProviderDefinitionObject tag for creating Data Providers.

UseThe parameters that you need for creating a data provider are available in the Web ApplicationDesigner. You add other parameters, for example, to set up the value help (F4), or to send acommand to the data provider before you call a page.

The ‘CMD’ parameter has to be filled with the ‘SET_DATA_PROVIDER’ to indicate thatyou are creating a data provider

ExamplesCreate Query View<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’SET_DATA_PROVIDER’><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 ><param name='DATA_PROVIDER_ID' value='VIEWABC'>DATA_PROVIDER :View1

</object>

Query view filtered by country (USA)<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’SET_DATA_PROVIDER’><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 ><param name='DATA_PROVIDER_ID' value='VIEWABC'><param name=’FILTER_IOBJNM’ value=’0COUNTRY’><param name=’FILTER_VALUE’ value=’US’>DATA_PROVIDER :View1

</object>



Object Tag for Web ItemsDefinitionObject tag for creating a Web item.

UseThe parameters that you need for creating a Web item are available in the Web Application Designer.You add further parameters, for example, to adjust the size at a later point, or to set a title.

The parameter ‘CMD’ has to be filled with ‘GET_ITEM’ to indicate that you are creating aWeb item.

ExampleCreating a Web Item<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’GET_ITEM’><param name='ITEM' value='NavBlock'><param name='ITEM_ID' value='NAVBLOCK'><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 >

ITEM :Nav Block

</object>

Creating a Web item with height 400 pixels, width 500 pixels, and the title “Business Graphic”<object WIDTH=’400’ HEIGHT=’500’>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’GET_ITEM’><param name='ITEM' value='Chart1'><param name='ITEM_ID' value='PIECHART'><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 ><param name=’GENERATE_CAPTION’ value=’X’><param name='CAPTION' value='Business Grafik'>ITEM :Chart 1

</object>

Command URLsDefinitionYou can set command URLs in a Web template [Seite 241], as well as an object tag [Seite 242].These are then used as bookmarks for URLs or the starting place for a URL.

StructureCommand URLs have the following structure:<SAP_BW_URL Parameter1=’Value1’ Parameter2=’Value2’ ...>

When you generate the HTML page with one of the following URLs, command URLs are replaced by asimilar URL:



http://myAppServer:myPort/SAP/BW/BEx?pageno=1&request_No=8&Parameter1=Value1&Parameter2=Value2&...This URL requests a new page from the ITS. The parameters are removed. If you navigate in the Webapplication, then a new page is requested. The status of the previous page is changed due to thetransfer of the parameters (for example, filters are set).

See also:Command Sequences [Seite 265]

Calling up Web TemplatesUseThe URL for calling a Web template is generated by the Web Application Designer. You can extendthe URL by various parameters when you call up a Web template. These parameters can:

� Influence the data contents or display of the results (see Calling Parameterized Web Templates[Seite 250])

� Activate or deactivate different functions on the server.

FunctionChoose from the following options to call up the template:

Standard call up and properties of Web templates

You can determine the properties of the Web template both in an object tag (see ObjectTag for the Properties of Web Templates [Seite 243]) and or with command Call WebTemplate.

CMD LDOC


TEMPLATE_ID Name of the Web templateName under which you stored the Webtemplate in the Web Application Designer.

STATELESS (optional)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

End the connection to the server as soon aspossibleFor Web templates that are used almostexclusively for display without furthernavigation, it is more useful to set the attributeSTATELESS. The session on the applicationserver is terminated when the Web template iscreated. This saves resources on theapplication server.

If this attribute is not specified, it isassumed that the page is stillneeded for navigating.



USE_PERSONALIZATION (optional)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Use personalized Web templateIf the parameter is set to ‘X’, the personalizedWeb template for the current user is used. Ifpersonalization does not exist for the Webtemplate or the parameter is not set, the Webtemplate is executed without personalization.

STYLE_SHEET (optional) Path for a stylesheet that you want to use todisplay the Web template.This overwrites any stylesheet that you mayhave already assigned.

TRACE (optional)’X’ = switch on, ‘ ’ = do not switch on

Switch on OLAP traceTo analyze problems with SAP, you usuallyneed a trace. You can activate the trace withthe help of note 112458 or by using the TRACEparameter.

JAVASCRIPT (optional)’X’ = switch on, ‘ ’ = do not switch on

Use of JavaScriptUsing this parameter, you ensure that Webapplications are created using JavaScript(extensive interaction options) or suppress theuse of JavaScript (restricted interaction).

If this parameter is not transferred,JavaScript is activatedautomatically in Web browsers ofversion >=4.0.

SNIPPET_OPERATIONS (optional)’X’ = switch on, ‘ ’ = do not switch on

Reload changed components of the pageYou use this parameter to control whether onlychanged objects are loaded in navigation. Thisfunction has higher Web browser requirements.For this reason, this function is only supportedby MS Internet Explorer version >=.

If this parameter is not transferred,loading is activated automaticallyfor the suitable Web browsers.

ENABLE_OPEN_WINDOW (optional)’X’ = switch on, ‘ ’ = do not switch on

Open new windowUsing this parameter, you can control whethera new browser window is opened, for example,for the properties dialog box or for filtering. Ifthis parameter is not specified, new windowsare opened (if supported by the Web browser).

VARIABLE_SCREEN (optional)‘X’ = display variable screen, ‘ ’ = do notdisplay, if possible

Display variable screenIf you call up a Web template that has queryviews containing variables that are ready forinput, you can use these parameters to displaythe variable screen. Is you do not set thisparameter, or set it to ‘ ’, the variable screen ishidden, whenever possible. However, it will stillbe shown if, for example, the required variablesthat are ready for input have not yet been filled.



MELT_VARIABLES (optional)‘X’ = merge, ‘ ’ = display each queryindividually

Merge variablesIf you call up a Web template containingseveral query views that have variables thatare ready for input and you go to the variablescreen display, you can determine, throughthese parameters, whether variables, which areused in all query views and in the same context(same InfoProvider, same compounding), areto be provided for input only once.

VARIABLES_CLEAR (optional)‘X’ = reset variable, ‘ ’ = do not reset

Reset default variablesIf you call up a Web template that contains oneor several query views that have variables thatare ready for input, you can specify thisparameter to reset the default variablesthrough the query view. The variables thencontain the defaults from the variable definition.

SUPPRESS_WARNINGS (optional)‘X’ = do not display warnings, ‘ ’ = displaywarnings

Suppress warningsWith this parameter, warnings are notdisplayed. With this parameter, warnings arenot displayed.

SUPPRESS_SYSTEM_MESSAGES(optional)'X' = Do not display system messages

' ' = Display system messages

Suppress system messagesWith this parameter, system messages are notdisplayed.

DATA_MODE (optional)‘NEW’ = use current data

‘STORED’ = Use precalculated data

‘HYBRID’ = use precalculated data, requestcurrent data if this is missing.

‘STATIC’ = use precalculated HTML pages

‘STATIC_HYBRID’ = use precalculated HTMLpages, if there are none, search byprecalculated data and when there is none,request current data

Data modeThis parameter is optional. If you do not specifyone of the options for this parameter, a requestis always sent to the OLAP processor andcurrent data is read.

For the modi ‘STORED’ and ‘HYBRID’, datahas to be precalculated using the ReportingAgent [Extern].

See Defining the Web Templates Setting[Extern]

The parameters PAGEID and WBID that are used in BW 2.x are supported for the Webtemplates created under BW 2.x. We recommend, however, that you no longer use these.

Calling up the Web template without navigating

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&TEMPLATE_ID=yourTemplate&STATELESS=X

Calling up the Web template with trace switched on

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&TEMPLATE_ID=yourTemplate&TRACE=XCalling up the Web template with reset variables and active variable screen



http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&TEMPLATE_ID=yourTemplate&VARIABLE_SCREEN=X&VARIABLES_CLEAR=X

Calling up the Web template with a different data providerThis call-up replaces all data providers [Seite 270] of the type 'query view' with the data providerspecified. This means you can make a query or a query view available for use without having to doanything else on the Web, and you can use a predefined Web template for displaying the query.

As well as the parameters used in the default call up, this call up also has the following:

Call up for displaying a query:


INFOCUBE Technical name of the InfoProvider

QUERY Technical name of the query

VARIANT (optional) Variant, if you are not required to enter avariable

Call up for displaying another query view:


DATA_PROVIDER_ID Technical name of the saved query view



Displaying a query by using a Web template of your choice

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&TEMPLATE_ID=yourTemplate&infocube=myCube&query=myQuery

Setting your own Web template objectsAs well as being able to define a new initialization for all data providers of a template, you can alsoconvert each data provider specifically and each Web item, using parameterization. By doing this, youallow even your more complicated Web templates to be reused.

The index in the parameter is indicated in the following by '_I'.

The parameters for overwriting the data provider initialization are:


SET_DATA_PROVIDER_I Logical name of the data providerName of the data provider for which you wantto set a new initialization

INFOCUBE_I (Option 1) Technical name of the InfoProvider

QUERY_I (Option 1) Technical name of the query

DATA_PROVIDER_ID_I (Option 2) Technical name of the saved query view




The parameters for overwriting the Web item initialization are:


SET_ITEM_I Logical name of the Web itemName of the Web item for which you want toset a new initialization

ITEM_ID_I (Option 1) Web item keyYou create a Web item for a Web templatebased on a Web item setting that you havemade in the Web Application Designer.

ITEM_CLASS_I (Option 2) Class name of the Web item className of the ABAP object class that outputgeneration transfers. This corresponds to theuse of non-reusable Web items (standard Webitems) in the Web Application Designer. Webitems are created with the default values for theattribute.

The class name for the table is, for example,CL_RSR_WWW_ITEM_GRID

Swapping 2 data providers and a Web item when calling up a Web template

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&TEMPLATE_ID=yourTemplate&SET_DATA_PROVIDER_1=myDataProvider1&infocube_1=myCube&query_1=myQuery&SET_DATA_PROVIDER_2=myDataProvider2&data_provider_id_2=mySpecialView&SET_ITEM_3=myItem&ITEM_ID_3=myPieChart

Using a standard Web template for a data providerIf you call up the previous variant without specifying a TEMPLATE_ID, a standard Web template isused automatically. To make a Web template the standard Web template, go to BW CustomizingImplementation Guide � Business Information Warehouse � Settings Relevant for Reporting �Web-Based Settings � Determine a Standard Web Template.

If there is no setting made here, the system uses a Web template generated by SAP.

Calling up a query without making any preparations in the Web

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&infocube=myCube&query=myQuery

Calling Parameterized Web TemplatesUseThe URL for calling a Web template is generated by the Web Application Designer. It is possible tocopy the URL, and use it again as many times as you like.

A typical URL looks like this:



http://myAppServer:myPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate

The first part of the URL ((http://myAppServer:myPort/SAP/BW/BEx?) calls the BEx service in the SAPWeb Application Server in the BW system. The next step is to call the Web template. The command‘LDOC’ with the parameters 'TEMPLATE_ID' calls the Web template.

The command LDOC requests a new HTML page. The Web template is used to construct this HTMLpage. The Web application corresponding to the Web template is displayed in the Web Browser.

You parameterize the Web template by adding further parameters to the URL. These parameters arepassed on to all data providers and Web items. Parameterizing the URL allows you to filter all thequery views according to a particular country or cost center.

ExamplesFiltering all query views according to Germany

http://myAppServer:myPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate&FILTER_IOBJNM=0COUNTRY&FILTER_VALUE=DEFiltering all query views according to Germany, 2000

http://myAppServer:myPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate&FILTER_IOBJNM_1=0COUNTRY&FILTER_VALUE_1=DE&FILTER_IOBJNM_2=0CALYEAR&FILTER_VALUE_2=2000Displaying all Web items with title

http://myAppServer:myPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate&GENERATE_CAPTION=X

Switching Web TemplatesUseYou have the option to calling up Web reports [Seite 246] or to switch between different Web reports.When you switch Web reports, all the Web items and data providers in the Web template in which youstarted are retained. The Web items and data providers that appear in the new Web template, and forwhich there is no object with the same name, are generated from scratch. The system identifies theobjects by their logical names.

The main difference between calling a Web template and switching to a different Web template is thatobjects from the initial Web template are transferred without being modified into the new Web report.This means, for example, that the query view of the navigation status stays the same.

This function is particularly useful for switching from overview pages (often containing only diagrams)to detailed pages (with tables and navigation blocks).

FunctionsCMD CHANGE_TEMPLATE


TEMPLATE_ID Name of the Web templateName under which you stored the Webtemplate in the Web Application Designer.




<SAP_BW_URL CMD='CHANGE_TEMPLATE' TEMPLATE_ID=’DETAILS'>

Personalizing the Web TemplateUseWith this command you can personalize a Web template for the user who is logged on. The next timethis user calls the Web template with parameter USE_PERSONALIZATION=X, the same navigationstatus as was valid during personalization is displayed. This mechanism is useful especially for portalpages.

CMD PERSONALIZE

Example<SAP_BW_URL CMD='PERSONALIZE'>

Removing PersonalizationUseYou use this command to remove the current user’s Web template personalization.

CMD RESET_PERS

Example<SAP_BW_URL CMD='RESET_PERS'>

Creating BookmarksUseCommand that allows you to mark a Web application as a bookmark. The result of this instruction is todisplay a Web application with a bookmark-enabled URL. You can call this URL at any time, whichresults in a Web application that displays the same navigation status (including whether the hierarchyis expanded) as the Web application from which the instruction was called.

CMD BOOKMARK


BOOKMARK_DATA(optional)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Store historical data about the bookmarkThe Web application with the historical data isdisplayed when you call the bookmark.Bookmarks are normally used without data.



Example<SAP_BW_URL CMD='BOOKMARK'>

Changing Icon DirectoryUseYou use this command if you are working on a special Web application, and you want to use iconsother than the icons that are generally used as the symbols for expanding and collapsing hierarchies,for example. The command assigns a different icon directory to the Web template.

The names of the icons remain unaffected. In the new directory the icons have to appearwith their original names, but you are able to alter them in other ways.

FunctionsCMD SET_URLS


ICON_PREFIX Relative path to an directory in the MIMErepository or on the ITS

ExampleDisplaying a Web report using icons from a different directory

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate&cmd_1=cmd%3DSET_URLS%26ICON_PREFIX%3DmyPath

A command sequence is used in this example.

See also:

Command Sequences [Seite 265]

Releasing a Web TemplateUseYou can use this command to remove the current Web template with all its objects from the memory ofthe application server. The Web template cannot be accessed once this is done. You can only use thecommand Calling up a Web Template [Seite 246] to do this.

You can call up other Web templates by using commands in a command sequence.

FunctionsCMD PAGE_FREE



<SAP_BW_URL CMD='PAGE_FREE'>

Calling up the Variables ScreenUseThis command allows you to call up the variables screen again for the current page. You can thenchange the variable values that have been used until now in the variables screen.

You can also transfer new values over, as described in Default Variables for Web Applications [Seite254]. Along with the values already set, these serve as the default variables screen.

If the variables screen appears when you call up a Web application, you have to adjust the Webtemplate call (see Calling up a Web Template [Seite 246]� Standard Call).

FunctionsCMD PROCESS_VARIABLES

SUBCMD VARIABLE_SCREEN

<SAP_BW_URL CMD='PROCESS_VARIABLES' SUBCMD='VARIABLE_SCREEN'>

Default Variables for Web ApplicationsUseVariables [Seite 39] play a central role in BW queries. For example, the entire query or only individualparts of the query can be filtered before reading data according to values. There are variables withautomatic substitution, substitution from authorizations, or variables that are ready for input.

The variables for Web applications can be processed in the background (without a variable screen) orin the foreground (with a variable screen). In both cases it is desirable to predefine variables throughparameterization. Therefore, all types of variables that are ready for input are supported

In contrast to filtering, the external value for predefining has to be specified for the variables. The date,for example, is transferred as it has been entered.

FeaturesYou set default variables by parameterizing the URL. The variable values are separated from eachother by different indexes.

The index in the parameter is indicated in the following by '_I'.

Characteristic Value VariablesParameter variables or variables for several single values are predefined as follows:


VAR_NAME_I Technical name of the variables



VAR_VALUE_EXT_I Attribute value in external displayKey for characteristic value in external display

Interval variables are predefined as follows:



VAR_VALUE_LOW_EXT_I “From” characteristic value in externaldisplayKey for characteristic value in external display

VAR_VALUE_HIGH_EXT_I “To” characteristic value in external displayKey for characteristic value in external display

Selection option variables are predefined as in the following:



VAR_OPERATOR_I Operator'EQ' = Individual value

'BT' = Interval

'LT' = Less than

'LE' = Less than or equal to

'GT' = Greater than

'GE' = Greater than or equal to

VAR_VALUE_LOW_EXT_I “From” characteristic value in externaldisplayKey for characteristic value in external display

VAR_VALUE_HIGH_EXT_I “To” characteristic value in external displayKey for characteristic value in external display

This value must only be specifiedwith VAR_OPERATOR='BT'.

VAR_SIGN_I Row effect'I' found values are added,

'E' found values are removed.

Variables for precalculated value sets are preassigned as follows:



VAR_VALUE_EXT_I Name of value set

Variables for Single Hierarchy Nodes or Variables for Several Hierarchy Nodes



VAR_VALUE_EXT_I Node key in external displayKey for hierarchy node



VAR_NODE_IOBJNM_I Name of the node characteristicWith characteristic nodes and text nodes, youhave to specify the characteristic name(0HIER_NODE).

Hierarchy, Formula, and Text Variables



VAR_VALUE_EXT_I Hierarchy name, formula value, text

ExamplesPredefining the parameter variable

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate&var_name_1=myParameterVariable&var_value_ext_1=4711Predefining the parameter variable (4711) and select options variable (1, 7 to 12)

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate&var_name_1=myParameterVariable&var_value_ext_1=4711&var_name_2=mySelOptVar&var_operator_2=EQ&var_sign_2=I&var_value_low_ext_2=1&var_name_3=mySelOptVar&var_operator_3=BT&var_sign_3=I&var_value_low_ext_3=7&var_value_high_ext_3=12Predefining hierarchy nodes variable (DE, 0HIER NODE)

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate&var_name_1=myHryNodeVariable&var_value_ext_1=DE&var_node_iobjnm_1=0HIER_NODE



Changing the Values of VariablesUseUsing this command, you can change the values of variables on the current page.

Enter the variable values as described in Default Variables for Web Applications [Seite 254]. Variablesthat you do not specify maintain their previous value.

FunctionsCMD PROCESS_VARIABLES

SUBCMD VAR_SUBMIT

Example<SAP_BW_URL CMD='PROCESS_VARIABLES' SUBCMD='VAR_SUBMIT'VAR_NAME_1=’myParameterVariable’ VAR_VALUE_EXT_1=’4711’>

Adjusting and Enhancing the Context MenuUseYou can adjust the context menu that is created automatically for table cells to your company-specificneeds and scenarios.

You can copy functions of the enhanced context menu to the context menu that is not enhanced oryou can hide functions.

You can also integrate your own context-specific entries in the context menu.

FunctionsThe following options are available:

Adjusting the Context Menu [Seite 257]

Enhancing the Context Menu [Seite 263]

Adjusting the Context MenuUseAlong with properties such as VARIABLE_SCREEN, you can also modify the context menu for a Webtemplate. You can turn every entry in the menu on or off or place it in the Enhanced Menu.

FeaturesAll entries in the context menu are listed in the following list of properties:



Menu entries that are not specified retain their default value. The default values areunderlined in the list

Properties Description

Back(MENU_BACK)‘ ’= Not displayed

‘X’= “Always Display” in the basic menu

‘E’= Displayed in the “enhanced menu”

Menu entry: “Back”

Undo one navigation step on a data provider

Forward(MENU_FORWARD)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry. “Forward”

Repeat a navigation step on a data provider.

Back to Start(MENU_BACK_TO_START)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Back to Start”

Undo all navigation steps on a data provider

Keep Filter Value(MENU_FILTER)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Keep Filter Value”

Keep Filter Value on Axis(MENU_FILTER_ON_AXIS)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Keep Filter Value on Axis”

Choose Filter Value(MENU_SELECT_FILTER)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Select Filter Value”



Keep Filter Value on Axis for Diagram(MENU_FILTER_ON_AXIS_CHART)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Keep Filter Value on Axis forDiagram”

When considering diagrams, it is often moreuseful to use the command “Keep Filter Valueon Axis” than it is to keep the filter, which isremoved when you drilldown. The geometry ofthe list remains the same and the chart/or mapcan still be interpreted. Therefore, there areseparate settings for these Web items.

Keep Filter Value for Diagrams(MENU_FILTER_CHART)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Keep Filter Value” for Diagrams

When considering diagrams, it is often moreuseful to use the command “Keep Filter Valueon Axis” than it is to keep the filter, which isremoved when you drilldown. The geometry ofthe list remains the same and the chart/or mapcan still be interpreted. Therefore, there areseparate settings for these Web items.

Filter and drilldown according to(MENU_FILTER_DrILL_DOWN)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Filter and Drilldown According to”

Drilldown According to(MENU_DRILL_UP)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Drilldown According to”

“Drilldown” with the exception ofnavigation in maps.

Drilldown According to in Context of Map(MENU_DRILL_UP_GIS)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Drilldown According to” in Contextof Map

“Drilldown” in the context ofnavigation in maps.

Insert drilldown according to(MENU_DRILL_DOWN)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Insert Drilldown According to”

Swap ... with ...(MENU_EXCHANGE_OBJECTS)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Swap ... with ...”

Swap characteristics or structures.



Remove Drilldown(MENU_REMOVE_DRILL_DOWN)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Remove Drilldown”

Swap Axes(MENU_SWITCH_AXIS)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Swap Axes”

Expand/Collapse Hierarchy Nodes(MENU_HIERARCHY_NODE_DRILL)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: Expand/Collapse Hierarchy Nodes

Expand Hierarchy(MENU_HIERARCHY_DRILL)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Expand Hierarchy”

(De)activate Hierarchy(MENU_HIERARCHY_STATE)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “(De)activate Hierarchy”

Sorting(MENU_SORT)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Sort”

Sort by characteristic cells and data cells.

Calculate Result As...(MENU_CALCULATE_RESULT)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Calculate Result as”

Calculations for value cells.

Calculate Single Values As...(MENU_CALCULATE_VALUE)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Calculate Single Values As...”




Cumulated(MENU_CUMULATE_VALUE)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Cumulated”


Displaying Documents(MENU_DISPLAY_DOCUMENTS)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Display Documents”

Create Document(MENU_DOCUMENT_CREATE)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Create New Document”

Show/Hide Document Properties(MENU_DISPLAY_DOCUMENT_PROP)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Show/Hide Document Properties”

In the context of the Web item List ofDocuments.

Show/Hide Document Selection Criteria(MENU_DISPLAY_DOCUMENT_SELEC)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Show/Hide Document SelectionCriteria”

In the context of the Web item List ofDocuments.

Report/Report Jump Targets(MENU_RRI)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: For report/report jump targets

Export as …CSV File(MENU_EXPORT_TO_CSV)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Export as... CSV File”

Export as ... MS Excel 2000 File(MENU_EXPORT_TO_XLS)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Export as ... MS Excel 2000 File”



Bookmark(MENU_BOOKMARK)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Bookmark”

Create bookmarks.

Bookmark with Displayed Data(MENU_BOOKMARK_WITH_DATA)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Bookmark with Displayed Data”

Create bookmark with the current data. Whenyou call up the bookmark later, the “historical”data is displayed.

Personalize Web Page(MENU_PERSONALIZE)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Personalize Web Page”

Display Charactieristic Properties(MENU_CHARACTERISTIC_PROPERTIES)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Display Characteristic Properties”

Properties for characteristic cells.

Value Cell Properties(MENU_VALUE_PROPERTIES)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: For value cell properties

Properties for value cells.

Query Properties(MENU_QUERY_PROPERTIES)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Query properties”

Display variable screen(MENU_VARIABLE_SCREEN)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: For calling up variables screen

Calls the screen for entering variables if theWeb application contains queries withvariables.

Currency translation(MENU_CURRENCY_CONVERSION)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Currency Translation”

Calls up the currency translation dialog box.



Enhanced Menu(MENU_ENHANCED)‘ ’= Not displayed



Menu entry: “Enhanced Menu”

Display option for entries in the enhancedcontext menu.

ENHANCED_MENU‘ ‘ = Start with basic menu

‘X’ = Start with enhanced menu

Start with Enhanced Menu

You decide here whether the page opens withthe basic menu (standard setting) or theenhanced menu.

ExamplesFor this example, Swap Axes appears in the basic context menu and the currency translation iscompletely hidden.<object>

<param name='OWNER' value='SAP_BW'><param name='CMD' value='SET_PROPERTIES'><param name='MENU_SWITCH_AXIS' value='X'><param name='MENU_CURRENCY_CONVERSION' value=' '>

</object>

Enhancing the Context MenuUseAs well as being able to make entries in the context menu visible, entries in the enhanced menu visibleor entries in the enhanced menu invisible, you can also hang scenario-specific entries in the menu.You have two options:

� You define the new entries using the Web Template Properties object tag.

� You add the new entries to the menu using the JavaScript function.

The former option is described in this section.

In both cases, you have to write a JavaScript function that transfers the processing when you selectthe menu entry.

For more detailed information, see Adding a Menu Entry using JavaScript [Seite 307].

FunctionsNew entries are defined using different series of parameters in the Web template properties as follows:


CMENU_LABEL_I Labeling text in the menu



CMENU_FUNCTION_I JavaScript function for processing thecommandThis function is implemented in JavaScript andis used to execute commands after selection ofthe menu entry.

CMENU_PARAMETER_I Free parameterThis parameter is passed to the JavaScriptfunction 'CMENU_FUNCTION' and can beevaluated there as required. The parametermakes it possible to use a function for morethan one menu entry.

CMENU_CELL_TYPE_I' ' = No restriction

'CHARACTERISTIC' = Characteristic

'CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE' = Characteristicvalue

'STRUCTURE' = Structure

'STRUCTURE_VALUE' = Structure componentvalue

'DATA' = Data cell

'EXCEPTIONS' = Item exceptions

'CONDITIONS' = Item conditions

'DOCUMENT_LIST' = Item document list

Context of the entryIf you want the menu entry to appear only incertain contexts and not in all context menus,you can define this with 'cell_type' and 'filter'.

CMENU_FILTER_I Context of the entryAccording to the value of ‘cmenu_cell_type’,different values are useful here:

'CHARACTERISTIC','CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE', 'STRUCTURE','STRUCTURE_VALUE': Iobjnm

'EXCEPTIONS': Exception ID

'CONDITIONS': Condition ID

'DOCUMENT_LIST': Document ID

See Examples.

CMENU_VISIBILITY_I‘ ‘= Not displayed

‘X’= Displayed in the “basic menu”


Visibility of the entryYou specify whether the entry is to appear inthe basic menu or also in the enhanced menu.

CMENU_POSITION_I'TOP' = Before the "normal" entries

'BOTTOM' = After the "normal" entries

Position of the entryThe entries are inserted in the order in whichthey were called. You can choose if the entryshould appear before the "normal" entries orafter them in the menu. They may not occurbetween the "normal" entries.

Examples.



If the command sequence takes up too much space to fit into a URL, add the attribute‘NO_OUTPUT’ to a command instead. As a result, the command is executed and anempty page is sent back. However, no data is read. This is therefore useful when youaccess a main frame from a control frame, for example. Using JavaScript, you can thencarry out a sequence of single commands in the main frame and only leave out theattribute ‘NO_OUTPUT’ in the last command.

ExamplesStart Web application and filter Data Provider 1 according to DE filters and Data Provider 2according to US filters

http://myAppServer:myPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate&CMD_1=DATA_PROVIDER%3DDP1%26FILTER_IOBJNM%3D0COUNTRY%26FILTER_VALUE%3DDE&CMD_2=DATA_PROVIDER%3DDP2%26FILTER_IOBJNM%3D0COUNTRY%26FILTER_VALUE%3DUSFilter command URL to Data Provider 1 according to calendar year 2000, change title of graphic(Chart) GRAPHIC to ‘2000’, and change title of table TABLE to ‘Details2000’<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='DP1' FILTER_IOBJNM='0CALYEAR' FILTER_VALUE='2000'CMD_1='ITEM=GRAPHIC&CAPTION=2000' CMD_2='ITEM=TABLE&CAPTION=Details2000'>

Using FormsUseWith HTML forms you can integrate input fields easily into an HTML page. You can also use thisHTML technology to create BEx Web applications.

FunctionsWeb Template ParameterizationBy using forms, you can set customized parameters when calling up Web applications. To do this youneed an HTML document with a form, from which the URL for the Web application is called up with therelevant parameters.

After calling up the following HTML document, the user is offered a form in which he orshe can choose a calendar year and a country from dropdown boxes. After executing thesubmit command, the Web application appears with preset filters in the query views.

<html><body><table><form method="POST"http://myAppServer:myPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate&FILTER_IOBJNM_1=0CALYEAR&FILTER_IOBJNM_2=0COUNTRY ">

<tr> <td>calendar year</td> <td><select size="1" name="FILTER_VALUE_1">

<Option value="1997">1997</Option><Option value="1998">1998</Option><Option value="1999">1999</Option><Option value="2000">2000</Option></select></td>



</tr><tr><td>Land</td> <td><select name="FILTER_VALUE_2">

<Option value="BR">Brazil</Option> <Option value="DE">Germany</Option> <Option value="FR">France</Option> <Option value="GB">Great Britain</Option> <Option value="JP">Japan</Option> <Option value="RU">Russia</Option> <Option value="ES">Spain</Option> <Option value="US">USA</Option>

</table><input type="submit" value="Submit" name="Submit"></form></body>

</html>

Buttons and Forms in Web TemplatesYou use the anchors (<a href=” ... ”></a>) and HTML forms to integrate commands into a Webtemplate. This command can effect one or several Web items or Data Providers.

At the point where URLs usually appear in HTML, you can use placeholders, that are described undercommand URLs [Seite 245] . These are automatically replaced during processing, so that only validURLs appear in the HTML pages that you have created.

Drilldown query view 1 by country and filter the calendar year to 2000<a href= <SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View 1’ CMD=’Expand’IOBJNM=’0COUNTRY’ FILTER_IOBJNM=’0CALYEAR’ FILTER_VALUE=’2000’>”>Year2000 + Drilldown by country</a>

Form, in which the user can choose a calendar year and a country from dropdownboxes.

<form method="POST" action="<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’*’ MULTI=’X’FILTER_IOBJNM_1=’0CALYEAR’ FILTER_IOBJNM_2=’0COUNTRY’>">

<table>

<tr> <td>calendar year</td> <td><select size="1" name="FILTER_VALUE_1">

<Option value="1997">1997</Option><Option value="1998">1998</Option><Option value="1999">1999</Option><Option value="2000">2000</Option></select></td></tr><tr><td>Land</td> <td><select name="FILTER_VALUE_2">

<Option value="BR">Brazil</Option><Option value="DE">Germany</Option><Option value="FR">France</Option><Option value="GB">Great Britain</Option><Option value="JP">Japan</Option><Option value="RU">Russia</Option><Option value="ES">Spain</Option>



<Option value="US">USA</Option></select></td></tr>

</table><input type="submit" value="Submit" name="Submit"></form>

Buttons that filter view 1 according to calendar years<form method="POST" action="<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View 1’FILTER_IOBJNM=’0CALYEAR’>"><input type="submit" value="1998" name="FILTER_VALUE"><input type="submit" value="1999" name="FILTER_VALUE"><input type="submit" value="2000" name="FILTER_VALUE"></form>

Language-Dependent TextsDefinitionBy using this BW-specific tag, you can install language-dependent texts in a Web application.

UseYou create text elements for an ABAP report that can then be translated.

With the help of the SAP_BW_TEXT tag that you insert into a Web template, you can access the textsas follows:

<SAP_BW_TEXT PROGRAM=’MYREPORT’ KEY=’001’>

You can also use language-dependent headings for Web items. You can specify the headings asparameters either in the object tag of the Web item

<param name=’CAPTION’ value=’SAP_BW_TEXT?PROGRAM=MYREPORT&KEY=001’>

or fill the heading in the Web Application Designer as follows:

SAP_BW_TEXT?PROGRAM=MYREPORT&KEY=001

You can find additional information about language-dependent texts under Creating ABAP Programsfor Maintaining Language-Dependent Texts [Seite 268].

Creating ABAP Programs for Maintaining Language-Dependent TextsUseTo make Web applications independent from static texts, you can maintain and translate the text in anABAP table. The Web application is then filled with the corresponding texts according to the logonlanguage.

PrerequisitesYou are in the ABAP Editor (transaction SE38)



Procedure1. In the Program field enter the name of the program, for example ZHTML_TEXTS and in the

subobject screen, select Source Code.

2. Choose (Create). You reach the ABAP: Program Properties <Name of Program> Changescreen.

3. Enter the title of the program, for example Web Application Texts.

4. Under Type in the Attributes field, choose Executable Program and then Save. You reach theCreate Object Catalog Entry dialog box.

5. In the Attributes field under Package enter $TMP and save the program as a Local Object.

You have created an ABAP report called ZHTML_TEXTS

6. In the menu bar choose Goto � Text Elements � Text Symbols. You reach the ABAP TextElements: Display Text Symbols Language English screen. Choose (Create <-> Change).

Enter your texts in the empty table.

a. In the Sym field enter the numerical key of the new text element (0-999), for example, 001.

b. In the Text field, enter the name of the text element, for example, Credit Memos.

The dLen field is filled automatically with the actual length of the text you entered, forexample, 12 in the case of Credit Memos.

c. In the mLen field, enter the maximum length of the text field.

If the maximum length of the text field (mLen) is smaller than the actual length of the textfield (dLen), the system asks you whether you want the text to be shortened to themaximum length.

d. When you have entered all your texts, choose (Activate). You reach the ABAP TextElements: Change Text Symbols Language English screen.

7. In the menu bar of the ABAP Text Elements: Change Text Symbols Language English, chooseGoto � Translation. You reach the Target Language for Translation screen.

a. Select the target language, into which you want to translate the texts, for example, DE andchoose (Continue). You reach the Translation: ABAP Text Pool: <Name of Program> ($)from Language <X> to <Y>, on which your texts and translation proposals from the ABAP textpool are displayed. For example, “Credit Memos” is translated as “Gutschriften”. You cantransfer the proposals or edit them as you wish.

The program generated the text translations from the ABAP text pool if correspondingentries are available there. For texts without proposals you have to enter the translationyourself.

b. Choose Save.

ResultIn the Web template, you can now insert the following tag for the example text used hereZHTML_TEXTS: <SAP_BW_TEXT PROGRAM=’ZHTML_TEXTE’ KEY=‘001’>.

The command inserts the text that you maintained with the key 001 in the table, in accordance with thelogon language in the Web template, for example as the table title.

<th><SAP_BW_TEXT PROGRAM=‘ZHTML_TEXTE’ KEY=‘001‘></th>



Data ProviderDefinitionData Providers are objects that deliver data. When you navigate through the data, or parameterizethe call-up, it may change the status of the data provider. A data provider can supply any number ofWeb items [Seite 113] with data.

StructureGeneric AttributesGeneric attributes are attributes that are valid for every data provider. You need these attributes assoon as you begin to create a data provider.


DATA_PROVIDER ( or name ) Logical name of the data providerThis name is used to attach Web items to aparticular data provider and to send commandsto the data provider. The name must be uniquewithin the Web template [Seite 241]

WBID ( or DATA_PROVIDER_WBID )(optional)

Key assigned to the Excel workbook, underwhich you stored the data provider in theBusiness Explorer.You have to have saved the workbook in BW(favorites, roles).

If you do not specify this parameter, theworkbook ID (WBID) of the Web template isused instead.

You cannot change these attributes with a command URL [Seite 245].

CommandsIt is possible to apply commands, such as filters, to data providers. In most cases, you must specifyparameters for these commands. With some commands, it is possible to specify a whole list ofparameter values. The parameter name is given an index “_1”, “_2”. In this rest of this document, thisindex is referred to as “parameter name_N”

There is at least one example given for every command. This is displayed in the same syntax asdescribed under Command URLs [Seite 245].

All commands have the following parameters in common:


CMD Name of the commandMost commands are triggered by thisparameter. As well as this type of command,there are also generic commands withparameters that you are able to assign to othercommands. Generic commands are alwaysapplied after the named command.



DATA_PROVIDERDATA_PROVIDER_N

Name of the data providerYou are able to apply a command to severaldata providers. You either specify a particulardata provider, or display a list of possible dataproviders, or restrict the number of dataproviders by using wildcards (MULTI=‘X’). Thecommand is applied to all these data providers,as long as they support this action.

You must specify the dataprovider(s).

MULTI Using the DATA_PROVIDER as a referenceIf MULTI is set to ‘X’, the command is appliedto all the data providers that have‘DATA_PROVIDER’ in their name. ‘*’ means alldata providers, for example.

This parameter is optional.

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Applying the command to the data provider ‘DP 1’<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’DP 1’ CMD=’...’ ...>

Applying the command to the data providers ‘DP 1’ and ‘DP 1’<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER_1=’DP 1’ DATA_PROVIDER_1=’DP 2’CMD=’...’ ...>

Applying the command to all the data providers that contain ‘USA’ in their name<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’*USA*’ MULTI=’X’ CMD=’...’ ...>

Stored Query ViewsDefinitionStored query views are saved navigational states in a BW query. When you call up the Web template,a query view (not a database view) is created on the server with the saved navigational state.

StructureStored query views have the following attributes:


DATA_PROVIDER_ID


Key for a query viewThe DATA_PROVIDER_ID that you specify,determines the initial status of the query view.



VARIANT (optional)


Name of the variant used to fill the variablesWhen you save a query view, the currentvariable values are saved with it. You canoverwrite the values by specifying a variant(optional). You create variants from thevariable screen.

STYLE_SHEET (optional) Path to a stylesheet that you want to use todisplay F4-Help.If you do not specify anything here, the Webtemplate stylesheet is used instead.

HOME_FRAME (optional) Name of the main frameIf you use HTML frame technology to displaythe data and you want to display the input Helpin a separate frame to the Web template, youhave to specify the name of the frame wherethe Web template is displayed for stored queryviews in the HOME_FRAME attribute . Youalso have to specify the attributeTARGET_HELP_FRAME for the navigationblock Web item.

BLOCK_SIZE (optional) Number of rows per block in the input helpBy entering this parameter, you can determinethe number of rows displayed before an indexto leaf through other blocks is started. If thevalue is set to 0, the complete table isdisplayed, regardless of the number of rows.

The parameters VIEWID and WBID (DATA_PROVIDER_WBID) used in BW 2.x are stillsupported. We recommend, however, that you no longer use these.

You can apply the following commands to a stored query view:

� Properties of Stored Query Views [Seite 273]

� Calling the Query Properties Dialog Box [Seite 276]

� Back, Forwards and Back to Start [Seite 276]

� Filters [Seite 277]

� Removing Filters [Seite 279]

� Calling Value Help [Seite 280]

� Drilldowns [Seite 281]

� Removing Drilldowns [Seite 281]

� Switching Characteristics/Structures [Seite 282]

� Swapping Axes [Seite 283]

� Setting the Navigational Status [Seite 283]

� Sorting [Seite 284]

� Setting Properties of Display Attributes [Seite 285]

� Positioning the Results Row [Seite 286]

� Hiding the Results Row [Seite 287]

� Setting the Display [Seite 287]



� Calling the Characteristic Properties Dialog Box [Seite 288]

� Translating Currencies [Seite 289]

� Calling the Currency Translation Dialog Box [Seite 289]

� Defining and Changing Exceptions [Seite 289]

� Calling the Dialog Box for Defining Exceptions [Seite 291]

� Setting the Status of an Exception [Seite 291]

� Creating and Changing Conditions [Seite 292]

� Calling the Dialog Box for Defining Conditions [Seite 293]

� Setting the Status of a Condition [Seite 294]

� Displaying Documents [Seite 294]

� Saving Query Views [Seite 295]� Properties of Value Cells [Seite 296]

� Calling a Dialog for Cell Properties [Seite 296]

� Calculating Lists [Seite 297]

� Operations for Display Hierarchies [Seite 298]

� Jumping using the Report/Report Interface [Seite 301]

� Exporting Data [Seite 302]

Properties of Query ViewsDefinitionInstruction for a query view.

UseThe query view has the most varied properties. You can change the properties by specifying theattribute and its value. You therefore do not have to specify parameter 'CMD'.

The query view properties are evaluated at the end of command processing.

Structure Property Description

SUPPRESS_ZEROS‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Hide rows/columns only containing null values(for all value cells for this combination ofcharacteristics).

ZERO_PRESENTATION'0' = display

'1' = display without currency/unit

'2' = do not display

'3' = display zero text

Zero value display

ZERO_TEXT Text for zero value display '3'



SHOW_SCALING_FACTORS‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Display scaling factors and exclude currency /unit

SIGN_PRESENTATION'1' = sign before number

'2' = sign after number

'3' = concatenated display

Sign display

FULL_CONCAT_KEYS‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Display of characteristic and attribute keys fullyconcatenated.

SHOW_DOCUMENTS‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Show document links for each characteristicvariant.

SHOW_BOR_OBJECTS‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Show Drag&Relate links (BOR links) for eachcharacteristic variant of a BOR InfoObject.

UHRY_ACTIVE_ROWS‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Display rows as hierarchy

UHRY_CAPTION_ROWS Labeling for rows for hierarchical display

UHRY_LEVEL_ROWS Number of objects (characteristics, hierarchies,structures) on the rows that are initially visibleas hierarchy when display is switched on.

UHRY_ACTIVE_COLUMNS‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Display columns as hierarchy

UHRY_CAPTION_COLUMNS Labeling for columns for hierarchical display

UHRY_LEVEL_COLUMNS Number of objects (characteristics, hierarchies,structures) on the columns that are initiallyvisible as hierarchy when display is switchedon.

IntegrationYou can add the query view properties to any other command !

Resetting and Reinitializing Query ViewsUseYou use this command to reinitialize data providers [Seite 270] of the type Query View. The queryview is recreated according to the parameters and the Web items display the data for the new storedquery view [Seite 271].

If you are using a Web item that requires, for example, a specific characteristic (such asthe dropdown box [Seite 183] filter), the new data provider supports this characteristic.

FunctionsCMD RESET_DATA_PROVIDER




INFOCUBE Technical name of the InfoCube

QUERY Technical name of the query


or

CMD RESET_DATA_PROVIDER


DATA_PROVIDER_ID Technical name of the view


Converting the data provider “View1” to another query:<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View1' CMD='RESET_DATA_PROVIDER'INFOCUBE='myCube' QUERY='myQuery'>

Converting the data provider “View1” to a saved view:<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View1' CMD='RESET_DATA_PROVIDER'DATA_PROVIDER_ID='myViewID'>

Displaying a Copy of a Data Provider on a New PageUseThis command enables you to display a copy of the current navigation status of a data provider [Seite270] on a new page. This command is suitable for detailed windows, in which you navigateindependently of the overview window (see example).

FunctionsCMD RELEASE_DATA_PROVIDER


TEMPLATE_ID (optional) Name of the Web templateName under which you stored the Webtemplate in the Web Application Designer. Ifthis parameter is not specified, the standardtemplate is used.

Any other parameters for parameterizingyour Web template

See Calling Up Web Templates [Seite 246]

Displaying a copy of the status of the data provider “View 1” on a new page:



<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View1' CMD='RELEASE_DATA_PROVIDER'>

Displaying a copy of the status of the data provider “View 1” in a new window withtemplate 1:JavaScript call: SAPBWOpenWindow("<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View1'CMD='RELEASE_DATA_PROVIDER'>","Details",600,400);

Calling Dialog Query PropertiesDefinitionInstruction for a query view.

UseYou can call the Query Properties dialog with this instruction.

Structure CMD Process_help_window

HELP_SERVICE QUERY_PROPERTIES

Back, Forwards, and Back to StartDefinitionBack, forwards, and back to start is a command for a query view in the Web template.

UseBy using this command, you can do the following for a query view:

� undo the last action

� undo all actions

� or, in the event that you undo one or more actions, execute them again.

In contrast to using the set function Back and Forwards available in the Web browser,these commands only affect the specified data provider and not the entire page.

StructureCMD Description

BACK Undoes the last action executed for this queryview

RESET Goes back to the navigation status that wasvisible when the Web application was called



FORWARD Executes a previously undone action again

The last action for query view1 is now undone<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View1' CMD='BACK'>

All query views are now reset to the status that was set when they were called <SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='*' MULTI='X' CMD='RESET'>

FilteringDefinitionFilter is a command for a query view in the Web template.

UseYou set filter values for characteristics and structures within a query view. It is possible to set severalfilters for the same characteristic / structure, or the same filter for several different characteristics /structures. Filter is a generic command, which means you do not have to set the ‘CMD’ parameter.

You are able to add the filter parameters to any other command !The actual filtering process is carried out at the end of the operation.

StructureParameter Description

FILTER_IOBJNMFILTER_IOBJNM_N (optional)

Name of the charcateristic / structure thatyou want to filter bySpecify the technical name of the characteristic(0COUNTRY, for example) or the structure (25characters) here.

FILTER_COLLAPS (optional)

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Removing filter characteristics from thedrilldownThe characteristics that are specified underFILTER_IOBJNM, are removed from the axesafter the filter has been applied. If you do notspecify the parameters, the system assumesyou want to use the value ‘X’ = Yes.

VAR_SIGN_N (optional) Row effect'I' found values are added,

'E' found values are removed.

If the parameter is not specified,then 'I' is accepted.

If the FILTER_IOBJNM_N entry is missing from an index n, the value fromFILTER_IOBJNM is used, if available.



For filtering individual values, the following parameters are also specified:


FILTER_VALUEFILTER_VALUE_NFILTER_VALUE_EXTFILTER_VALUE_EXT_N

Filter ValueValue that is filtered next.

If the variant with the ending 'EXT'is chosen, the entire value inbrackets has to be specified in theexternal dislay, for example,12.24.2000.

If the ending 'EXT' is not used, theentire value in brackets has to bespecified in the internal display, forexample, 20001224 for12.24.2000.

FILTER_VALUE_TYPE (optional)FILTER_VALUE_TYPE_N (optional)

Type of value specified underFILTER_VALUE‘VALUE’ : Key for a characteristic value

‘VARIABLE_EXIT’ : Name of an exit variableThe filter is set using the values returned by thevariable exit. Parameter, interval, and selectionoption variables are permitted for customer andSAP exit variables as well as for default values.

OPERATOR (optional)OPERATOR_N (optional)

Operator'EQ' = Individual value

'LT' = Less than

'LE' = Less than or equal to

'GT' = Greater than

'GE' = Greater than or equal to

If no operator is specified, then'EQ' is accepted.

For filtering intervals, the following parameters are also accepted:


FILTER_VALUE_LOWFILTER_VALUE_LOW_NFILTER_VALUE_LOW_EXTFILTER_VALUE_LOW_EXT_N

Filter value – lower limit (no brackets)

FILTER_VALUE_HIGHFILTER_VALUE_HIGH_NFILTER_VALUE_HIGH_EXTFILTER_VALUE_HIGH_EXT_N

Filter value – upper limit (no brackets)



For filtering hierarchy nodes, the following parameters are also accepted:


FILTER_VALUEFILTER_VALUE_N

Hierarchy Node Name

FILTER_NODE_IOBJNM (optional)FILTER_NODE_IOBJNM_N (optional)

Name of the Node CharacteristicYou have to specify the name of the nodecharacteristic if you want to filter according tohierarchy nodes. With characteristic nodes andtext nodes, you have to specify thecharacteristic name (0HIER_NODE).

ExamplesFilter query view1 according to the country Germany<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ FILTER_IOBJNM=’0COUNTRY’FILTER_VALUE=’DE’>

Filter query view1 according to the first three months<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ FILTER_IOBJNM=’0CALMONTH’FILTER_VALUE_LOW_EXT=’1’ FILTER_VALUE_HIGH_EXT='3'>

Filter all query views according to costs, and the countries Germany and the USA<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’*’ MULTI=’X’FILTER_IOBJNM_1=’DRB9ZVVMBCHVX4F04Z1JGKYVC’FILTER_VALUE_1=’DTG057U7OQ8K2ALKCMR2AWM14’ FILTER_IOBJNM_2=’0COUNTRY’FILTER_VALUE_2=’DE’ FILTER_IOBJNM_3=’0COUNTRY’ FILTER_VALUE_3=’US’>

Filter all query views according to the current month<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’*’ MULTI=’X’ FILTER_IOBJNM=’0CALMONTH’FILTER_VALUE=’0CMONTH’ FILTER_VALUE_TYPE=’VARIABLE_EXIT’>

Removing FiltersDefinitionRemove filter is a command for a query view in the Web template.

UseYou use this command to remove the filter from a characteristic or a structure for one or more queryviews.

StructureCMD Remove_Filter


IOBJNMIOBJNM_N

Name of the characteristic/structureSpecify here the technical name of thecharacteristic (0COUNTRY, for example) orstructure (25 characters) from which you wantto delete the filter. It is also possible to specifya list of characteristics/structures.



ALL‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Remove all filtersAlternatively to listing characteristics andstructures, you can remove all filters.

ExamplesRemove the filter by country from query view1<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’Remove_Filter’ IOBJNM=’0COUNTRY’ >

Remove the filter by country from all query views and filter according to calendar year 2000<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’*’ MULTI=’X’ CMD=’Remove_Filter’IOBJNM=’0COUNTRY’ FILTER_IOBJNM=’0CALYEAR’ FILTER_VALUE=’2000’>

Remove all filters by country from query views and filter according to calendar year 2000<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='*' MULTI='X' CMD='Remove_Filter' ALL='X'FILTER_IOBJNM='0CALYEAR' FILTER_VALUE='2000'>

Calling Value HelpDefinitionCalling value help is a command for a query view in the Web template.

UseBy using this command you can call the filter value help for a characteristic or a structure for a queryview.


HELP_SERVICE DP_VIEW_FILTER


IOBJNM Name of the characteristic/structureSpecify the technical name of the characteristichere (for example, 0COUNTRY) or thestructure (25-place character sequence) forwhich you want to call value help.

BOOKED_VALUES Using posted values for value helpIf this parameter is not specified or is not set to‘X’, only values are displayed in the input helpthat are also booked in the InfoProvider withinthe scope of the currently valid filter conditions.This can take a long time under certainconditions.

If the parameter is set to ' ', all dimension tablevalues are displayed. This can be quicker, butcan also display values that do not appear inthe InfoProvider under the current filterconditions and when filtering can give the resultNo corresponding data found.



DrilldownDefinitionDrilldown is a command for a query view in the Web template.

UseUse this command to change the position of a characteristic or a structure for one or more queryviews.

StructureCMD Expand


IOBJNM Name of the characteristic/structureSpecify the technical name of the characteristichere (for example, 0COUNTRY) or thestructure (25-place character sequence thatyou want to bring into the drilldown.

AXIS (optional)‘X’ = columns

‘Y’ = rows

’ ’ = Free characteristics (=remove drilldown)

Axis on which the characteristic/structure isto be basedIf PARENT_IOBJNM is not specified, thecharacteristic/structure is brought onto the axisbehind the other characteristics/structures. Ifyou do not specify the parameter ‘AXIS’, thevalue ‘Y’ is used for characteristics, and ‘X’ forstructures.

PARENT_IOBJNM (optional) Name of a characteristic/structure on theaxisWhen you specify this parameter, you can draga characteristic/structure behind a different oneon an axis.

ExamplesDrilldown query view1 by country<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View 1’ CMD=’Expand’ IOBJNM=’0COUNTRY’ >

Drilldown query view 1 by country and filter the calendar year to 2000<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’Expand’ IOBJNM=’0COUNTRY’FILTER_IOBJNM=’0CALYEAR’ FILTER_VALUE=’2000’>

Drag periods 1, 2, and 3 (2000) from query view1 to the columns<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’Expand’ IOBJNM=’0FISCPER’ AXIS=’X’FILTER_IOBJNM=’0FISCPER’ FILTER_VALUE_1=’2000001’ FILTER_VALUE_2=’2000002’FILTER_VALUE_3=’2000003’>

Remove DrilldownDefinitionRemove drilldown is a command for a query view in the Web template.



UseUse this command to remove a characteristic or a structure from the drilldown for one or more queryviews. This command is the same as the command Drilldown [Seite 281] if the parameter AXIS=’ ‘ isset.

StructureCMD Collapse


IOBJNM Name of the characteristic/structure Specify the technical name of the characteristichere (for example, 0COUNTRY) or thestructure (25-place character sequence) thatyou want to remove from the drilldown.

ExampleRemove drilldown by country from query view1<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’Collapse’ IOBJNM=’0COUNTRY’ >

Switching Characteristics/StructuresDefinitionSwitch Characteristic/Structures is a command for a query view in the Web template.

UseUse this command to remove a characteristic or a structure from a characteristic or a structure, for oneor more query views.

StructureCMD Exchange


IOBJNM_1 Name of characteristic/structureSpecify the technical name of the 1st

characteristic (0COUNTRY, for example) or the1st structure (25 characters) here.

IOBJNM_2 Name of characteristic/structureSpecify the technical name of the 2nd

characteristic (0COUNTRY, for example) or the2nd structure (25 characters) here.

ExampleReplace drilldown by country with drilldown by calendar year in query view 1<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View 1’ CMD=’Exchange’ IOBJNM_1=’0COUNTRY’IOBJNM_2=’0CALYEAR’>

or<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View 1’ CMD=’Exchange’ IOBJNM_1=’0CALYEAR’IOBJNM_2=’0COUNTRY’>



Swapping AxesDefinitionSwap Axes is a command for a query view in the Web template.

UseThis command swaps the roles of the axes (the list is reversed). All the characteristics and structuresin the rows are moved into the columns, and all the characteristics and structures in the columns aremoved into the rows.

StructureCMD Switch_Axes

Swap axes for the query view1<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View 1' CMD='SWITCH_AXIS'>

Setting the Navigational StateDefinitionSetting the navigational state is a command for a query view in the Web template.

UseBy calling this command, you can restructure or redistribute characteristics and structures on the axes.

Structure CMD SET_NAV_STATE


ALL‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Redistribute all characteristics andstructuresIf this parameter is set to ‘X’, then allcharacteristics and structures are taken fromthe axes and redistributed according to theother parameters.

If the parameter is not set or is set to ‘ ‘, thenthe listed characteristics are assignedaccording to the parameters on the axes.

IOBJNMIOBJNM_N

Name of the characteristic/structureSpecify the technical name of the characteristichere (for example, 0COUNTRY) or thestructure (25-place character sequence) thatyou would like to place on an axis.



AXISAXIS_N‘X’ = columns

‘Y’ = rows

' ' = free characteristics

Axis on which the characteristic/structure isto be basedThe characteristic or structure is based on theaxis. The position on the axis is specified bythe parameter ‘Position’.

POSITIONPOSITION_N

Position on an axisBy specifying the position, the characteristic orstructure is set for this position on the axis.

If the position is not specified or isset to ‘0’, then the characteristic orstructure is set at the end of thedrilldown sequence.

Moving the key figure structure to the rows and removing the calendar year andplanned/actual structure from the columns<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View1' CMD='SET_NAV_STATE' ALL='X'IOBJNM_1='DTG057U7OQ8K2ALKCMR2AWM14' AXIS_1='Y'IOBJNM_2='0CALYEAR' POSITION_2='1' AXIS_2='X'IOBJNM_3='EFG057U7OQ8K2JKKCMR2AWM67' POSITION_3='2' AXIS_3='X'>

Ensuring that the cost centers (and not the materials) are in the drilldown for allquery views<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='*' MULTI='X' CMD='SET_NAV_STATE'IOBJNM_1='0COSTCENTER' AXIS_1='Y' IOBJNM_2='0MATERIAL' AXIS_2=' '>

SortDefinitionSort is a command for a query view in the Web template.

UseDepending on the parameterization, you use this command to sort characteristics or according tovalues.

Structure CMD Sort


SORT_TYPE'K' = Key

'T' = Text

'H' = Hierarchy

'S' = Selection

'V' = Value

Type of sortCharacteristics can be sorted according to key,name, hierarchy (if there is an active displayhierarchy for the characteristic) or selection (if,in the query definition, there is more than onerestricted single value or a query view isrestricted dynamically). You can also sortaccording to values.



SORT_DIRECTION'A' = Ascending

'D' = Descending

Required sort direction

The sort direction for sort_type=His always 'A'.

IOBJNM

Only for sorting characteristics.

Characteristic that you want to sort

This parameter is omitted whenyou are sorting according tovalues.

STRUCTURE_MEMBER_1

Only for sorting according to value.

Component of the first structureIf you sort according to value, you have tospecify the value cell exactly. To do this, youhave to specify the components of the structure(25-character string) for all the occurringstructures (maximum 2).

STRUCTURE_MEMBER_2

Only for sorting according to value.

Component of the second structureIf two structures are defined in the query, youhave to also determine the structuralcomponents of the second structure.

Sorting Customers in Query View1 According to Text, in Ascending Order<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View1' CMD='SORT' IOBJNM='0CUSTOMER'SORT_TYPE='T' SORT_DIRECTION='A'>

Sorting List According to Actual Sales, in Descending Order<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View1' CMD='SORT' SORT_TYPE='V'SORT_DIRECTION='D' STRUCTURE_MEMBER_1='DTG057U7OQ8K2ALKCMR2AWM14'STRUCTURE_MEMBER_2='EFG057U7OQ8K2JKKCMR2AWM67'>

Setting Properties of Display AttributesDefinitionInstruction for a query view.

UseYou can change the properties of display attributes with this command.

Structure CMD SET_ATTRIBUTE


IOBJNM Name of characteristicSpecify the technical name of the characteristic(0COUNTRY, for example) to which theattribute belongs here.



ATTRINM Name of the attributeDefine the technical name of the displayattribute here.

ACTIVE‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Display attribute

POSITION Position of the attribute within the attribute

PRESENTATION'KEY' = key

'TEXT' = shortest text

'TEXT_MD' = middle-length text

'TEXT_LG' = long text

'KEY_TEXT' = key and text

'TEXT_KEY' = text and key

Layout

Results Row PositionDefinitionInstruction for a query view.

UseYou can define the position of the results row with this command. Hierarchy nodes are also based onthis setting if there are other objects with competing settings on the hierarchy axis.

StructureResult position

CMD SET_RESULT_POSITION


AXIS‘X’ = columns

‘Y’ = rows

Axis on which the result position should beset

RESULT_POSITION'TOP' = Top/left

'BOTTOM' = Bottom/right

Result position

Hierarchy Node Position

CMD SET_RESULT_POSITION




IOBJNM Name of characteristicEnter the technical name of the characteristicon which the hierarchy node position should bedefined here.

RESULT_POSITION'TOP' = Top (left)

'BOTTOM' = Bottom (right)

Node positionThe information in brackets represent whathappens if the characteristic is on the columns.

Suppression of Result RowsDefinitionInstruction for a query view.

UseYou can suppress results row with this command.

Structure CMD SET_SUPPRESSION


IOBJNM Name of characteristicDefine the technical name of the characteristic(e.g. 0COUNTRY) here.

RESULT_SUPPRESSION'NEVER' = No suppression

'CONDITIONAL' = Conditional suppression

'ALWAYS' = Always suppress

Suppression method

Define DisplayDefinitionInstruction for a query view.

UseYou can change the display of characteristics, hierarchy node types and attributes with this command.



Structure CMD SET_PRESENTATION



NODE_IOBJNM (Option 1) Name of the node characteristicWith characteristic nodes and text nodes, youhave to specify the characteristic name(0HIER_NODE).

ATTRINM (Option 2) Name of the attributeDefine the technical name of the displayattribute here.

PRESENTATION'NONE' = No display (only for characteristics)

'KEY' = key

'TEXT' = shortest text

'TEXT_MD' = middle-length text

'TEXT_LG' = long text

'KEY_TEXT' = key and text

'TEXT_KEY' = text and key

Layout

Calling Dialog Characteristic PropertiesDefinitionInstruction for a query view.

UseYou can call the Characteristic Properties dialog with this command.


HELP_SERVICE CHAR_PROPERTIES





Currency TranslationDefinitionInstruction for a query view.

UseYou can define a new currency translation for the query view with this command.

Structure CMD CURRENCY_CONVERSION


CUR_CONV_METHOD Currency translation type

CUR_CONV_TYPE‘0’ = database currency

'1' = as in the query definition

'2' = into target currency

'3' = into target currency via definition currency

Translation type

TARGET_CURRENCY Target currencyOnly need be specified for CUR_CONV_TYPE2 and 3

Calling a Dialog for Currency TranslationDefinitionInstruction for a query view.

UseYou can call the dialog for currency translation with this command.


HELP_SERVICE CURRENCY_CONVERSION

Defining and Changing ExceptionsDefinitionInstruction for a query view.



UseYou can change existing (local) exceptions and define new (local) ones with this command.

Exceptions that were defined in the Query Designer cannot be changed.

Structure CMD SET_EXCEPTION


EXCEPTION_ID(optional)

ID of the condition to be changedIf there is no exception with this ID, a new oneis created. A new exception is also created ifthis parameter is not filled.


Exception active

DESCRIPTION DescriptionThis text is displayed in the list of exceptions.

IOBJNM_I Context in which a characteristic must beThe exception is only evaluated if the data cellfor the given characteristic is in the contextdescribed by parameters OPERATOR andVALUE.

OPERATOR_I Context in which a characteristic must beValid operators are:

'AL' = No restrictions

'AG' = Aggregated (no filtering)

'EQ' = A certain value

'NA' = Restricted to a value

'HL' = Hierarchy level

VALUE_I Context in which a characteristic must beKey of the characteristic value if operator 'EQ'and hierarchy level if operator 'HL'.

ALERT_LEVEL_J Alert LevelThe alert level can have the values 1, 2 and 3for good numbers, 4, 5 and 6 for criticalnumbers and 7, 8, and 9 for bad numbers.

OPERATOR_J Operator for the data values'EQ' = Equal to

'NE' = Not equal to

'BT' = Interval

'LE' : Less than or equal to

'LT' = Less than

'GE' : Greater than or equal to

'GT' = Greater than



VALUE_LOW_J Data cell value

VALUE_HIGH_J Data cell value toThis parameter is only needed for intervaloperators.

Calling a Dialog for Defining ExceptionsDefinitionInstruction for a query view.

UseYou can call the dialog for defining exceptions with this command.


HELP_SERVICE EXCEPTION_DEFINITION


EXCEPTION_ID Name of exceptionEnter the technical name of the exception hereif you want to change an existing exception. Ifno value is defined for this parameter, a newexception will be created.

Setting the Status of an ExceptionDefinitionSet the status of an exception is a command for a query view in the Web template.

UseYou call this command when you want to change the status of an exception in a query view.

StructureCMD Set_Exception_State


EXCEPTION_ID Technical name of the exceptionGive the technical name of the exception here(25-place character sequence).



ACTIVE (Option 1)‘X’ = activate, ‘ ’ = deactivate

Required exception status

TOGGLE_STATE (Option 2)‘X’ = switch, ‘ ’ = do not switch

Change the exception statusIf this attribute is set to ‘X’, the exception isactivated, if it is not active already, anddeactivated, if it is active.

ExamplesSet the exception “Problems in Sales” in Query View1 to active<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’Set_Exception_State’

EXCEPTION_ID=’DTG057U7OQ8K2ALKCMR2AWM14’ ACTIVE=’X’>

Change the exception “Problems in Sales” in Query View1<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’Set_Exception_State’

EXCEPTION_ID=’DTG057U7OQ8K2ALKCMR2AWM14’ TOGGLE_STATE=’X’>

Creating and Changing ConditionsDefinitionInstruction for a query view.

Use'You can change existing (local) conditions and define new (local) ones with this command.

Conditions that were defined in the Query Designer cannot be changed.

Structure CMD SET_CONDITION


CONDITION_ID(optional)

ID of the condition to be changedIf there is no condition with this ID, a newcondition is created. A new exception is alsocreated if this parameter is not filled.


Condition active

DESCRIPTION DescriptionThis text is displayed in the list of conditions.

IOBJNM_I List of characteristicsList of the characteristics for which thecondition should be applied in combination. Ifno characteristic is specified, the condition isapplied to all characteristics.



STRUCTURE_MEMBER_1_I Component of the first structureA condition always refers to exactly one valuecell. To do this, you have to specify thecomponents of the structure (25-characterstring) for all the occurring structures(maximum 2).

STRUCTURE_MEMBER_2_I Component of the second structure (if itexists)

OPERATOR_I An operator'EQ' = Equal to

'NE' = Not equal to

'BT' = Interval

'LE' : Less than or equal to

'LT' = Less than

'GE' : Greater than or equal to

'GT' = Greater than

'TC' = Top n

'TP' = Top percent

'TS' = Top sum

'BC' = Bottom n

'BP' = Bottom percent

'BS' = Bottom sum

VALUE_LOW_I Numerical value for operator

VALUE_HIGH_I Numerical value for operatorOnly the interval operator needs this value.

Calling a Dialog for Defining ConditionsDefinitionInstruction for a query view.

UseYou can call the dialog for defining conditions with this command.


HELP_SERVICE CONDITION_DEFINITION




CONDITION_ID Name of the conditionEnter the technical name of the condition hereif you want to change an existing condition. Ifno value is defined for this parameter, a newcondition will be created.

Setting the Status of a ConditionDefinitionSet the status of an condition is a command for a query view in the Web template.

UseYou call this command when you want to change the status of a condition in a query view.

StructureCMD Set_Condition_State


CONDITION_ID Technical name of the conditionGive the technical name of the condition here(25-place character sequence).


Required status for the condition


Change the status of the conditionIf this attribute is set to ‘X’, the condition isactivated, if it is not active already, anddeactivated, if it is active.

ExamplesSet the condition “Top 10 Customers” in query view1 to active<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View1' CMD='Set_Condition_State'

CONDITION_ID='DTG057U7OQ8K2ALKCMR2AWM14' ACTIVE='X'>

Change the “Top 10 Customers” condition in query view1<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View1' CMD='Set_Condition_State'

CONDITION_ID='DTG057U7OQ8K2ALKCMR2AWM14' TOGGLE_STATE='X'>

Displaying DocumentsDefinitionInstruction for a query view.



UseYou can call the document display for the selected context with this command.

StructureYou can access four different contexts:

CMD DOCUMENTS


NAVIGATIONAL_STATE (Option 1)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Documents for the current navigation status

DATA_ROW (Option 2) Documents for a data cell: Y coordinateCoordinates in the data block

DATA_COLUMN (Option 2) Documents for a data cell: X coordinateCoordinates in the data block

IOBJNM (Option 3) Documents for a characteristic

IOBJNM (Option 4) Documents for a characteristic value:characteristic

VALUE (Option 4) Documents for a characteristic value: keyCharacteristic value in internal representation(without conversion exit)

Saving the Query ViewDefinitionCommand for a query view.

UseYou use this command to save a query view as a reusable object.

Structure CMD SAVE_VIEW


TECH_NAME Technical name of the view

DESCRIPTION Description

OVERWRITE‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Overwrite existing view



Properties of Value CellsDefinitionInstruction for a query view.

UseYou can change the properties of value cells with this command.

Structure CMD SET_VALUE_PROPERTIES


STRUCTURE_MEMBER_1 Component of the first structureThe properties are defined for a value cell. Todo this, you have to specify the components ofthe structure (25-character string) for all theoccurring structures (maximum 2).

STRUCTURE_MEMBER_2 Component of the second structure (if itexists)

SCALING_FACTOR Scaling factors0=No scaling, 1=Factor 10, 2=Factor 100, ...

DECIMAL_PLACES Number of displayed decimal places

EMPHASIS‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Display with highlighting

Calling a Dialog for Cell PropertiesDefinitionInstruction for a query view.

UseYou can call the dialog for cell properties with this command.


HELP_SERVICE STRUC_MEMBER_PROPERTIES


STRUCTURE_MEMBER_1 Component of the first structureEnter the value of the first structurecomponent here. The combination of structurecomponents defines the coordinates for a cell.



STRUCTURE_MEMBER_2 Component of the second structure (if itexists)Enter the value of the second structurecomponent here. The combination of structurecomponents defines the coordinates for a cell.

List CalculationDefinitionList calculation is a command for a query view in the Web template.

UseWith this command you can change the settings for calculating lists for a value cell.

StructureCMD SET_LIST_CALCULATION


STRUCTURE_MEMBER_1 Component of the first structureThe value cell must be determined exactly forcalculating lists. To do this, you have to specifythe components of the structure (25-characterstring) for all the occurring structures(maximum 2).

STRUCTURE_MEMBER_2 Component of the second structure (if itexists)

APPLY_TO_RESULTS (optional)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Use calculation guidelines also for eventcells

CUMULATION (optional)‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Cumulated output

VALUE_CALCULATION (optional) Calculations' ' = No list calculation

'R' = Norming for query result

'G’ = Norming for overall result

'C' = Norming for result

'S' = Ranking list

'O' = Ranking list (olympic)



RESULT_CALCULATION (optional) Calculations for result cells'00' = No list calculation

'01' = Summation

'02' = Maximum

'03' = Minimum

'04' = Count of all values

'04' = Count of all values

'06' = Average using all values

'06' = Average using all values <> 0

'08' = Standard deviation

'09' = Variance

'10' = Hide results

'11' = First value

'12' = Last value

ExampleDisplay maximum plan sales<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View1' CMD='SET_LIST_CALCULATION'STRUCTURE_MEMBER_1='DTG057U7OQ8K2ALKCMR2AWM14'STRUCTURE_MEMBER_2='EFG057U7OQ8K2JKKCMR2AWM67' VALUE_CALCULATION='02'>

See also:OLAP Functions for Active Cells [Seite 427]

Operations for Display HierarchiesDefinitionOperations on Display Hierarchies contains commands for a query view in a Web template.

UseThere are four operations that you apply to display hierarchies:

1. With the SET_HIERARCHY_STATE command, you activate or deactivate a display hierarchy thathas been assigned to a characteristic (for example, in the query definition or in a query view).

CMD SET_HIERARCHY_STATE


IOBJNM Name of characteristicCharacteristic with a display hierarchyassigned to it already.


Required status of the display hierarchy.




Switch the status of a hierarchyIf this attribute is set to ‘X’, the displayhierarchy is activated, if it is not active already,and deactivated, if it is currently active.

Activating a Hierarchy for the Cost Center Characteristic for Query View1<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View1' CMD='Set_Hierarchy_State'IOBJNM='0COSTCENTER' ACTIVE='X'>

2. You use the SET_HIERARCHY command to assign a display hierarchy to a characteristic.

CMD SET_HIERARCHY


IOBJNM Name of characteristicCharacteristic that you want to assign a displayhierarchy to.

HIERARCHY_NAME Technical name of the hierarchy

HIERARCHY_VERSION Hierarchy versionIf the hierarchy has a particular version, youmust specify the version. Otherwise you canleave out this parameter.

HIERARCHY_DATE Key date for the hierarchyYou specify the key date for time-dependenthierarchies here. The date must be formattedas YearMonthDay (for example, 20002412).

If the parameter is not transferred,the key date in the query is copied.

ACTIVE‘X’ = activate, ‘ ’ = deactivate

Required status of the display hierarchy.

Assigning ‘MyHierarchy’ to the Cost Center Characteristic for Query View1<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View1' CMD='Set_Hierarchy'IOBJNM='0COSTCENTER' Hierarchie_Name='MyHierarchy' ACTIVE='X'>

3. You use the DRILL_TO_LEVEL command to expand the display hierarchy up to a specifiedhierarchy level.

CMD DRILL_TO_LEVEL


IOBJNM Name of characteristicCharacteristic, to which an active displayhierarchy is assigned.



LEVEL Hierarchy levelLevel to which you want to expand thehierarchy. Level 1 is the root level.

If a hierarchy node is filtered at thesame time, make sure that thelevel is higher than the level of thefiltered node.

Drilldown Cost Center Characteristic for Query View1 up to Level 3<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View1' CMD='Drill_To_Level'Iobjnm='0COSTCENTER' Level='3'>

4. You use the SET_DRILL_STATE command you can expand and collapse a node from a displayhierarchy.

Note that the node must be visible in the list in the current navigation status.

The command is a useful way of influencing the extent to which the hierarchy is expandedwhen you are calling a Web application, activating a hierarchy, or determining and activating ahierarchy. Command sequences are used to execute both commands at the same time.

CMD SET_DRILL_STATE


IOBJNM Name of characteristicCharacteristic, to which an active displayhierarchy is assigned.

POSITION Data position in the drilldownSince several objects can be drilled down onan axis, the node specifications are no longerunique. Therefore, the axis position is usedinstead. For example, the fifth data line.

DRILL_STATE Level to which you want the hierarchy to beexpanded'E' = hierarchy nodes expanded

'C' = collapse

'U' = by activating “Display as Hierarchy” on theaxis: drilldown according to the next object onthe axis

Specifying the Hierarchy for the Cost Center Characteristic for Query View1 andSimultaneously Expanding the Fifth Node on the Axis<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View1' CMD='Set_Hierarchy'IOBJNM='0COSTCENTER' Hierarchie_Name='MyHierarchy' ACTIVE='X'CMD_1='CMD=set_Drill_State&Data_Provider=View1&iobjnm=0COSTCENTER&POSITION=5&Drill_State=E'>

A command sequence is used in this example.

See also:



Command Sequences [Seite 265]

Calling Up Dialog Box for Formula DefinitionDefinitionCommand for a query view.

UseYou can use this command to call up a dialog box for defining a new or an existing formula.

StructureCMD Process_help_window

HELP_SERVICE DP_VIEW_SET_CALC_MEMBER

SUBCMD NEW


FORMULA_STRUCTURE Technical name of structure

CMD Process_help_window

HELP_SERVICE DP_VIEW_SET_CALC_MEMBER

SUBCMD CHANGE


FORMULA_ID Technical name of formula

Goto using Report/Report Interface.DefinitionCommand for a query view.

UseYou can use this command to execute a report to report jump. You can jump from one Web templateto another Web template, to another query, or to a transaction in a R/3 system and much more.

Structure CMD RRI




RRI_RECEIVER RRI Recipient ID

DATA_ROW(optional)

Data rowContext from which jump is made

DATA_COLUMN(optional)

Data columnContext from which jump is made

IOBJNM(optional)

a characteristicContext from which jump is made

ExampleJump to XYZ<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View1' CMD='RRI' RRI_RECEIVER='XYZ'>

See also:Overview: Report-Report-Interface [Extern]

Defining Sender/Receiver Assignment to the R/RI in BW [Seite 90]

Exporting DataDefinitionInstruction for a query view.

UseYou can export the data of a query view to a CSV or MS Excel 2000 file with this instruction.

Structure CMD EXPORT


FORMAT Format'CSV' = CSV file

'XLS' = MS Excel 2000 file

ExampleExporting data to MS Excel 2000<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View1' CMD='EXPORT' FORMAT='XLS'>

Use of JavaScript FunctionsUseYou can execute commands or command sequences with JavaScript as well as by using<SAP_BW_URL> tags.



Another JavaScript application is the enhancement of the context menu to include customer-specificentries.

All subsequent examples refer to JavaScript excerpts.

FunctionsYou can choose from the following functions:

Sending Instructions [Seite 303]

Enhancing the Context Menu with JavaScript [Seite 307]

Logon Language [Seite 314]

Sending InstructionsUseYou must create an URL before you can send it. The following options are available:

� Use of the <SAP_BW_URL> tag

� Use of BW JavaScript function SAP_BW_URL_GET(). This returns the same as the<SAP_BW_URL>tag, but can be called from outside its own frame.

Functions JavaScript Function SAP_BW_URL_GET

Return value Start of an URL for calling an instructionthat should be executed in the same pagecontext.

Prepare Bookmark URLvar = "<SAP_BW_URL CMD='BOOKMARK'>";

gives you the same as

var = "<SAP_BW_URL>" + "&CMD=BOOKMARK";

or

var = SAP_BW_URL_GET() + "&CMD=BOOKMARK";

There are a number of JavaScript functions for sending instructions. Functions that simplify themanagement of windows and that permit you to call for example property dialogs in separate windowsare provided. These functions take into consideration whether or not the Web browser should useJavaScript. No new windows are created for example for a pocket IE device.

You can choose from the following JavaScript functions:

Execute URL in the Same Window [Seite 304]

Execute URL in a New Window [Seite 304]

URL from a New Window in the Opening Window [Seite 305]

Close Window [Seite 305]

Execute Form in a New Window [Seite 306]

Execute Form in the Opening Window [Seite 306]



Execute URL in the Same WindowUseJavaScript function for sending commands.

Functions JavaScript Function SAPBWOpenURL


url URL to be started.

ExampleSend Bookmark URLSAPBWOpenURL(SAP_BW_URL_GET() + "&CMD=BOOKMARK");

or in HTML:

<a href="JavaScript:SAPBWOpenURL(SAP_BW_URL_GET() + '&CMD=BOOKMARK');">Createbookmark</a>

Open SAP Portals HomepageSAPBWOpenURL("http://www.sapportals.com");

Executing an URL in a New WindowUseJavaScript function for sending commands.

FunctionsThe URL is executed in a new window (if the output device permits this). This is advantageous forexample for selecting filter values and for the properties dialogs.

JavaScript Function SAPBWOpenWindow


url URL to be started.

Name Window name

Width Width of the window

Height Height of the window

ExampleCall Select filter value dialog for characteristic 0Costcenter of Data Provider ABCSAPBWOpenWindow(SAP_BW_URL_GET() +"&CMD=PROCESS_HELP_WINDOW&HELP_SERVICE=DP_VIEW_FILTER&DATA_PROVIDER=ABC&IOBJNM=0COSTCENTER","FILTER",800,600);

or in HTML:



<a href="JavaScript:SAPBWOpenWindow(SAP_BW_URL_GET() +'&CMD=PROCESS_HELP_WINDOW&HELP_SERVICE=DP_VIEW_FILTER&DATA_PROVIDER=ABC&IOBJNM=0COSTCENTER','FILTER',800,600);">Define filter value for cost center</a>

Display self-made form in a new windowSAPBWOpenWindow("http://.../CustomerForm.htm","CONFIG",300,200);

Open SAP Portals homepage in a new windowSAPBWOpenWindow("http://www.sapportals.com","SAPPORTALS",800,600);

URL from a New Window in the Opening WindowUseJavaScript function for sending commands.

FunctionsYou can send an URL on the opening window from a new window with this function. The properties ofthe output device are taken into consideration.

JavaScript Function SAPBWSetOpenerUrl


url URL to be started in the opener window.

closetrue = close, false = leave open

Then close window

ExampleStart a new Web application in the main windowSAPBWSetOpenerUrl(SAP_BW_URL_GET() + "&CMD=LDOC&TEMPLATE_ID=NewTemplate");

or in HTML:

<a href="JavaScript:SAPBWSetOpenerUrl(SAP_BW_URL_GET() +"&CMD=LDOC&TEMPLATE_ID=NewTemplate");">New Web report</a>

Closing WindowsUseJavaScript function for sending commands.

FunctionsWith this function you can close a window without having to execute a command.

The properties of the output device are taken into consideration. If the output device doesnot accept JavaScript, the function pages back by one page.

JavaScript Function SAPBWCloseWindow



ExampleClose windowSAPBWCloseWindow();

or in HTML:

<a href="JavaScript:SAPBWCloseWindow();">Close window</a>

Executing a Form in a New WindowUseJavaScript function for sending commands.

FunctionsThe form is executed in a new window (if the output device permits this). You can use this function tocreate your own forms for control in a Web template.

JavaScript Function SAPBWWForm


name Window name

formname Name of form

width Width of the window

height Height of the window

ExampleExecute a Form in a New WindowSAPBWWForm("WindowName","FormName",800,600);

or in HTML:

<a href="JavaScript:SAPBWWForm("WindowName","FormName",800,600);">Evaluate form in a newwindow</a>

Executing a Form in the Opening WindowUseJavaScript function for sending commands.

FunctionsYou can execute a form on the opening window from a new window with this function.

The properties of the output device are taken into consideration.

JavaScript Function SAPBWOpenerSubmitForm




formname Name of form

closetrue = close, false = leave open

Then close window

ExampleExecute form in the opening window and close windowSAPBWOpenerSubmitForm("FormName",true);

or in HTML:

<a href="JavaScript:SAPBWOpenerSubmitForm('FormName',true);">Execute form and closewindow</a>

Enhancing the Context Menu with JavaScriptUseAs well as being able to make entries in the context menu visible, entries in the enhanced menu visibleor entries in the enhanced menu invisible, you can also hang scenario-specific entries in the menu.There are several options:

� You define the new entries for the Web template properties with the object tag. For moreinformation see Object Tag for the Properties of Web Templates [Seite 243]

� You hang the new entries in the context menu with a JavaScript function. You can find moredetailed information under:

Adding a Menu Entry with JavaScript [Seite 307]

Command Processing [Seite 309]

In both cases you must write a JavaScript function that processes the menu entryselection.

Adding a Menu Entry using JavaScriptUseYou can add new entries to the context menu either using the Web template property or with aJavaScript call.

Functions JavaScript Function SAPBWAddToMenu


label Labeling text in the menu



func JavaScript function for processing thecommandYou implement this function in JavaScript anduse it to execute commands after you haveselected the menu entry.

parameter Free parameterThis parameter is passed to the JavaScriptfunction ‘func’ and you can evaluate it there asrequired. The parameter allows you to use afunction ‘func’ for more than one menu entry.

cell_type‘ ’ = No restriction

‘CHARACTERISTIC’ = Characteristic

‘CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE’ = Characteristicvalue

‘STRUCTURE’ = Structure

‘STRUCTURE_MEMBER = Structuralcomponent

‘DATA’ = Data cell

‘EXCEPTIONS’ = Exceptions item

‘CONDITIONS’ = Conditions item

‘DOCUMENT_LIST’ = Document list item

Context of the entryIf you want the menu entry to appear only incertain contexts and not in all context menus,you can define this with ‘cell_type’ and ‘filter’.

filter Context of the entryDifferent values are relevant here, dependingon the value of ‘cell_type’:

‘CHARACTERISTIC’,‘CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE’, ‘STRUCTURE’,‘STRUCTURE_VALUE’: Iobjnm

‘EXCEPTIONS’: Exception ID

‘CONDITIONS’: Condition ID

‘DOCUMENT_LIST’: Document ID

See Examples.

visibility‘ ’= Not displayed

‘X’= Displayed in the “basic menu”


Visibility of the entryHere you define if the entry is to appear in thebasic menu or in the enhanced menu.

position‘TOP’ = Before the “normal” entries

‘BOTTOM’ = After the “normal” entries

Position of the entryThe entries are inserted in the order in whichthey were called. You can choose if the entry isto appear before the “normal” entries or afterthem in the menu. You cannot position theentries in between the “normal” entries.

Data_provider Name of the data providerName of the data provider (if the entry is to bemade only for a specific data provider).



Item Name of the Web itemName of the Web item (if the entry is to bemade only for a specific Web item).

ExampleSee the examples under Command Processing [Seite 309]

Command ProcessingUseWhen you enhance the context menu with customer-specific entries (with Web template properties orJavaScript function 'SAPBWAddToMenu'), you must define a JavaScript function that is executedwhen a customer-specific entry is selected. This function is responsible for processing the command.

FunctionsThe function must support the following interface:

JavaScript Function JavaScript function for processing thecommand


parameter Free parameterThe parameter makes it possible to processmore than one menu entry with one function.See Examples.

cell_type' ' = No special

‘CHARACTERISTIC’ = Characteristic

‘CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE’ = Characteristicvalue

‘STRUCTURE’ = Structure

‘STRUCTURE_VALUE’ = Structure componentvalue

‘DATA’ = Data cell

'EXCEPTIONS' = Web Item List of Exceptions

'CONDITIONS' = Web Item List of Conditions

'DOCUMENT_LIST' = Web Item List ofDocuments

Context of cell

Filters Context of cellDifferent values makes sense here, dependingon the value of ‘cell_type’:

‘CHARACTERISTIC’,‘CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE’, ‘STRUCTURE’,‘STRUCTURE_VALUE’: Iobjnm

‘EXCEPTIONS’: Exception ID

‘CONDITIONS’: Condition ID

‘DOCUMENT_LIST’: Document ID

See Examples.

parameter1 Exact definition of the context of the cellcell_type = 'CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE': Keyof characteristic value

cell_type = 'STRUCTURE_VALUE':STRUCTURE_MEMBER_ID_1

parameter2 Exact definition of the context of the cellcell_type = 'CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE': Nodetype for a hierarchy node

cell_type = 'STRUCTURE_VALUE':STRUCTURE_MEMBER_ID_2

item Name of the Web item on which the menu iscalled

dataprovider Name of the Data Provider on which themenu is called

x Cell is on data column xThis parameter is needed especially for thereport/report interface.

Y Cell is on data row yThis parameter is needed especially for thereport/report interface.

You can use all the JavaScript functions that were listed for processing.

Example<SCRIPT language="JavaScript"><!--

// menu entry at start and only for customer cells, only for data provider DP1

SAPBWAddToMenu("Customerdetails","myMenuProcessor","1","CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE","0CUSTOMER","X","TOP","DP1","");

// Menu entry at the end to the IT Home Page

// Menu entry at the end to the IT Home Page

// Menu entry at the beginning and only on material groups

SAPBWAddToMenu("Materials","myMenuProcessor","3","CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE","0MATERIAL","X","TOP","","","");

// Command Processing



function myMenuProcessor(parameter,cell_type,filter,parameter1,parameter2,item,dataprovider,x,y){ switch (parameter){ case "1":

// Report-report-interface jump to customer details Web application in a new window

SAPBWOpenWindow(SAP_BW_URL_Get() + "&CMD=RRI&DATA_ROW=" + y +"&DATA_COLUMN=" + y + "&IOBJNM=0CUSTOMER&RRI_RECEIVER=ABC","CustDetails",600,400); break; case "2":

// Call IT help page

SAPBWOpenWindow("http://…/it/olap/help.htm","Help",600,400); break; case "3":

// Filter material group and expand by material

SAPBWOpenUrl(SAP_BW_URL_Get() + "&CMD=EXPAND&" + "DATA_PROVIDER=" + escape(dataprovider) + "&IOBJNM=0MATERIAL&IOBJNM_PARENT=0MATGROUP&FILTER_IOBJNM=0MATGROUP" + "&FILTER_VALUE=" + escape(parameter1) + "&FILTER_NODE_IOBJNM=" +escape(parameter2)); break; }}---></SCRIPT>

Properties of Page ObjectsUseThis section lists the JavaScript functions for the properties of Web items and query views:

� You can access the current attribute value of a Web item. See Web Item Attributes [Seite 311]

� You can determine which characteristics a data provider has. See Information on the NavigationStatus [Seite 334]

Web Item AttributesUseYou can access the current attribute values of a Web item using this JavaScript function. For example,you can specify whether a Web item is visible. This will help you to create a Web application in whichyou can switch between two views, for example between a chart and a table, using a link.

FeaturesJavaScript Function SAPBWGetItemProp


Name Logical name of the Web item

Return value Array with Web item properties The information is stored as follows:

new Array(itemName, newArray(attributeName1,attributeValue1), newArray(attributeName2,attributeValue2), ...)

Specifying whether a Web item is visible:

<SCRIPT language="JavaScript">



</SCRIPT>

Characteristics of a Saved Query ViewUseYou can use this JavaScript function to determine which characteristics belong to a data provider. Bydoing this you can then, for example, fill a dropdown box for changing drilldowns with the relevantcharacteristics and do not have to create a dropdown box manually for each query view.

Moreover, this function is language-independent which means the selections are adjustedautomatically for each language. The texts are shown according to the logon language.

FunctionsJavaScript Function SAPBWGetDataProviderDimensions


Name Logical name of the saved query view

Return value Array of characteristics and structures ofthe data provider The individual characteristics and structuresare stored as arrays, as in the example:

new Array(dimArray1, dimArray2, ...)

The individual characteristics and structureshave the following structure:

new Array(iobjnm,is_structure (,X),hierarchyAssigned( ,X), activeHierarchy(,X), axis (X,Y, ), filtered ( ,1 (single value),X(multiple filter values)), caption, unsupportedproperties)

There are other properties in addition to thoselisted, but these have not yet been officiallyreleased.

Listing characteristics and structures:

<SCRIPT language="JavaScript">



</SCRIPT>

Calendar for Date FilterUseYou can use this JavaScript function to call up a calendar. When you select a value, the system filtersthe data characteristic for the specified DataProvider.

FunktionsumfangJavaScript Function SAPBWSetFilterByCalendar



dataProvider Logical name of the DataProviderWhen the filter operation is only to be appliedto a DataProvider, specify its logical namehere.

dataProviderArray Logical name of DataProviderWhen the filter operation is to be applied toseveral DataProviders, specify their logicalnames here, for example, new Array(“DP1“,“DP2“,“DP3“)

iobjnm Date characteristicThe system is to filter according to thischaracteristic.

displayDate (optional) Start dateDate the calendar displays when it appears.This parameter is optional. The date formathas 4 characters for the year, 2 for themonth and 2 characters for the day:YYYYMMDD

Filter DP1 according to 0CALDAY<ahref=”Javascript:SAPBWSetFilterByCalendar(‘DP1’,null,’0CALDAY’,’20020213’);”>FilterCalday</a>

Logon LanguageUseWith this function you can define the logon language and thereby take the different input formats of thevarious languages into consideration in JavaScript.

Functions JavaScript Function SAP_BW_Get_Language

Return value Logon Language e.g. EN for English and DE for German.

Web Design API for TablesPurposeThe Web Design Application Programming Interface (Web Design API) is aimed at Web designers andABAP programmers that want to create Web applications for highly individual scenarios, such as BIcockpits, based on BEx Web application design and want to change the display of tables or navigationblocks to meet their own requirements.



The Web Design API enables you to modify individual cell data (characteristic values, columnheaders, value cells, and so on) with relation to content, display and navigation options.

Process1. Using the Class Builder (transaction SE24) or the Object Navigator (transaction SE80), create a

class with a class name in the customer name space.

2. Give the class the same properties as class CL_RSR_WWW_MODIFY_TABLE.

3. Implement only the methods that fill cell contents that you want to change. For further informationabout the different methods, see Table Interfaces [Seite 315].

4. Create the your Web template from the table provided by SAP.

5. Extend the object tag of the table and/or the navigation block in the Web template with theparameter <param name='MODIFY_CLASS' value='YourClassName'>.

6. Check in the modified Web template.

ResultThe next time you call up the Web template, your class for adjusting the table contents is called up.

We recommend that you test this in transaction RSRT2. Select the HTML checkbox andenter the contents of the start URL from CMD=LDOC as the URL.

You can now test the HTML generation in the Debugger. Simply set suitable breakpointsand restart the transaction.

Table InterfaceDefinitionThis enables you to display tables or navigation blocks in BEx Web applications as you choose.

UseThe range of options reaches from simply changing the display to enhancing the navigation optionsand display specifically for data.

You use ABAP-OO to execute the technical implementation.

� You create an ABAP-OO class.

� This class must succeed from the class CL_RSR_WWW_MODIFY_TABLE.

� The class name of the appropriate class is specified in the object tag of the Web item Table or theWeb item Generic Navigation Block in the Web template in the following form:

<object>…<param name="MODIFY_CLASS" value="YourClassName">…</object>

StructureIn the following, different methods are executed with which you can modify cell contents. All methodsreceive the contents which are suggested as standard in BEx Web Applications as “CHANGING”



parameters. These can be redefined in the implementation of the table interface methods. If individualcell types remain unchanged, leave the implementation empty.

The table interface has the following functions:

� Attributes [Seite 316]

� Events [Seite 323]

� Methods for Manipulating Cell Contents [Seite 324]

� Service Methods [Seite 333]

AttributesDefinitionFunctional components of the table interface.

StructureThe following instance attributes of the class are filled automatically. They get their values from theWeb application framework.

The attributes are read-only.

Attribute Description

N_ITEM_NAME Logical name of the tableThis attribute is needed for command URLs.You can use this attribute, for example, tochange attributes in the table.

N_GENERATE_LINKS Generate navigation linksIf the value = “X”, URLs can be generated.

If the value is blank, the item is for display only.It is not possible to interact with the item.

N_ALT_STYLES Display zebra listIf the value = “X”, the formatting is the same inevery other row.

N_STATELESS Calling the Web application withoutinteractionIf the value = “X”, the Web application is calledand the session is dismantled on theapplication server. SAP BW 2.0 supports nofurther interaction.



N_R_CREATION_PARAMETERS Creation parameters for the tableUsing the reference for an instance of the classCL_RSR_PARAMETER, the system is able toread the value-name pairs that have been usedin the generation of the table. Methods such asGET are used to read the values.

The parameters of the start URL and thename-value pairs specified in the object tag ofthe item in the Web template belong to thesename-value pairs.

This means that the start URL or object tag (inthe Web template) can transfer parameters tothe class. This increases the number of times aclass can be reused and the different areaswhere the class can be used, for example, byusing customer-specific parameters thatconfigure the class individually.

N_JAVASCRIPT Using Java ScriptIf the value = “X”, Java Script functions aresupported. Otherwise, you must not use JavaScript functions, since you cannot be sure thatthe requesting Web browser supports JavaScript.

N_DATA_PROVIDER_NAME Logical name of the data providerNeeded in the generation of navigation URLs.

N_NO_DATA No relevant data found

N_NO_AUTHORIZATION No authorization for displaying data

N_R_DATA_SET Data in the data provider

This attribute is needed only forspecial applications.

As a rule, the information that istransferred by the methodinterfaces is enough to determinethe cell contents.

For more information see Datasets [Seite 317].

DatasetsDefinitionThe dataset contains the data for the query view.



UseSpecial applications require information that cannot be obtained using the method interfaces. Forsome applications you need more information than is contained in the cell contents. For example, youneed the list of available characteristics or the contents of the dynamic filter before you are able tojump from one report into another.

An understanding of the enhancement described below is not necessary for the use of thetable interface.

You have made sure that the data from the dataset (N_R_DATA_SET) is always up to date. TheN_SX_VERSION_20A_1 attribute, type RSRDS_SX_DATA_SET_20A_1, is filled automatically. Thedata consists of both the metadata (a catalog of characteristics (AXIS_INFO) and so on) and thedisplayed values (AXIS_DATA and CELL_DATA).

StructureThe instance attribute N_R_DATA_SET � N_SX_VERSION_20A_1 has the following components:

Component Description

AXIS_INFO [Seite 318] Metadata description of the characteristics,attributes, and structures on the axes.

AXIS_DATA [Seite 319] Characteristic values, attribute values, andstructural components according to thesequence they appear in on the axes.

CELL_DATA [Seite 321] Value cells: The cells are arranged by row first,and then by column.

TXT_SYMBOLS [Seite 322] Text elements for the query

AXIS_INFODefinitionThis component describes the properties of the structures, characteristics, and attributes, and howthey are distributed between the axes.

StructureThe AXIS_INFO is a table of axes (rows, columns, and filters) with the appropriate axes components.

AXIS_INFO Description

AXIS Axis ID0 : Columns

1 : Rows

255 : Filters

NCHARS Value cellsThe cells are arranged by row first, and then bycolumn.

NCOORDS Number of objects on the axis (number ofrows / columns / filter values)



CHARS Characteristics with their attributes andstructures on the axis.

The complex table CHARS has the following structure:

CHARS Description

CHANM Name of the characteristic or of the structure

HIENM Hierarchy name, if the hierarchy is active

VERSION Hierarchy version

DATETO Key date for the hierarchy

CAPTION Name of the characteristic or of thestructure

CHAPRSNT Characteristic display0 : key and text

1 : Text

2 : Key

3 : Text and key

4 : Long text

5 : Medium text

6 : No display

ATTRINM Attributes for this characteristic

ATTRINM is a table of the attributes for the characteristic. It has the following structure:

ATTRINM Description

ATTRINM Name of the attribute

CAPTION Name of the attribute

CHAPRSNT Attribute display0 : key and text

1 : Text

2 : Key

3 : Text and key

4 : Long text

5 : Medium text

AXIS_DATADefinitionThe component AXIS_DATA describes the contents of the axis.

StructureAXIS_DATA is a table with the following structure:



AXIS_DATA Description

AXIS Axis ID0 : Columns

1 : Rows

255 : Filters

SET Axis contents

The complex table SET has the following structure:

SET Description

TUPLE_ORDINAL Number of the entry beginning with 0 on theaxis

CHANM Name of the characteristic or of thestructure

CAPTION Text for the characteristic value

CHAVL Internal key value for the characteristicvalueThis is needed, for example, for the filteroperations.

CHAVL_EXT External key value for the characteristicvalueThis corresponds with CHAVL after theapplication of the conversion exit.

NIOBJNM With hierarchy nodes, this is the name of thenode characteristic (0HIERNODE for textnodes).

TLEVEL Hierarchy level of the entry

DRILLSTATE Extent to which the entry is expanded (foran active hierarchy).L : Hierarchy leaf

- : Expanded node

+ : Collapsed node

OPT Only with filters:

EQ : Single value

LT : Less than

LE : Less than or equal to

GT : Greater than

GE : Greater than or equal to

BL : From-value with intervals (two rows)

BH : To-value with intervals

SIGN I : Include

E : Exclude

ATTRIBUTES Attribute values

ATTRIBUTES is a table with the following structure:

ATTRIBUTES Description



ATTRINM Name of the attribute

CAPTION Text for an attribute value

ATTRIVL Key for the attribute value

This describes the contents of an axis.

CELL_DATADefinitionThe CELL_DATA component describes the value cells.

The number cells of the query view are given as the assigned table of rows for BAPI typeBAPI6111CD. If you display the query view data as a table, the assignment of cells corresponds tothat of the data block, in which the assignment is run first using the rows and then using the columns.

The index of a specific value is therefore calculated as follows:

Index = Column position + (row position – 1)* number of columns

StructureThe data structure is as follows:


CELL_ORDINAL Numbering of the values begins with 0

CELL_ORDINAL is always smallerby 1 than the index of the rows

VALUE Value

FORMATTED_VALUE Formatted value

Unit and currency are used already in this field

VALUE_TYPE Value typeThe value type accepts the following values:

‘ ’ normal, valid value

‘0’ division by 0

‘1’ value cannot be determined

‘3’ value constructed from different currencies

‘5’ zero value

‘9’ surplus

‘D’ date

‘T’ time

‘A’ no authorization for this value

CURRENCY Currency identifier

UNIT Unit identifier



MWKZ Amount/value key figureThe amount/value key figure accepts thefollowing values:

'W' value

‘M’ amount

‘P’ price

‘Q’ ratio

‘%’ percentage value

‘C’ counter

‘F’ real number

‘D’ date

‘T’ time

NUM_SCALE Scaling factors

0 for 1, 1 for 10, 2 for 100, 3 for 1000, ...

NUM_PREC Precision of the number in decimal places

CELL_STATUS Not used

BACK_COLOR Not used

TXT_SYMBOLSDefinitionThe component TXT_SYMBOLS describes the text elements of the query. The text elements areavailable as a table made up of RRX_TXT_SYMBOLS rows.

StructureThe text elements have the following structure (only the most important components):


SYM_TYPE Type of text element‘V’ for variable

‘F’ for filter value

‘C’ for general text element

SYM_NAME Name of the objectWith variables this is the variable name, withfilters it is the filter characteristic, and withgeneral text elements it is the name of theelement.

A list of the names of the general text elementsis stored under Text Elements [Seite 196].



SYM_FS Follow-on record number

A text element can be distributed over severalrows, for example, in intervals. This field givesyou the row number of a component within atext element. If SYM_FS=0, the text element isa new text element.

SYM_BEGIN_GROUP New group within a text element

Groups are usually separated bysemicolons (;)

SYM_CAPTION Name of the text element

SYM_VALUE Value of the component of the text element

EventsDefinitionFunctional components of the table interface.

UseEvents allow you to initialize tables.

StructureInitializationInitializing a table: You call this method is before processing. Using the reference from the dataset,you can analyze metadata for the navigational state as well as the data itself. All attributes of the classthat were listed beforehand are filled at this point.

Method Start

New RowsYou call the following method before starting a new row. You can execute a suitable initialization forthe rows.

Method New_Row

Importing Parameter Description

I_Y New row numbers

Header CompletedThe following method is called after you have processed the table header. You can execute a suitableinitialization for the rows.

Method Header_Finished


I_Y New row numbers



CompletionThis method gives you the option of carrying out further operations after you have finished the table.For example, setting Java Script functions using the method “Set_Javascript_Function” (see ServiceMethods [Seite 333]) or cleaning up the table.

Method Finished

Manipulating Cell ContentsDefinitionFunctional components of the table interface.

UseYou can use a set of methods to manipulate cell contents.

Only implement the methods for the cell types that you want to manipulate.Standard contents will be used for all other cell types.

Standard contents may change between releases/support packages. If you want tochange the contents of a cell, we recommend that you overwrite the contents of, forexample, C_CELL_CONTENT completely and do not process the field with REPLACE ora similar operation.

FunctionsYou can use the following methods to manipulate cell contents:

� Caption_Cell: Headers [Seite 325]

� Scaling_Factor_Cell: Scaling Factors [Seite 326]

� Characteristic_Cell: Characteristic Values [Seite 326]

� Attribute_Cell: Attribute Values [Seite 327]

� Structure_Cell: Structural Components [Seite 328]

� Data_Cell: Data Cells [Seite 329]

� Error_Cell: Error Cells [Seite 330]

� NAV_BLOCK_LABEL: Label Area of Navigation Block [Seite 330]

� NAV_BLOCK_VALUE: Filter of Navigation Block [Seite 332]

All methods have importing parameters that describe the context of the cell.

All methods have the same changing parameters. These parameters provide the default values andcan be changed in the method. As these parameters are method-independent, they are listed onlyonce here.

Changing Parameter Description

C_CELL_ID Cell IDIf you leave this parameter empty, the cell hasno ID. The ID is used to process the cellcontents with JavaScript.



C_CELL_CONTENT Cell ContentsThe cell contents themselves can be verysimple (for example, a number) or verycomplex (for example, for hierarchy nodes:icons with expanded/collapsed URL and text).

C_CELL_STYLE Style of CellThe style defines the color, font, font size,spacing, etc. of the cell. The styles are definedin the Cascading Style Sheet. The CascadingStyle Sheet is assigned to the Web template.

C_CELL_TD_EXTEND Extension of TD tagHere you can set the properties such as thewidth, height, alignment or color of the cell.This parameter is not normally set becausemany of the properties are already definedwhen the style is defined.

HeadersDefinitionYou use the Caption_Cell method to adjust the contents of header cells.

Structure Method Caption_Cell


I_X X coordinate of the cell in the table

I_Y Y coordinate of the cell in the table

I_IS_EMPTY Cell is empty'X' = empty

I_IOBJNM_ROW Characteristic in the rowsIn the rows axis, the characteristic, whoseheader you want to display in the cell.

I_ATTRINM_ROW Attribute for characteristic in the rowsIn the rows axis, the attribute for thecharacteristic, whose header you want todisplay in the cell.

I_TEXT_ROW Text for characteristic / attribute

I_IOBJNM_COLUMN Characteristic in the columnsIn the columns axis, the characteristic, whoseheader you want to display in the cell.

I_ATTRINM_COLUMN Attribute for characteristic in the columnsIn the columns axis, the attribute for thecharacteristic, whose header you want todisplay in the cell.



I_TEXT_COLUMN Text for characteristic / attribute

I_ROWSPAN Number of cells that you want to mergealong the rows axis

I_COLSPAN Number of cells that you want to mergealong the columns axis

I_IS_REPETITION Repetition'X' = cell contents is a repetition

Scaling FactorsDefinitionYou use the Scaling_Factor_Cell method to adjust the contents of cells that display the scalingfactors.

Structure Method Scaling_Factor_Cell




I_TEXT Scaling text

I_IS_SUM Sum total cell‘X’ = sum total cell

I_NUM_SCALE Scaling factor

I_CURRENCY Currency

I_UNIT Unit

Characteristic ValuesDefinitionYou use the Characteristic_Cell method to adjust the contents of cells containing values forcharacteristics.

Structure Method Characteristic_Cell






I_IOBJNM Name of characteristic

I_AXIS Axis on which the characteristics arearranged in the drilldown'X' = columns, 'Y' = rows

I_CHAVL_EXT Characteristic value in external displayKey value of the characteristic value accordingto its application in the conversion exit.

I_CHAVL Characteristic value in internal displayKey value of the characteristic value. This isneeded for the filter operations.

I_NODE_IOBJNM Name of the node characteristicWith characteristic nodes and text nodes, youhave to specify the characteristic name(0HIER_NODE).

I_TEXT Text for characteristic value

I_HRY_ACTIVE Status of the display hierarchy‘X’ = active

I_DRILLSTATE Extent to which the node is expanded'E' = expanded, 'C' = collapsed

I_DISPLAY_LEVEL Display hierarchy level of the node / leaf

I_USE_TEXT Cell contents'X' = text, ' ' = key



I_FIRST_CELL First data cell of the characteristic value

I_LAST_CELL Last data cell of the characteristic value

I_CELLSPAN Number of cells that you want to mergealong the drilldown axis

I_CELLSPAN_ORT Number of cells that you want to mergevertically along the drilldown axis

Attribute ValuesDefinitionYou use the Attribute_Cell method to adjust the contents of the cells containing attribute values.

Structure Method Attribute_Cell






I_IS_EMPTY Cell is empty'X' = empty

I_IOBJNM Name of characteristic

I_ATTRINM Name of attribute


I_CHAVL_EXT Attribute value in external displayKey value of the attribute value according to itsapplication in the conversion exit.

I_CHAVL Attribute value in internal displayKey value of the attribute value.

I_TEXT Text for attribute value

I_USE_TEXT Cell contents'X' = text, ' ' = key




Structural ComponentsDefinitionYou use the Structure_Cell method to adjust the contents of structural components.

Structure Method Structure_Cell




I_IOBJNM Name of the structure




I_STRUCTUR_MEMBER Name of the structural componentKey value of the structural component.

I_STRUCTUR_MEMBER_2 Name of the structural component of theother structureKey value of the structural component of asecond structure (if a second structure isavailable). This is needed, for example, for sortoperations.

I_TEXT Name of the structural component




I_CELLSPAN_ORT Number of cells that you want to mergevertically along the drilldown axis

Data CellsDefinitionYou use the Data_Cell method to adjust the contents of data cells.

Structure Method Data_Cell




I_VALUE Values of the cell without scaling

I_DISPLAY_VALUE Values of the cell after scaling

I_NUMERICAL_SCALE Scaling factors

I_NUMERICAL_PRECISION Number of places after the decimal point

I_CURRENCY CurrencyThree-character currency ID, for example,USD, ATS, or DEM.

I_UNIT UnitUnit according to the application of the three-character conversion exit.

I_ ALERTLEVEL Alert level1, 2, 3 = green; 4, 5, 6 = yellow; 7, 8, 9 = red




You can make many changes, for example, choose to display the alerts as icons, or change the waycurrencies and units are displayed (units as text, for example).

Error CellsDefinitionYou use the Error_Cell method to adjust the contents of error cells.

Structure Method Error_Cell




I_TEXT Error text

I_TYPE Error type (S, E, A, I, W)

Labeling Area of the Navigation BlockDefinitionYou can adjust the contents of the labeling cells of the navigation block with methodNAV_BLOCK_LABEL.

StructureThe area for labeling can be divided in up to 4 columns.

Method NAV_BLOCK_LABEL


I_IOBJNM Technical name of the characteristic orstructure

I_IS_STRUCTURE Object is a structure‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

I_AXIS Axis on which the characteristics / structureare arranged in the drilldown'X' = columns, 'Y' = rows

I_CAPTION Label text

I_HRY_ACTIVE Status of the display hierarchy'X' = Active




C_CELL1_ID ID of cell 1If you leave this parameter empty, the cell hasno ID. The ID can be used to process the cellcontents with JavaScript.

C_CELL2_ID ID of cell 2



C_CELL1_CONTENT Cell contents 1The cell contents themselves can be verysimple (for example only a number) or verycomplex (for example for hierarchy nodes:icons with expanded/collapsed URL and text).

C_CELL2_CONTENT Cell contents 2



C_CELL1_STYLE Style of cell 1The style defines the color, font, font size,distances, etc. of the cell. The styles aredefined in the Cascading Style Sheet. TheCascading Style Sheet is assigned to thetemplate.

C_CELL2_STYLE Style of cell 2



C_CELL1_TD_EXTEND Extension of TD tag 1Here you can set the properties such as thewidth, height, alignment or color of the cell.This parameter is not normally set becausemany of the properties are already definedwhen the style is defined.

C_CELL2_TD_EXTEND Extension of TD tag 2



C_CELL1_WIDTH Width of column 1






Filter Area of the Navigation BlockDefinitionYou can adjust the contents of the filter cells of the navigation block with methodNAV_BLOCK_VALUE.

StructureThe area for the filter can be divided in up to 4 columns.

Method NAV_BLOCK_VALUE


I_IOBJNM Technical name of the characteristic orstructure

I_IS_STRUCTURE Object is a structure‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

I_AXIS Axis on which the characteristics / structureare arranged in the drilldown'X' = columns, 'Y' = rows

I_CAPTION Label text

I_HRY_ACTIVE Status of the display hierarchy'X' = Active


C_CELL1_ID ID of cell 1If you leave this parameter empty, the cell hasno ID. The ID can be used to process the cellcontents with JavaScript.




C_CELL1_CONTENT Cell contents 1The cell contents themselves can be verysimple (for example only a number) or verycomplex (for example for hierarchy nodes:icons with expanded/collapsed URL and text).




C_CELL1_STYLE Style of cell 1The style defines the color, font, font size,distances, etc. of the cell. The styles aredefined in the Cascading Style Sheet. TheCascading Style Sheet is assigned to thetemplate.






C_CELL1_TD_EXTEND Extension of TD tag 1Here you can set the properties such as thewidth, height, alignment or color of the cell.This parameter is not normally set becausemany of the properties are already definedwhen the style is defined.








Service MethodsDefinitionFunctional components of the table interface.

UseService methods are offered along with methods for manipulating cell contents [Seite 324]. You needthese when creating new cell contents.

FunctionsYou can use the following service methods:

Creating Navigation URLs [Seite 333]

Information on the Navigation Status [Seite 334]

Information on a Specific Cell [Seite 335]

Icons [Seite 336]

Sending Messages [Seite 337]

JavaScript Functions [Seite 338]

Creating Navigation URLsUseYou generate command URLs using the following method. This ensures that the request is sent to thecorrect page instance of the current session.

FunctionsMethod GET_URL



Importing parameter Description

I_R_PARAMETER Command parameterThe command parameter is transferred usinginstances of the class CL_RSR_PARAMETER.Use the methods in this class, for example,ADD, to fill the parameter.

Returning parameter Description

R_URL Command URL

In addition, you can use the following service methods:

Icons [Seite 336]





Information on the Navigation StatusUseThis method returns information on the current navigation status. You can call it up at any time.

FunctionsMethod GET_STATE_INFOS

Exporting parameter Description

E_THX_AXIS_INFO Distribution of the structures,characteristics and attributes on the axesand their propertiesFor details about structures, see Data Sets[Seite 317] and AXIS_INFO [Seite 318]

E_T_SLICER Dynamic filterFilter that you can change in navigation and,for example, see in the navigation block.

For details about tables, see Data Sets [Seite317] and AXIS_DATA [Seite 319]

Unlike in the set, the ATTRIBUTEScomponent is not offered.

E_T_TXT_SYMBOLS Query text elementThe text element contains general information(for example, the query key date) about thevariable values and information for fixing queryfilters.

For details about tables, see Data Sets [Seite317] and TXT_SYMBOLS [Seite 322]






Icons [Seite 336]



Information on a Specific CellUseThis method returns details for cells at a specific cell coordinate.

Prerequisites

You cannot call up this method in the START method.

FunctionsMethod GET_CELL_INFO


I_ROW Row coordinate of cell in table

I_COLUMN Column coordinate of cell in table

Exporting parameter Description

E_AXIS Axis of the cell0 = on the columns, 1 = on the rows, -1otherwise

E_DATA_ROW Data rowRow coordinate in data area This information isimportant, for example, when jumping from onereport to another.

E_DATA_COLUMN Data columnColumn coordinate in data area Thisinformation is important, for example, whenjumping from one report to another.



E_CELL_TYPE Type of cell0 = Empty cell

1 = Data cell

2 = Structure component

3 = Characteristic value4 = Characteristic header5 = Display-attribute value

6 = Display-attribute header

7 = Scaling factor

E_IOBJNM Characteristic/structure nameThis parameter is filled only for cells of type 2,3, 4, 5 and 6.

E_ATTRINM Display-attribute nameThis parameter is filled only for cells of type 5and 6.

E_T_CELL_RESTRICTIONS Cell restrictionsRestrictions arising from the position of the cellin the table. For example, there are restrictionson the display of data cells on the axes.

For details about tables, see Data Sets [Seite317] and AXIS_DATA [Seite 319]

Unlike in the set, the ATTRIBUTEScomponent is not offered.

E_S_CELL_DATA Information about data cellsInformation about data cells, for example, thevalue of the data cell, is available from here.For details about structures, see Data Sets[Seite 317] and CELL_DATA [Seite 321]




Icons [Seite 336]



IconsUseYou use IMG tags in HTML for icons. To fill the IMG tag attribute SRC, the path of the icon directoryfrom the MIME Repository or on the ITS is required. The following method returns this path:



FunctionsMethod GET_ICON_PATH

Returning parameter Description

R_PATH Path for icon directoryYou use this path in the HTML IMG tag forSRC. You have to enter only the screen name.







Sending MessagesUseYou use the following method to send messages. These appear at the start of the HTML page in atable. You use this function primarily to notify users of errors.

FunctionsMethod SEND_MESSAGE


I_CLASS Message class

I_TYPE Message type (I, W, E, A, X)

I_NUMBER Message number

I_MSGV1 Message variable value 1








Icons [Seite 336]




JavaScript FunctionsUseThe following method enables you to manage JavaScript source code centrally. The source code isset at the start of the HTML page. You can use this function to construct your own JavaScript sourcecode and, for example, call up manipulated cells from there.

FunctionsMethod SET_JAVASCRIPT_FUNCTION


I_NAME Name of the section of source codeThis name is unique. Any source code alreadystored that has the same name is overwritten.

I_CODING JavaScript source code





Icons [Seite 336]


Analysis & Reporting: BEx Web ApplicationsUseBEx Web Applications are Web-based applications from the Business Explorer for data analysis,reporting and analytical applications on the Web.

PrerequisitesYou have formatted your data in the BEx Web Application Designer using Web items (table, filter,chart, map, document, and so on) and can now access them on the intranet or using an enterpriseportal.

FeaturesYou use various navigation functions to change the view of data displayed in a Web application to suityour needs. Various navigation functions are available, depending on the Web items that have beenincluded in the Web application. Each navigation function is characterized by a symbol. Use the icon to expand the Web item, and the icon to collapse the item. There is also a context menu forthe Web items Navigation Block, Table, Chart, List of Exceptions, List of Conditions, and Label thatyou can call up by clicking with the left mouse button on a cell text (characteristic, characteristic value,structural component, description of an exception, description of a condition). For more information,see Context Menu Functions [Seite 339]

Using the Web items Single Document and List of Documents, you can add documents containingadditional information and comments for the business data. For more information, see UsingDocuments in Web Applications [Seite 378].

When you analyze business data on a map using the Map Web item, you have several navigationoptions within the map as well as various interaction options with other Web items in your Webapplication. For more information, see Navigating in Maps [Seite 381]



You use the Ad-hoc Query Designer Web item to create and change your Web application queriesdirectly on an ad-hoc basis. For more information, see Functions of the Ad-hoc Query Designer [Seite364].

You can also use data mining methods in Web applications to predict customer behavior or to dividecustomers into three classes according to sales (A, B and C). For more information, see PredictionSimulation [Seite 233] and ABC Classification [Seite 234].

Using a variable screen, you can fill variables with values when you display the Web application in theWeb browser. You can personalize the values for the individual components of the Web application orfor the entire Web application. For more information on settings in the Web Applications Designer thataffect the display of the variables screen and the on the functions of the variables screen, see UsingVariables in Web Applications [Seite 384].

Queries that you display on an ad-hoc basis on the Web from the BEx Analyzer, the Query Designeror the Ad-hoc Query Designer are displayed in a standard Web template. In the standard Webtemplate, you can navigate using the filter and the context menu. You can also use the most commonfunction from a toolbar. For more information, see Navigation Functions in the Standard WebTemplate [Seite 387].

You can make your Web applications accessible so that physically impaired users can access them.For more information, see Accessibility in Web Applications [Seite 389].

Context Menu FunctionsUseThe Web items Navigation Block, Table, Chart, List of Exceptions, List of Conditions, and Label have acontext menu that you can call up by clicking with the left mouse button on a cell text (characteristic,characteristic value, structural component, description of an exception, description of a condition).

FeaturesThe context menu offers various functions depending on the cell context, the Web item used and thesettings of the Web template in the Web Application Designer.

In the context menu itself, you can use the menu entries Enhanced Menu and Basic Menu, to togglebetween the two versions. The basic menu contains a subset of the enhanced menu.

You can activate and deactivate the functions in the context menu and the enhancedmenu for a Web application. You determine which functions the context menu contains inthe Web template.

a. In the Web Application Designer, in the Properties window, select the Web template andchoose the Web Item tab page. The list contains the Web template properties.

b. Under Entries in the Context Menu, select the required setting for the individual functions.

� Choose No Display when you do not want the function to appear in the context menu.

� Choose Always Display when you want the function to appear in the context menu.

� Choose Enhanced Menu when you want the function to appear only in the enhanced contextmenu.

c. Choose Save.

The context menu can contain the following functions:



BackChoose Back if you want to undo a navigational step in this query view. This query view is the dataprovider for the Web item on which you select the function Back.

Back to StartChoose Back to Start if you want to undo all navigational steps in this query view. This query view isthe data provider for the Web item on which you select the function Back to Start.

ForwardChoose Forward if you want to repeat a navigational step in this query view for which you havealready chosen Back. This query view is the data provider for the Web item on which you select thefunction Forward.

Keep Filter ValueChoose Keep Filter Value if you want to see only the data for a characteristic value. The characteristicvalue itself is removed from the drilldown.

For example, in the drilldown, you have the characteristic Country. From the characteristicvalue Germany, you choose the function Keep Filter Value. The table data is now filteredfor Germany, and the characteristic value, “Germany” in this case, is no longer displayedin the drilldown. You can only see in the navigation block or in the filter that the table isfiltered for Germany.

Keep Filter Value on AxisChoose Keep Filter Value on Axis if you only want to see the data for a characteristic value and, at thesame time, you still want to see the characteristic value itself in the drilldown.

Above all, this function is meaningful with the Web items Chart and Map. This is becauseyou can see for yourself in the chart or map to learn the context in which the data exists,meaning how they were filtered. The chart / map remains able to be interpreted.

Select Filter ValueChoose Select Filter Value if you want to filter the Web application according to values. For moreinformation, see Selecting Filter Values [Seite 343].

Filter and Drilldown According to � CharacteristicChoose Filter and Drilldown According to to fix a characteristic to a value in one step (meaning to filterit) and to drilldown according to another characteristic on the same axis (row axis or column axis).

Choose the function Filter and Drilldown According to � for example, Region for thecharacteristic value Germany. The data is filtered for Germany. The characteristic valueGermany disappears from the drilldown. Simultaneously, the characteristic Region isdrilled down.

Drilldown � Across or Down

For characteristic descriptions (for example, country), you can choose Drill Down � Vertically in thenavigation block or from a label in order to drill down along the axes for the columns or rows.

Insert Drilldown According to

In the context menu for a characteristic value or characteristic description, choose Add Drilldown by �Region, when you want to add a characteristic (for example, Region) to a precise position in thedrilldown that you want.



Swap Characteristic 1 / Structure 1 with ��Characteristic 2 / Structure 2 You can use this function to swap a characteristic / structure with another characteristic / structure.

Remove DrilldownChoose Remove Drilldown if you want to remove a characteristic from the drilldown.

Swap AxesYou use this function to swap the query axes. If you have characteristics in the rows and key figures inthe columns and you choose Swap Axes, then the key figures are displayed in the rows and thecharacteristics are displayed in the columns.

Expand/Collapse Hierarchy NodesChoose Expand Hierarchy Nodes to expand, and Collapse Hierarchy Nodes to collapse a hierarchynode. You can also expand or collapse the hierarchy node by clicking on the hierarchy symbol.

Expand Hierarchy

Choose Expand Hierarchy � To Level ..., if you want to display more levels of the hierarchy.Alternatively, click on the hierarchy symbol to expand the hierarchy.

See also:Working with Hierarchies [Seite 460]

Activating /Deactivating HierarchiesYou use this function to switch active hierarchies on and off.

Drilldown Nodes by <Next Object on the Axis>This function is available in the context menu for the characteristic displayed in the hierarchy if youhave activated the Display Rows or Columns Hierarchically in the Query-Properties [Seite 353],underData Preparation. You can drilldown a node after the next object to see the values for this objectunderneath it.

Sort � Sort Ascending / Sort Descending You can use this function to sort structural component values by ascending or descending order

This function is only available in the cells of structural components when all structures arefixed to individual values.

Sort Characteristic 1You can use this function to sort characteristic values or attributes for a drilldown characteristic indescending or ascending order. It is possible to sort according to the key, the name, a displayattribute, or a displayed value column.

Keys are usually sorted according to internal formatting. If you want to sort according to externalformatting, you have to include this formatting with the InfoObject.

In hierarchy lists, the relationship between the upper-level/lower-level nodes is retained inthe hierarchy structures. Lower-level nodes, however, are usually displayed in thesequence in which they appear in the sort criteria. You use the Sort according to hierarchyfunction to restore the original sequence as determined in the hierarchy definition.

Calculate Result As...You use this function to recalculate the results rows and single values that are displayed in the queryaccording to the following criteria:



Summation / Maximum / Minimum / Count All Values/ Count all values < > 0 / Average of All Values /Average of All Values < > 0 / Standard Deviation / Variance / Suppress Result / First Value / LastValue

For more information, see Calculate Result as... [Seite 432].

Calculate Single Values As...You use this function to recalculate the single values that are displayed in the query according to thefollowing criteria:

Normalize result/ Normalize total result/ Normalize../ Ranked list/ Olympic ranked list

For more information, see Calculate Single Values As... [Seite 434].


This function is particularly useful with drilldowns on time characteristics (months, forexample). Using the function Calculating Single Value as � Normalize Results, and Sort� Descending, on the corresponding value column, you get a cumulated list that is oftendescribed as an ABC list.

GotoChoose Goto when you want to access documentation and jump targets using the Report-Reportinterface. For more information, see Goto [Seite 346]

Currency TranslationChoose Currency Translation when you want to determine the currency into which the key figures andstructural components of the query are to be translated. For more information, see CurrencyTranslation [Seite 348]

BookmarkChoose Bookmark when you want to retain a particular navigation status of the Web application, andaccess it later. For more information, see Bookmark [Seite 349]

Bookmark with DataChoose Bookmark with Data when you want to retain a particular navigation status of the Webapplication, together with its data, and access it later. When you call up the bookmark URL later, notonly does the retained navigation status appear in the Web application, but also the historical datafrom the time the bookmark was set. For more information, see Bookmark [Seite 349]

By default, this function does not appear in the context menu. You can activate thisfunction in the Web Application Designer.

d. In the Web Application Designer, in the Properties window, select the Web template andchoose the Web Item tab page. The list contains the Web template properties.

e. Under Entries in Context Menu, choose the property Bookmark with Displayed Data. In theValue column, the option No Display is activated.

� Choose Always Display when you want the function to appear in the context menu.

� Choose Enhanced Menu when you want the function to appear only in the enhanced contextmenu.

f. Choose Save.



Export As � CSV File / MS Excel 2000 FileMS Excel 2000 File.

You can export query data to MS Excel 2000.

The query data is embedded in the BEx Analyzer as with queries: The navigation status does notchange and the formatting is transferred. You can see the filter restrictions and the data in the table.Exceptions are highlighted in color in the same way as on the Web.

You can also use the BEx Analyzer BW functions to continue navigating.

CSV file

You can export the query data into a CSV (comma separated value) file.

In contrast to exporting to MS Excel 2000, you do not see the context of the numbers and you cannotsee the filter data. The query formatting (such as the exceptions being displayed) is not transferred tothe CSV file.

For more information, see Exporting as a CSV File/Excel 2000 File [Seite 348].

PropertiesChoose Properties when you want to change different settings for the characteristic or key figure. Youcan find additional information under Properties for a Characteristic [Seite 350] and Local Properties ofa Key Figure [Seite 352].

Key Figure DefinitionChoose Key Figure Definition to see how a concrete figure is comprised in your Web application. Youcan check whether data has been loaded and analyze errors. For more information, see Key FigureDefinition [Seite 355]

Query PropertiesChoose Query Properties when you want to change different settings for the query at run time. Formore information, see Query Properties [Seite 353]

Choosing a Filter ValueUseIn your Web application, you can select filter values for characteristics and structures. The Webapplication is then filtered according to these selected values.

ProcedureThe Select Filter Value for ... dialog box is divided into two areas:

� An upper area from which you can select single or a number of filter values

� A lower area in which you make more complex filter settings

You can make settings in each of the areas. The settings in both areas are used for your Webapplication.

Selecting Single or Multiple Filter ValuesYou can choose from all possible values for the respective characteristic or structure in a query.Depending on the query setting, the values are displayed as a key and/or identifier. You can selectone or more values from this set of values.

� Click on a single value to select it (the hand symbol shows you that it is a hyperlink). The value iscopied without your having to take any further actions.



� To select more than one value, mark the checkbox in front of the relevant values and chooseTransfer. You can also choose only to select a single value here.

You can also sort the given values in ascending or descending order. Do so by clicking onthe hyperlink above the list of single values having the name of the characteristic orstructure. The first click sorts the list in ascending order, the second click sorts it indescending order.

Finding Filter ValuesAs well as selecting filter values directly, you can also find them using a search. This search looks atthe selection list of the single values, that is, the single values are restricted according to the searchcriteria.

1. Enter a search term.

2. Choose Find.

The list of single values displays the values corresponding to your search term.

3. To select one or more values proceed as above.

Searching for attributesYou can also determine your selection of filter values by searching using attributes.

This option is only available when the characteristic has display attributes. In theProperties for a Characteristic [Seite 350], you have selected attributes for display.

1. Choose Search by Display Attributes On.

An additional area is displayed displaying the attributes for a characteristic. You can hide thisarea by choosing Search by Display Attributes Off again.

2. Mark the checkbox in front of the corresponding attribute.

3. Enter the search term for the attribute.

4. Choose Find.

The set of filter values corresponding to the search criteria is displayed with the attributes yousearched for.

5. To select one or more values proceed as described above.

Searching in HierarchiesYou can also search through leaves and nodes in a hierarchy.

For more information, see Searching in Hierarchies [Seite 345]

Complex Filter SettingsIn the lower part of the Description of Filter Values dialog box, you can define a value area for filtervalues and exclude filter values or value areas for filter values.

To enter a value range:

1. Make a check in the checkbox.

2. Select the operator in the dropdown box and enter the relevant values:

a. Choose [] for an interval and enter the lower limit of the interval in the first input field and theupper limit in the second input field.

b. Choose the corresponding operator for =, <=, > and >= and enter the relevant value in the firstinput field.



Selecting the operator = corresponds to selecting a single value in the upper screen area.

3. Do not change the Include setting.

4. Choose New Row to define further value areas.

5. Choose Transfer.

To exclude a value or a value range:

1. Perform steps 1 and 2 (see above).

2. To exclude a value or value range change the Include setting to Exclude.

3. Choose New Row to exclude further values or value ranges.

4. Choose Transfer.

Searching in HierarchiesUseYou can search through leaves and nodes in the hierarchies of your Web application.

PrerequisitesThe hierarchy, whose leaves or nodes you are searching, is indicated as an active presentationhierarchy in the characteristic properties.

You have changed the Aktive Presentation Hierarchy setting:

� in either the query definition in the Query Designer (Characteristic Properties [Seite 61]) or in theAd-hoc Query Designer (Characteristic Properties [Seite 368]).

� at runtime in the Web application (Properties for a Characteristic [Seite 350]).

Procedure1. From the context menu of a characteristic value, choose Select Filter Value. The Select Filter

Value for <Characteristic> dialog box appears.

2. If the search function is not active, choose Search On.

3. You can search for filter values that are known to you:

Enter a filter value in the upper white field and choose Find.

You can restrict the search to a single hierarchy node by calling up the context menu for thenode and choosing Restrict Search to this Node. The systems transfers the name of theselected hierarchy node to the second white field (Restrict Search to).

4. Choose Find.

ResultAfter the search is complete, the lower-level hierarchy nodes that contain the search criteria aremarked with a red arrow.

You can now select the subnode denoted with a red arrow and choose Transfer. The Web applicationis then filtered according to this subnode.



Changing Filter ValuesUseIn your Web application, you can change filter values for characteristics and structures you havealready changed, and filter the Web application by other criteria.

PrerequisitesYou have already set filters in your Web application. See Selecting Filter Values [Seite 343]

Procedure1. In the context menu for a characteristic, characteristic value, structure or structural component,

choose Select Filter Value. The Define Filter Value for... dialog box appears.

The filter values that have already been set appear in the Existing Filter Values area.

In the New Filter Values area, functions that are described in Selecting Filter Values [Seite343] are available.

2. To change your filter settings, proceed as follows:

To delete existing filter settings deselect the checkbox in front of the filter setting in theExisting filter values area.

Filter values that are maintained in the Existing Filter Values area are no longer availablein the New Filter Values area.

Settings for value areas and values to be excluded can be changed directly in the ExistingFilter Values area.

3. You come across new filter settings in the New Filter Values area, as described in Selecting FilterValues [Seite 343].

4. To apply your changed filter settings to the Web application, choose Transfer.

ResultThe Web Application is filtered according to the changed filter settings.

GotoUseWith the Goto function in the context menu, you can go to documents and targets with thereport/report interface.

PrerequisitesYou have to define the sender/receiver assignment in advance so that the system offers targets withthereport/report interface in the context menu under Goto. You can find additional information underEditing Sender/Receiver Assignments to the R/RI in BW [Seite 90]

See also:Report/Report Interface: Overview [Extern]



FeaturesDocumentsYou can display documents for different objects that were created in the Administrator Workbench orin the Web application, and then create new documents. You can also use a Full Text Search inDocuments [Seite 380].

Depending on the cell content in which you call up the Goto function, several options are available forselection:

� For cells that contain a key figure, you have the function Goto � Display Documents. You get tothe existing documents for InfoProvider data that are suitable for cell selection.

� For cells that contain a characteristic value, you have the following functions:

� Goto � Display Documents: You get to the existing documents for master data for thecharacteristic value.

� Goto � Documents for Navigation Status: You get to the existing documents for InfoProviderdata that are suitable for cell selection.

� For cells that contain meta objects (in created characteristics), you have the following functions:

� Goto � Display Documents: You get to the existing documents for the meta object.


If you want to create a new document, choose Additional Functions � Creating a New Document[Seite 379].

You can find additional information under Documents [Extern] and Using Documents in WebApplications [Seite 378].

TargetsThe Report/Report-Interface (RRI) enables you to perform a parameterized call-up of programs fromother programs. This means that you can use it to jump from one report to another report that deliversmore information. In BW, you can get to the targets within and outside of BW. You can go to theconnected R/3 system or to another SAP system (as of Service API Release 6.10).

If you want to use the R/RI in R/3, then you have to specify the URL for transaction RSRRin the source system in the SAP reference IMG under BW Customizing ImplementationGuide � Business Information Warehouse � Reporting-Relevant Settings � Web-BasedSettings � Determine URL for the R/RI Start in the Source System.

Depending on the report type you selected for a query in the sender/receiver assignment, you havethe following, possible targets under Goto in the Web application that has this query as a dataprovider:

� Starting another query in the Web (with the standard Web template) or starting another Webapplication, where the entry variants are filled by the selection requirements and elementdefinitions of the selected cells of the sender query.

� Starting Web-capable reports, functions, and transactions inside and outside of BW.

In all SAP systems in which you want to call up transactions, you need the SAP InternetTransaction Server (ITS) and the SAP GUI for HTML, so that the transaction is Web-capable.



Currency translationUseIn the Currency Translation dialog box you can define the currency into which the key figures andstructure components of a query are to be translated.

Procedure1. You have the following options for changing the currency of structures and structure components:

� Display Original Currency (= default setting). You can go back to the original currency thatwas changed here.

� To translate a currency:

� Select a currency in the dropdown box for Translation to Currency.

� Select a currency in the dropdown box for According to Currency Type.

� To take a translation type from the query definition into consideration, mark thecorresponding checkbox.

2. Choose Transfer.

ResultThe key figures and structure elements are translated into the selected currency.

Exporting as a CSV File / MS Excel 2000 FileUseIn order to process a query executed in a Web application further, you must export the query as a CSVfile or MS Excel 2000 file.

Prerequisites� You have executed a query in your Web application and want to display it in a different format and

continue processing the query.

� To export the data to an Excel file, you have opened the BEx Analyzer

Procedure1. From the context menu (left mouse-click on the text of a characteristic, characteristic value,

structural component, description of exception, description of condition), choose Export As... �CSV File or Export As... � MS Excel 2000 File. The system exports the data into a CSV file or anMS Excel 2000 file.

Export to MS Excel files from MS Excel 2000 is supported.

2. If you choose Export As...� CSV File, the query is displayed in CSV format (comma separatedvalue). The numerical values of the query are displayed in a list that is separated with commas.The numerical values context, formatting (for example, displaying exceptions) and the filter dataare available in the CSV file. You cannot navigate further with BW functions.

3. If you choose Export As...� MS Excel 2000 File, the query is embedded in the BEx Analyzer,which you opened previously:

a. Choose Tools from the Web browser toolbar to display the BEx toolbar.



b. Choose (Refresh) from the BEx toolbar. You are asked to log on to the system. Once youhave logged on, the query is displayed in the BEx Analyzer. You can navigate in the query asusual and use all of the BW functions from the context menu and the toolbar.

c. To display the query again along with its current navigational status, from the BEx toolbarchoose (Tools) � Launch in Web Browser � Query (Default View). The query is displayedon the Web in its current navigational state. This Web display is based on the standard Webtemplate [Seite 387].

Setting BookmarksUseIf you want to call the current navigational state (including expanded hierarchies) in a Web applicationor an ad-hoc query created on the Web again at a later date, you can set a bookmark for thisnavigational state. The system creates a URL for the bookmark that you can call up at any time.

PrerequisitesYou are in a Web application that you created in the usual way or that you called up on an ad-hocbasis from the Query Designer using (Display Query on the Web) from the standard Web template.You have created a navigational state for which you want to set a bookmark.

Procedure� In the Web application, from the context menu (left mouse click) of any cell (in the query), choose

Bookmark

In a Web application that you created on an ad-hoc basis using the standard Web template,you can also set a bookmark for the required navigational state using the toolbar:

� From the Web application toolbar, choose (Bookmark)

ResultThe system creates a URL for the bookmark to be displayed in the address line of your Web browser.

To access the bookmark again later, you can save the URL in your favorites or copy and paste it intoother files.

You manage bookmarks in the Reporting Agent. For more information, see Bookmark Administration[Extern].

In the Web Application Designer, you can also create bookmarks with up-to-date data.This means that when you call up the URL of a bookmark, not only the navigational statusis displayed, but also the current data for this. This option is not set as a default, but youcan choose it when necessary.



Properties for a characteristicUseIn the Properties for <Characteristic>, for example, Order, dialog box, you can make various settingsfor the characteristic at runtime.

FeaturesWhich options to change the characteristic the system shows depends on the properties of thecharacteristic – characteristic with/without attributes, characteristic with/without hierarchies. Besidesgeneral settings that you can change for each characteristic, you can display the additional options,depending on the properties of a characteristic. The dialog box contains up to three additional areas:

� Display the Following Attributes (Characteristics with Attributes)

� Presentation Hierarchy (Characteristics with Hierarchies)

� Display Hierarchy Nodes (Characteristics with active presentation hierarchies)

For all CharacteristicsLayoutYou can determine here in which format you want to present the individual characteristic values of thecharacteristic.

� Key and Name: The characteristic values are displayed by their technical key followed by theshortest available text.

� Name: The characteristic values are shown by their shortest available text.

� Key: The characteristic values are shown by their technical key.

� Name and Key: The characteristic values are displayed as the shortest available namefollowed by the technical key.

� Long Description: The characteristic values are shown by their long text.

� Medium Name: The characteristic values are shown by their mid-length text.

Sorted byDetermine here whether the system is to sort by:

� Key

� Name

� Selection

For any characteristics with attributes, the following additional options are available for the attributes:

� Attribute Key

� Attribute Text

If you have selected Key or Attribute Text, in the second dropdown box, select the attribute for whichthis sort setting is to apply.

To transfer this setting, under Display Following Attribute, select the correspondingattribute.

Sort directionChoose Ascending or Descending for the sort direction.

Suppress Results Rows



Here you can choose whether to suppress the results rows Never, Always or Only for One Value. Onlyfor One Value means that only those results rows are suppressed that aggregate only one value, thatis, the value and the result are identical and the results row repeats the same value.

Display the Following AttributesIn order to display a specific attribute, select the checkbox in front of the attribute concerned.

To determine the format with which the attribute is displayed, choose







In order to determine the order of attributes when you select several of them, select the correspondingposition (1,2,3...) in the dropdown box.

Presentation HierarchySelect Active and, in the dropdown box, select the name of the hierarchy when the characteristic is tobe displayed with this hierarchy.

To determine to which hierarchy level the hierarchy is to be expanded, select the Expansion level inthe dropdown box.

Displaying Hierarchy Nodes

This option is only available if the characteristic has an active presentation hierarchy. Ifyou only denoted the hierarchy as an active presentation hierarchy during runtime and notin the query definition, you firstly need to choose Transfer. This option is made availablewhen you call up the Properties for <Characteristic> dialog box again.

If you want to set the format in which the hierarchy nodes of the characteristic are to be displayed, inthe respective text node dropdown box and the available hierarchy characteristic nodes, choose therequired display type:

� Key and Name

� Name

� Key

� Name and Key

� Long Name

� Middle Name

ActivitiesIn the Web application, from the enhanced context menu of a characteristic or its characteristic value,choose Properties. The Properties for <Characteristic> dialog box appears. Make your settings andchoose Transfer.



Local Properties of a Key FigureUseIn the Local Properties: <Key Figure>(for example, Credit Memo) dialog box, you make varioussettings for the key figure for the runtime.

FeaturesThe options for changing a key figure are divided into four areas:

� Number Display

� Sorting

� Calculations

� Calculation Direction

In order to display the column and highlight the key figure values concerned, select Highlight.

How these highlighted items appear in the Web application depends on the definition ofthe affected classes in the Style Sheet.

Number DisplayYou can set a scaling factor of 1 to a billion. If, for example, you set 1,000, the value 3,000 is shownin the report as 3.

You can set the display of the scaling factor in the query properties [Seite 353].


SortingYou have the following options for sorting the values of a key figure:

� Leave Sorting

� Ascending Order

� Descending Order

CalculationsYou use this function to recalculate the results rows and single values that are displayed in the queryaccording to particular criteria.




Also Apply to ResultsYou can also use the chosen recalculation on the results rows under Calculate Results as... orCalculate Single Values as...



Calculation DirectionThe default calculation direction is not always as expected. You can change the direction as required:

� From top to bottom and from left to right (=default direction).

� From top to bottom

� From left to right

ActivitiesIn the Web application, from the enhanced context menu of a key figure, choose Properties. The LocalProperties: <Key Figure> dialog box appears. Make your settings and choose Transfer.

Local Properties of the QueryUseIn the Local Properties of the Query dialog box, you can make various settings for the query runtime.

FeaturesThe options for changing a query are divided into three areas: In addition, a fourth, informational areais displayed.

� Data Staging

� Presentation Options

� Display from

� Last Changed

Data StagingIn Data Staging, two basic options that influence the query output are combined.

� You decide between a display in the Multi-dimensional View and the Tabular View. In tabularreporting [Extern] view, the InfoObjects are displayed only in the columns.

� In the standard, Multi-Dimensional View, you can make additional settings.

� You can place characteristics that are split over several columns in one column in a hierarchy.To do this, select Display Columns Hierarchically...and specify in the dropdown box the nodeto which you want to expand this hierarchy.

� You can place characteristics that are split over several rows in one row in a hierarchy. To dothis, select Display Rows Hierarchically...and specify in the dropdown box the node to whichyou want to expand this hierarchy.

Presentation OptionsThere are several options in the Presentation Options area:

� Under Result Position, you determine where you want to display the results in tables.

� Bottom/right (=default setting)

� Top/left

� Bottom/left

� Top/right

� Under +/- Signs Display, you choose how the minus sign is displayed.

� In front of the value – for example, -5 is displayed



� Behind the value – for example, 5- is displayed

� In parentheses – for example, (5) is displayed

� Zero DisplayThe following display options are available for displaying zeroes:

With Currency/Unit: Zeroes are displayed with the currency/unit (for example, 0.00EUR. Thisis the default setting).

Without Currency/Unit: Zeroes are displayed without a currency or unit entry, that is, 0.00.

A Empty Cells: Cells containing a zero value remain empty.

Display Zeroes As: Choosing this setting activates the Display Zeroes As field. You are nowable to enter the required value (character, number or letter), for example, *. The cellscontaining a zero value are filled with this value.

� Suppression of ZerosYou can use this setting to determine whether columns or rows containing zeros are to bedisplayed.

If you select Suppression of Zeros, the rows or columns whose result is zero are notdisplayed. The row or column contains, for example, the values 1, -1, 1, -1, therefore the resultis 0. Activating this setting means that the whole row or column is not displayed.

If you do not select Suppression of Zeros, the rows or columns with zero values are displayed.

Display OptionsYou can choose from the following display options:

� Display Scaling Factors

Key figures can have scaling factors and units/currencies. Normally, units/currencies aredisplayed for every key figure, but not the scaling factors. If you activate the Display ScalingFactors for Key Figures, an additional header row is added in the row or columns header ofthe table. Information about the scaling factor and currency/unit appears in this additionalheader row, as long as it is consistent (for example, 1,000 EURO).

This setting is deactivated by default.

You can set the scaling factor in Key Figure Properties [Seite 352].

� Display Document Links

You can call up additional information for certain cells. Cells for which additional informationexists have the icon . Cells for which additional information exists have the icon .

For more information, see Using Documents in Web Applications [Seite 378].

� Display Drag and Relate Links

If you activate this setting, the symbol appears in the Web application next to theDrag&Relate-enabled InfoObjects. This setting is necessary for you to be able to recognizeDrag&Relate-enabled InfoObjects in an Enterprise Portal and to use the Drag&Relatefunction. You can find additional information about the Drag&Relate function fromDrag&Relate [Seite 409].

PropertiesInformation about the last changes to the query is displayed in this area:

� Owner

� Last Changed By

� Date

� Time



ActivitiesIn the Web application, from the enhanced context menu for the characteristic value, choose acharacteristic description or the structural component Query Properties. You reach the LocalProperties of the Query dialog box. Make your settings and choose Transfer.

Key Figure DefinitionUseThe Key Figure Definition dialog box gives information about how a concrete number is concatenatedin your Web application. You can check whether data has been loaded and analyze errors.

PrerequisitesFrom the context menu of a key figure or a concrete key figure value, you have chosen Key FigureDefinition.

FeaturesIf the key figure contains a formula, you can see how the formula is constructed in the key figuredefinition. The formula is displayed in full with all of the operators and objects used in the formula.

If you want to see additional information for this key figure, from the key figure context menu, chooseDetails.

You can navigate in the Key Figure Definition dialog box using the context menu. You can also use thenavigation block along with the request ID and currency/unit here. You can use the request ID to seewhether data has been loaded.

TableUseThe Table Web item displays the values of a query view in the Web application in the form of a table.The same list geometry that is used in the BEx Analyzer is supported. Characteristics and structurescan be displayed in both the rows and the columns.

FeaturesAn additional context menu is available in the table, alongside the context menu for the characteristicdescription (base planning object, for example). This menu relates to the characteristic values (casing,network, for example) or structural components.

Functions in the contextmenu for characteristicdescriptions

Functions in the contextmenu for characteristicvalues

Functions in the contextmenu for structuralcomponents

� Back

� Back to Start

� Select Filter Value [Seite343]

� Drilldown � Across or

� Back

� Back to Start

� Keep Filter Value

� Keep Filter Value on Axis

� Select Filter Value [Seite

� Back

� Back to Start

� Keep Filter Value

� Keep Filter Value on Axis

� Select Filter Value [Seite



Down

� Exchange Characteristic 1with � Characteristic 2 /Structure

� Remove Drilldown

� Swap Axes

� Sort Characteristic 1 �Ascending According tokey / Ascending Accordingto Name / DescendingAccording to Key /Descending According toName

� Goto [Seite 346]

� Translating Currencies[Seite 348]

� Bookmark [Seite 349]

� Export As � CSV File /MS Excel 2000 File

� Properties [Seite 350](characteristic)

� Query Properties [Seite353]

343]

� Filter and DrilldownAccording to �Characteristic 2

� Drilldown �Characteristic 2

� Exchange Characteristic 1with � Characteristic 2 /Structure

� Remove Drilldown

� Swap Axes

� Sort Characteristic 1 �Ascending According toKey / AscendingAccording to Name /Descending According toKey / DescendingAccording to Name





� Properties [Seite 350](characteristic)


343]

� Filter and DrilldownAccording to �Characteristic 2

� Drilldown �Characteristic 2

� Exchange Structure with� Characteristic

� Swap Axes

� Sort � Sort Ascending /Sort Descending

� Calculate Result as �(Not Defined) / Summation/ Maximum / Minimum /Count All Values < > 0 /Average of All Values /Average of All Values < >0 / Standard Deviation /Variance / SuppressResult / First Value / LastValue

� Calculate Single ValuesAs � (Not Defined) /Normalization of Result /Normalization of TotalResult / Normalization ofQuery Total / Ranked List/ Ranked List (Olympic)

� Cumulated





� Properties [Seite 352] (keyfigure)

� Key Figure Definition[Seite 355]


The contents of the enhanced context menu are listed in the description of the contextmenu functions. You can use the menu entries Enhanced Menu and Basic Menu, totoggle between the two versions. The basic menu contains a subset of the enhancedmenu.

For more information, see Context Menu Functions [Seite 339]



Generic Navigation BlockUseThe Web item Generic Navigation Block displays the navigational state of a query view in the Webapplication in the form of a table. All characteristics and structures in the query view are listed in thetable and their filter values are displayed. You can change the navigational status of the query view.You can transfer characteristics and structures to an axis (rows or columns) or from an axis. You canfilter according to single values and remove the filter again.

FeaturesYou use the icon to expand an InfoObject by columns, and the icon to expand the InfoObject byrows. The InfoObject is drilled down in the table accordingly. In the navigation block a symbolappears next to the InfoObject. Click on this symbol to remove the drilldown from the table.

You use the icon to select filter values. The filter values you select are used to restrict the drilldownin the table. The filter values selected are listed in the navigation block. Use the delete option toremove the filter.

In the generic navigation block, there is a context menu that relates to the description of thecharacteristic (building component, for example):

� Back

� Back to Start

� Select Filter Value [Seite 343]

� Drilldown � Across or Down

� Switch Axes

� Sort characteristic� Ascending According to Key / Ascending According to Name / DescendingAccording to Key / Descending According to Name

� Goto [Seite 346] � Display documents / Documents for Navigation Status

� Currency Translation [Seite 348]


� Export As � CSV File / MS Excel 2000 File

� Properties [Seite 350] (characteristic)

� Query Properties [Seite 353]

The contents of the enhanced context menu are listed in the description of the contextmenu functions. You can toggle between the two versions by choosing the menu entriesEnhanced Menu or Basic Menu. The basic menu contains a subset of the enhancedmenu.

For more information, see Context Menu Functions [Seite 339]

List of ConditionsUseA Web item that displays all of the existing conditions and their status (active/not active/notapplicable/not used) for a stored query view in the Web application.



FeaturesThe List of Conditions Web item displays the status of conditions for a stored query view in the form ofa table in the Web application. All of the conditions that can be applied to the current navigation statusfor the query view are listed.

� The status of the condition is displayed for every condition (active/not active/not applicable/notused). You use the symbol to activate/deactivate the conditions.

� You change a condition by clicking on the description of the condition and choosing Change fromthe context menu. See Defining and Changing Conditions [Seite 358].

� You create a new condition by choosing Create. You can describe your condition in the Definitionof a Condition dialog box. See Defining and Changing Conditions [Seite 358].

Defining and Changing ConditionsUseYou can formulate conditions to make data analysis more efficient. In the Web application, the data isrestricted in accordance with the conditions so that only the part of the results area in which you areinterested is displayed.

Conditions do not affect the results lines, that is, the results lines correspond to the tableresults lines without this condition.

You can find additional information about the scope of functions for conditions under Conditions [Seite80], in the BEx Query Designer section.

PrerequisitesYou have called up the conditions function to change or define a condition.

� In the Web item List of Conditions [Seite 357].

� In the Web item Ad-hoc Query Designer [Seite 364]

� In the toolbar of the standard Web template [Seite 387]

ProcedureDefining Conditions1. Specify a description for the condition in the Description field.

2. If you want to just define the condition, and do not want to execute it in the Web application,remove the check from the Active checkbox that is there by default.

3. You now have the following options:

� Choose All Characteristics in the Drilldown if you want to evaluate the individual conditions forall of the characteristics in the drilldown, independently of one another.


If the Customer characteristic is the only one in the drilldown, the top 5 customers as faras sales are concerned are displayed because of the condition. If the Productcharacteristic is the only one in the drilldown, the top five products with regards to salesare displayed. Additionally, if Customer and Product are in the drilldown, the top five



customers and the top five products with regards to sales are displayed, as well as all 25combinations of the two.

� Choose Selected Characteristics Only and the relevant characteristic if you want to evaluatethe individual condition(s) only when this characteristic is in the drilldown.


You have selected Customer as the only characteristic. The condition is only evaluated ifCustomer is in the drilldown. Only the top five customers with their sales are displayed.

� Choose Selected Characteristics Only and several characteristics if you want to evaluate theindividual condition(s) for combinations of characteristics.


You have selected the Customer and Product characteristics. The condition is onlyevaluated if Customer and Product are in the drilldown at the same time. The option AllCharacteristics in Drilldown displays the top five customer-product combinations withsales, meaning only five rows instead of 25 (see above).

4. Specify the values that should satisfy the condition in the area Single values of the condition. Acondition row is always derived from the determination of a key figure or structure used in thequery, an operator, and a value that matches the operator.

a. Make a check in the checkbox.

b. In the dropdown box select the key figure or structure.

c. Select the operator from the second dropdown box.

For the following operators use both input fields for entering a "from" and "to" value:

� [ ] for entering values that lay within an interval

� ] [ for entering values outside an interval

For the remaining settings, enter the value in the first input field:

You have three input rows by default. You can show further rows with New Row.

5. Choose Transfer.

Changing Conditions1. In the Web item List of Conditions click on a condition and select entry Change in the context

menu. The Definition of a Condition dialog box appears.

2. Change the settings of your condition.

If you want to delete a setting, remove the check from the checkbox in one of the rows inthe are Single Values of the Condition. This row will no longer appear when the Definitionof a Condition dialog box is called again.

3. Choose Transfer. Your changes are copied.

Deleting Conditions1. In the Web item List of Conditions, click on a condition and select Delete from the context menu.

2. The condition is deleted.



ResultYou have defined or changed a condition for a query. The condition is evaluated in the Webapplication. Only those objects are displayed which fulfill the defined conditions.

List of ExceptionsUseA Web item that lists the existing exceptions and their status (active/not active) for a stored query viewin the Web application.

FeaturesThe List of Exceptions Web item displays the status of the exceptions for a stored query view in theform of a table.

� For each exception, the status of the exception (active/not active) is also displayed. You canactivate or deactivate the exception by clicking on the symbol. Alternatively, you can click onthe description and choose Activate or Deactivate from the context menu.

� You change an exception by clicking on the description of the exception and choosing Changefrom the context menu. See Defining and Changing Exceptions [Seite 360].

� You can create a new exception by choosing Create. You can describe your exception in theDefinition of an Exception dialog box. See Defining and Changing Exceptions [Seite 360].

Defining and Changing ExceptionsUseIn exception reporting you select and highlight objects that are in some way different or critical. Resultsthat fall outside a set of predetermined threshold values (exceptions) are highlighted in color. Thisenables you to identify immediately any results that deviate from the expected results.

Exception reporting allows you to determine the objects that are critical for a query in you Webapplication.

PrerequisitesYou have called up the exceptions function to change or define a condition.

� In the Web item List of Exceptions [Seite 360].

� In the Web item Ad-hoc Query Designer [Seite 364]

� In the toolbar of the standard Web template [Seite 387]

ProcedureDefining Exceptions1. Specify a description for the exception in the Description field.

2. If you want to just define the exception, and do not want to execute it actively in the Webapplication, remove the check from the Active checkbox that is there by default.



3. In the Evaluation for field, choose the structural components, for which you want to create theexception.

4. Define the variant of the exception in the Value of the Exception area by creating one row for eachalert level.

a. Make a check in the checkbox.

b. Select an operator from the dropdown box. You have the following operators:

� is between

� Is smaller than

� Is smaller than or equal to

� Greater than

� Greater than or equal to

� Equal to

� Not equal to

� Not between

For the following operators use both input fields for entering a "from" and "to" value:

[ ] for entering values that lie within an interval

Not between: for entering values outside an interval

For the remaining settings, enter the value in the first input field:

c. In the second dropdown box, enter the required priority of the exception as the alert level. Thepriority is displayed in the Web application with the appropriate background color for the tablecell. You can use a total of nine colors from dark green for good 1 to yellow for critical to darkred for bad 3.

The colors refer to the colors used in SAP's Cascading Style Sheets.

d. With New row you can show further rows if you need more than the three standard input rows.

5. Make your settings in Cell restrictions to define the data cells of the report for which the exceptionshould be evaluated. The system offers a row for each characteristic.

All the characteristics of a query used in the rows, columns or free characteristics can beused as characteristics.

a. Select an operator from the dropdown box.

b. Enter a value in the input field.

For the operator Equal: Single Value, enter a characteristic value and for the operatorHierarchy Level, enter a number.

You have the following operators:

Operators Meaning

All The cell context is not restricted. The exceptionis valid for every drilldown status of thecharacteristic.



Equal: Single value The exception is valid for only one particularvalue of the characteristic (“spare parts” under“product group”, for example). Specify thecharacteristic value you want to use in externalnon-compounded display format or call thevalue help with to choose a characteristicvalue.

Hierarchy level The exception is valid only for a particularhierarchy level of the characteristic. Specify thehierarchy level you want to use as a number inthe input field.

In the hierarchy for thecharacteristic Location, Country isthe second hierarchy level(continent – country – state –location). If you want the exceptionto be valid only for the hierarchylevel Country, put the number 2 inthe Value field. If you want theexception to be valid only for thehierarchy level State, put thenumber 3 in the Value field, sinceState is the third hierarchy level.

Results only The exception is valid only for aggregatedvalues of the characteristic.

Everything except results The exception applies to all values of thecharacteristic apart from aggregated values.

Operators for Use with Unlisted Characteristics

The standard default cell restriction Absolute Values is applied to all those characteristicswhose cells you have not restricted individually. This setting means that the exception is validonly for the aggregated values of this characteristic.

In the field Operators for User with Unlisted Characteristics, you can also choose therestriction Relative Values. This setting means that the exception is valid independently of thedrilldown status of a characteristic, whose cell context has not been restricted. This does notqualify as a restriction.

We recommend that you use this setting only with relative values (for example,percentage deviations).

6. Choose Transfer.

Changing Settings of an Exception1. In the Web item List of Exceptions click on an exception and select entry Change in the context

menu. The Definition of an Exception dialog box appears.

2. Change the settings of your exception.

If you want to delete a setting, remove the check from the checkbox in one of the rows inthe area Exception Values. This row will no longer appear when the Definition of anException dialog box is called again.

3. Choose Transfer. Your changes are copied.



Deleting Exceptions1. In the Web item List of Exceptions click on an exception and select entry Delete in the context

menu.

2. The exception is deleted.

ResultYou have defined or changed an exception. The exception is evaluated in the Web application, that isthe cells in the table that are affected by the exception are displayed with the appropriate colorshading.

LabelUseThe Label Web item displays the descriptions of characteristics, attributes, or structural components.You can create a link to the context menu of these characteristics, attributes, or structuralcomponents. Since the descriptions are language-dependent, the text is automatically displayed in thelogon language.

You can enter a label in a text or place it next to a dropdown box. You can also create navigationblocks by adding different labels for characteristics and structural components to a table.

FeaturesIf you activate the CONTEXT_MENU attribute when you publish the Label [Seite 195] Web item, acontext menu referring to the description of the characteristic or structural component that youselected in the Web Application Designer appears.

For more information, see Context Menu Functions [Seite 339].

Dropdown Box, Radio Button Group, Checkbox,Hierarchical Context MenuUseThe Web items Dropdown Box, Radio Button Group and Checkbox enable you to filter bycharacteristic values in various visual formats. In the table, the drilldown is displayed according to thevalue you selected.

The Web item Hierarchical Context Menu creates a context menu from the hierarchy of acharacteristic or structure. The hierarchy nodes appear as entries in this context menu and can be setas filters. You can use this Web item to filter in the Web application by hierarchy nodes.



Ad-hoc Query Designer FunctionsUseThis section contains an overview of the functions available in the Ad-hoc Query Designer.

PrerequisitesTo create queries on the Web using the Ad-hoc Query Designer, you have to create a Web applicationwith the Ad-hoc Query Designer Web item.

FeaturesThe Ad-hoc Query Designer enables you to:

Create new queriesAd-hoc Query Designer: Defining New Queries [Seite 364]

Create new queries using the wizardAd-hoc Query Designer: Defining New Queries with the Wizard [Seite 375]

Open existing queriesSelect an existing query from your history, favorites or roles or from the complete list under InfoAreasand choose Transfer. The query is displayed in the ad-hoc query designer. You can then change thequery [Seite 377].

Ad-hoc Query Designer: Defining New QueriesUseYou use the ad-hoc query designer to create and change your Web application queries.

The Ad-hoc Query Designer enables you to:

� Create queries by assigning characteristics from an InfoProvider to rows, columns, filters, andfree characteristics, and including key figures from the InfoProvider in the key figure structureof the query.

� Restrict or filter key figures and characteristics

� Use predefined key figure structures and restricted or calculated key figures in the query

� Set or change query properties and key figure/characteristic properties in the query

� Create or change conditions and exceptions

For further information about restrictions on the Ad-hoc Query Designer in comparison to the BExQuery Designer, see Ad-hoc Query Designer [Seite 229].

You can also define new queries with a wizard [Seite 375] that takes you step-by-stepthrough the process.

PrerequisitesYou have created a Web application containing the Ad-hoc Query Designer Web item.

Procedure1. Choose Create New Query. You get to the Choose an InfoProvider dialog box.



2. Choose the InfoProvider that you want to use from your history or from the complete list underInfoAreas and then choose Transfer.

3. Select the characteristics that you want to usea. From the dropdown box, choose Characteristics. The system displays the dimensions of the

InfoProvider.

b. Expand the required dimension directory and click on the characteristic that you want toinclude.

c. From the context menu, choose the area (row, column, free characteristics, filter) in which youwant to place the characteristic. The characteristic appears in the chosen area.

You can filter characteristics using a number of characteristic values to restrict the dataset. Select the characteristic and from the context menu, choose Select Filter Value [Seite343].

If a hierarchy is defined for the characteristic, an additional dialog box appearsautomatically before the Select Filter Values dialog box. Here you can choose whetheryou want to restrict the characteristic according to the flat list of characteristic values orusing a hierarchy. If you select a hierarchy, the Select Filter Values dialog appears with ahierarchically structured selection.

4. Select the key figures/structuresa. From the dropdown box, choose Structures. The system displays the available key figure

structures for the InfoProvider.

b. Select the key figure structure that you want to use and assign this in the context menu to therows or columns.

If you are not using one of the key figure structures, assign the key figures to the rows orcolumns:

a. From the dropdown box, choose Key Figure. The key figures from the InfoProvider, includingexisting calculated and restricted key figures, are displayed.

b. If necessary, expand the directories of calculated or restricted key figures.

c. Select the key figure that you want to use and assign this in the context menu to the rows orcolumns.

You can also restrict the key figure, if necessary. From the context menu, choose CreateRestriction

a. Select the characteristic by which you want to restrict the key figure: Expand the relevantdimension and select the required characteristic. You get to the Select Filter Value [Seite 343]dialog box.


b. Select the filter value that you want to use to restrict the key figure and choose Transfer.

The can mark the restricted key figure selection as constant. This means that the selectioncan no longer be changed through navigation or filtering while the query is running and isused as a reference size. From the context menu of the restriction, choose Selection ofConstants. For more information about this function, see Selecting Constants [Seite 70].

You can also display existing characteristics for key figures. From the context menu,choose Display Restrictions. If the list of restricted characteristics for key figures isempty, you can include characteristics in this list.



a. In the left-hand display frame of the InfoProvider objects, from the dropdown box, chooseCharacteristics, expand the dimensions and select the characteristic that you want to use torestrict the key figure.

b. From the context menu of the characteristic, choose Restriction. The characteristic is includedin the list of restrictions for the key figure.

c. From there, using the characteristic context menu, you can choose Select Filter Values.

The query can contain only one structure. This structure has to be the key figurestructure and be in the rows or columns of the query.

You cannot use key figures or key figure structures in the filter.

You cannot define exception cells, since this requires two structures.

You cannot create reusable structures or restricted or calculated key figures

If you want to see the documents available for an InfoProvider object (characteristic, keyfigure, structure, and so on), in the left display frame of the InfoProvider objects, from thecontext menu of the relevant object, choose Documents. You can also display existingdocuments or create new documents for the InfoProvider and the query itself. Select thename of the InfoProvider or query in the title, and from the context menu chooseDocuments.

This takes you to a list of existing documents. From here, using Additional Functions youcan create a new document [Seite 379].

5. You can make settings in the properties, if necessary.

Select the characteristic, key figure, structural component or structure in the assigned area(rows, columns, and so on) and from the context menu, choose Properties.

Select the query name and from the context menu, choose Properties.

If you have not yet saved your query and therefore have not yet given the query a name,in the tile, the name of the query appears as <New Query>.

For more detailed information, see:

Characteristic Properties [Seite 368]

Selection/Formula Properties [Seite 370]

Structural Properties [Seite 372]


6. You can also define exceptions and conditions.

Select the query name and from the context menu, choose Exceptions or Conditions.

For more information, see:

Defining and Changing Conditions [Seite 358]

Defining and Changing Exceptions [Seite 360]

7. If you have assigned, for example,

� The key figures to the columns

� The characteristics to the rows

� Characteristics that you want to be able to add when you navigate in the drilldown to the freecharacteristics



� As well as characteristics according to which you want to restrict the data set of the query tothe filter

and have made additional settings as necessary, you can check the query definition for errors.Choose Check.

8. You can review the structure of the query without data in the preview window. Choose Preview.

9. Choose Save. A dialog box appears.

a. From the dropdown box, choose the folder, favorites or roles in which you want to save thequery.

b. Enter a technical name and a description for the query.

c. Choose Transfer.

You can execute the query without saving it.

10. Choose Execute.

If you do not want to execute the query immediately, choose Close. The Ad-hoc QueryDesigner is hidden, collapsed or does not change, depending on the setting you made forthe attribute Action On Close (ON_CLOSE). If it does not change, it is still visible in theWeb application and is expanded. The individual fields (rows, columns, filters, freecharacteristics) are empty. The query that you defined or changed is no longer locked butcan be changed by other users.

See also: Ad-hoc Query Designer [Seite 229]

You can also use and execute the query in a tabular view.

a. Select the query name and from the context menu, choose Properties. You reach the QueryProperties dialog box.

b. In the Presentation tab page and under Data Formatting, choose Tabular View.

c. Choose the Tabular View tab page.

d. You can now determine the sequence of the characteristics and key figures used in the queryin the columns by selecting the placing (1,2,3...) from the dropdown box of the InfoObject thatyou are using.

e. Choose Transfer.

f. Choose Execute. The query is displayed in tabular form, that is, the InfoObjects are shownonly in the columns in tabular reporting [Extern]. By assigning columns how you want, youcan, for example, display a characteristic between two key figures.

ResultThe query is displayed in a different frame or in other Web items in the current template, depending onhow the attributes for the Ad-hoc Query Designer [Seite 229] Web item are set up.



Characteristic PropertiesUseIn the Characteristic Properties dialog box for a specific characteristic, such as order type, you can seta range of functions. These settings then affect all key figures for this characteristic in a querydrilldown.

FeaturesThe Query Properties dialog box is divided into three tab pages, each covering different settings.

Tab Page: GeneralThe settings that you can make here are identical to those in the Characteristic Properties dialog in theQuery Designer. See Characteristic Properties [Seite 61]

Tab Page: Presentation HierarchyYou can present the characteristic hierarchically.

In the Hierarchy Name field, select the hierarchy required for this characteristic. When you click in thefield, a dropdown box appears with all of the hierarchies that are available for this characteristic.Choose a hierarchy from the list.

The hierarchy is displayed in the Hierarchy Name field. The technical name of the hierarchy isdisplayed below it.

Select the Active checkbox to display the characteristic with the selected hierarchy in the query.

When you deactivate the Active selection box, the characteristic is displayed in the query not as ahierarchy but as a basic list.

When you have selected a hierarchy, you see the following options for the hierarchy:

Sorting Within the HierarchyYou can set the sorting within the hierarchy according to the Key or Name in Ascending or Descendingorder.

Select Execute Sort and select the type of sorting and sort direction required.

If you do not make any entries, the values are sorted as determined in the hierarchy.

Hierarchy PropertiesEach hierarchy has certain properties that you specify in the hierarchy definition. You can override thefollowing hierarchy properties for the current hierarchy:

� Expansion Level

Select Other Level and enter a numerical value to show the hierarchy level to which you wantto expand the hierarchy.

� Position of Child Nodes

Select Other Position and choose whether the child nodes are positioned above (Down) orbelow (Up). Choose At the Top if, for example, you want to see the overall result at thebottom.

� Display of Values of Posted Nodes

Select Other Setting and choose whether you want to Display or Suppress the values ofposted nodes.

In hierarchies, nodes always display the aggregated values of the subordinate nodes andleaves. If a node has a posted values, you cannot see this. To display this posted value, anadditional leave is inserted, which has the same name as the node. This leaf displays thevalue posted to the node.



For more information about this function in the form of an example, see CharacteristicProperties [Seite 61].

� Display Nodes with Only One Child

Select Other Setting and choose whether you want to Display or Suppress the values ofnodes with only one child. Suppressing nodes with only one child helps you to reach the moredetailed information quickly.

For more information about this function in the form of an example, see CharacteristicProperties [Seite 61].

Tab Page: Attributes

This tab page appears only when the characteristic has attributes.

You determine here which attributes you want to display for this characteristic in the query.

In the Display Type dropdown box, select the format in which you want to display the attribute.

You can choose from the following:

� Not Selected: The attribute is not selected for the query and is not displayed.

� No Display: The attribute display is hidden.







In the Display Type dropdown box, the system offers only those texts for selection thatwere created for this attribute in the InfoObject maintenance [Extern]. See Tab Page:Attributes [Extern]

� Not Selected, No Display and Key are always offered.

� Key and Name, Name, Name and Key are offered additionally if a text (short, medium or long)was created for this attribute.

� Medium Name is offered if a mid-length text has been created.


ActivitiesIn the Ad-hoc Query Designer, select the characteristic (from the rows, columns, filter or freecharacteristics) and from the context menu, choose Properties. The Characteristic Properties dialogbox appears. Make the settings you need and choose Transfer.



Selection/Formula PropertiesUseIn the dialog box Selection/Formula Properties for a structural component, you can set a range offunctions. You can make the settings for both the columns and the rows.

FeaturesDescriptionThe name of the key figure, the restricted key figure (selection) or the formula appears automatically.You can change the description here.

In contrast to characteristics and attributes, structural components can contain several rows for thedescription.

The total number of all characters in all rows, including the line-end character is restrictedto 60 characters.

Technical NameYou can enter a technical name for the structural component. However, this is optional.


For access from external interfaces (such as Crystal Reports, from URLs or using OLE DBfor OLAP), a technical name is necessary for structural components, since the structuralcomponent is considered a table field and has to be uniquely accessible. If you do notenter a technical name, the unique ID (UID) is used for access from external interfaces foruniquely identifying the structural component. However, the UID has 25 characters, whichcan lead to problems when you change queries.

You can change the technical name. When you do so, a warning appears that tells you that when youuse the structural component in external interfaces, the references can be destroyed.

LayoutHere you can choose whether you want to highlight the selection or formula. The type of highlightingdepends on the style used in the BEx Analyzer or in the Web application.

If you choose Hide, the selection or formula is not displayed.

Moreover, you can mark a selection as constant here. This means that the selection cannot bechanged by navigation or filtering for the runtime and can therefore be used as a reference size. Formore information, see Selecting Constants [Seite 70].

Number displayYou can set a scaling factor of 1 to a billion. If, for example, you set 1,000, the value 3,000 is shownin the report as 3.


Select Reverse +/- Signs if you want to display the numbers as negative values. A positive numberreceives a minus as a sign (for example, 85 becomes –85) or a negative number receives a plus (forexample, -38 becomes +38).



The reversal of plus and minus signs is purely a display function. If, for example, the keyfigure is added to a formula, it is calculated with its correct values.

CalculationsYou use this function to recalculate, according to particular criteria, the results rows and single valuesthat are displayed in the query.




Also Apply to ResultsYou can also use the chosen recalculation on the results rows under Calculate Results As... orCalculate Single Values As...



� Calculate � Single Value as � Ranked list / Ranked list (Olympic)

� Calculate � Cumulative

Currency Translation

The Currency Translation is not offered:

� In the dialog box for formulas

� If the source key figure does not have a currency

You create the translation types for currency translation [Extern] in the Administrator Workbench. Formore information, see Creating Currency Translation Keys [Extern].

You can set a target currency for a structural component in the Ad-hoc Query Designer.

Select a currency in the dropdown box for Currency Type. According to how the currency translationkey has been created in the Administrator Workbench, you have the following options:

� Select the target currency when converting

The target currency is not fixed in the translation key in the Administrator Workbench but canbe determined when converting. Select the required translation key and enter the TargetCurrency in the dropdown box. You can also select a currency from the dropdown box.

� Fixed target currency

The target currency is determined in the translation key in the Administrator Workbench.Select the required translation key with the fixed target currency. In the Target Currencydropdown box, the fixed target currency for this translation key appears.

� InfoObject determines target currency



The target currency is determined in the translation key in the Administrator Workbench sothat it is determined from an InfoObject. Select the required translation key with the targetcurrency from the InfoObject.

ActivitiesSelect the structural component in the Ad-hoc Query Designer and from the context menu, chooseProperties. You reach the Selection/Formula Properties dialog box. Make the settings you need andchoose Transfer.

Structure PropertiesUseYou can change the description of a structure and give it a technical name in the Structure Propertiesdialog box.

FeaturesDescriptionThe name of the structure appears automatically here. You can overwrite this text.

Technical NameIf the structure has been saved as a reusable structure, the technical name of the structure isdisplayed here and you can no longer change it.

You can enter a technical name for local structures. However, this is optional.


Access from external interfaces (such as Crystal Reports, from URLs or using OLE DB forOLAP), a technical name is necessary for structures, since the structure is considered atable field and has to be uniquely accessible. If you do not enter a technical name, theunique ID (UID) is used for access from external interfaces for uniquely identifying thestructure. However, the UID has 25 characters and can cause problems to arise when youchange queries.

You can change the technical name. When you do so, a warning appears that tells you that when youuse the structure in external interfaces, the references can be destroyed.

ActivitiesIn the Ad-hoc Query Designer, select the structure, and from the context menu, choose Properties.The Structure Properties dialog box appears.

Query PropertiesUseIn the Query Properties dialog box, you can make various settings for the query.



IntegrationYou reach the Query Properties dialog box by selecting a query name in the Ad-hoc Query Designerand choosing Properties from the context menu.

If you have not yet saved your query and therefore have not yet given the query a namethe name of the query appears in the title as <New Query>.

FeaturesThe Query Properties dialog box is divided into four tab pages, each covering different settings.

Tab Page: GeneralDescriptionThe name of the query that you entered when saving the query automatically appears here. You canchange the description here.

Technical NameThe technical name of the query is displayed here.

Key dateEach query has a key date. For time-dependent data, the key data determines for which time the datais selected. The default key date value is the date the query was executed, that is <Today>.

1. Click on the Key Date field. A dialog box with a calendar appears for you to select your key date.

2. Select a date from the calendar. If you select 01.01.1999 for example, time-dependent data isread from the 01.01.1999.

The key date only applies to time-dependent data.

Release for OLE DB for OLAP External Reporting tools that communicate via the OLE DB for OLAP interface use queries asDataSources. If you want to release this query as a DataSource for external Reporting tools, selectRelease for OLE DB for OLAP.

Note: Queries containing formulas with the operators %RT, %CT, SUMRT, SUMCT andLEAF cannot be released for OLE DB for OLAP. These operators are dependent on howthe list is displayed in the BEx Analyzer and the formulas would return other unexpectedvalues via OLE DB for OLAP or MDX.

For more about using formula operators in calculated key figures, see Calculating KeyFigures [Seite 31].

PropertiesThis is where you can see details of the owner and person who last changed the structure, as well asthe corresponding data and time that the query was changed.

Tab Page: PresentationData StagingYou choose here whether you want to display the query in a tabular or multi-dimensional view.

If you choose Tabular View, you can determine the sequence of the columns on the Tabular View tabpage.



If you choose Multi-dimensional View, you can specify whether the columns or the rows are displayedhierarchically. Select the checkbox and specify the InfoObject to which you want to expand thehierarchical display.

Display OptionsResult positionHere, you determine whether the result is displayed on the bottom right (=default), bottom left, top rightor top left.

Sign displayHere, you determine how the minus sign is displayed. The following display options are available fornegative values:

� - 5 = the minus sign is positioned before the value (=default setting)

� 5 - = the minus sign is positioned after the value

� (5) = negative values are displayed in parentheses

Zero DisplayThe following display options are available for zeroes:

With Currency/Unit: Zeroes are displayed with the currency/unit (for example, 0.00EUR. This is thedefault setting).

Without Currency/Unit: Zeroes are displayed without a currency or unit entry, that is, 0.00.

A Empty Cells: Cells containing a zero value remain empty.

Display Zeroes As: Choosing this setting activates the Display Zeroes As field. You are now able toenter the required value (character, number or letter).

Display Zeroes As...You enter the required value (characters, numbers or letters), for example, *. The cells containing azero value are filled with this value, for example *.

Suppress Zero Rows/ColumnsYou can use this setting to determine whether columns or rows containing zeros are to be displayed.

If you select Suppress Zero Rows/Columns, the rows or columns whose result is zero are notdisplayed. The row or column contains, for example, the values 1, -1, 1, -1 and the result is 0.Activating this setting means that the whole row or column is not displayed.

If you do not select Suppress Zero Rows/Columns, the rows or columns with zero values aredisplayed.

Display OptionsThe following options are possible:

� Adjusting format after refreshing

� Suppressing repeated key values

� Display Scaling Factors

� Displaying document links

� Displaying drag and relate links

These options are identical to those in the BEx Query Designer. For more information, see QueryProperties [Seite 56]



Tab Page: Variables

This tab page appears only when the query contains variables. Reusable restricted keyfigures, calculated key figures or structures can all have variables. If you have any ofthese reusable objects containing variables in your query, the Variables tab page appearsin the query properties.

Any entry variables the query contains are listed here. You can determine the sequence in which thevariables appear in the variables screen when you execute the query. In the dropdown box, select theplacing (1,2,3...) for the current variable.

Tab Page: Tabular ViewYou can also use the query in a tabular view. In tabular reporting [Extern], the InfoObjects aredisplayed only in the columns By assigning columns how you want, you can, for example, display acharacteristic between two key figures.

In the Presentation tab strip under Data Processing, you have chosen Tabular View.

You can determine the sequence of the characteristics and key figures used in the query in thecolumns by selecting the placing (1,2,3...) from the dropdown box of the InfoObject that you are using.

ActivitiesMake the settings you need for the query and choose Transfer.

Ad-hoc Query Designer: Defining New Queries with theWizardUseYou can use the wizard for the ad-hoc query designer to create queries in a Web application followinga step-by-step procedure.

You can only create queries with the wizard. In the ad-hoc query designer itself, you canedit the queries further or change existing queries.

PrerequisitesYou have created a Web application containing the Ad-hoc Query Designer [Seite 229] Web item.

Procedure1. In the ad-hoc query designer, choose Create Query with Wizard. You get to the Choose an

InfoProvider dialog box.

2. Choose the InfoProvider that you want to use from your history or from the complete list underInfoAreas and then choose Continue.

3. Define the columnsSelect the key figures that you want to see in the columns of the query. Expand the nodesCalculated or Restricted Key Figures if necessary, to be able to select existing calculated orrestricted key figures.

Choose Next.

4. Define the rows



Expand the relevant dimension directory and select the characteristic that you want to see inthe rows of the query.

Choose Next.

5. Define the free characteristicsExpand the relevant dimension directory and select the characteristics that are available whenyou navigate in the query so that you can add them to the drilldown.

Choose Next.

6. Define the filterExpand the relevant dimension directory and select the characteristic according to which youwant to restrict the data set of the query.

In order to restrict a data set, you have to restrict the selected characteristics to a numberof characteristic values. You cannot do this in the wizard. To do this, you have to edit thequery in the ad-hoc query designer after you have defined it in the wizard. Select thecharacteristic in the filter and from the context menu, choose Select Filter Values [Seite343].


Choose Next.

7. The query definition is displayed and specifies the source InfoProvider, the contents of the filterand the free characteristics as well as a preview of the rows and columns of the query.

If you want to change the query definition, choose Back. If you want to leave the query as it is,choose Transfer. The wizard window closes.

ResultThe query that you defined is displayed in the ad-hoc query designer.

You can now save the query. Choose Save. A dialog box appears.

a. From the dropdown box, choose the folder, favorites or roles in which you want to save thequery.

b. Enter a technical name and a description for the query.

c. Choose Transfer.

You can execute the query without saving it.

Choose Execute.

The query is displayed in a different frame or in other Web items in the current Web template,depending on how the attributes for the Ad-hoc Query Designer [Seite 229] Web item are set up.



Ad-hoc Query Designer: Changing QueriesUseYou use the ad-hoc query designer to create and change your Web application queries.

PrerequisitesYou have created a Web application using the Ad-hoc Query Designer Web item and already defineda query [Seite 364] there.

ProcedureMoving characteristics or key figuresIf you want to move characteristics or key figures into different areas (columns, rows, and so on),choose from the context menu of the InfoObject Move � Columns, Rows...

If you want to move the characteristic or key figure within an area, choose from the context menu ofthe InfoObject Up or Down. The InfoObject is then moved up or down one space.

Removing characteristics or key figuresIf you want to remove characteristics or key figures from the query, choose from the context menu ofthe InfoObject Remove.

Displaying Structural ComponentsYou can choose Structural Components from the context menu for key figures to display the individualcomponents of the key figure structure.

Creating RestrictionsYou can restrict key figures by characteristic values. From the context menu, choose CreateRestriction. You can find more detailed information under Ad-hoc Query Designer: Defining NewQueries [Seite 364].

Displaying RestrictionsYou can display restrictions that have already been defined for the key figure you are using. From thecontext menu, choose Display Restrictions

If the list of characteristics with restricted key figures is empty, you can add characteristicsfrom the left-hand selection window for InfoProvider objects using the context menu �Restriction. You can find more detailed information under Ad-hoc Query Designer:Defining New Queries [Seite 364].

Selecting Filter ValuesYou can filter characteristics using a number of characteristic values to restrict the data set. Select thecharacteristic and from the context menu, choose Select Filter Value [Seite 343]. You can find moredetailed information under Ad-hoc Query Designer: Defining New Queries [Seite 364].

Changing Property SettingsSelect the characteristic or key figure in the assigned area (rows, columns, and so on) and from thecontext menu, choose Properties.

Select the query name and from the context menu, choose Properties.

You can find more detailed information under:

Changing Characteristic Properties [Seite 350]

Changing Key Figure Properties [Seite 352]

Changing Query Properties [Seite 353]

Changing Conditions and Exceptions



Click on the relevant symbol next to the name of the query (Condition , Exception ) and change,delete or create a new condition or exception.

You can find more detailed information under:

Defining and Changing Conditions [Seite 358]

Defining and Changing Exceptions [Seite 360]

Using Documents in Web ApplicationsUseYou can comment and enhance the structured business data that you provide for example in a tablewith unstructured information such as texts, diagrams and graphics with the Web items Singledocument and List of documents.

From the context menu, using the Goto function, you can access the existing documents forInfoProvider data, master data and metaobjects.

You can display document links for the content of a cell.

PrerequisitesIndividual Document and List of Documents Web items:

You created documents [Extern] in the Administrator Workbench or in the master data maintenancescreen and inserted the Web item single document [Seite 225] or list of documents [Seite 226] in theWeb template when you published the Web application in the BEx Web Application Designer.

FeaturesSingle DocumentFor example you can add several documents such as route directions and a picture of the local officefor each value of a characteristic, such as Business partner. Depending on what setting you made forthe Document Display Type (IS_INPLACE) attribute in the Web Application Designer, the document isdisplayed either in the Web application (“X”) or in its own window (“ ”). If the IS_INSPACE attribute = ‘‘, the system displays a link to the document text, using which you can reach the document in yourown browser window.

List of DocumentsThe List of Documents allows you to call up or create context sensitive information for the InfoProviderdata used in the Web browser.

You can search in the list of documents: See Searching in Documents [Seite 380].

Further Functions

Click on the Additional Functions button to call up a context menu with the following functions:

� Creating New Documents [Seite 379]

� Display / Do not display properties

Set whether document properties are to be displayed or not. Depending on how you have setthe Display Properties (SHOW_PROPERTIES) attribute in the Web Application Designer, thesystem displays the properties for the documents or not. You can change the initial settinghere.

� All selections



This function is made available by activating the enhanced menu. Choosing All Selectionsdisplays all characteristics, for which you can restrict the list of documents or a new document,are displayed in context.

� Bookmark

Choose Bookmark if you want to call up a particular navigation status in the Web Applicationwith the Documents List Web item. The system creates a URL that can be bookmarked, whichis displayed in the address line of your Web browser.

To access the bookmark again later, you can save the URL in your favorites or copy andpaste it into other files.

You can find additional information under Setting a Bookmark [Seite 349].

� Enhanced/Basic menu

The All Selections function is made available by activating the enhanced menu.

You can find additional information about the context from Documents List [Seite 226].

Goto: Display documents / Documents for Navigation StatusYou can use the Goto function to display documents for different objects that were created in theAdministrator Workbench, in the master data maintenance, or in the Web application, and then createnew documents.

For more information, see Goto [Seite 346]

Document Links

The system displays the symbol in the respective cell, .when documents exist for the content of acell, and the Display Document Links function is activated in the query properties. This allows you toimmediately see when a document exists for this cell. Click on . The document is displayed in itsown browser window.

The document links can be contained in the Table, Navigation Block and Text Elements Web items.

You can find additional information about Displaying Document Links in the query properties:

In the Query Designer: Query Properties [Seite 56]

In the Ad-hoc Query Designer Query Properties [Seite 372]

Locally in the context menu: Local Query Properties [Seite 353]

Creating New DocumentsUseIn the Web application document display, you can create new documents for transaction data usingOther Functions.

You can enter only text here. This function is primarily suitable for making comments andremarks about the data.

PrerequisitesYou reach the dialog box for creating new documents as follows:

� The Web application contains the Web item List of Documents. You restrict the validity range ofthe new document in the context of the Web item and select Further Functions � Create NewDocument.



� In the context menu of an InfoObject choose Goto � Display documents or Documents forNavigation Status. The list of documents for this navigation status is displayed in a separatebrowser window. Choose Further Functions � Create New Document.

Procedure1. Give the new document a title.

This title is also the text of the hyperlink to the document and should therefore bedescriptive and meaningful.

2. The system automatically creates a unique key for the new document. This key is displayed in theName field. You can change the name, but this name must be unique in all the documents of theclass (transaction data, metadata, master data).

3. You can define whether the document

a. is valid only for the current query

b. is valid only for the current InfoProvider

c. is valid for all InfoProviders in BW that contain the InfoObjects for which you already limitedthe document when you created it (neither checkbox is marked).

4. Enter the text of the document in the Content field. (You can also enter HTML.)

5. Choose Save.

6. Choose Close and Back.

ResultYou have created a new document. The Web application is automatically refreshed and the title of thedocument is displayed as a hyperlink in the list of documents.

Finding DocumentsUseThe List of Documents Web item contains a full text search function that enables you to search forspecific documents [Extern] that you created.

Prerequisites1. You have installed the TREX search engine [Extern] on the Administrator Workbench.

2. You have called up a Web application with the List of Documents Web item or have chosen (fromthe context menu of a cell in a Web application) Goto [Seite 346] � Display Documents.

Procedure1. In the frame with the tab pages Selection and Find, choose the Find tab page.

2. Enter the search text in the input field.

3. You can search in all documents (In All Documents) or in a restricted set of documents (In theFollowing Documents). Select In All Documents or In the Following Documents.

If you select In All Documents, the search is conducted in the following types of document:

� Documents for InfoProvider data

� Documents for master data



� Documents for transaction data

If you select In the Following Documents, the search is conducted in the set of documentsyou selected.

The set of selected documents, which you can see in a list of InfoObjects with thecorresponding dropdown boxes, is created from your query navigation or from theselection criteria that you determined on the Selection tab page.

You can change the set of selected documents here:

� Next to each InfoObject there is a dropdown box that you can use to change the search set.Choose Other Single Value from the dropdown box for an InfoObject. A new Web browserwindow appears.

In the Value Selection for “Text” dialog box, choose the text or key of a single value. Thesystem transfers the selected text or key into the Text field in the original browser window.

4. Once you have determined the search criteria, choose Find.

ResultThe search result is displayed in the lower area of the frame. The percentage displayed inparentheses after a document in the search result shows the degree of accuracy of the search result.To display a document found in the search, click on the document.

For more information, see Query Properties [Extern]

Navigating in MapsUseOnce you have attached a map to your Web application using the BEx Web Application Designer, youcan analyze your business data geographically. There are several navigation options available within amap on the context menu, as well as various interactive options for other items of your Webapplication. These all help to simplify your geographical analysis.

PrerequisitesYou have created a Web application containing a map in the BEx Web Application Designer.

At least one more Web item (for example, a table) has to be attached for you to be able touse the interactive functions. You can control this item using the map.

To use the geographical filter functions, executed by clicking on the map renderer object,the parameters IMAGEMAP_PATTERN and INFLUENCED_DP_X have to be created inthe HTML code for the Web template (see Example of Interaction in Maps [Seite 382]).

FunctionsThe context menu for maps contains all the standard menu entries (see Navigation and NavigationFunctions [Seite 444]). The following two functions differ from those in the standard menu and providespecial functions for use with maps:

Context Menu Entry Values Function

Drilldown All geo-relevant characteristicsof the current query that arenot already set as filters ordrilldowns.

Drills down on thecharacteristic that you clickedon in the map by anothercharacteristic.



Filter and drilldown accordingto ...

All geo-relevant characteristicsof the current query that arenot already set as filters ordrilldowns.

Sets a filter and drills down atthe same time on thecharacteristic that you clickedon in the map by anothercharacteristic.

ActivitiesYou can call up all navigation functions from the context menu. You open this menu by clicking in themap with the left mouse button.

You execute the control functions for other elements of your Web application by simply left-clicking themouse on the map renderer object.

ExampleSee Example of Interaction in Maps [Seite 382]

Example of Interaction in MapsUseThis example shows you how to use a map with the card layer attribute Command for Interaction inorder to analyze business data using geographic facts.

ScenarioYou want to analyze your business data in table form quickly and without complications based on ageographic representation.

PrerequisitesThe template of your Web application contains a map and a table containing your business data.

The following lines must be adjusted correctly to your individual system environment in the HTML codeof the Web template.

Example:

<param name=’IMAGEMAP_PATTERN’ value=’FILTER_VAL’>

<param name=’INFLUENCED_DP_1’ value=’Revenue Cockpit’>

Procedure1. Open your Web application in a browser.

2. Navigate in the map using the geographic function bar and select a representation that gives youan overview of the geographic facts about your query.

3. If during your analysis you find a city, region or country whose data you want to study more closelyin tabular form, for example because you suspect that it has unused market potential, click on therelevant object of the map renderer (bar chart, symbol, pie chart, color shading) in the map.

ResultBased on the geographic information, only the relevant values for the city, region or country aredisplayed in the table of data. In this way you can easily filter data based on geographic information.



Using What If Prediction in Web ApplicationsUseYou can use the web item for What If Prediction to predict customer behavior based on a given set ofinput criteria. This functionality is most useful in situations where you are required to perform onlinepredictions. For example, when a customer applies for a loan, you can predict if the customer iscreditworthy or not, based on certain attributes such as income, profession or transaction history.

You can use the What If Prediction Analysis for the data mining methods Clustering and Decision TreeAnalysis.

Prerequisites� You must create a Web application containing What If Prediction web item in the BEx Web

Application Designer.

� The model based on which the web application is created must be fully created and activated(see Creating, Changing, and Activating a Source [Extern]).

� The status of the model must be Trained.

ProcedureYou can set the attributes for a web item in the web application designer. Your web application variesaccording to the attributes you set. For more details on each attribute, see What If Prediction web item[Seite 233].

The following is a general procedure to use the What If Prediction web application.

1. Select the required service and the model based on which you want to do prediction.

2. Enter the relevant Values for the Model fields.

SAP recommends that you select the model field values for prediction from the givenset of values. If you enter a value that is not present in the training data, this value will

not be considered for prediction. To choose from the given set of values, use the button.

3. Choose Predict to execute prediction and view the results.

4. You can use the Clear option to clear your model values and enter new values to start a newprediction.

5. You can choose the Customizing Options to view the prediction results in different graphicalforms like pie charts, bar graphs and so on. You can also select the Color Scheme and theLegend Position of your choice.

ResultIn decision tree, the result contains information about the predicted classes with their probability andsupport. You can also view the results in graphic form.

In clustering, the result contains information about the first and the second best cluster under whichthe predicted case falls. You can also view the results in the form of a pie chart.



Using ABC Classification in Web ApplicationsUseThe ABC Classification is a frequently used analytical method to classify objects (customers, productsor employees) based on a particular measure like revenue or profit. For example, you can classifyyour customers into three classes A, B and C according to the revenue they generate.

Prerequisites� You must create a Web application containing ABC Classification web item in the BEx Web

Application Designer.

� The model and source based on which the web application is created must be fully createdand activated (see Creating, Changing, and Activating a Source [Extern]).

� The status of the model must be Trained.

ProcedureYou can set the attributes for a web item in the web application designer. Your web application variesaccording to the attributes you set. For more details on each attribute, see ABC Classification [Seite234].

Depending on the attributes you have specified for the application, you can:

6. Select the ABC Classification from the given models.

7. View the following in the ABC Classification results:

� Statistics for the ABC Classification

� Model Name and details

� ABC Classification Chart

For detailed information on ABC Classification, refer to ABC Classification [Extern].

Using Variables in Web ApplicationsUseUsing variables [Seite 39] allows you to wait until the Web application is actually displayed in the Webbrowser before you fill individual parts of the query or the entire query with values. Variables act asplaceholders for characteristic values, hierarchies, hierarchy nodes, texts, and formula elements, andcan be processed in many different ways. There are variables with automatic substitution, substitutionfrom authorizations, or variables that are ready for input.

PrerequisitesThe query, on which the Web application is based, must contain variables.

Settings in the Web Application DesignerYou can make settings for variables and the variable screen in the BEx Web Application Designer.Select the template concerned from the dropdown box in the header of the Properties window. On theWeb Items tabstrip, under General you have the following options:

� Always Display Variable Screen

If Always Display Variable Screen is not selected, the variable screen is only displayed whenthe mandatory variables are not filled. By selecting the Always Display Variable Screen, thevariable screen is displayed at all times.



� Reset Variable Values to Default Values

� Display Same Variables Only Once

This ensures that the same variables for different queries are displayed only once.

See Determining Properties of a Web Template [Seite 107].

Functions of the Variable Screen in the Web ApplicationSee Variable Screen [Seite 385].

See also:Calling up the Variable Screen [Seite 254]

Default Variables for Web Applications [Seite 254]

Variable ScreensUseYou can fill variables - parameters of a query - with values when the Web application is displayed inthe Web browser using the variable screen. You can assign the following types values in the variablescreen:

� Variable types for characteristic values

A characteristic value variable is the placeholder for either a single value, an interval, or a setof selection options.

� Variables for hierarchy nodes

You can only enter hierarchy nodes as single values.

See Using Variables [Seite 39].

You can personalize the values for individual components or for the entire Web application. Thismeans that you assign a certain value to a variable. The variable has this value until you cancel thepersonalization. See Personalizing Variables [Seite 386].

PrerequisitesAt least one of the queries on which the Web application is based must contain variables.

ProcedureEntering Values for VariablesIn the Variables window, you can give values to the variables. If your Web application contains morethan one query, the variables screen is divided into several areas with one area for each query. Withinthese areas the input options for the variables depend on the variable type.

Entering Characteristic Value Variables:

� To enter a single value, enter the value in the input field following the characteristic ID. To entermore than one single value, choose New Row. Another row for entering a single value isdisplayed.

� To enter an interval, enter the lower limit of the interval in the first input field after the characteristicID and the upper limit of the interval in the second input field.

� When entering a selection option you have various options for assigning a variable values:

� Define a single value

a. From the dropdown box select the operator =, and enter the value in the first input field. Thiscorresponds to entering a single value (see below).



b. Do not change the Include setting.

c. To enter more than one single value, choose New Row. A new input row appears.

� Define a value range

a. In the dropdown box choose the operator [] to define an interval and enter the lower limit of theinterval in the first input field and the upper limit of the interval in the second input field.

b. Alternatively you can select one of the operators <, <=, >, >= from the dropdown box andenter the upper or lower limit of the value range in the first input field.

c. Do not change the Include setting.

d. To enter more than one value range choose New Row. A new input row appears.

� Exclude single values and value ranges

a. Describe the single value or value range (see above)

b. Change the include setting to exclude in the dropdown box.

c. To exclude more than one single value or value range choose New Row. A new input rowappears.

Mandatory variables are marked with (*).

Choose to select the values using the value help.

Entering Variables for Hierarchy Nodes:

� To assign values to the variables for hierarchy nodes you must make your entry using the valuehelp ( ). Select a hierarchy node in the Value Help dialog.

For hierarchy nodes entries must be forced using the value help because values that areentered manually might not be unique.

To check values that were entered manually for consistency, choose Check.

To display the Web application with the entered variable values, choose Execute.

By clicking on the pushbuttons All Variables and Free Variables, you change the view from displayingall variables to displayed only the non-personalized variables. See Personalizing Variables [Seite 386].

Personalizing VariablesUseYou can personalize single variables or all variables in a Web application. This means that you assignthe variables to a value permanently or until you remove the personalization. Personalization meansthat you do not always have to make the settings for a variable, that is your personal settings,manually over and over again.

ProcedurePersonalizing a VariableThe icon tells you that your variable has not been personalized.

1. Assign a value to the variable. See Variables Screen [Seite 385].

2. To personalize a variable, click on the icon and choose Personalize.



3. The system removes the personalized variable from the variables screen.

� To display the personalized variables and their values, choose All Variables. The personalizedvariables are displayed. The icon shows that the variable has been personalized.

� To hide the personalized variables again, choose Free Variables. Only those variables that are notpersonalized are now displayed.

The option of hiding personalized variables relates to the basic idea of personalization:Personalized variables have a permanently defined value. Your attention is directed at thefree variables that have not been personalized.

Deleting PersonalizationsThe icon tells you that your variable has been personalized.

1. To remove the personalization, click on the icon and choose Delete Personalization.

2. The icon shows that the variable is no longer personalized.

If you want to set another value as the personalized value in the variables screen,overwrite the relevant value in the input field. You do not have to delete thepersonalization in this case.

Personalizing TemplatesYou can also personalize templates. This means that all of your variable assignments for the templateare saved as you personal setting. This assignment is used until you remove the personalization.

Personalizing the Template

1. The template has not yet been personalized. The icon in the heading of the variables screenshows you this. In this screen, you personalize the entire template.

2. After you have given values to your variable, click on the icon and from the context menu,choose Personalize.

3. The icon shows that your template has been personalized.

Deleting the Personalization of the Template

1. The template has been personalized the template. The icon in the heading of the variablesscreen shows you this.

2. Click on the icon and from the context menu, choose Delete Personalization.

3. The icon shows that the personalization of your template has been removed.

Navigation Functions in the Standard Web TemplateUseWhen you display a query on the Web, this query is embedded automatically into a standard Webtemplate. The query is displayed on the Web in a table with a filter. The name of the query appears asthe title. The most common functions appear in a toolbar that is embedded automatically. Thenavigation options are also available in the filter and in the context menu.

IntegrationYou can call up queries on the Web using the following tools:



Query Designer: By clicking on the symbol Display Query on the Web (see also: Functions of theBEx Query Designer [Seite 18].

BEx Analyzer: By choosing Tools � Launch in Web Browser: Query (Default View) (see also: Tools[Seite 440].

Ad-hoc Query Designer: If you do not specify the optional attributes DISPLAY_DATA_PROVIDER,TARGET_FRAME and TARGET_TEMPLATE_ID, the query results are displayed in a new browserwindow in the standard Web template. (See also: Ad-hoc Query Designer [Seite 229].)

You specify the standard Web template in the SAP Reference IMG � BusinessInformation Warehouse � Settings Relevant for Reporting � Web-Based Settings �Determine Standard Web Template. The 0Query_Template is the default standard Webtemplate. This standard Web template contains the toolbar described below. You can alterthis template and then specify the changed template as the standard Web template.

FeaturesIn addition to navigating in the context menu [Seite 339] and in the filter, Web applications that use thestandard Web template also have a toolbar containing various functions.

TableOnce you have displayed your data using one of the functions described below, you canreturn to the tabular data dispaly using this function.

Bar ChartThis function displays the query data in a bar chart. If you want to return to the table display,choose Table.

Pie ChartThis function displays the query data in a pie chart. If you want to return to the table display,choose Table.

Line ChartThis function displays the query data in a line chart. If you want to return to the table display,choose Table.

3D Bar ChartThis function displays the query data in a 3D bar chart. If you want to return to the tabledisplay, choose Table.

Swap AxesYou use this function to swap the query axes. For example, if you have characteristics in therows and key figures in the columns and you choose Swap Axes, then the key figures aredisplayed in the rows and the characteristics are displayed in the columns. If you want to undothis step, click on Swap Axes again.

InfoInformation about the query key date, how up-to-date the query data is, who last changed thequery, when the query was last changed and the last time the query was refreshed isdisplayed here. You can also see information about the values in the filter and the variablevalues with which the query is filled.

If you want to return to the table display, choose Table.

Exceptions



You can create new exceptions and change or delete existing exceptions. The existingexceptions are displayed along with their status (active, inactive). In the context menu of anexception, you can deactivate, change, or delete the exception. If you want to display theexception in the table, choose Table.

For more information, see Defining and Changing Exceptions [Seite 360].

ConditionsYou can create new conditions and change or delete existing conditions. The existingconditions are displayed along with their status (active, inactive, not applicable, not used). Inthe context menu of a condition, you can deactivate, change, or delete the condition. If youwant to display the condition in the table, choose Table.

For more information, see Defining and Changing Conditions [Seite 358].

Display Variable EntriesIf the query contains variables, you can display the screen for variables with this function andselect additional variable values as required. For more information, see The Variables Screen[Seite 385].

Query DesignerYou can call up the Ad-hoc Query Designer and define new queries or change an existingquery on the Web. For more information, see Functions of the Ad-hoc Query Designer [Seite364].

BookmarkYou can set a bookmark that enables you to call up a certain navigational state for the queryat a later date. The system creates a URL for the bookmark that is displayed in the addressline of your Web browser.

To access the bookmark again later, you can save the URL in your favorites or copy andpaste it into other files.

For more information, see Setting a Bookmark [Seite 349].

Export to MS Excel 2000You can export query data to MS Excel 2000.

The query data is displayed in the same way as queries in the BEx Analyzer. You see the filterrestrictions and the data in the table. Exceptions are highlighted in color in the same way ason the Web.

The formatting is transferred. Further navigation with BEx functions is not possible. However,you can continue to edit the query using MS Excel functions.

Export to CSVYou can export the query data into a CSV (comma separated value) file.

In contrast to exporting to MS Excel 2000, you do not see the context of the numbers and youcannot see the filter data. The query formatting (such as the exceptions being displayed) isnot transferred to the CSV file.

Accessibility in Web ApplicationsUseAccessibility means unrestricted access and working methods for physically impaired users of SAPsystems. Accessibility is concerned with general system availability for special user groups such asblind, visually impaired, or mobility impaired users.



It also gives the physically impaired user the opportunity to personalize various system settings, suchas the screen display, according to their own requirements.

We are endeavoring to develop accessible Web applications for SAP BW 3.0B. At thetime of publication, no statements have been made as to the extent to which BEx Webapplications will be accessible to all users. We will publish this information in futurerelease notes.

This document indicates the settings that are necessary for accessibility in Webapplications.

PrerequisitesThe generated HTML of BEx Web applications is adapted for output through electronic tools (assistivetechnology). Accessibility is possible only through the use of screen readers.

ProcedureGeneral Accessibility SettingsYou adapt BEx Web applications for accessibility by giving the URL call the parameterACCESSIBILITY=X.

Additional Settings and Recommendations for Supporting Visually Impaired UsersWhen you create Web applications for visually impaired users, consider that data displayed in the formof charts and maps is very problematic. Therefore, display data for visually impaired users in tabularform or at least give the option of changing from a graphical to a tabular display.

When using the ticker [Seite 203] Web item, ensure that the ticker is set to an appropriate speed.

We deliver a high-contrast stylesheet for visually impaired users that you can select in the WebApplication Designer in your template settings [Seite 107].

You can change the font size in your browser settings, since the typeface in BW stylesheets isformatted relatively. When you adjust your stylesheet, ensure that you retain this formatting.

BEx Mobile IntelligencePurposeWith the help of BEx Mobile Intelligence, you can access your Web applications on the move. Youneed one of the following devices:

� PDA (Personal Digital Assistant) with Microsoft Windows CE 3.0 Operating System and PocketInternet Explorer

� WAP-enabled mobile telephone

� i-Mode-enabled mobile telephone

� Mobile device with an EPOC32 operating system (for example, Nokia Communicator 9210)


The Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) is used as the basis for data transfer with WAP-enableddevices and the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) with PDAs. The Wireless Markup Language(WML) for WAP-enabled devices, the Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) without stylesheets andwith restricted Java Script for PDAs, and the Compact Hypertext Markup Language (cHTML) for i-Mode-enabled devices, form the descriptive language basis.



You can either access your Web application online (for which you need a connection to the BW 3.0Web Application Server) or offline (no connection). In the latter case, static, pre-calculated HTMLpages are used. The pages are pre-calculated using the Reporting Agent.

The same URL is used to call up BEx Mobile applications as with BEx Web applications. The BWserver automatically recognizes which device made the request (PDA, WAP, i-Mode or normaldesktop browser), and generates a device-specific HTML or WML page. For this reason, BEx Mobileapplications are normal BEx Web applications and are created in the same way as BEx Webapplications in the BEx Web Application Designer. For WAP and i-Mode devices, Web items areautomatically displayed over several pages.

An additional mobile intelligence function is using the Reporting Agent to send an SMS message to amobile device when a defined exception arises in the Mobile application. By doing this, you highlightthe business situations that require close attention.

The following graphic describes the interactions in mobile intelligence:

WebFramework

Automatische Device Recognition

Renderer for i-Mode

Table

Renderer

Chart

Renderer

...Renderer for WAP

Table

Renderer

Chart

Renderer

...Renderer for PDAs

Table

Renderer

Chart

Renderer

...Renderer for Internet Browser

Table

Renderer

Chart

Renderer

...

OLAPProcessor

ReportingAgent

WebTemplates

BW Server

Web Application Designer

A Design-Tool for All

Devices

A URL

for All Devices

AlertsReported via

Email, SMS



Process FlowMobile Intelligence with WAP

WAP-GatewayWAP-Gateway

Web ApplicationServer

Web ApplicationServer

HTTP Request

WSP/WTP Request

WMLBytecode

HTTP Request

HTML

BW Server

1. You connect to your mobile terminal with a WAP service provider using your mobile device (forexample, a WAP compatible mobile telephone). This allows you to use a WAP Gateway or WAPserver, enabling you to transfer contents from the Internet to the mobile device.

2. In addition, the WAP-gateway passes on the requested URL to the BW Web Application Server.

3. In the URL HTTP request, the BW server notes that WML is requested instead of HTML.

4. In the BW server, the data is converted into WML.

5. The result is returned to the WAP-gateway, which now converts the WML text data into acompressed byte code, sending it to the mobile device.

Compressing the data reduces transfer time.

Mobile Intelligence with HTTPMobile Intelligence with HTTP has the same process as with the Web applications. See Creating WebApplications with the BEx Web Application Designer [Seite 98].

You can find additional information in the following sections:Creating Mobile Applications [Seite 393]

Alert Scenarios [Seite 408]

Offline-Scenarios [Seite 408]



Creating a Mobile ApplicationUseYou want to create a Web application that you can call up later in a mobile device (for example, aWAP-enabled mobile telephone or PDA). This kind of Web application is called a mobile application.

ProcedureBasically, a mobile application is created in the same way in the BEx Web Application Designer as aWeb application (see Creating Web Applications with the BEx Web Application Designer [Seite 98] ).

However, there are restrictions on the various Web items that are supported by mobile devices. SeeSupported Web Items [Seite 393] to find out which Web items are supported by which devices.

You should also take into account when you create the Web application that the display options ofsome devices are severely limited by the size of the display and also by their ability to display colors.Some of these display options are already covered under Automatic Display Optimization for mobileapplications (see Automatic Device Recognition [Seite 395]: Section: Optional Settings). Normally, youonly need to adjust the range of data for mobile use.

ResultA mobile application created in the Web Application Designer is called up using the correspondingURL, just like a Web application.

The BW Server automatically recognizes what kind of mobile device is being used to call up themobile application (WAP device or PDA). Rendering is carried out according to the properties of thedevice used (WML for WAP-enabled devices, HTML without stylesheets and with restricted JavaScriptfor PDAs, cHTML for i-Mode-enabled devices).

Supported Web ItemsDefinitionWhen creating a mobile application, create a Web template in the BEx Web Application Designer[Seite 95]. You can attach different Web Items to a Web template.

Not all of the Web items available in the Web Application Designer are supported becauseof the various display options for the mobile end devices currently on the market. Thedisplay and operation of some of the Web items are also specially adapted to the enddevice.

Web Items in PDAsAll Web items are supported in PDAs (with the exception of the Ad-hoc Query Designer Web item).

The Web items are displayed exactly as in the Web browser although PDAs do not supportstylesheets. The stylesheet information is analyzed by the server and transferred to the browser of theend device as pure HTML.

When you navigate in the PDA application, the context menu is displayed on a separate page. TheDownload by Excel function is not available in the PDA application.

Web Items in WAP-Enabled End DevicesThe following Web items are supported in WAP-enabled end devices:



Web Item Presentation/Navigation/Function

Tables Presentation:

� The table is displayed in rows

� Information about the header line isbuffered and displayed in each new row.

Navigation:

� If the table is too large for the device’smemory, it is automatically displayed overa number of pages. You can scroll betweenthese pages.

� Hierarchy nodes can be expanded andcollapsed.

� Exceptions are displayed with text symbols(+++, +/-, ---).

� A new row is marked by a separator (---------)

Generic Navigation Block Function:

� Drilldown in columns/rows or removedrilldown

� Select or remove filter values for acharacteristic

Charts Display:

� The size of a chart is adjustedautomatically to the display of the device.

� When the Display Optimization Webtemplate property is activated (defaultsetting), columns, bars, lines and circlesautomatically have appropriate settings forthe chart types.(Remove legend, setbackground to white, only use black andwhite shades as the fill color, for example)

� When the Display Optimization Webtemplate property is deactivated, inprinciple all chart types can be used.However, you need to select appropriatechart settings in the Web ApplicationDesigner.

Alert Monitor Function:

� Displays a list of Web Applications, inwhich an exception was detected in theReporting Agent.

Navigation:

� Links to Web applications, displaying thecorresponding queries in the default Webtemplate.

List of Exceptions Function:

� Exceptions can be activated anddeactivated.



List of Conditions Function:

� Conditions can be activated anddeactivated.

Dropdown Box / Radio Button Group Display:

� Link list to select a filter value for acharacteristic.

Text Elements Display as in the Table Web item.

Role Menu Display:

� Web applications, queries and externallinks of the selected role are displayed inthe role menu.

Navigation:

� You can branch to the subfolder.

� Menu entries are used as jumps to theexisting Web applications.

� You can return to the role menu.

� The Web application with role menu of a"mobile role" can be used with a bookmarkin the WAP device as the start page for themobile application .

In WAP devices, only a restricted context menu is available for the options. Variables entry and F4input help is not supported.

Web items in i-Mode- enabled devicesIn i-Mode-enabled devices, navigation and the display of Web items is very similar to that for Webitems in WAP-enabled devices.

Instead of text symbols, i-Mode applications always use graphic symbols (for example, graphicsymbols in the overview page give information about which Web item type can be called up using thecorresponding link).

The applied Cascading stylesheet determines colors for the background, for texts and exceptions intables.

You can also use the Map Web item with i-Mode devices that support colors. A geo-navigation toolbaris also available depending on the settings in the Web Application Designer.

Automatic Device RecognitionUseA service that assigns the various mobile devices to a so-called device class within mobile intelligence.Device classes form the basis of device-specific output in BEx Web applications.

FeaturesAutomatic Device RecognitionAutomatic device recognition supports the following device classes:

� PDA (Personal Digital Assistant) with Microsoft Windows CE 3.0 Operating System and PocketInternet Explorer

� WAP-enabled mobile telephones



With WAP devices, a distinction is made between Nokia Active and Openwave mobilebrowsers (formerly phone.com), such as Siemens.

� i-Mode-enabled mobile telephones

� Mobile devices with an EPOC32 Operating System (for example, Nokia Communicator 9210)


You can find a constantly updated list of all supported devices in SAP note 453142.

The device classes have the following technical names:

� PIE (for PocketIE) for PDAs

� WML for WAP devices

� IMO for i-Mode-devices

� EPO for EPOC32-based devices

Not only is it important that mobile devices are automatically recognized, but their display must also beadjusted to meet device-specific requirements.

Automatic optimization for PDA applicationsPDA devices have the default Web browser Pocket Internet Explorer. Compared with desktop Webbrowsers, this browser has restricted JavaScript and Cascading stylesheet functions. For this reason,automatic optimization for PDA applications covers the following areas:

� Server-side JavaScript adaptation

� Server-side stylesheet conversion into pure HTML

� Device-specific context menu on a separate page

You can find more information under PDA Application [Seite 398]

Automatic optimization for EPOC32 applicationsThe display is similar to that for PDA applications. However, EPOC32-based browsers do not supportJavaScript. JavaScript is not used at all. Therefore, there is no context menu.

Automatic optimization for WAP applicationsWeb Item Paging

Since WAP devices have limited display and memory capabilities, Web items for a WAP applicationare automatically divided over several pages if the application contains two or more Web items. TheWeb items are linked to each other using an automatically generated overview page. In this overviewpage, the WAP application Web items are displayed in a list.

Paging with Tables

Tables are displayed over several pages according to the memory size of the device. To give you abetter overview, a title is automatically generated that specifies the current page number and the totalnumber of pages.

Table (1/3) means that the table content is too large to be displayed on a single page, andthat this page is the first of three.

Wireless Bitmap-Charts

Charts need to be converted to the black and white Wireless Bitmap [Extern] (WBMP) format, in orderto be able to display them in WAP devices.

Standard Web Template



A special Web template exists for Ad-hoc analyses in WAP devices. The default Web templatecontains Web items Table, Generic Navigation Block, Text Elements, Exceptions List, Conditions Listand Chart.

You can find more information under WAP Application [Seite 399]

Automatic optimization for i-Mode applicationsi-Mode applications are displayed in cHTML.

� As for WAP applications, the Web Item Paging and Paging for Tables services are available.

� The size and color of charts is dependent on the i-Mode device.

� You can separately adjust the background color, as well as the colors of hyperlinks, texts andexceptions, by using a different Cascading stylesheet. The stylesheet is automatically converted tocHTML server-side.

� Stateful URLs are generated instead of session cookies.

� A default Web template exists for Ad-hoc analyses in i-Mode devices. The default Web templatecontains Web items Table, Generic Navigation Block, Text Elements, Exceptions List, ConditionsList and Chart.

� You can use the Map Web item (with geo-navigation toolbar) with i-Mode devices that supportcolors.

Optional Settings:Automatic display optimizationIn the Web Application Designer, the Automatic Display Optimization (Device-Specific) attribute can befound in the Web template.

Activating this attribute automatically adjusts the size of the Web item to the size of the display forPDA devices. In addition, the width of dialogs are automatically adjusted, as is the size of maps andcharts and the positioning of map legends and navigation toolbars.

For WAP and i-Mode devices, the chart size, color and legend are automatically adjusted.

The Automatic Display Optimization (Device-Specific) attribute is activated by default. This means thatWeb item settings are automatically adjusted, which makes sense in most situations. Automaticsettings may have a negative effect on device-specific Web templates, in which case you candeactivate the attribute.

Device-specific Web templatesYou can create device-specific Web templates using the following naming conventions:

� <Template_ID>_PIE for PDA Applications

� <Template_ID>_PIE for EPOC32 Applications

� <Template_ID>_WML for WAP Applications

� <Template_ID>_IMO for i-Mode Applications

In cases where a particular device requests a Web template, for which there is a device-specific Webtemplate, this device-specific Web template is automatically used.

You have defined the Web template ABC. The device-specific Web templates must becalled ABC_PIE (for PDA), ABC_WML (for WAP), ABC_IMO (for i-Mode devices), and soon. When a Web device requests the Web template ABC, the Web template ABC_WML isautomatically used (via the naming convention).



You can also create a device-specific Web template for Ad-hoc Web applications (URLwith the URL parameters InfoCube and query). See Set Default Web Template in theImplementation Guide (IMG).

Device-specific Web templates for PDA, EPOC32, WAP and i-Mode exist for the default Web templateused to display queries in Ad-hoc analysis.

PDA ApplicationThe following example shows a PDA application with the Web items Generic Navigation Block andTable.

When you navigate in PDA applications, the context menu is displayed on a separate page. Thefollowing picture shows the context menu for the Order characteristic.



PDA application with a PDA deviceYou need a PDA with a LAN or wireless LAN card.

Start the Pocket Internet Explorer in your PDA and enter the Web application URL generated in theWeb Application Designer in the address field.

Alternatively, you can synchronize the URL using the Docking Station and Microsoft ActiveSync.

Add the URL to your mobile favorites in Internet Explorer. The URL will be synchronized for your PDAwhen you next connect your PDA to your desktop PC.

Using a PDA EmulatorYou can use an emulator, such as the Microsoft PocketPC emulator, to quickly become familiar withmobile intelligence in PDA devices.

SAP Note 453142 has additional information about settings for PDA devices (proxy, for example) andabout how to download emulators from the Internet.

WAP ApplicationThe following example shows a WAP application with the Web items Generic Navigation Block, Tableand Chart.

Web Item PagingSince WAP devices have limited display and memory capabilities, Web items for a WAP applicationare automatically displayed over several pages, which are linked together via an automaticallygenerated overview page.

In this overview page, the WAP application Web items are displayed as a list of links to separate WMLpages.



1. Choose and to move the cursor to the required Web Item.

2. Choose Link to see the selected Web item.

For example, choose the Table Web item:

Display for the Table Web item

Table (1/3) means that the table content is too large to be displayed on a single page, and that thispage is the first of three.



Navigation in the Table Web item

Use to scroll to the bottom of the page and choose the link � >Continue...� to get to the next page...

... Or choose Menu...

... And use the table navigation links that are automatically added to the menu.



OLAP navigation with the Generic Navigation Block Web itemIn the overview page, choose the Generic Navigation Block Web item:

Choose [Navigation] and click on Link.

Display for the Generic Navigation Block Web item

The letters next to the InfoObjects mean the following:

R = Rows

C = Columns

Indicate whether the InfoObject is displayed as a drilldown in rows or in columns. In this example,Order is drilled down in the rows [Order R]. The key figures are drilled down in columns [Key figuresC].

NavigationChoose [Fiscal Year]] and click on Link.



Adding to the drilldownChoose Drilldown: [in Rows] (Drilldown in rows), and click on Link.

�Fiscal Year R] means that the fiscal year is drilled down in rows.

Choose [Order R] and click on Link.

Choosing a filter



Choose Filter: [Choose] and click on Link.

Choose the order number you want to add to the filter:

1. Choose Pick to select the required order numbers.

2. Choose OK.



Select Choose to activate the filter.

The F (=Filter) in [Order RF] means filter values have been selected for the Order characteristic that isdrilled down in rows.

Choose Menu.



Choose Table and click OK.

Here, you can see the result of the navigation steps (Add Drilldown and Filter) in the table.

Displaying the Chart Web item

In WAP devices, charts are displayed in the black and white (Wireless Bitmap [Extern](WBMP)) format.



In the overview screen, choose the Chart Web item and click on Link.

Here, you can see the result of the navigation steps (Add Drilldown and Filter) in the chart.

WAP applications with a WAP-enabled deviceHere, you need a WAP-gateway and access via a telecom provider. The WAP-gateway must be infront of the firewall and it must have access to the BW system. Security settings (restrictions to aparticular mobile phone) are dependent on the WAP server.

Using WAP emulatorsYou can use an emulator, such as the emulators for Openwave or Nokia, to quickly become familiarwith mobile intelligence in PDA devices.

SAP Note 453142 provides additional information about how to download emulators from the Internet.



Alert ScenarioDefinitionThe Alert Scenario is a function that sends an automatic SMS or email message to a mobile enddevice when an exception occurs.

UseIf you included an exception in your mobile application, you can use the Reporting Agent to send anSMS or email to your mobile end device when the exception occurs. The Alert Monitor Web itemdisplays a list of exceptions. It can be restricted to the current user and to a particular number of alerts.

After receiving the SMS or email message, you can use your mobile device to access the Webapplications involved via the Alert Monitor. This allows you to analyze them in more detail.

See also:Alert Monitor Web Item [Seite 199]

Offline ScenarioDefinitionOffline scenario is a function that helps you to create a mobile application at a predefined time so thatit can be downloaded offline later from a mobile end device (laptop or PDA).

UseYou can determine when your mobile application should be generated so that you can access it offlinelater.

Predefining HTML Pages [Extern].is executed by the Reporting Agent [Extern] The pages aredownloaded via WebDav and Web Folder. Afterwards, the pages can be transferred to the PDA viaMicrosoft ActiveSync.

Downloading pre-calculated HTML pagesAdding a new Web folder in your file explorer:

Web folders can be installed with Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher.

1. Open your file explorer.

2. Choose My Computer � Web Folders.

3. From the context menu (right-click), choose New � Web Folder.

4. Enter the BW WebDAV server URL.

<protocol>://<bw_application_server>:<port>/SAP/BW/doc/tmpl/fldtmpl/<technical packagename>

for example, http://pwdf0647.wdf.sap-ag.de:1080/SAP/BW/doc/tmpl/fldtmpl/MBI_OFFLINE

You can omit fldtmpl and the technical package name <technical package name> from theURL if you want to access several packages.



5. Log on with your BW user name and password.

Collaboration & Distribution: Enterprise PortalIntegration

Drag&RelateUseFunction that enhances basic browser-based navigation.

With Drag&Relate you can use transactions in different systems by linking data from one applicationwith data in another application. You select a business object (for example, order) by clicking on it andthen dragging it into another object (for example, a link to an external Web site) on the iPanel. Thesystem then executes the action (for example, display the delivery status of the order).

For more information about Drag&Relate in the Enterprise Portal see:

The Unification Environment [Extern]

PrerequisitesTo be able to use the Drag&Relate solution for BW 3.0A SP05, you need the following systems:

� Enterprise Portal 5.0

� Business Information Warehouse 3.0A SP05

� R/3 system with a R/3 unifier and ITS

In addition, you have to enter R/3 as a DataSource in the Enterprise Portal (you do not necessarilyhave to enter BW as a DataSource).

You also have to load the master data from an R/3 with unifier into BW. This fills the attribute0LOGSYS automatically with the value that you have to enter in BW in the tableRSRR_HRNP_SERVER.

You have to enter the hostname and port of the R/3 unifier in BW in the table RSRR_HRNP_SERVER:

a. Go to transaction SM30 � Table RSRR_HRNP_SERVER

b. Enter the logical system (logsys) and the R/3 unifier in the table.

In the BEx Query Designer under Query Properties (reached by clicking in the Query Designer toolbaron the symbol), you have to activate the display option Display Drag&Relate Links.

FeaturesYou have saved a BEx Web Application as an iView in role and integrated the iView into your role inthe Enterprise Portal. You have accessed the Enterprise Portal and have opened an iView from BW.There are characteristics in your iView with the Drag&Relate symbol .

The Drag&Relate solution for BW3.0A SP05 enables Drag&Relate from a BEx Web Application toan R/3 transaction:

Click on on a characteristic (for example, order) in the iView and drag it by holding the left mousebutton down from the iView to an R/3 transaction in the iPanel. The R/3 system transaction is



displayed and shows you the corresponding information in this transaction for the characteristic (forexample, the delivery status of the order is displayed).

The Drag&Relate function is restricted to this navigation option for BW 3.0A SP05.Moreover, it is restricted to the following characteristics with the property BOR_TYPE andthe attribute 0LOGSYS: Drag&Relate-Enabled Characteristics [Seite 410].

Drag&Relate-Enabled CharacteristicsDefinitionThe characteristics delivered with Business Content which can be used in conjunction with theDrag&Relate function for BW 3.0A SP05

StructureThe following characteristics are Drag&Relate-enabled for BW 3.0A SP05:

Technical Name Business Object Repository[Extern] (BOR)-Objekttyp

Description

0ABC BUS1036 Business process number

0ABCPROCESS BUS1036 Business process number

0ACCOUNT BUS3014 Account number

0ACDOC_CC_P BUS0002 Company code of the paymentdocument

0ACTTYPE BUS1031 Activity type

0ALP_POSTN PDOTYPE_S Alternative position

0APPLICANT APPLICANT Applicant

0APPR_REQU BUS2204 Appropriation request

0ASSEMBLY BUS1001 Assembly

0ASSET BUS1022 Asset subnumber

0AU_ENDCU KNA1 Consumer

0AU_VHORD KNA1 Ordered by

0BALSHA_APC BUS3014 Balance sheet account:Acquisition and productioncosts

0BBP_BIDDER BUS1006 Bidder

0BBP_PURGRP PDOTYPE_O Purchasing group

0BBP_PURORG PDOTYPE_O Purchasing organization

0BBP_RECIPT BUS1006 Goods recipient from businesspartner table

0BBP_REQSTR BUS1006 Requester from businesspartner table

0BBP_VENDOR BUS1006 Vendor from business partnertable



0BE_BILLORG BUS1006 Billing organization

0BILLTOPRTY KNA1 Bill-to party

0BPARTNER BUS1006 Business partner

0BP_ACTIVIT BUS1006 Activity partner

0BP_CCARD BUS1186 BP: Payment card

0BP_CONTPER BUS1006 Contact person

0BP_EMPLO BUS1006 Employee

0BP_RESPPER BUS1006 Employee responsible

0BPARTNER BUS1006 Business partner

0BPARTNER1 BUS1006 BP in a BP relationship(‘partner 1’)

0BPARTNER2 BUS1006 BP in a BP relationship(‘partner 2’)

0BUS_AREA BUS0003 Business area

0C_CTR_AREA BUS0022 Credit control area

0CCT BUS0012 Cost center

0CH_ACC_COM BUS1029 Group chart of accounts

0CHRT_ACCTS BUS1029 Chart of accounts

0CNSTR_MAT BUS1001 Construction material of thetechnical object

0CNTCTEMPL BUS1065 Contact employee

0CO_AREA BUS0004 Controlling area

0CO_MST_AR BUS0004 Controlling area of the mastercost center

0COMP_CODE BUS0002 Company code

0COMPETITOR KNA1 Competitor

0COMPONENT BUS1001 Bill of material components

0COORDER BUS2075 Order number

0COPACRMCLM BUS1030 Allocation cost element CRM

0COSTCENTER BUS0012 Cost center

0COSTELMNT BUS1030 Cost element

0CP_EMPLOY BUS1065 Cost object employee

0CP_ORGUNIT PDOTYPE_O Cost object organizational unit

0CP_POSITIO PDOTYPE_S Cost object position

0CP_REFPOS PDOTYPE_S Reference position

0CRET_ACTT BUS1031 Credited activity type

0CRET_CCTR BUS0012 Credit cost center

0CRET_ORDER BUS2075 Credited order

0CRM_AGNT BUS1006 Employee in CustomerInteraction Center



0CRM_AGNT2 BUS1006 2nd employee in CustomerInteraction Center

0CRM_BILLTO BUS1006 Bill-to party

0CRM_CAGNTB BUS1006 CIC Agent (BP)

0CRM_COMPET BUS1006 Competitor

0CRM_EXC_CC BUS1006 Executing interaction center

0CRM_LEAGUI BUS2000108 Lead GUID

0CRM_MKTELE BUS2054 CRM marketing element (R/3WBS element)

0CRM_MKTELM BUS20100 CRM marketing element(campaign and marketingplan)

0CRM_OBJGUI BUS1178 GUID technical referenceobject

0CRM_OPGUID BUS2000111 GUID of opportunity

0CRM_OU_A01 PDOTYPE_O Organizational level 1







0CRM_PAYERP BUS1006 Payer

0CRM_PLANTP BUS1006 Purchasing: Plant as partner(GR)

0CRM_PR_CHI BUS1178 CRM structured products:destination GUID

0CRM_PRCONF BUS1178 CRM product: configurationproduct GUID

0CRM_PROD BUS1178 CRM product

0CRM_PROSPE BUS1006 Prospective customer

0CRM_PS_PAR BUS1178 CRM structured products:parent GUID

0CRM_PURGRP PDOTYPE_O Purchasing group

0CRM_SALESP BUS1006 Sales partner

0CRM_SALGRP PDOTYPE_O Sales group CRM

0CRM_SALOFF PDOTYPE_O Sales office CRM

0CRM_SALORG PDOTYPE_O Sales organization CRM

0CRM_SHIPTO BUS1006 Ship-to party

0CRM_SND_PT BUS1006 Business partner fordetermining sender address

0CRM_SOLDTO BUS1006 Sold-to party



0CRM_SRVORG PDOTYPE_O Service organization CRM

0CRM_VENDOR BUS1006 Vendor

0CRMPLEAGUI BUS2000108 GUID of preceding lead

0CRMPLPGUID BUS1178 Product list: Product GUID

0CRMPOPPGUI BUS2000111 GUID of preceding opportunity

0CRMPU_OG_R PDOTYPE_O Responsible organizationalunit in purchasing

0CRMSA_OG_R PDOTYPE_O Responsible organizationalunit in sales

0CRMSE_OG_R PDOTYPE_O Responsible organizationalunit (service)

0CRMSRVTGRP PDOTYPE_O Executing CRM serviceorganization

0CS_INVESTE BUS1024 Investee unit

0CS_ORDER BUS2088 Service order

0CS_PARTNER BUS1024 Partner unit

0CS_UNIT BUS1024 Consolidation unit

0CUST_HIE01 KNA1 Customer hierarchy level 1



0CUSTOMER KNA1 Customer number

0DB_BP BUS1006 Business Partner for D&Bscenario

0DEBITOR KNA1 Customer number

0DEBT_ACTT BUS1031 Debited activity type

0DEBT_BUSA BUS0003 Debited business area

0DEBT_CCTR BUS0012 Debited cost center

0DEBT_CMPC BUS0002 Debited company code

0DEBT_NETW BUS2002 Debited network

0DEBT_ORDER BUS2075 Debited order

0DEBT_WBS_E BUS2054 Debited WBS element

0DOC_NUMBER BUS2032 Sales document

0EMPLOYEE BUS1065 Employee

0EQUIPMENT EQUI Equipment number

0EVENT PDOTYPE_E Business event

0EXTPERS PDOTYPE_H External person

0FM_AREA BUS0027 Financial management area

0FUNCT_LOC BUS0010 Functional location

0GL_ACCOUNT BUS3006 G/L account

0HC_COSTPER BUS0012 Sending cost center ofperforming organizational unit



0HC_COSTREQ BUS0012 Receiving cost center ofrequesting organizational unit

0HC_COSTREV BUS0012 Revenue-receiving cost center

0HRPOSITION PDOTYPE_S Position

0HT_INRSPTN KNA1 Intermediate resale partner

0HT_PARTNER KNA1 Business partner

0HT_PRTBRCH KNA1 Business partner branch

0HT_RESCUST KNA1 Reseller customer

0INSP_LOT BUS2045 Inspection lot number

0INT_CUST KNA1 Customer number for internalsettlement

0INVORDER BUS2075 Capital investment order

0MA_OPPINBP BUS1006 Initiator of businessopportunity (business partner)

0MA_RSPBP BUS1006 Bidder (business partner)

0MAINTPLANT BUS0008 Maintenance plant

0MAST_CCTR BUS0012 Master cost center

0MAT BUS1001 Material number

0MATERIAL BUS1001 Material

0MATL_GROUP BUS1072 Material group

0MCHAR_PLNT BUS0008 Master inspectioncharacteristic plant

0ME_BPADVRT BUS1006 Advertiser

0ME_BPAGENC BUS1006 Agency

0ME_BPAGENT BUS1006 Sales agent

0ME_BPBILL BUS1006 Bill-to party

0ME_BPCARRI BUS1006 Carrier

0ME_BPCOAHD BUS1006 Contract holder

0ME_BPCOMRC BUS1006 Commission recipient

0ME_BPCONT BUS1006 Contact person

0ME_BPINV BUS1006 Invoicing party

0ME_BPMAS BUS1006 Higher-level business partner

0ME_BPPAYEE BUS1006 Payment recipient

0ME_BPPAYER BUS1006 Payer

0ME_BPPUBC BUS1006 Publisher

0ME_BPREB BUS1006 Bonus recipient

0ME_BPSERVC BUS1006 Carrier service company

0ME_BPSHPTO BUS1006 Ship-to party

0ME_BPSPRTY BUS1006 Sold-to party

0ME_BPSRVCR BUS1006 Service company



0ME_BPSVRCM BUS1006 Commission recipient’sservice company

0ME_PSPCAMP BUS20100 Campaign WBS number

0ME_REVACCI BUS3006 Deferred revenue account

0ME_REVACCR BUS3006 Revenue account

0ME_VENACC BUS3014 Vendor account number

0MOVE_PLANT BUS0008 Receiving/supplying plant

0MPN_MATNR BUS1001 Manufacturer part

0MSTRTENANT BUS1006 Master tenant

0NETWORK BUS2002 Network

0NOTIFICATN BUS2078 Notification number

0ORG_DOC_CC BUS0002 Company code for sourcedocument number

0ORG_DOC_CO BUS0004 Controlling area for sourcedocument number

0ORGUNIT PDOTYPE_O Organizational unit

0P_EL_PRCTR BUS0015 Partner profit center for theelimination of internal businessvolume

0P_PLANT BUS0008 Planning plant

0PACCOUNT BUS3014 Partner account number

0PART_ABCPR BUS1036 Partner business process

0PART_ACTTY BUS1031 Activity type of partner costcenter

0PART_CCTR BUS0012 Partner cost center

0PART_COORD BUS2075 Partner order

0PART_PRCTR BUS0015 Partner profit center

0PART_WBSEL BUS2054 Partner WBS element

0PAYER KNA1 Payer

0PBUS_AREA BUS0003 Trading partner business areaof the business area

0PCOMP_CODE BUS0002 Partner company code

0PLANPLANT BUS0008 Maintenance planning plant

0PLANT BUS0008 Plant

0PLANT_COMP BUS0008 Issuing plant

0PLANT_P BUS0008 Purchasing plant

0PLANTFROM BUS0008 Sending plant

0PLANTTO BUS0008 Receiving plant

0PLMPRODUCT BUS1001 PLM product

0PM_ORDER BUS2007 Maintenance order

0POR BUS2048 Order number



0PRCA_RESP BUS1006 Product category: Personresponsible

0PRODORDER BUS2048 Manufacturing order

0PROFIT_CTR BUS0015 Profit center

0PROG_POS BUS1158 Program position

0PROJECT BUS2001 Project definition

0QMWCPLANT BUS0008 Work center plant

0QMWORKCTR BUS0011 Work center

0QUALIGROUP PDOTYPE_QK Qualification group

0RC_ACCOUNT BUS3006 Reconciliation G/L account

0RECV_BUSA BUS0003 Receiver business area

0RECV_CCTR BUS0012 Receiver cost center

0RECV_CMPC BUS0002 Receiver company code

0RECV_NETW BUS2002 Receiver network

0RECV_ORDER BUS2075 Receiver order

0RECV_PROCS BUS1036 Receiver business process

0RECV_WBS_E BUS2054 Receiver WBS element

0REFDOC_ORG PDOTYPE_O Predecessor documentorganization

0REFEMPL BUS1065 Reference employee

0REQ_COMCOD BUS0002 Requesting company code

0REQU_BUSA BUS0003 Requesting business area

0REQU_CCTR BUS0012 Requesting cost center

0REQU_M_GRP BUS1072 Requesting material group

0REQU_PRCTR BUS0015 Requesting profit center

0RESP_CCTR BUS0012 Cost center responsible

0RESTYPE PDOTYPE_R Resource type

0RT_CUSTPL KNA1 Plant customer number

0RT_GENMAT BUS1001 Material or generic material

0RT_MGRAIW BUS1072 Material group (IS)

0SALESORG BUS0006 Sales organization

0SEM_APRCTR BUS0015 Allocated profit center

0SEM_CGPRCT BUS0015 Profit center group

0SEND_ACTT BUS1031 Sender activity type

0SEND_BUSA BUS0003 Sender business area

0SEND_CCTR BUS0012 Sender cost center

0SEND_CMPC BUS0002 Sender company code

0SEND_ORDER BUS2075 Sender order

0SEND_PROC BUS1036 Sender business process



0SHIP_TO KNA1 Ship-to party

0SOLD_TO KNA1 Sold-to party

0STAKEHOLD BUS1006 Stakeholder

0SUBNETWORK BUS2002 Sub-network number

0SUPP_PLANT BUS0008 Supplying plant

0TRAVELER BUS1065 Traveler

0TV_TRIP BUS2089 Trip number

0UCDEV_CAT BUS1001 Device category

0WBS_AS_ELE BUS2054 WBS assignment (IM)

0WBS_ELEMT BUS2054 Work breakdown structureelement (WBS element)

0WDRW_PLANT BUS0008 Withdrawal plant ofcomponents

0WORKCENTER BUS0011 Work center/resource

Analysis & Reporting: BEx AnalyzerUseThe Business Explorer Analyzer (BEx Analyzer) is the analysis and reporting tool of the BusinessExplorer that is embedded in Microsoft Excel.

FeaturesYou can call up the BEx Query Designer in the BEx Analyzer, in order to define queries.Subsequently, you can analyze the selected InfoProvider data by navigation to the query created inthe Query Designer and create different query views of the data. You can add the different queryviews for a query or for different queries to a work book and save them there. You can save theworkbook in your favorites or in your role on the BW Server. You can also save the workbook locallyon your computer.

You can start queries in a standard view (with a standard Web template set up in the customizingimplementation guide) in the Web browser and forward the URL or continue to navigate on the Web.Similarly, you can export the Web query to MS Excel 2000.

Overview of the Functional Area of the BEx Analyzer:

� BEx toolbarYou access the functions of the BEx Analyzer from the BEx toolbar, which takes you to theBEx Open dialog box where you can open existing queries, or to the BEx Query Designerwhere you can create new queries or change existing queries.

See also:

BEx Toolbar Functions [Seite 418]

� Evaluating Query DataThe BEx Analyzer offers convenient functions for evaluating and presenting InfoProvider datainteractively. In the BEx Analyzer, you can add queries to workbooks, navigate within themand refresh the data. You can also process the queries further in Microsoft Excel or displaythem in the Web browser in a default view.



Navigation of a query allows you, for example, to filter characteristics on a single value,drilldown on all values for a characteristic, regroup characteristics and key figures in the rowsand columns of the results area, or hide key figures. Navigation results in different views of theInfoProvider data. In addition, a range of further functions is available which allow you to edit aquery interactively (for example, sorting, cumulated output, among others). In addition, youcan use the editing functions in Microsoft Excel in order to set up individual format templates,to print results areas, or to create graphics.

See also:

Evaluating Query Data [Seite 444]

� Queries in WorkbooksQueries are inserted into workbooks so you can display them. When you insert a query, a linkis made between the cell areas of the worksheet with the data of the InfoProvider upon whichthe query is based. A link therefore exists between the Business Explorer and the BusinessInformation Warehouse Server (BW Server).

When inserting a query into the workbook, a VBA routine is automatically generated in theworkbook. You can also connect the Business Explorer with your own VBA programs (VisualBasic for Applications).

You can create workbook templates, into which you can insert your queries. Workbooktemplates can contain pre-determined items for the area of the query, formatting settings,logos, VBA macros, and so on.

See also:

Queries in Workbooks [Seite 463]

ActivitiesTo start the BEx Analyzer, choose Start ��Programs ��SAP Frontend Business InformationWarehouse ��SAP Business Explorer Analyzer.

You can also access the BEx Analyzer via SAP Easy Access � SAP Business InformationWarehouse � SAP Menu � Business Explorer ###Analyzer or in the Business Explorer Browserusing the Business Explorer Analyzer symbol in the menu bar.

BEx Toolbar FunctionsUseAs you start the Business Explorer Analyzer, the toolbar appears in Microsoft Excel. It allows you toaccess all the important functions for navigating and analyzing the query data.

The BEx toolbar functions are also in the Microsoft Excel main menu under SAP BusinessExplorer.



Functions

Save Goto Tools

Back Formatting Help

Open Change Query View Layout

Refresh Query OLAP Functionsfor Active Cells

Settings

OpeningThis symbol takes you to the BEx Open dialog. You can open the following object types:

� Workbooks

� Queries

� Saved query views

� Exceptions

Depending on the type of object that you have selected, the BEx Open dialog appears differently withthe specified functions.

See also:Opening [Seite 422]

SavingWith the Save function on the BEx toolbar you can:

� Save the workbook as a new workbook

� Save the workbook as an existing workbook

� Change the title of the workbook

� Save the query view as a jump target

� Save the query view globally

If you save the workbook, then the query is not detached. You can call the workbook at a later date,create a connection to the Business Information Warehouse Server, and refresh the queries containedin the workbook.

See also:Saving [Seite 422]

Refreshing QueriesRefreshing the query means to request the current valid data from the BW Server. The query isautomatically refreshed when you insert it into the workbook and when you change the navigationalstatus, that is, unless you have activated the function Stop Automatic Refresh (see also: Settings[Seite 442]).

Therefore, you only usually need the function Refresh Query in the following cases:

� To update the data after you have opened a workbook

� When you fill the query with new variable values



A query can only be refreshed if a connection exists between the Business Explorer andthe Business Information Warehouse Server.

See also:Refreshing Queries [Seite 423]

BackChoose Back if you want to undo your last navigation step.

See also:Navigation and Navigation Functions [Seite 444]

Changing QueriesYou use the function Change Query View on the BEx toolbar if you:

� Want to change the arrangement of characteristics and key figures into rows, columns and freecharacteristics for the query and carry out several navigation steps one after the other (ChangeQuery View � Change query (Local View)

� Want to change the definition of the query (Change Query View � Change Query (GlobalDefinition)).

See also:Changing Queries [Seite 424]

GotoWith this function you can:

� Display exceptions in the alert monitor, providing that some exceptions have been found for thisquery.

� Jump to a saved query view

� Activate the function Repeat jump on double-click, to use double-click to jump to a saved view ofquery data

See also:Goto [Seite 425]

OLAP Functions for Active CellsIf you choose OLAP functions for active cell, you call the OLAP functions in the Business Explorer.They are available on the cells for the filter and results areas of a query. The context menu you call,depends on whether you select a cell in the filter area of the query, or a cell in the results area of thequery.

You can also jump to documents for single master data and characteristic values or documents for thenavigation status.


FormattingFormatting for the query underlines the type of data contained in a cell, highlighting the structure of thedelivered results. Query formatting consists of:

� Fonts

� Templates



� Borders

� Alignment

� Defining symbols for:

� Expanding hierarchically

� Collapsing hierarchically

� Expanding in other dimensions

� Linking to documents

� Hierarchy indentation

Small, normal, large, very large

You can change the format of the query to configure the display however you like.

See also:Formatting [Seite 438]

LayoutUsing the layout functions, you can change the appearance of the screen for the query in theworkbook.

You use the layout functions to:

� Attach a diagram or a map

� Display text elements for the query

� Display exceptions or conditions

� Move the filter area or the results area

� Select queries in a worksheet

See also:Layout [Seite 439]

ToolsYou use the functions under Tools to:

� Display the query in a default view in the Web browser

� Edit queries (global definition)

� Insert, copy, remove queries

� Remove all queries, delete the results and detach queries from the workbook

� Activate SAP sheet protection

See also:Tools [Seite 440]

SettingsYou use the functions under Settings to determine whether:

� Queries are refreshed automatically

� There is a connection to the BW server

� Information about the BW server is displayed

� A new workbook it is created from scratch, selected from a list or based on an existing template

� OLAP functions are available using the right mouse button



� Warnings are suppressed

� Log book entries are recorded

See also:Settings [Seite 442]

OpeningUseWith the Open function on the BEx toolbar you can open existing workbooks or queries. You can alsodefine a new query for an InfoProvider.

FunctionsYou can select from the following functions on the left-hand side of the dialog box, SAP BEx: Open...:

� Workbooks: All the workbooks that are assigned to your favorites or to your roles are displayed.

� Queries: All the Business Information Warehouse queries (for which you have authorization todisplay) are displayed. You can search for a query by its technical name or description.

� Exceptions: All exceptions are displayed that the user is allowed to see in accordance with thebackground processing scheduling (see Defining the Exceptions Setting [Extern]). The exceptionsare listed starting with the InfoArea level up to the individual views, that is, the drilldowns you ranin the background.

See also: Displaying Exceptions: Alert Monitor [Seite 79]

Changing Queries / Defining QueriesIf you want to change an existing query or define a new one, choose Queries on the left-hand side ofthe dialog box. Select the query you want to change in the InfoArea/InfoProvider tree and chooseChange to the right of the screen. To create a new query, either choose New directly from the right ofthe screen, or first select an InfoArea or InfoProvider for which you want to create the query, and thenchoose New.

ActivitiesIf you want to open an existing workbook or query, or if you want to define a new query, start theBusiness Explorer Analyzer, and, from the Microsoft Excel main menu, choose the function SAPBusiness Explorer � Open, or alternatively, use the Open pushbutton on the BEx toolbar.

See also:Queries in Workbooks [Seite 463]

SavingFunctionsYou insert a query into a workbook and, using navigation, generate various views ofthe data. You also alter settings for the characteristic display, or for the whole query.You can save this view of the data in the workbook.With the Save function on the BEx toolbar you can



� save the workbook as a new workbook

� save the workbook as an existing workbook

� save the current view as a permanent view for the query

If you save the workbook, then the query is not detached. You can call the workbookat a later date, create a connection to the Business Information Warehouse Server,and refresh the queries contained in the workbook.

ActivitiesSaving as a New WorkbookChoose Save � Save as New Workbook... in the BEx toolbar. The SAP BEx: Save inDocument Storage popup appears. Enter a description for the workbook, and selectthe folder (favorites or roles) in which you want to store the workbook.

Saving as an Existing WorkbookSelect Save � Save as Existing Workbook from the BEx toolbar. The activeworkbook is saved under the name that already exists.

Saving a View for a QuerySelect Save � Save Query View in the BEx toolbar. The SAP BEx: Save View forQuery popup appears. Enter a description for the new view and select OK. The view issaved permanently and is available for Web Reporting and navigation. You can call up the savedviews for a query by choosing Goto -> (your query name) from the BEx toolbar. If you have justopened the workbook, this is only available after a refresh of the query.

Saving a Workbook LocallyIn the Microsoft Excel main menu, choose File � Save or File � Save as..., if you wantto save the workbook on your PC rather than in the BW system.

See also:

Refreshing Queries [Seite 423] Detaching Queries [Seite 467]

Changing a Query View [Seite 424]

Refreshing QueriesFunctionsTo ensure the most current data in a query is always displayed, you must refresh thequery after each navigation and after each change to the settings. A query can onlybe refreshed if a connection exists between the Business Explorer and the BusinessInformation Warehouse Server.During the refreshing the current report data is requested from the BusinessInformation Warehouse server . You can also stop the automatic refreshing. This isrecommended, for example, if you intend to undertake several settings changes andnavigational steps in succession without displaying the corresponding dataimmediately (see Settings [Seite 442]).



ActivitiesAfter inserting a query into a workbook, you have to refresh the query to be able tocontinue navigating. Choose Refresh from the BEx toolbar. If you have selected aquery on the worksheet, exactly this query is refreshed. If you have not selected aquery, then you can select all queries in all opened worksheets. You can only use thenavigation functions in the BEx toolbar and the context menu after refreshing thequery.

You can determine that the automatic refresh function for the queries when opening theworkbook. Choose Properties > Interaction > Refresh Query on Opening Workbook fromthe context menu (right mouse-click) on any part of the query.

You can also determine that when you refresh the query, you restore the initial screen thatwas set up, instead of the last (current) navigation status. Choose Properties > Interaction> Refresh to Restore Global Definition from the context menu (right mouse-click) on anypart of the query.

See also:


Choose the function Refresh Query if you, for example:� switched off automatic refresh

� interrupted the connection to the Business Information Warehouse (BW Server)

� copied the query or moved the results area (see also Positioning Cell Areas of the Query [Seite467])

When refreshing a query, the formatting and the column width of the cell areasautomatically adjusts to the updated query data. You can specify the type of adjustment inthe Query Properties [Seite 457].

See also:Detaching Queries [Seite 467]

Changing QueriesUseYou use the function Change Query View on the BEx toolbar if you:

� Want to change the arrangement of characteristics and key figures into rows, columns and freecharacteristics for the query in the current workbook (Change Query (Local View)

� Want to change the definition of the query in every workbook (Change Query (Global Definition)).

Changing a Query (Local View)The drilldown status of the query is displayed in the form of three directory trees: one tree shows thefree characteristics, the trees “rows” and “columns” show the characteristics and key figures, which arearranged along the rows and columns axis. Characteristics that are displayed in the “rows tree” or the“columns tree” are drilled down upon. The tree “free characteristics” contains all characteristics thatare not currently drilled down upon.



The characteristics and key figures are displayed in the rows and columns in the sequence in whichthey appear in the query. You can determine the position and sequence of the characteristics and keyfigures in the rows axis and columns axis of the query using drag and drop. You can also establishwhich characteristics you want to drill down on, free or filtered. The key figures can be hidden orshown. If the key figures are shown then they are available in the query. You can display and changethe properties of the characteristics. You change characteristic properties (for example, results display,attributes display, presentation hierarchy) by choosing a characteristic and selecting Properties fromthe context menu.

In the lower right-hand area you will see a preview of the table for the results area that shows howyou change the view of the data via your navigational steps.

If you want to change not just your view of the data but also the selection of key figures andcharacteristics for the query, then you need to change the query definition. From the toolbar, chooseChange Query (Global Definition) .

You do not need authorization to use the function Change Query (Local View).

Change Query (Global Definition)

Changes that you make here effect ALL objects that are used in the query:

� ALL the workbooks that contain this query. This means you are changing thequery definition for all the workbooks in which this query appears, not just the one youare working in.

� All Web template that use the query as a data provider for Web items

� All Crystal Reports that use the query as a data source for formatted reports

� All Reporting Agent settings that use the query for precalculating Webtemplates

Only users with the correct authorization can use the function Change Query (globaldefinition).

See also:Query Design: BEx Query Designer [Seite 16]

Displaying and Changing Existing Queries in the Query Designer [Seite 86]


GotoUseWith the Goto function you can

� Display the exceptions of a querySee also:

Displaying Exceptions: Alert Monitor [Seite 79]

� Jump to a saved query view



See also:

Saving [Seite 422]

� Reach to jump targets using the Report/Report InterfaceThe Report/Report-Interface (RRI) enables you to perform a parameterized call-up ofprograms from other programs. This means that you can use it to jump from one report toanother report that delivers more information. In BW, you can get to the targets within andoutside of BW. You can go to the connected R/3 system or to another SAP system (as ofService API Release 6.10).

Depending on the report types you have selected for a query in the sender recipientassignment, you can leave the query and go to the following destinations:

� Starting another query where the entry variants are filled by the selection requirements andelement definitions of the selected cells of the sender query.

� Starting reports, functions, and transactions inside and outside of BW.

You need to have defined the sender-recipient assignment for the system to be able tooffer jump targets. You can find additional information under Editing Sender/ReceiverAssignments to the R/RI in BW. [Seite 90]

See also:

Report/Report Interface: Overview [Extern]

� Display documents/ Documents for Navigation StateYou can display various documents for different query objects. You can also create newdocuments. You have created the documents in the Administrator Workbench, in the masterdata maintenance, in the Bex Analyzer or in a Web application.

See also:

Documents [Extern]

Using Documents in Web Applications [Seite 378]

ActivitiesExceptionsFrom the BEx toolbar, choose Goto � Exceptions. You get a list of alerts for the exceptions of theparticular query you are looking at.

GotoJumping to query viewsIf you want to go to a saved query view, in the BEx toolbar, choose Goto. The descriptions of thesaved views appear in the selection box. You can choose the view you want to jump to.

You can also use a double mouse click to jump to the saved view. In the BEx toolbar, choose Goto �Repeat jump with Double-click. A checkmark appears next to Repeat jump with double-click, to showthat this function is active.

By double-clicking, you can jump directly from a field in a query results area, to a saved query view (ofanother query). In this way, the field contents of the jump-query are included as parameters of thequery for which you saved a view.

Reaching jump targets via the Report/Report InterfaceIn the BEx toolbar, choose Goto. The jump targets that were previously assigned are displayed in thedisplay frame. A single-click will bring you to the jump target you want. A new workbook is opened inthe process. The selections made in the query definition are transferred into the jump target.



When jumping to a jump target outside of the BW, you need to select a source systemand log in if necessary. You only need to login once for each Excel session, even ifseveral workbooks are opened.

Displaying documents/ Documents for Navigation StateSelect a cell and in the context menu, choose Goto. Depending on the cell content in which you call upthe Goto function, several options are available for selection:

� For cells that contain a key figure, you have the function Goto � Display Documents. You get tothe existing documents for InfoProvider data that are suitable for cell selection.

� For cells that contain a characteristic value, you have the following functions:

� Goto � Display Documents: You get to the existing documents for master data for thecharacteristic value.


� For cells that contain meta objects (in created characteristics), you have the following functions:

� Goto � Display Documents: You get to the existing documents for the meta object.


The documents are displayed in the Web. If you want to create a new document, choose AdditionalFunctions � Creating a New Document [Seite 379].

OLAP Functions for Active CellsUseOLAP functions are functions that you access from the cells in the filter and results areas of the queryin the Business Explorer. You use either the context menu (right mouse click) or the OLAP Functionsfor active cells symbol from the BEx toolbar to call these functions. Exactly which functions you areable to call, varies according to the highlighted cell area of the query, and depends on whichcharacteristics and key figures are available, on which it is possible to navigate, and to make settings.

Cell areas that do not belong to the query have only the MS Excel context menu.

Choose Settings � OLAP functions (right mouse click) to deactivate the OLAP functionsin the Business Explorer. When you deactivate the OLAP functions, the functions in theMS Excel context menu are the only functions available in the cell areas of the query. Thequery is not detached.

See also:Settings [Seite 442]

Functions in Filter CellsThe selection of functions that are available in the context menu of the filter cells depends on thenavigational status of the selected characteristic. The functions are:

� Select Filter Value



� Remove Filter Value

� Drilldown � Vertically

� Drilldown � Horizontally

� Properties (See Query Properties [Seite 457])

Select Filter ValueChoose Select Filter Value to restrict a free characteristic to one or more characteristic values, or torestrict a structure to one or more parts of a structure (key figures). You choose one or more valuesfrom a list that is displayed containing all the characteristic values/key figures. After you refresh thequery, only the data for the values you selected are displayed in the drilldown.

See also:Selecting Filter Values [Seite 447]

Remove Filter ValueChoose Remove filter value if you want to see all the characteristic values for the characteristic again.

DrilldownTo display all the characteristic values for a characteristic along the rows axis or the columns axis ofthe results area, choose Drilldown � Vertical or Drilldown � Horizontal. If the characteristic has beenfiltered previously, only the filtered values are drilled down upon.

Functions for the Cells in the Results AreaThe selection of functions available from the context menu of the cells in the query results area,depends on the position and contents of the individual cell. The selection of functions that areavailable, depends on whether you have selected a cell that is related to a characteristic, a cellcontaining a characteristic value, for example, or whether you have selected a cell that is related to astructure element (key figure), a cell containing a key figure name, for example.

The following functions are explained under Navigation and Navigation Functions [Seite 444]:

� Back

� Back to initial view

� Keep as filter value

� Filter and drilldown according to

� Insert drilldown according to

� Swap ... with ...

� Active hierarchy

� Expand hierarchy

SortingYou use this function to sort the characteristic values or attributes for a drilldown characteristic (therows and columns) according to various criteria, ascending or descending, for example. It is possibleto sort according to the key, the name, a display attribute, or a displayed value column. (Forinformation on activating display attributes, see Properties of the Query Components [Seite 60] �Characteristic properties.)

Keys are usually sorted according to internal formatting. If you want to sort according to externalformatting, you have to include this formatting with the InfoObject.

In hierarchy lists, the relationship between the upper-level/lower-level nodes is retained inthe hierarchy structures. Lower-level nodes, however, are usually displayed in the



sequence in which they appear in the sort criteria. You use the Sort according to hierarchyfunction to restore the original sequence as determined in the hierarchy definition.

Sort according to selectionIf you have filtered the characteristic according to several single values, either in the query definition,or using a variable in the selection options, you use the Sort according to selection function to sort thevalues accordingly. This also goes for selections in a dynamic filter (see Selecting Filter Values [Seite447]).

� The system attempts to make meaningful suggestions for each value. It attempts first of all to sortaccording to a selection.

� Time characteristics, characteristics without text, or characteristics that are displayed by defaultwith either key or key and text, are sorted according to key.

� Otherwise, the system sorts according to text. (SORT <itab>... AS TEXT..: Text fields aresorted automatically according to the language environment specified by the current user, that is,the language the current user is logged on to the system in. This means that the relative sequenceof characters, one after the other, is culture-specific, and corresponds to the current textenvironment. The text environment is set automatically and corresponds to the logon language ofthe current user.

CalculateYou use this function to recalculate the results rows and single values that are displayed in the queryaccording to particular criteria.

This function is found in the context menu of the filter cells in the results area, as well as inthe query designer [Seite 16]. In the query definition (local view or global definition), selectthe key figure you want to use, and choose Properties � Calculations from the contextmenu (right mouse click).

You can find additional information under Calculating Results as... [Seite 432] and CalculatingIndividual Values as... [Seite 434].


This function is particularly useful with drilldowns on time characteristics (months, forexample). Using the functions Single value as � Normalize results, and Sort �Descending, on the corresponding value column, you get a cumulated list that is oftendescribed as an ABC list.

Also Apply to ResultsIt is also possible to apply the recalculation you have selected to the results rows.



� Calculate � Single value as � Ranked list / Ranked list (olympic)

� Calculate � Cumulated



(Characteristic) � Suppress Hierarchy NodesIf the characteristic has an active display hierarchy, you use this function to determine whether youwant to suppress the hierarchy nodes never, always, or conditionally.

� never: The hierarchy is displayed along with all the hierarchy nodes.

� always: The overall results row is not displayed.

� conditionally: A hierarchy node is suppressed only if it has exactly one lower-level node. Thelower-level node (can be a lower-level node or hierarchy leaf) is displayed instead of thesuppressed hierarchy node, meaning it is given preference in the hierarchy level.

(Characteristic) � Node positionIf the characteristic has an active display hierarchy, you position the hierarchy nodes either top(above) or bottom (below). The lower-level nodes for a node are expanded either upwards ordownwards.

(Characteristic) � Cumulated displayIf you choose this function, the system sorts the list in ascending order according to key. All thestructure elements (key figures) are subsequently aggregated to the n+1 characteristic value, one afterthe other, for each of the nth characteristic values. With time characteristics, the missing characteristicvalues are included wherever necessary.

If, for this function, you subsequently choose a different sorting method, the numbersbecome difficult to make sense of.

Do not chose the cumulate output function to use with more than one characteristic.

It is a good idea to use the function Calculate � Single value as � Cumulated, since thisfunction is more controllable, and more suitable in most cases.

This function allows you to display cumulated values for time-characteristics, cumulatedsales for calendar year / month, for example.

Calendar year 2000 Sales Cumulated sales

January 100 100

February 110 210 (January + February)

March 120 330 (January + February +March)

(Characteristic) � NormalizingIt is possible to normalize the query data from all key figures for various results for this key figure – theresults are displayed as percentages.

Interim results are displayed as absolutes, not as percentages.

The normalization process refers to a particular characteristic each time, and has various settingsindependently for each characteristic.

Each key figure for a query has a query result. This is the result of the key figure that results from theaggregation of all characteristics for the query.

In each view, an overall result is displayed for the key figures. It is also possible to normalize data forthis result.



Finally, you also have the option of normalizing data for the results that are displayed in the resultsarea.

The overall result, and the query result, are identical to one another, provided that none ofthe characteristics are filtered.

ExceptionsYou activate / deactivate exceptions for a query.

Currency translationYou translate according to a target currency or a database currency.

See also:Translating Currencies [Seite 461]

All CharacteristicsThis is where you make the following settings for all characteristics:

Display asCharacteristic values are displayed using different display forms. The display forms on offer depend onthe InfoObject properties that are set on the database. Under the display forms offered forcharacteristics, you choose, for example, whether the key, the name, or the long text of thecharacteristic, is displayed.

If you select the display form key and name, the key is displayed using external format. If you selectthe display form name and key, the shortest available text is displayed.

The various display options are also available for use with individual characteristics, andwith attributes. Highlight the characteristic or attribute that you want to use, and choosecharacteristic / attribute � Display as from the context menu (right mouse click).

For information on activating display attributes, see Properties of the Query Components[Seite 60] � Characteristic properties.

Results Rows PositionYou choose whether you want the results rows displayed on the top/left or bottom/right of the screen.

Suppress Results RowsYou determine whether the results rows are suppressed never, always or under certain conditions.Conditional suppression of the results rows means that the results rows are not displayed if thecorresponding area contains only one characteristic value.

This function is also available for use with individual characteristics. Highlight thecharacteristic that you want to use, and choose (Characteristic) � Suppress ResultsRows from the context menu (right mouse click).

Suppressing zerosIf you switch this function on, cells containing a zero value (0.00) are left empty. If all the cells for aparticular object in a characteristic value that has been drilled down upon are zero, and this function isactive, the whole characteristic value is excluded from the display.

NormalizationYou are able to choose not to use normalization, or to normalize the characteristics using:

� Query Result



� Overall Result

� Result

UndoIt is possible to cancel individually the settings for the characteristic display, for the results rows, andfor normalizing single characteristics. Alternatively, it is also possible to undo all the changes made tosettings, for all characteristics at once.

PropertiesUnder Properties, you make settings affecting the display, interaction, and column width. Technicalinformation for the query or the workbook is found under Information.


ActivitiesSelect any cell in the query and, using the right mouse button, call the context menu, or choose OLAPfunctions for active cells from the BEx toolbar.

Calculate Result As...UseYou use this function to recalculate the results rows displayed in the report according to particularcriteria. These local calculations only include numbers in the calculation that appear in the current viewof the report. In this way, you override the standard OLAP processor calculations of the OLAP.

You can use this function in the following areas:

BEx Analyzer: In the context menu of the filter cells in the results area or in the BExtoolbar under OLAP Functions of Active Cells.

Query Designer: In structural components in the dialog box Selection/Formula Properties[Seite 66].

Web applications: In the context menu of structural components (see Functions of theContext Menu [Seite 339]).

FeaturesYou can choose from the following functions:

� (Nothing Defined)

� SummationThe sum total of the values for the corresponding area is displayed as the result.

� MaximumThe maximum (greatest) value of the corresponding area is displayed as the result.

� MinimumThe minimum (smallest) values for the corresponding area is displayed as the result.

� Count All ValuesThe number of values for the corresponding area is displayed as the result.



� Count All Values <> 0The number of values for the corresponding area is displayed as the result, with the exceptionof zeroes, meaning that values equal to 0 are not counted.

� Average of All ValuesThe average (sum divided by total number of values) of all the values for the correspondingarea is displayed as the result.

� Average of All Values <> 0The average (total divided by number) of all values for the corresponding area is displayed asthe result, with the exception of zeroes, meaning that values equal to 0 are not counted.

� Standard DeviationThe standard deviation is a measure used to show how the values are spread in relation to themean value (average). Standard deviation = Root from the variance: SQRT (variance)

� VarianceThe following formula is used to calculate the variance:

( x² - ( x)² / N) / (N-1) for N > 1 and notexist for N=1

� Suppress ResultThe result is not displayed.

� First ValueThe highest value for the corresponding area is displayed as the result.

� Last ValueThe lowest value for the corresponding area is displayed as the result.

If the result is a totals row, the area calculated is the corresponding column.

If the result is a totals column, the area calculated is the corresponding row.

With higher totals, that is multiple drilldowns (with results and an overall result), all of thesingle values affected are taken into account (without results).

� Summation of Rounded ValuesIf you have set a scaling factor, it is useful to calculate the sum of rounded values locally sincethe sums (in particular with high scaling factors) can differ considerably.

The following example shows the values of a simple query where sales has been set witha scaling factor of 1,000.

Customer Sales

1,000 EUR

Customer 1 2.246

Customer 2 2.126

Sum 4.372

If you now reduce the number of decimal places, the values are rounded:

Customer Sales

1,000 EUR

Customer 1 2.25



Customer 2 2.13

Sum 4.37

You can see that the sum seen locally is not the value that you would expect. This valuewas calculated first then displayed and then the value was rounded.

If you activate the function Summation of Rounded Values, the value is rounded first, thencalculated, then displayed. The query then appears as follows:

Customer Sales

1,000 EUR

Customer 1 2.25

Customer 2 2.13

Sum 4.38

Calculate Single Values As...UseYou use this function to recalculate the single values displayed in the report according to particularcriteria. These local calculations only include numbers in the calculation that appear in the current viewof the report. In this way, you override the standard OLAP processor calculations.

You can use this function in the following areas:

BEx Analyzer: In the context menu of the filter cells in the results area or in the BExtoolbar under OLAP Functions of Active Cells.

Query Designer: In structural components in the dialog box Selection/Formula Properties[Seite 66].

Web applications: In the context menu of structural components (see Context MenuFunctions [Seite 339]).

FeaturesYou can choose from the following settings:

(Nothing Defined)NormalizationYou can normalize the query data for a key figure for different results of the key figure – the data isdisplayed as a percentage of the result.

Normalization of ResultAll values are normalized for the result. The result equals the total result if there is only onecharacteristic in the drilldown.

Normalization of Overall ResultAll values are normalized to the overall result. If there are several characteristics in the drilldown, thereare different results that are combined to form an overall result.

Normalization of Query ResultAll values are normalized to the query result. Each key figure for a query has a query result. This is theresult of the key figure that results from the aggregation of all characteristics for the query.



The overall result and the query result are identical, providing that none of thecharacteristics are in the filter.

The values of the results row and the overall results row are not displayed as percentagesbut as absolute values.

Ranked ListThe single values for a characteristic are sorted according to the key figure you have selected, andgiven a ranking.

It is possible, for example, to generate a ranked list of products, according to sales.

A 100 = Rank 1

B 50 = Rank 2

C 50 = Rank 2

D 20 = Rank 3

Ranked List (Olympic)The olympic ranked list is different to a normal ranked list, in that only three ‘medals’ are everawarded.

In this example, product D is awarded rank 4, because products B and C have the secondand third place medals.

A 100 = Rank 1

B 50 = Rank 2

C 50 = Rank 2

D 20 = Rank 4MaximumYou can calculate the minimum key figure values for a characteristic locally.

MinimumYou can calculate the minimum key figure values for a characteristic locally.

Count All ValuesYou can count all values.

Count all values <> 0You can count all values, excluding zero values.

Average of All ValuesYou can calculate the average of all values locally.

Average of all values <> 0You can calculate the average of all values, excluding zero values locally.

Suppress Single ValuesThe single values are not displayed. Only the results are displayed.



ExamplesThe following table gives an overview of the functions Normalize to Result, Normalize to Overall Resultand Normalize to Query Result:

Customer Sales Normalizationof Result

Normalizationof OverallResult

Normalizationof Query Result

Customer 1 10 10.86 % 0.97 % 0.12 %

Customer 2 0 00.00 % 0.00 % 0.00 %

Customer 3 17 18.47 % 1.66 % 0.21 %

Customer 4 8 08.69 % 0.78 % 0.10 %

Customer 5 15 16.30 % 1.46 % 0.19 %

Customer 6 22 23.91 % 2.15 % 0.28 %

Customer 7 15 16.30 % 1.46 % 0.19 %

Result 92

Overall Result 1023

Query Result 7812

The following table gives an overview of the Ranked List and Ranked List (Olympic) functions:

Customer Sales Ranked List Ranked List(Olympic)

Customer 1 10 5 5

Customer 2 0 7 7

Customer 3 17 2 2

Customer 4 8 6 6

Customer 5 15 3 3

Customer 6 22 1 1

Customer 7 15 4 3

The following table gives an overview of the functions Maximum, Minimum, Count All Values andCount All Values <> 0:

Customer Sales Maximum Minimum Count AllValues

Count allvalues <> 0

Customer 1 10 10 10 1 1

Customer 2 0 10 0 2 1

Customer 3 17 17 0 3 2

Customer 4 8 17 0 4 3

Customer 5 15 17 0 5 4

Customer 6 22 22 0 6 5

Customer 7 15 22 0 7 6

The following table gives an overview of the functions Average of All Values, Average of All Values <>0 and Suppress Single Values.

Customer Sales Average of AllValues

Average of allvalues <> 0

SuppressSingle Values

Customer 1 10 10.00 10.00 0



Customer 2 0 5.00 10.00 0

Customer 3 17 9.00 13.50 0

Customer 4 8 8.75 11.66 0

Customer 5 15 10.00 12.50 0

Customer 6 22 12.00 14.40 0

Customer 7 15 12.43 14.50 0

The system always calculates from the top in the direction of the drilldown. In this case (characteristicsin the rows and key figures in the column) from top to bottom. If the key figures are in the rows and thecharacteristics are in the columns, the calculation direction is from the top to the right.

If a query contains characteristics in the rows and in the columns and the query is filtered by a keyfigures (for example, sales), the calculation begins at the top left and goes down to the bottom right.

Example query with Sales in the filter and Customer and Region in the drilldown:

Customer Germany England France

BMW 10 17 35

VW 0 15 17

Mercedes 12 22 3

Result 131

The following table shows the query with the function Normalize to Result:


BMW 7.63 % 12.97 % 26.71 %

VW 0.00 % 11.45 % 12.97 %

Mercedes 9.16 % 16.79 % 2.29 %

The following table shows the query with the function Ranked List:


BMW 7 3 1

VW 9 5 4

Mercedes 6 2 8

The following table shows the query with the function Ranked List (Olympic):


BMW 7 3 1

VW 9 5 3

Mercedes 6 2 8

The following table shows the query with the function Maximum:


BMW 10 17 35

VW 10 17 35

Mercedes 12 22 35

The following table shows the query with the function Minimum:




BMW 10 10 10

VW 0 0 0

Mercedes 0 0 0

FormattingUseFormatting for a query consists of, among other things, font, font color, backgroundcolor and background pattern, frame, alignment and options for the hierarchy display.Different format templates and hierarchy symbols are used for the display of thevarious cell areas of queries (filter cells, results area, header information). Theformatting of the SAP format template serves to underline the type of data containedin a cell and, therefore, to emphasize the structure of the delivered results. You canchange the format templates and the symbols for the hierarchy display in order toconfigure the display according to your personal requirements.

FunctionsThe Business Explorer uses the concept of the format templates from Excel forformatting results areas, filter cells, and cell areas for header information. Formattingproperties such as font, pattern, frames and so on, are never directly assigned to acell. Instead they are summarized in format templates, and these are then assignedto the cells. Therefore, cells of the same type contain the same format template.Every time you change a query the cell contents also changes and at the same timethe format of the cell is automatically adjusted to correspond with the new cellcontents. You can prevent this automatic adjustment by choosing Properties��Adjust Format after Refresh.

You can change the format of queries as much as you like using the concept of the formattemplates. For example, each change to the format template SAPBEXstdData (chooseFormat � Format Templates in the main menu) influences the display of all cells thatcontain data.

You can also use formatting in Workbook Templates [Seite 465].

The changes to the SAP format templates apply to the whole workbook and remain thesame when navigating and refreshing queries.

ActivitiesTo change the format template of query cell areas, select the relevant cell area andchoose the symbol for Format in the BEx toolbar. Select the font, pattern, frame oralignment. Make the required changes and choose OK.



You can change the width of the hierarchy indentation and the hierarchy pushbuttonsfor the hierarchy display.� In order to change the hierarchy buttons for hierarchy nodes and leaves, insert an autoshape

symbol into the workbook. Select this symbol and choose Format � Hierarchy Buttons. Choosewhether you want the autoshape symbol to be labeled as “Expand” or “Compress”. When youexpand and compress the hierarchy, the changes to the hierarchy buttons come into effect.

� In order to change the width of the hierarchy indentation, choose Format � HierarchyIndentation. The indentation can be set to narrow, normal, wide and very wide.

The maximum number of hierarchy levels that can be displayed is 13 for Narrow, 7 forNormal, 5 for Wide and 4 for Very Wide. If you exceed the maximum number of hierarchylevels that can be displayed, then the next level will be displayed again under the levelabove.

You can also use the format template that you changed in other workbooks. In the mainmenu choose Format � Format Template and select the workbook, for which you want totransfer the format to the active workbook. Select Merge....

See also:

Cell Areas of a Query [Seite 463] Query Properties [Seite 457]

LayoutFunctionsWith the help of the layout functions, you can determine the layout of the data analysis, and howqueries are displayed in a workbook. You can evaluate the data for a query using a diagram or a map(BEx Map). You can display text elements and move cell areas. You can also select queries in aworksheet.

Attaching DiagramsYou can display an Excel diagram for a query. The diagram evaluates all of the data in the currentnavigation state, meaning the diagram is always refreshed automatically whenever the query isrefreshed.

Attaching MapsUsing Attach Map, you can evaluate the geo-relevant data for a query with the help of the BEx Map.The BEx Map is BW’s integrated Geographical Information System (GIS) in the Business Explorer.

See also:BEx Map [Seite 451]

Displaying Text ElementsYou have the option of displaying the text elements for a query (for example, author, last changed by,InfoProvider, generation time, and so on). The text elements are inserted into the cell area betweenthe filter cells and the results area of the query. Note that depending on the current query, only the textelements that are currently relevant are ever displayed (meaning not all text elements are displayed).

See also:



Displaying Text Elements [Seite 468]

Displaying ExceptionsIf you have defined exceptions for a query, you can display them. The descriptions for the exceptionsare inserted into the cell area below the filter cells. You can activate/deactivate the exceptions with adouble-click or over the context menu (right mouse-click).

See also:Exception Reporting [Seite 73]

Displaying ConditionsIf you have defined conditions for a query, you can display them. The descriptions for the conditionsare inserted into the cell area underneath the filter cells. You can activate/deactivate the conditionswith a double-click or over the context menu (right mouse-click).

See also:Using Conditions [Seite 84]

If you want to move or delete text elements or the descriptions of the exceptions orconditions, then move them or delete the relevant cells in Excel.

Moving the Results AreaYou can move the results area for a query to another cell area. Enter the cell area that you want touse. When you move the results area, its contents are deleted. Refresh the query after you havemoved it, in order to display the contents of the results area again.

Moving the FilterYou can move individual filter cells for a query to another cell area. Enter the cell area that you want touse.

Selecting Queries in a WorksheetBy choosing Select Queries in Worksheet, you can also display which cell areas of the worksheet areconnected to different queries. Arrows between the filter cells and the results area indicate where thequery-cell areas belong. If you select the function again, the highlighting is removed once more.

ActivitiesChoose Layout from the BEx toolbar.

See also:Cell Areas of a Query [Seite 463]

ToolsFeaturesStart in Web Browser � Query (Standard View)By using this function, the query that has been drilled down in the BEx Analyzer is displayed in theinitial view of the Web browser. The query is embedded automatically into a standard Web template.



You determine the standard Web template in the SAP Reference IMG � BusinessInformation Warehouse � Settings Relevant for Reporting � Web Based Settings �Determine Standard Web Template.

Query DesignerUse this function to access the BEx Query Designer [Seite 16]. Here you can create a new query oropen an existing one.

Inserting a Query...You select the function Insert query..., if you want to insert an additional query into the activeworksheet of the workbook. The query is inserted into the worksheet, starting at the selected cell.

Copying QueriesYou can copy the query to a new position in the workbook. Enter the position you want to copy thequery to. After copying, you have to refresh the query if you want to display current data.

Removing QueriesUsing this function you delete one selected query from the workbook. The query definition itself is notdeleted. You can therefore insert this query into this or another workbook if necessary.

Please note that the information on where the areas are positioned in the workbook, isretained when you delete the query. The workbook looks empty. When you insert anotherquery into the workbook, the positions are already there.

See also:Removing Queries from Workbooks [Seite 466]

All Queries in the WorkbookRemoving

Using the function All queries in the workbook � Remove, you remove all the queries contained in theworkbook. The query definitions are not deleted by this procedure.

See also:Deleting Query Objects [Seite 88]

Deleting Results

Using the function All queries in the workbook � Delete results, you delete all the results areas of allthe queries contained in the workbook. You can recreate the results areas by choosing the Refreshsymbol on the toolbar.

See also:Refreshing Queries [Seite 423]

Detaching

The function All Queries in the Workbook ��Detach deletes the link between the cell areas of thequeries and the data. If you detach the queries, the data area that is visible on the worksheet remainsintact, but it can no longer be navigated or refreshed.

The function Detach query can no longer be undone.



See also:Detaching Queries [Seite 467]

SAP Sheet Protection...SAP sheet protection allows you to protect the current worksheet from changes. The function isactivated after you enter a password, and enables you to continue using the navigation functions ofthe Business Explorer.

If sheet protection is activated, then not all the toolbar functions are available.

See also:Sheet Protection [Seite 471]

ActivitiesIn the BEx toolbar, choose Tools.

SettingsFeaturesYou can make settings for connection to the Business Information Warehouse Server, for using aworkbook template, for the availability of the context menu in the results area of the query and formanaging a log book.

Stop automatic refreshIf you switch this function on, you can stop the query from being refreshed automatically after thefollowing functions:

� Selecting Filter Values [Seite 447]

� Changing a Query (local view) [Seite 424]

� Properties [Seite 457]

With the help of the function Stop Automatic Refresh, you can make several navigational steps in oneor more queries without there being a delay after every step. Then deactivate the function. Thestopped queries are now refreshed according to the new navigational status.

Connection to the BW ServerYou can terminate the connection between the BEx Analyzer and the Business InformationWarehouse Server, or you can set up a new connection.

Displaying Information on the BW ServerChoose Display Information on BW Server if you want to know if and how you logged on to theBusiness Information Warehouse Server. A dialog box then tells you, either that no connection existsto the Business Information Warehouse Server, or it shows you the parameters of the currentconnection (user name, host server, system name and so on).

See also:Information Functions [Seite 461]

New Workbooks when EmbeddingWith this function, you can determine into which workbook a query is embedded.



is created emptyChoose the function is created empty if you want to insert the query into an empty workbook.

is selected from listChoose the function is selected from list if you want to choose beforehand, the workbook into whichyou want to insert the query.

is based on permanent templateChoose the function is based on permanent template if you want to insert the query into the workbookthat you have defined as a permanent workbook template.

See also:Queries in Workbooks [Seite 463]

Permanent Workbook Template...With this function, you determine which workbook is the permanent workbook template. You can theninsert new queries into this kind of permanent workbook template. If you choose the function Newworkbook on embed � is based on permanent template, then all queries are inserted automaticallyinto a new workbook that is based on the permanent workbook template.

See also:Creating Workbook Templates [Seite 465]

OLAP Functions with Right Mouse ClickYou can determine whether interactive functions such as navigation or sorting on the cell area of thequery, are possible using the context menu or not.


Suppress Messages from ServerIf you switch on this function, you can stop warning messages appearing.

Log BookUse the information function Log book if you want to log the activities of the Business Explorer inExcel.

You empty the log book by switching the logbook record off and back on again. Save thecontents of the log book before you turn off the Log function.

See also:Information Functions [Seite 461]

Displaying the Log BookYou can display the list of activities by choosing Display Log.

The log book display is not constantly updated, meaning you must repeat the commandDisplay log book from time to time in order to see the most current entries.

ActivitiesIn the BEx toolbar, choose Settings.



Evaluating Query DataUseYou analyze the dataset of the Business Information Warehouse in the BEx Analyzer by insertingqueries into Excel workbooks and then interactively evaluate and present the query data.

After inserting a query into a workbook, the distribution of the characteristics and key figures orstructures in the rows and columns from the query definition is shown in the first view.

With the help of navigation functions (such as the expansion of a hierarchy, filtering of acharacteristic to a characteristic value) you can change the query and thereby generate further viewsof the InfoProvider data. The BEx Analyzer functions you need to do this are in the standard toolbarand in the context menu of the filter and results area cells. You can change the display of thecharacteristics and key figures in the axes of the rows and columns belonging to the query. You canmake settings that affect the display of the entire query, the characteristics, the key figures or the data.You can define sort orders (for example, ascending or descending according to the key or the name ofthe characteristic values) and determine output conditions (such as a currency translation) in order toconfigure the presentation of the data in accordance with your requirements. In addition, you can usethe editing functions in Microsoft Excel in order to set up individual format templates, to print resultsareas, or to create graphics.

If you have created the required view of the data for the InfoCube, you can save it in the workbook andstore it, for example, in your favorites.

PrerequisitesAt least one query must be defined for an InfoProvider in the Business Information Warehouse.

FunctionsThe navigation allows you to view and evaluate the query data from different points of view. When younavigate, you change the query and create new views of the query data.

The basic navigation functions are:

� Displaying a hierarchy

� Filtering a characteristic by a characteristic value

� Drilling down according to a characteristic and changing the drilldown status

� Filtering a characteristic and drilling down by another characteristic

� Distributing the characteristics and key figures along the row axes and the column axes of thequery

� Putting the characteristics and key figures in order

� Hiding and showing key figures

� Activating and deactivating conditions and exceptions

� Evaluating geographical data (for example, characteristics such as customer, sales region,country) on a map.

Navigation and Navigation FunctionsUseA query shows views of the data of an InfoProvider, upon which the query is based. You use thenavigation functions to generate different views of the query data (known as the navigation status).



These views are subsequently displayed in the results area of the query. Switching between thedifferent views is called navigation. In the Business Explorer, navigation is used to analyzeInfoProvider data. In the query definition, you specify which view of the data is displayed first after youhave inserted the query into the workbook.

Other views that you navigate to, are stored in the workbook. If - after saving and opening theworkbook again! - you: refresh the query in the workbook, the navigation status that you reached thelast time the query was open is displayed, only this time it contains the most current data from theInfoProvider.

If, after refreshing the query, you want the system to display automatically the initial queryview, as defined in the global definition, choose Properties � Interaction � Return toglobal definition on refresh (see also: Query Properties [Seite 457]).

In addition to the navigation functions, you are also able to use characteristic-basedsettings to change the view of the data. These characteristic-based settings include howcharacteristics and totals rows are displayed. Various sorting functions are also available.


FunctionsThe basic navigation functions are:

� Filtering a characteristic according to characteristic values or hierarchy nodes

� Drilling down according to a characteristic and changing the drilldown status

� Filtering a characteristic, and drilling down according to a different characteristic

� Distributing the characteristics and key figures along the row axes and the column axes of thequery

� Changing the sequence of characteristics and key figures on an axis

� Expanding a hierarchy

� Hiding and displaying key figures.

If you want to change the way the characteristics and key figures are distributed amongthe rows and columns of the query, or if you want to carry out several navigational stepsat once, select the symbol on the toolbar for Change Query View � Change Query (localview). See also: Changing Query Views [Seite 424]

FunctionsBackChoose Back if you want to undo a navigational step. This function is also available directly on thetoolbar (green arrow pointing to the left).

Note that only one navigational step is undone. Other settings, such as display (displayas) or sort are not affected by this (see OLAP Functions for Active Cells [Seite 427]).

Back to initial viewThe initial view of the data is the view that is displayed directly after you insert the query into aworkbook. The initial view is determined in the query definition, by the distribution of key figures and



characteristics into rows, columns, and free characteristics. Choose the function Initial View if youwant to return to this view after navigating in the query.

Keep as filter valueChoose Keep as filter value to retain a characteristic you have selected as a characteristic value orhierarchy node. When you refresh the query, only the data that refers to the fixed characteristic valueis displayed.

Filter and drilldown according toChoose Filter and Drilldown According to to fix a characteristic to a value in one step (meaning to filterit) and to drilldown according to another characteristic on the same axis (row axis or column axis).

Insert drilldown according toChoose Insert Drilldown According to to drilldown on a characteristic highlighted on the worksheetaccording to another characteristic.

Swap ... with ...Choose Swap ... with..., to switch the roles of two characteristics. In this way you swap characteristicsbetween the row axes and the column axes of the results area.

Active hierarchyYou use this function to switch active hierarchies on and off.

Expand hierarchyChoose Expand Hierarchy � To Level ..., if you want to display more levels of the hierarchy.Alternatively, click on the hierarchy symbol to expand the hierarchy.

See also:Working with Hierarchies [Seite 460]

ActivitiesYou access the various navigation functions either by double-clicking, via the context menu for thefilter cells and the results area, or by using the Change Query function on the toolbar.

You carry out the more basic navigational steps by double clicking. For example, you use a double-click to move characteristics into or out of the drilldown:

� Double-clicking on the filter cell of a characteristic that has been drilled down upon, removes thecharacteristic from the drilldown, and converts it into a free characteristic.

� Double-clicking on a characteristic value in the results area, filters the characteristic according tothis characteristic value, and also removes the characteristic from the drilldown.

Navigational steps such as Filter or Exchange with are found in the context menus of the filter cells,or the results area. You call up the context menu by selecting the relevant characteristic or key figure,and pressing the right mouse button. Alternatively, it is possible to call up these functions by selectingthe relevant characteristic or key figure, and choosing the symbol for OLAP Functions for Active Cellon the toolbar.

For a complex navigation involving several navigational steps, it is best to use the functionChange Query (local view).

See also:Changing Query Views [Seite 424]

OLAP Functions for Active Cells [Seite 427]



Selecting Filter ValuesUseYou use the value selection in the Business Explorer Analyzer to select filter values for characteristics.

PrerequisitesYou have executed a query in an Excel workbook. You have also selected a characteristic in the filtercells, and chosen Select filter value... from the context menu (right mouse button).

ProcedureSelecting single values

This function is used only if the characteristic does not have an active display hierarchy.

1. In the top left of the selection field, choose single value, and (flat list) as the hierarchy.

2. Select one or more values from the list of available values displayed in the left-hand window, anddrag the value(s) into the Selection box on the right (alternatively, use the pushbutton with thearrow pointing to the right to move the values).

Only those values for which there are data records in the InfoProvider, and which you areauthorized to use are displayed. The number of available values in the left-hand window isrestricted to 100. It is possible to remove this restriction, or to choose the displayed valuesaccording to other criteria. See Filter Values: Formulating Selection Conditions [Seite449].

Selecting value ranges

This function is used only if the characteristic does not have an active display hierarchy.

1. Choose value range from the top left of the selection field, and the operator that you want to use(top right).

The following operators are possible:

� is between

� is greater than or equal to

� is less than or equal to

� is greater than

� is less than

2. If you choose the operator between, first select the upper and lower limits of the interval from thelist of available values in the left-hand window, and choose the button with the arrow pointing tothe right. The characteristics for the interval you select appear in the right-hand Selection window.

If you choose one of the operators is greater than or equal to, is less than or equal to, isgreater than, or is less than, select a value from the list of available values in the left-handwindow, drag it across, and drop it into the Selection window on the right (alternatively use thebutton with the arrow pointing to the right to move the value across into the Selection window).

Intervals are formed using a key and not according to the displayed texts. For example,�January; November� also contains August.



Selecting hierarchy nodes

This function is used only if the characteristic has an active display hierarchy.

If single values is set in the top left of the selection field, the active display hierarchy appears in the topright corner of the screen.

If the display hierarchy for the characteristic is active, the standard hierarchy (flat list) isnot displayed, and you cannot select any value ranges.


5. Select one or more hierarchy nodes, and drag the node(s) into the Selection window on the right(alternatively, use the button with the arrow pointing to the right to move the node(s)).

Searching for values1. Specify a search term in the entry field (bottom left).

2. Choose Find. The system searches locally in the displayed value list (not on the server). The firstvalue found that fits the search string is underlined.

3. Click on the Find button again to move through the list of values that the system has foundmatching the search term.

Direct entry

This function is used only if you want to restrict a characteristic to a value or a valuerange. You cannot make an entry directly when you are selecting structure elements (keyfigures, for example) and hierarchy nodes.

3. In the entry field (bottom left) specify a characteristic value in external format.

4. Choose the button with the arrow pointing to the right.

The system checks whether this value exists. If the value does not exist, you get an errormessage.

Note the following conventions for making entries for value ranges and intervals:

Value range: <operator><value>, for example, >= 1995

Intervals: <lower limit>;<upper limit>, for example, A01; Z99

Deleting values from the selection windowIf you want to delete values from the selection, highlight the relevant values in the Selection window onthe right-hand side of the screen, and drag them back into the window on the left (alternatively, use thebutton with the arrow pointing to the left to move the values).

Excluding characteristic valuesYou use this function to select the values that you do not need for your report.

This function is only used with single values.

1. In the right-hand window, select the value that you want to exclude.

2. Choose Exclude from selection from the context menu (right mouse click).



If you want to include the value in the selection again, choose Include in selection from thecontext menu (right mouse click).

Displaying value keysCharacteristic values can also be displayed as value keys.

1. Select a characteristic value from either the left-hand or right-hand window.

2. Choose Technical names from the context menu (right mouse click).

The characteristic values appear as value keys in Selection window on the right-hand side ofthe screen. On the left-hand side, you see the value keys in a separate column to the right ofthe characteristic value name.

ResultYou have filtered a characteristic by certain characteristic values. Choose OK.

The query is reconstructed according to the selection criteria you specified. The selected characteristicvalues are displayed in the filter cells, on the right, next to the corresponding characteristic. Only thecharacteristic values you selected are included in the results area.

Filter Values: Formulating Selection ConditionsUseThe filter values displayed in the selection dialog in the left-hand window (seeSelecting Filter Values [Seite 447]) are restricted to 100 values in the extended help. It ispossible to remove this restriction, or to choose the displayed values according toother criteria.

This function is not available for displaying hierarchy nodes, or choosing structureelements.

PrerequisitesYou have executed a query. You have also selected a free characteristic from thefilter cells, and chosen the Select filter value function from the context menu (rightmouse button).

ProcedureChoose Display Other Values (button with yellow arrow, bottom left). You get to the SelectionConditions dialog box.

This is where you

� formulate selection conditions

� deactivate the 100 values restriction.

If there are a lot of characteristic values, and you choose to deactivate only the first 100values, the value selection process may take a long time.

The only the first 100 values option is inactive if there are less than 100 values available.



Formulating Selection Conditions1. Choose the attribute (the characteristic is itself always an attribute) that you want to restrict from

Restriction(s) in the left window.

2. Choose an operator.

The following operators are possible:

� is equal to

� is greater than or equal to

� is less than or equal to

� is greater than

� is less than

� is between

� contains pattern

3. Specify a characteristic value in external format. If you want to use the help function to choose theattribute values, click on the pushbutton with the three dots next to the field.

If you choose the operator between, you have to specify both the upper and lower valuesof the interval.

4. Choose the button with the arrow pointing to the right, to apply the restriction. The dialog staysopen so that you are able to add further restrictions to your selection condition.

5. Choose OK. The list of available values displayed in the left-hand window of the selection dialog,is now restricted according to the selection conditions you specified.

If, in the InfoObject maintenance, under the settings for the Business Explorer, youspecify, that you want the characteristic display to contain text (only text, or text and key)and there are in fact texts available for the characteristic, a Text attribute is offered in theRestriction(s) in the left-hand window. In this case, the operators equal to and containspattern, are available. The following is an example of the kind of selection condition youmight want to apply:

“Display all products that contain the text toothpaste”

“Display all values containing the text plug, for the characteristic Material”

Changing Selection Conditions1. In the right-hand window, highlight the restriction that you want to change.

2. The settings appear in the Restriction(s) left-hand window, where you are able to make thechanges.

3. Choose the button with the arrow pointing to the right, to apply the changes.

Deleting Selection Conditions1. In the right-hand window, highlight the restriction that you want to delete.

2. Choose the button with the arrow pointing to the left. This removes the restriction from theselection.



BEx MapPurposeMany characteristics in the Business Information Warehouse, for example, customer, sales region,and country, contain important geographical information. You evaluate geographical information in theBEx Map, along with key figures that are relevant to business. The BEx Map is BW’s GeographicalInformation System (GIS). It is integrated into the Business Explorer.

IntegrationThe BEx Map is part of the Business Explorer. It is used for reporting on geo-relevant data.

Geo-relevant InfoObjects are stored and maintained in the Metadata Repository. The master data forgeo-InfoObjects is equipped with geo-attributes. InfoObjects are geocoded using an external tool:ArcView from ESRI (Environmental Systems Research Institute).

FunctionsWith the BEx Map, you prepare and evaluate data of a geographical nature (characteristics such ascustomer, sales region, and country, for example). The geo-relevant data is displayed graphically on amap. Using enhanced navigation options (“geographical drilldown”), regional information can beevaluated more easily at different levels of detail. A map shows the spatial proximity of places andregions, allowing geographical connections to be more clearly represented.

ProcessThe following graphic illustrates how geographical data is evaluated using the BEx Map:

Business Explorer

BW Server

Administrator Workbench

Staging EngineStaging Engine

BAPIBAPI

InfoCubesMaster DataInfoCubesInfoCubes

Master DataMaster Data

AnalyzerAnalyzer

Grid Data Grid Data Map DataMap Data

APIAPI

OLAP ProcessorOLAP Processor

BrowserBrowser

Meta DataRepositoryMeta DataRepository

Geocoding

GISInfoObject

Geo-Coordinates

2. In the InfoObject maintenance, flag the geo-relevant characteristics (country, for example) that youwant to use as geo-characteristics.

3. You load the corresponding shapefiles [Extern] into the BW system. You maintain the assignmentof shape file and master data (mapping between geo-characteristic and shape file). SeeSAPBWKEY Maintenance for Static Geo-Characteristics [Extern]

If you want to use the BEx Map to report on geo-characteristics that show information in pointform (customer, plant, sales office, for example) you have to geocode these characteristics.See Geocoding [Extern]



4. You define a query with geo-characteristics, and insert the query into a workbook. Choose Layout�� Attach Map. Query data of geographical relevance is displayed on the map in the BusinessExplorer, or on the Web. You navigate around the map to report further on the geo-relevant data.

See:

Geographical Data Analysis with BEx Map [Seite 452]

Maps [Seite 204]

Navigating in Maps [Seite 381]

Geographical Data Analysis with BEx MapUseWith the BEx Map that is integrated into the BEx Analyzer, you can prepare andanalyze data that has geographical relevance. The geo-relevant data is displayed ona map, so that you can see regional features and geographical connections at aglance.

IntegrationThe BEx Map is part of the BEx Analyzer, and appears in a new worksheet in theworkbook. The size of the BEx Map corresponds to the initial size of the workbook.

PrerequisitesIn the BEx Analyzer, you have to execute a query containing at least one geo-relevant characteristic, meaning that the query contains at least one InfoObject(characteristic) that has been defined as a static geo-InfoObject in the InfoObjectmaintenance, and for which data with geographical relevance exists.

FunctionsThe BEx Map allows you to analyze regional features at different levels of detail. Thebasic concept underlying the BEx Map, is that of laying different map layers, eachcontaining various geographical data, one on top of the other, and displaying at themon one map. A map layer behaves in the same way as a transparent slide, which canbe changed from visible to invisible. For every map layer, you can choose varioustypes of graphical presentation (Renderers) to display your data, for example, colorshading, bar charts or pie charts. You can arrange the map layers hierarchically, forexample, continents � countries � states � districts, and navigate from one maplayer to the next.Choosing various renderers to display your data, also means that you can displayseveral key figures on a single map layer, for example, as bar charts and colorshading.

ActivitiesExecute a query that has geo-relevant data. Choose Layout � Attach Map from theBEx standard toolbar. A new worksheet appears in the workbook with the name ofyour query in the title line.The BEx Map consists of the following parts:



Map DesignIn the map design area (left) you define the navigation state for the query that youwant to see on the map. Here, you can specify the map layer on which you want tonavigate, and set the key figures that you want to display.

Map ViewThe maps are displayed in the chosen setting in the map view area (middle). Usingthe symbols from the BEx Map toolbar, you can pan, zoom in and zoom out, anddetermine the sequence of the map layers. The buttons found under the map, displaywhich map layers are visible, and allow you to display and remove the different maplayers quickly.

LegendThe legend (to the right) helps to explain the data displayed on the map. The legendgets its values from the query, and adjusts itself dynamically to the currentnavigational state.See also:Analyzing Data Geographically Using the BEx Map [Seite 453]

Analyzing Data Geographically Using the BExMapPrerequisitesYou have executed a query with geo-relevant data, and chosen Layout � Attach Map from thetoolbar.

ProcedureMap Design SettingsYou can see your key figures and characteristics of your query in the map design. The static geo-relevant characteristics are displayed as tabstrips. In every tabstrip, the remaining key figures andcharacteristics of the query are ready for you to select. The fields with the key figures andcharacteristics they contain, are arranged in a way that enables you, for example, to make thefollowing settings: “Show me the key figure (sales figures, for example) by the characteristic (calendaryear/month, for example) using the renderer (bar chart, for example)”.

1. In the tabstrips, choose the map layer that you want to work with.

You can choose from the following settings options:

Display a key figure 1. Choose a key figure from the Show me... field.

2. In the using... field, choose a renderer (color shading, bar chartor pie chart).

If you want to display only one key figure on the map,we recommend that you display it as color shading.



Display several keyfigures

1. Choose the key figures you want to display from the Show me...field.


We recommend that you display several key figures asbar charts or pie charts, because with color shading, youcan only display one key figure.

Display key figuresrestricted bycharacteristic

1. In the Show me... field, select a key figure (sales figures, forexample) and, in the by field, choose a characteristic (calendaryear/month, for example) that you want to use to drilldown onthe characteristic.


If you want to see both the relative values and the sumof the characteristic values, we recommend that you usea pie chart.

If you want to see an absolute comparison of theindividual values, we recommend that you choose a barchart.

Superimpose key figures 1. In the Show me... field, select the key figures you want todisplay, and choose a renderer (color shading, bar chart or piechart) in the using... field.

Since the underlaid key figure is displayed automaticallyas color shading, we recommend that you display thesekey figures as bar charts or pie charts.

2. Choose Over. A window appears in which you choose theoverlaid key figure. This is displayed automatically as colorshading.

2. Choose Apply to map.

Displaying Dynamic Geo-characteristicsYou can also display dynamic geo-characteristics on the map (see also: Static and Dynamic Geo-characteristics [Extern]). Since dynamic geo-characteristics deal with regional information (customer /vendor addresses, for example) the regional location display enables you to see distribution within aregion.

1. Choose Show in the Regional Locations area.

2. Select the geo-characteristic you want to use.

3. Choose Apply to map.

Setting up the Properties of the Graphical DisplaysYou determine the properties of the graphical displays as follows:

1. Choose the Settings... button located next to the using... field. You reach the Renderer Propertiesdialog box.



2. You can change the title of the legend here: Choose Change Default Title and enter a title in thefield Legend Title.

2. You can set the following properties for every renderer:

Color shading Bar Chart Pie chart

� Color selection

� Color ramp

� Number of colors used

� Color selection

� Bar height

� Bar width

� Color selection

� Maximum pie size

� Minimum pie size

Setting Regional Location Symbol PropertiesYou determine the properties of the regional location symbols as follows:

1. Choose the Properties button in the Regional Locations area. You get to the Symbol Settingspopup.

3. You can change the title of the legend here: Choose Change Default Title and enter a title in thefield Legend Title.

3. You can set the following properties for the regional location symbols:

� Symbol type: Circle, square, triangle, cross

� Symbol color

� Symbol size

Navigation Options in the Map ViewDefault Navigation

� You can zoom in on a detailed view.

Lasso a part of the map that you want to look at in more detail (hold down the left mousebutton and select the section you want to see by dragging the cursor across the relevantarea). You get a detailed view of this part of the map.

� You can use geo-drilldown to navigate in the lower layers.

By double clicking on a region on the map, you get to the next lower map layer. The mapdesign settings are transferred automatically to this map layer. At the same time, you zoom inon the region you lassoed. The buttons located under the map show you which map layers arecurrently visible.



Navigation using Symbols from the BEx Map Toolbar

Full Extent

Zoom In

Zoom Out

Pan

Map Properties

� Full ExtentChoose Full Extent if you want to see a view of the whole map.

� Zoom InChoose Zoom In if you want to display a more detailed view of the current map.

� Zoom OutChoose Zoom Out if you want to display a less detailed view of the current map.

� PanChoose Pan, if you want to look at adjoining areas of the map, but do not want to change thesize of the map. The mouse cursor appears as a “hand”. By holding down the left mousebutton, you can pan all over the map.

� Map PropertiesYou can determine the sequence of the map layers, and the properties of a map layer.

1. Choose Map Properties. You reach the Map Properties dialog box.

2. Choose Move Up or Move Down, if you want to change the sequence of the map layers.

Note that, in some cases, the regions in the layer above may hide the regions in the layerbelow.

3. Choose Layer Properties, if you want to change the settings for a map layer. You reachthe Map Layer Settings dialog box. Here you can make the following settings for everymap layer.

� Fill color

� Fill type: Solid fill, transparent, diagonal, diagonal stripes

� Outline color

� Outline width



Using Buttons to Show/Hide Map LayersThe buttons found underneath the map show you which map layers are visible. The arrangement fromleft to right corresponds to the sequence of the map layers from bottom to top. You can show severalmap layers at any one time. If you choose to show a map layer, the tabstrip belonging to it appearsautomatically in the Map Design.

Saving Query VariantsUseA query variant is a query for which the variable values have already been selected. You can also usethe variants for opening the query in the online display and for background processing.

PrerequisitesYou have defined a query that contains at least one variable that is ready for input.

Procedure1. Open the query with the variables that are ready for input.

2. You get to the dialog window for entering variables. Choose Save as Variant... from the contextmenu on the dialog box.

3. Enter a name and a description for the variant. Choose whether you only want to use the variantfor background processing (then the variant is no longer available for online display) and whetheryou want to protect the variant (then only you can change the variant).


ResultThe query variant can now be

� called up when you next open the query

� assigned to a setting for background printing or exception reporting in background processing.

See: Defining the Print Setting [Extern], Defining the Exceptions Setting [Extern]

See also:Using Variables [Seite 39]

Query PropertiesFeaturesThe query properties offer options for configuring display, interaction, and column width in thequery. You can determine whether:

� The formatting of the query is to be adjusted after refreshing

� Identical keys are displayed

� Scaling factors are displayed for key figures

� Links to documents for metadata and master data are displayed



� Interactive functions are available in the query

� Variable values are saved and reused

� Formatting and column width of the cell area are adjusted after the updated query data isrefreshed

Under information you can find the technical details of the query and the workbook.

DisplayAdjusting format after refreshingFormatting for the query underlines the type of data contained in a cell, highlighting the structure of thedelivered results. As a rule, after refreshing the position and size of the cell area in the results area ofthe query changes. The function Adjust Format After the Refresh guarantees that the format isadjusted after the updated data is refreshed. The function is active by default.

You can deactivate the function for adjusting the format, for example, if you want to display the datamore quickly, or if you use a workbook with your own format template.

See also:Formatting [Seite 438]

Suppressing identical keys in the results areaYou can display characteristic values with a key and name. If you have selected the key for thecharacteristic display, then you can determine whether identical keys should be displayed in the querydisplay. The setting Suppress Identical Keys is active as standard, so that only the first key isdisplayed for each characteristic and additional, identical keys are suppressed.

Displaying scaling factors for key figuresYou can display the scaling factor for key figures (for example, “in $1000”) in the row or columnheader. This function is not active by default.

Displaying filter cells for structuresKey figure structures did not have filter cells in release 1.2. This function allows you to show the keyfigure structure filter cells in 1.2 workbooks.

Displaying links to assigned documentsFor query metadata and master data, you can display links to documents [Extern] that you havecreated for these objects in the Administrator Workbench. If documents exist for these objects, thesymbol appears next to the metadata and master data. If you click on this symbol, you jump towhere the document is displayed on the Web.

InteractionAllowing interactive functionsInteractive functions, such as the navigation functions Sort and Store as Filter Value, are available bydefault for the query. You can deactivate these interactive functions if you want to stop the reportviews from being changed, for example.

Saving and reusing variable valuesIf variables that are ready for input are used in a report, then you can enter the desired values for thevariables or confirm the default values when embedding the query in an Excel worksheet. If you wishto save and reuse variable values select the setting Save and Reuse Variable Values. This function isnot active by default.



Refreshing the query when opening the workbookAs long as the workbook is saved on the BW Server, you can use this function to refresh the queryautomatically when you open it. This function is not active by default.

Refreshing restores global definitionWhen you refresh the query, the last navigation status is usually restored. Instead, you can use thisfunction to go back to the initial screen set up in the query global definition. This function is not activeby default.

Column WidthAdjusting column width after refreshingAs a rule, after refreshing, the position and size of the cell area in the results area of the querychanges. With the function Adjust Column Width After Refreshing, you determine which cell areas youwant to be adjusted in the Excel worksheet. You can choose between the settings Do Not AdjustColumn Width, Adjust Results Area, or Adjust Whole Column. The option Adjust Whole Column isactivated by default.

InformationThe following technical details are available:

� Query ID (local): Technical identification number of the query in the workbook that, for example,helps distinguish between VBA routines if there are several queries in the workbook.

The technical identification number of the query is displayed as the query ID and cannotbe changed. You can use the ID of the query in user-defined VBA routines.

See also:Integration with Visual Basic for Applications [Seite 472]

� Query ID (Server): Technical identification number of the query on the BW Server.

� Workbook ID (Server): Technical identification number of the workbook, as long as the workbookis saved on the BW Server.

� Original system of the workbook: Name of the BW Server

ActivitiesYou can change the properties of queries by choosing:

� Properties in the context menu of the results area (right mouse button)

� The symbol for OLAP functions for active cells � Properties on the toolbar.Make the settings you need and choose OK. The settings are also valid for the active query in theactive workbook.

If you want to save the settings for all queries in the active workbook, choose OK for AllQueries.



Working with HierarchiesUseYou can present the characteristic elements hierarchically in the Business Explorer Analyzer andevaluate the data of a query for the individual hierarchy levels.

IntegrationHierarchies for characteristics can be loaded from the source system or created in the BusinessInformation Warehouse. Further information on hierarchies is available in the Hierarchies [Extern]section of the Administrator Workbench documentation.

PrerequisitesThis function is available, if hierarchies exist for the characteristics of the query.

FeaturesYou can expand exactly one characteristic of the query in a hierarchical display.

If you expand another characteristic, the characteristic you displayed hierarchicallydisappears from the list.

Note also that you can only have hierarchies on row axes, not column axes.

The hierarchical display of a characteristic takes place one step at a time. You get a drilldown with thehierarchy nodes of the selected hierarchy. You can get to the lower hierarchy levels using a newdrilldown by hierarchy (or by clicking on the hierarchy symbol). Characteristic values that are notarranged in the hierarchy appear in the results area in the row marked ‘Not assigned’. If acharacteristic with a hierarchy is sorted according to key and name, then the node ‘Not assigned’appears at the end.

You can configure the hierarchy display (width of the hierarchy indentation and hierarchybuttons) individually, by using the function Format on the BEx toolbar.

See also:

Formatting [Seite 438]

ActivitiesYou can evaluate data for the individual hierarchy levels with the query. To display a characteristic asa hierarchy instead of a list, choose Active hierarchy form the context menu with a right mouse-click.You can now expand the hierarchy to the level you require. Expanding a hierarchy level means thatthe display of the level that the cursor is positioned on is extended by one more level, that is, the levelis moved to a position one level lower down. Conversely, the hierarchy can also be reduced by onelevel (compressed). Choose Expand Hierarchy � Level... from the context menu (right mouse click).However, you can also expand or compress the hierarchy by clicking on the hierarchy symbol.

You can also determine the hierarchical display of a characteristic in the query definition.

� Choose Change Query View from the BEx toolbar.

� Select the characteristic you want and choose Properties from the context menu (rightmouse click).

� In the field, choose Presentation Hierarchy Active.



In the field Presentation Hierarchy you can also set up the Start Expand Level, that is, thehierarchy level that you want to drilldown to in the initial view.

See also:Properties of the Query Components [Seite 60]

Translating CurrenciesPrerequisitesYou can use this function if you already created currency translation types [Extern] in the AdministratorWorkbench.

Procedure1. Select a cell in the results area of the query.

2. Using the right mouse button, choose Currency Translation from the context menu.

3. Specify if you want to translate the values of the query

� into a joint target currency,

� into the database currency,

� or into the currency (or currencies) according to the query definition (see Properties of theSelection/Formula [Seite 66] � Currency Conversion)

.

Translating into a Joint Target Currency4. Enter the name of the required currency translation type.

5. If the currency translation type does not specify a target currency, enter the required targetcurrency.

6. Confirm your entries.

ResultThe values of the query are translated into the desired target currency / currencies using a translationtype.

You can find further information in the section on Currency Translation in the Business Explorer[Extern] in the Administrator Workbench documentation.

Information FunctionsUseThe information functions allow you to prepare information on the working method ofthe Business Explorer. You can call up the information functions if you:� want to know which cell areas of the worksheet belong to a query

� want to log the activities of the Business Explorer in Excel and display the log (for example, iferrors occur during certain editing processes)



� want to know if and how you are logged on to the Business Information Warehouse Server(information on the BW Server).

FunctionsSelecting queries in a worksheetYou can display which cell areas of the worksheet belong to which query by choosingLayout � Select Queries in Worksheet from the BEx toolbar. Arrows between filtercells and the results area indicate the relevance of various cell areas to a query. Ifyou choose the function again (or refresh any query), the selections are removed.

See also:

Cell Areas of a Query [Seite 463]

Log BookThe log book function gives you the opportunity of logging all activities of theBusiness Explorer in Excel. In the log book information is held, for example, on whenwhich query is executed and with which parameters, on when you log on and log offfrom a particular Business Information Warehouse Server, on how a query isautomatically processed further after refreshing using a VBA-Exit, and so on.

On the BEx toolbar, choose Settings � Log, in order to begin and end the recording ofinformation. As soon as you have requested the recording of a log book, you candisplay its contents by choosing the function Settings ��Display Log Book. You cansave the contents of the log book as a text file.

You empty the log book by switching the logbook record off and back on again. Save thecontents of the log book before you turn off the Log function.

It can also be the case that the system suggests you log off from the BW Server when youactivate the log. This is because when you activate the log, the PC also starts logging thesteps on the BW Server, which is only of use if it is started when you log on to BW. If youwant to stop the steps being logged on the BW Server, choose Cancel.

The log book display is not constantly updated, meaning you must repeat the commandDisplay log book from time to time in order to see the most current entries.

Displaying Information on the BW ServerThis function allows you to display your logon parameters and the systemparameters, meaning you get information on if and how you are logged onto theBusiness Information Warehouse Server. Choose Settings � Display Information on theBW Server from the BEx toolbar. A dialog box then tells you, either that no connectionexists to the Business Information Warehouse Server, or it shows you the parametersof the current connection (user name, host server, system name and so on).

ActivitiesCall up the information functions with the help of the BEx toolbar.



Queries in WorkbooksUseQueries are inserted into workbooks so you can display them. When you insert a query, a link is madebetween the cell areas of the worksheet and the data of the InfoProvider upon which the query isbased. A link therefore exists between the Business Explorer and the Business InformationWarehouse Server (BW Server). This link stays in place until you interrupt it (see Settings [Seite 442]).

When you open a query and insert it into a workbook, the query is calculated and the view (initial view)of the data established in the Query Designer [Seite 16] is displayed.

If variables [Seite 39] that are ready for input are used in the query, you can enter the required valuesfor the variables or confirm the default values when you insert the query.

Workbooks into which queries are inserted are no different in appearance than otherExcel workbooks. They can be saved as files, copied, sent and (using Excel functions)edited however you like and even supplemented with other data.

FeaturesYou can choose whether you want to insert a query into a new workbook, into an existing one, or intoa workbook template:

If you want to insert a query into a new workbook:

1. Choose the symbol for Open...from the BEx toolbar. This brings you to the screen Open SAP BEx:

2. Select Queries from the left column.

3. Select a query from all those available. The queries are arranged according to InfoProviders.

4. Double-click on the required query or choose OK.

If you want to insert a query into the active workbook:

Open a workbook and, from the BEx toolbar, choose Tools ��Insert Query.... The query is theninserted into the current worksheet starting at the active cell.

If you want to insert a query into a workbook template:

1. Create a workbook template.

2. Insert the query into the workbook template.

See: Creating Workbook Templates [Seite 465]

If you use the function Based on Permanent Template (see Settings [Seite 442]), theBusiness Explorer queries in all these workbooks will have the same formatting when youinsert them.

See also:Opening [Seite 422]


Cell Areas of a QueryA query consists of the filter cells and the results area. The results area is divided into rows andcolumns. You also have the option of displaying text elements (header information) for the query.



You can highlight a query by clicking with the mouse on of the query cell areas.

The following graphic shows the various cell areas of a query:

Merkmal 1Merkmal 2Merkmal 3

Zeilenachse

Zeilenachse

SpaltenköpfeSpaltenköpfe SpaltenachseSpaltenachse

DatenbereichZeilenköpfeRoiweH ö f

1

23

45

67

89

10

Filter-zellen

Resultats-bereich

A B C D

A query consists of:

� A current view of the data (initial state). This view shows the distribution of key figures andcharacteristics in the rows in the columns and drilldown characteristics that were established in thequery definition.

� A filter cell for each characteristic of the query. You can position these filter cells wherever youlike in the worksheet.

See also:Positioning Query Cell Areas [Seite 467]

� A highlighted cell (the “anchor” of the results area) in the worksheet, which indicates the top leftcorner of the results area. Characteristics and key figures can be arranged along the rows orcolumns axis in the results area.

� A cell area in the workbook that you can freely select, in which text elements (header information)for the query are displayed. The header information can include such things as the title and authorof the query, the InfoProvider upon which the query is based, the last change date, statements onstatistical filters, or variables that are used in the query. This header information is shown onceyou have individually collected it.

See also:Displaying Text Elements [Seite 468]

You can display which cell areas of the worksheet belong to which query by selectingLayout � Select Queries in Worksheet from the toolbar. Arrows between filter cells andthe results area indicate the relevance of various cell areas to a query.

See also:Layout [Seite 439]

For a detailed description of the functionality in a query, see:

Queries in Workbooks [Seite 463]

Refreshing Queries [Seite 423]

Detaching queries [Seite 467]

Settings [Seite 442]



Query properties [Seite 457]

Creating Workbook TemplatesUseYou can create workbook templates, into which you can insert your queries. Workbook templatescontain the following elements:

� Preset positions for the different areas (title, filter cells, results area, text element)

� Format settings: You can change the background pattern, color scheme, and so on.

� Logo, Bitmaps

� VBA macros

See: Integration with Visual Basic for Applications [Seite 472]

Procedure1. Insert a query into a workbook.

2. Format the workbook (see Formatting [Seite 438])

3. Add other elements if required:

� Logo

� Bitmaps

� VBA macros and control elements that start the macros.

4. Save [Seite 422] the workbook.

If you do not use the preset positions for the areas of the query, skip step 1. In this case,new queries are inserted into the workbook template from the active cell onwards.

ResultThe saved workbook can now be used as a workbook template. If you now want to insert a query intothis workbook template, you have the following options:

� From the BEx toolbar, choose Settings � New workbook on embed � is selected from list. Youcan now select the required workbook as a template.

� From the BEx toolbar, choose Settings � New workbook on embed � is selected from list.

When you insert a query into the workbook template, the last query (not all queries!) that you added isdeleted and swapped with the new query that is embedded.

If you delete the query that you used to create the workbook template (step 1) and thatholds the invisible position data for the query before you save the workbook (step 4), theposition data is destroyed and can lead to undesired results.



Removing Queries from WorkbooksPrerequisitesAt least one query has been inserted in the workbook.

ProcedureYou can either remove a single query from the workbook, or all of the queries of theworkbook in one step.

Removing a Single Query1. Select the query that you want to delete.

2. Select Tools � Remove Query.

Removing all Queries from the Workbook1. Select Tools � All queries in the workbook � Remove.

2. Confirm the removal of all queries with Yes.

When you insert a query into a workbook, you not only save the information on the querydefinition, but also where the areas are placed (title, filter cells, results area and textelements) in the Excel cells. The information is stored in a hidden place.

Please note that the information on where the areas are positioned in the workbook, isretained when you remove the query. The workbook looks empty. When you insertanother query into the workbook, the positions are already there. In this way, theworkbook acts as a workbook template (see Creating Workbook Templates [Seite 465]).

If you want to embed the areas of the new query in other places, you first have to removethe Excel cells in which the parts of the old query were displayed.

To find out where the parts of the old query were, choose Layout � Select Queries inWorksheet from the BEx toolbar.

The query definition remains the same if you only remove the query by deleting the Excelcells. If you refresh the query by mistake, for example, by refreshing all the queries in theworkbook (see Refreshing Queries [Seite 423]), the message Results area could not beassigned appears. You can assign the query to a new results area. If you really want toremove deleted queries, choose Cancel. The query is automatically removed from theworkbook.




Detaching QueriesFunctionsA query inserted in a workbook can be recognized by the connection between cellareas of the worksheet (filter and results area) with the data of the query in theBusiness Information Warehouse server (OLAP-Server). In a hidden part of theworkbook, information is held on the displayed views of the data. This guarantees thetechnical connection. This connection remains even if the connection between theBusiness Explorer and the R/3 System is interrupted. After the interruption, you candisplay the current report data for the current report view by refreshing the query. Aslong as there is a connection to the server, the functions of the OLAP server(functions of the context menu and the toolbar) are offered for filter cells and theresults area.The function Detach Query deletes the connection between the cell areas of thequery and the report data. If you detach the query then the visible data area on theworksheet remains but can no longer be navigated through and also no longer berefreshed.

The function Detach query can no longer be undone.

ActivitiesYou can delete the connection between the cell areas of the queries and the data, bychoosing Tools � All Queries in the Workbook � Detach in the toolbar.

See also:

Settings [Seite 442]

Positioning Query Cell AreasUseYou can arrange queries and their cell areas in any number of ways on theworksheet by moving or, where necessary, deleting them again.If you copy the whole query to a new worksheet the position of the cell areas for thequery remain the same.

FunctionsYou can choose from the following functions:Function Procedure Valid for

Moving within a worksheet Move the relevant cells inExcel:

1. Select the cell area.

2. Place the cursor on theedge of the cell and drag it

� Text elements

� Filter cells

� Results area

� Displaying exceptions



to where you want it.� Displaying conditions

Moving to other worksheets In the BEx toolbar, chooseLayout � Move Filter or MoveResults Area.

� Filter cells

� Results area

Copying to other workbooks Choose Tools � Copy Queryfrom the BEx toolbar.

� complete queries only

Filter cellsThe filter cells for a query can be moved or copied freely.If you want to undo the changed position of the filter cells, delete all filter cells andrefresh the query. By doing this you have repositioned all cell areas for the query.

With the function Layout � Select queries in worksheet you can see which filter cellsbelong to which query.

Text ElementsYou can display the query text elements by group and selectively move or deletethem.

See also:Displaying Text Elements [Seite 468]

Moving / Copying QueriesYou can change the position of the query within the workbook. You can either copythe entire query or move the results area into the workbook. The properties of thequery remain the same after the position has been changed. After moving or copyingyou must refresh the query in order to display the current data.See also:Tools [Seite 440]

Refreshing Queries [Seite 423]

Displaying Text ElementsUseYou have the option of displaying different text elements for a query (for example, author, last changedby, InfoProvider, generation time, and so on). These text elements are called the “header information”of the query.

PrerequisitesYou have already inserted one or more queries into a workbook.

Procedure1. Select a query.

2. Select Layout � Display text elements.



3. You can either display all the text elements or single ones (general, filters, variables). The textelements available are displayed between the filter cells and the results area. You can also deleteor move single text elements by deleting or moving their cells in Excel.

Explanation of Text ElementsThe meaning of the most important text elements is outlined below:

� Author: The user who defined the query

� Last changed by: The user who last changed the query definition so that the query has beenregenerated. Small “changes” that you can also make by using navigation are not real definitionchanges.

� InfoProvider: The InfoProvider with the data reported on in the query

� Query technical name: Technical name for the query that you enter when you save it

� Key date: The key date is the date for which time-dependent master data is selected. Youdetermine the key date either in the query definition (query properties) or supply the value using avariable. If the key date has not been defined, then the system date is automatically made into thekey date.

� Changed on: This time tells you when the query definition was last changed.

� Validity of data: This is the point in time when data for the latest request that can be used forreporting was posted to the InfoProvider.

For MultiProviders, the current InfoPackages are determined from the individual basiccubes and from these, the basic cube with the oldest data validity date is called.

� Current user: The user who has this query open or has inserted it into a workbook.

� Last refresh: When the query data was last refreshed. This is the point at which you display thetext elements, since refreshing the query is necessary for displaying the text elements.

� Variables, filter values, conditions, exceptions: Additional text elements can be variables, filtervalues, conditions, or exceptions, depending on the current query definition. You can display thedescriptions of the conditions and exceptions as text elements by choosing Layout � DisplayConditions or Display Exceptions from the BEx toolbar (see also: Layout [Seite 439]).

See also:Cell Areas of a Query [Seite 463]

Positioning Query Cell Areas [Seite 467]

Background Information on Excel FunctionsScroll BarsIf there is no scroll bar displayed in a workbook:1. Choose Extras � Options from the Excel main menu. This brings you to the Options dialog box.

2. Select View > Window Options > Horizontal Scroll Bar or Vertical Scroll Bar.


If, on the other hand, you do not want to see the scroll bars, deactivate the optionsHorizontal Scroll Bar or Vertical Scroll Bar.



Freezing ColumnsIf you want to freeze a column:1. Select the column on the right of the column that you want to freeze.

2. Choose Window � Freeze from the Excel main menu. The columns you freeze do not move whenyou use the scroll bar.

If you want to stop the freeze function, choose Window � Remove Freeze.

You can also use this function for rows. You can also freeze individual cells with a columnand row freeze.

Sheet ProtectionIf you activate the sheet protection function in Excel (under Extras � Protection �Sheet...), you put most of the Business Explorer functions out of use. Therefore, usethe SAP Sheet Protection [Seite 471] instead.

FormattingYou can format the workbook cells by using Excel functions. This goes for the cells ofthe query, too (title, filter cells, text elements, results area). However, when yourefresh the query, the standard formatting for the query cells is restored and thesettings for these cells are lost.The Business Explorer Analyzer uses the Excel concept of format templatesFormatting [Seite 438] results areas, filter cells, and cell areas for header information.Cells of the same type always have the same format template assigned to them. Theformat template applies to the entire workbook.Changing the format template in the current workbook:1. Choose Format � Format Template from the Excel main menu. This brings you to the Format

Template dialog box.

2. Choose Change... and make the required settings.

We recommend you change the formatting of query cells by using the BEx toolbar.

a. Select the cells where you want to change the format.

b. Choose Formatting� Font/Pattern/Border/Alignment

c. Make the required changes and choose OK.

See also: Formatting [Seite 438]

If you need a specific format template to format a workbook in the BEx Analyzer, andthe template does not exist yet in the workbook, copy the standard definition of allBEx-specific format templates as well as the BEx-specific standard color chart.Choose from the following options:� To set the formatting before inserting the query into the workbook, create the required format

template in an empty workbook and use that workbook as the workbook template.

See also: Creating Workbook Templates [Seite 465]

� To set the formatting after inserting the query into the workbook, change the format templateand/or the color chart or import them from a different workbook.



You can use the file SAPBEXS.XLA to help you. If you load this file, Excel creates a sheetthat contains all the format templates in use.

Importing all format templates from another (open) workbook:1. Choose Format � Format Template from the Excel main menu. This brings you to the Format

Template dialog box.

2. Select Merge....

Copying color chart from another (open) workbook:4. Choose Extras � Options from the Excel main menu. This brings you to the Options dialog box.

5. Choose the Colors tabstrip and make the required changes.

Sheet Protection UseThe SAP sheet protection allows you to protect the current worksheet against changes. Cell areas ofthe query can then, for example, no longer be deleted and no further queries can be inserted if thesheet protection is active.

IntegrationThe function SAP Sheet protection corresponds to the Excel function Sheet protection. If you activatethe sheet protection from the Excel menu, then the majority of the functions in the Business Explorerare no longer executable. The SAP variant of the sheet protection, however, allows you to protectworksheets, without hindering the functionality of the Business Explorer (for example, the navigationfunctions). It is possible to turn off the SAP sheet protection with the Excel function Turn off sheetprotection...

Scope of functionsThe SAP sheet protection protects the current worksheet against changes but does, however, allowthe further use of the functions of the Business Explorer. If the sheet protection is active then thefunctions, that are called up with the symbol Tools, are no longer available. You activate the functionwith the entry of a password. The protection can only be lifted later with the entry of the correctpassword.

ActivitiesTo activate the sheet protection select the symbol Tools � SAP Sheet protection on the toolbar.Enter the password twice.

In order to remove the sheet protection, select the symbol Tools � SAP sheet procession. Enter thepassword, with which you activated the sheet protection.




Integration with Visual Basic for ApplicationsYou can also connect the Business Explorer (BEx) with your own VBA programs (Visual Basic forApplications). The BEx add-in can trigger your own VBA routines or you can control BEx add-infunctions from your own VBA routines.

Controlling from the BEx Add-inWhen inserting a query into the workbook, the following VBA routines are automatically generated inthe workbook:

Sub SAPBEXonRefresh(queryID As String, resultArea As Range)

End Sub

This routine is always called if the BEx Analyzer has filled the results area of the query. This routinehas the parameters Query ID and the Results Area as the Excel range. You can use this routine totrigger your own processes after you refresh the query.

You can display the ID of a query by choosing Properties � Information in the contextmenu.


You want the current date and the time to be entered in the cells directly above the upper left area ofthe result area every time the query is refreshed.

You supplement the VBA routine as follows:Sub SAPBEXonRefresh(queryID As String, resultArea As Range)

If queryID = “SAPBEXq0003” Then

With resultArea.Resize(1, 1)

.Offset(-1, 0) = "Last calculated at:"

.Offset(-1, 1) = Now

End With

End If

End Sub

“SAPBEXq0003” is the query ID here. You can display the query ID under the query properties.

If you require the same behavior for all queries in the workbook then the ‘If’ statement is omitted.

Controlling the BEx Add-inYou can call up various VBA routines of the BEx add-in, with which you control the Business ExplorerAnalyzer functions. The following call-ups are available:

Function SAPBEXgetWorkbookID(wbName As String) As StringDetermining the ID, under which a workbook is saved in the InfoCatalog.The workbook must be opened in Excel; its current name in the collection Application. Workbooksmust be entered in the parameter wbName. You will see that the technical name of the workbookgenerally differs from the title in the window.

The function provides an empty string if the workbook is not found in the collection ApplicationWorkbooks, or if it is established that it has not yet been saved in the InfoCatalog.



Function SAPBEXreadWorkbook(wbID As String) As StringReading a workbook from the InfoCatalog.The ID for the workbook in the InfoCatalog must be entered in the parameter wbID.

You can use the function SAPBEXgetWorkbookID to determine a workbook ID. However, you will seethat an ID is generally only valid in a certain InfoCatalog.

If the reading process was successful, the function shows the Excel name of the open workbook as aresult, or the empty string.

If there is no connection to an OLAP server, the function starts a logon dialog.

Function SAPBEXsaveWorkbook(wbName As String) As IntegerSaving a workbook in the InfoCatalogIn the parameter wbname, you must enter the Excel name of the workbook you want to save. Thename must be derived from the InfoCatalog and is saved there “as a new version”.

If there is no connection to an OLAP server, the function starts a logon dialog.

Function SAPBEXgetErrorText() As String

This return code can be interpreted as an error code for all API functions, that provide a result of typeinteger:

-1 Context error, this means that the function cannot be used on the cell in question

0 The function was executed without errors

> 0 An error occurred in the function

In the last case, the text on the error can then be requested with SAPBEXgetErrorText (until the nextcall-up of an API function).

Function SAPBEXsetFilterValue(intValue As String, Optional hierValue As String, OptionalatCell As Range) As IntegerFiltering with cell atCell (if this parameter is missing, then the active cell is taken as the basis)

The internal filter value must be entered in the parameter intValue. Please note that this valuecan be displayed differently from the external value displayed in the filter cell. You can eitheruse SAPBEXgetFilterValue or carry out the filter process once manually with the log bookfunction switched on in order to determine the internal value for a known external value. Theinternal filter value is noted in the log.

Enter the parameter hierValue when dealing with a node of a certain characteristic hierarchy with thefilter value.

“intValue = <blank>” means “do not filter anymore”

If no connection to a BW server exists the function starts a logon dialog.

The function produces a context error if atCell is not a filter cell.

Function SAPBEXgetFilterValue(intValue As String, hierValue As String, Optional atCell AsRange) As IntegerDetermining the internal filter value (and, where necessary, the characteristic hierarchy used) withcell atCell (if this parameter is missing, then the active cell is taken as the basis).

The result is displayed in the parameters intValue and hierValue, which you subsequently have totransfer to “byRef”. As no byRef parameter transfer is supported when calling up this function with theExcel method "Run", both of the values can alternatively be queried using the help functionsSAPBEXgetFilterValue_intValue and SAPBEXgetFilterValue_hierValue after the call-up ofSAPBEXgetFilterValue, for example.:

if run("SAPBEX.XLA!SAPBEXgetFilterValue", myValue, myHier) = 0 then

myValue = run("SAPBEX.XLA!SAPBEXgetFilterValue_intValue")

endif




SAPBExcopyFilterValue Function (fromCell As Range, Optional atCell As Range) As IntegerCopying a Filter Value from Filter Cells fromCell to Filter Cells atCell (if this parameter is missing, theactive cells are used as a basis).

Both filter cells have to relate to the same InfoObject which means that they have to belong to differentqueries. Both queries have to be embedded in the same workbook.

The return value is as SAPBEXgetFilterValue, and so on.

The function produces a context error if atCell or fromCell are not filter cells.

Function SAPBEXsetDrillState(newState As Integer, Optional atCell As Range) As IntegerChange drilldown status with cell atCell (if this parameter is missing, then the active cell is taken asthe basis).

“newState = 0” means “do not drilldown anymore”

“newState = 1” means “drilldown vertically””

“newState = 2” means “drilldown horizontally”



Function SAPBEXgetDrillState(currentState As Integer, Optional atCell As Range) As IntegerDetermining the drilldown status with cell atCell (if this parameter is missing, then the active cell istaken as the basis).

The result is returned in the parameter currentState, that must subsequently be transferred to “byRef”.As no byRef parameter transfer is supported when calling up this function with the Excel method"Run", the value can, alternatively, be queried after the call-up of SAPBEXgetDrillState using the helpfunction SAPBEXgetDrillState_currentState (see SAPBEXgetFilterValue).


Function SAPBEXrefresh(allQueries As Boolean, Optional atCell As Range) As IntegerallQueries = FALSE: Refreshing the query with cell atCell (if this parameter is missing, then the activecell is taken as the basis). In this variant, the function produces a context error, if atCell does notbelong to a results area or is a filter cell.

allQueries = TRUE: Refreshing all queries in the active workbook.

If no connection to a BW server exists the function starts a logon dialog. - provided no queries have tobe refreshed.

Sub SAPBEXpauseOn()Stopping the process run in the add-inYou switch on Stop Automatic Refresh in the BEx Analyzer when you call this function. This meansthe changes you make are noted with some of the navigation operations, but the query is notimmediately refreshed. This applies above all to the API call SAPBEXsetFilterState.

Sub SAPBEXpauseOff()Continuing the process run in the add-inAll changes that are noted since the process run in the add-in (invoked either by user interaction or bycalling up SAPBEXpauseOn) are now fetched by refreshing the queries in question.

If no connection to a BW server exists the function starts a logon dialog. - provided no queries have tobe refreshed.

Function SAPBEXfireCommand(fCode As String, Optional atCell As Range) As IntegerExecuting an OLAP function with cell atCell (if this parameter is missing, then the active cell istaken as the basis).



The cell in question must belong to the results area of a query and this query must have beenrefreshed in the current session.

You must enter the code of the OLAP function. In order to determine this code you carry out the OLAPfunction once manually with the logging function switched on. The OLAP function code is noted in thelog.

To be sure that you can use the OLAP function on specified cell, always call upSAPBEXcheckContext.

The function produces a context error if atCell does not belong to a results area.

Function SAPBEXcheckContext(fCode As String, Optional atCell As Range) As IntegerChecks whether a given OLAP function can be used with cell atCell (if the parameter atCell is missing,then the active cell is taken as the basis).


This function produces a context error if the check produces negative results, if the active cell does notbelong to a results area, or if the query has not been refreshed during the current session.

Function SAPBEXgetFilterValue(intValue As String, hierValue As String, Optional atCell AsRange) As IntegerJumps to a view, which you have to define in the workbook. The parameter jumpType must always byset to “v“(“v“ for view, other jump types are in development). The name of the view is displayed in theparameter jumpTarget. If no connection to a BW server exists the function starts a logon dialog.

The function evokes a context error if the active cell does not belong to a results area.

Function SAPBEXshowTextElements (Optional selectGroup As String, Optional atCell AsRange) As IntegerShow text element for query in which there is an atCell results area (if this parameter is missing,active cells are used as a basis)

selectGroup = blank or “*”: Show all text elements

selectGroup = “C”: Show only general text elements (created by, changed on,...)

selectGroup = “F”: Show filter only

selectGroup = “V”: Show variables only

The return value is as SAPBEXgetFilterValue, and so on.


Function SAPBEXembedQuery(genUID As String, Optional atActiveCell As Boolean) As StringEmbedding a query that is given by generated unique ID (genUID)

atActiveCell = true: Embed at active cell

atActiveCell = false: Embed in the permanent workbook template of the user (if this is not available, anempty workbook is used)

If successful, the internal workbook ID (SAPBEXq0001, SAPBEXq0002, ...) of the embedded query isreturned.

Function SAPBEXgetResultRangeByID(queryID As String, Optional charName As String) As RangeDetermining a cell area for a query in the active workbookYou have to specify the internal workbook ID (SAPBEXq0001, SAPBEXq0002, ...), for the query that isbeing searched for, in the query ID parameters.

charName = blank: Results area of the query is returned

charName = name of the characteristic: Filter area is delivered (normally a range of two cells) for thecharacteristic charName



The function delivers Nothing if the are you searched for is not found (query does not exist,characteristic is not in the query or the area has been deleted/is not available).

Formatted Reporting: Crystal Reports IntegrationPurposeFormatted reporting:

� Denotes the layout of reports using master data, ODS objects and multi-dimensional InfoProviders

� Contains every degree of freedom for formatting reports and enables you to assign reportelements to a degree of one pixel It is especially suitable for form-based reports and printedreports

� Does not offer any analytical functions You can specify the options for interaction only when youdesign the report

With BW, the customer receives as Business Content not only OLAP queries, but also formattedreports that were created by SAP using the Crystal Reports Designer on the basis of existing BWqueries.

These formatted reports display the full range of formatting elements and correspond particularly wellto the requirements of form-based reports. Using the Crystal Enterprise server component, you canpublish these reports on the Web, making them available to your users.

If, in addition to the reports delivered by SAP as Business Content, you want to create your ownformatted reports, you will need the Crystal Reports Designer. This tool is not delivered as standardwith BW but is a component of the Crystal Enterprise – SAP Edition solution offered by SAP and SAPPortals.

Implementation ConsiderationsThe following overview shows both client and server components of the Crystal Enterprise – SAPEdition solution, and their availability.

ServerClient

Design View

Crystal C

onnector

Business ContentActivation

Administration

Ans

ehen

� Delivery withSAP BW as atime-restricted testversion.

� Purchase viaSAP/SAPPortals

�Pre-definedCrystalReports areembedded inSAP BW asstandardBusinessContent

�Deliveredwith BW



IntegrationThe integration of Crystal Reports into BW enhances the Web application options in BW. Formattedreporting allows you to create formatted and form-based reports.

You can choose different views for the same query:

� The flat view for building Crystal Reports

� The multi-dimensional view for building workbooks

How does it fit into SAP BW?

FunctionsIntegrating Crystal Reports into BW enhances the SAP BW Business Explorer with the followingfunctions:

,

Business Explorer

•Query design usingthe Desktop or Web•Multi-dimensional(OLAP) analyses(MS Excel or Web-based)•Geographicalanalyses•Ad-hoc reporting•Alerts•Publishing iViews•Seamlessintegration of Web-and MS Excel-basedanalyses


Queries, Reportingand Analysis


FormattedReporting Mobile Intelligence

Technical ComponentsITools

Key Functions/Functional Areas

•Layouts exact toone pixel•Wizard-basedlayout definition•Static, formattedreports•Form-basedreports•Pre-definedCrystal Reportsin BusinessContent•Publishing onthe Web•Convenientprinting options

•Online andoffline scenarios•WAP device andPDA support•Automatic devicerecognition•Publishing usingthe WebApplicationDesigner•Device-specificoutput•Alerts, charts•Integration intothe mobile portal

•Web ApplicationDesign•Interactive analyticalContent on das Web•Information cockpitsand dashboards•Basis for creatinganalytical applications•Creation of iViewsfor the portal•Wizard-basedvisualisation APIs foradditional, highlyindividual Web design

•Single point-of-access•Role-based dataretrieval

•Personalization ,collaboration,profile generation




Components of the Crystal Enterprise – SAP Edition SolutionThe following overviews of the integration architecture show the components that you can use with theCrystal Enterprise – SAP Edition solution to create formatted and form-based reports:

� Report definition (layout) using the Crystal Reports Designer component

� Saving in BW

ServerClient

Design View

�Creating newreports�Opening /saving reports�Changingreports�Loadingreports into BW

Crystal C

onnector� Publishing reports on Crystal Enterprise, the server component for executing, scheduling, and

caching reports and outputting reports on the Web.

� Supporting several languages

� Integration into the SAP roles and user concept

Server

Client

Design View

Crystal C

onnector

�Publishing reports on theCrystal Enterprise Server�Translation into otherlanguages�Synchronization of rolesand users


� Integration into the SAP BW Administrator Workbench



� Using the SAP BW report/report interface (as recipient)

Server

Client

Design View

Crystal C

onnector

�Metadata Retrieval�Reading Data from BWQueries


Administration

� Presentation of formatted reports in the Web browser

� Supporting single sign-on

� Integration into the Enterprise Portal

� Printing reports with additional print options

ServerClient

Design View

Crystal C

onnector


Administration

Web Browser�Single Sign On�ePortfolio

Ans

ehen

Creating and Distributing ReportsThe following overview shows you how to create and publish reports using the full scope of functionsin the Crystal Enterprise – SAP Edition solution.



4. Save the report inthe BW repository

Server

Client

Design View

Crystal C

onnector


Administration

Vie

w

6. View the reportfrom anyFrontend (forexample, Webbrowser, SAPGUI, portal,ePortfolio)

5. Publish thereport toCrystal Enterprise

2. Select the Queryand retrieve metadata

1. Start the CrystalReports Designer

3. Structure andpreview the report

1 & 2: Using the Crystal Reports Designer, create report definitions with the object type Crystal Report

You use BW queries as the basis for Crystal Reports:

� BW queries that exist already in the BW system

� BW queries that you create by jumping from the Crystal Reports Designer to the BEx QueryDesigner

3. With the Crystal Reports Designer you can use the full range of formatting elements to display datafrom BW according to your requirements:

� Fonts

� Font sizes

� Colors

� Styles

� Diagrams

� Pictures

� Maps

� Free texts

Using the Crystal Report Designer, you can improve the layout of reports and how they aredisplayed on the Web since you can assign data freely and execute form-based reports to theaccuracy of one pixel.

You can

� Install the layouts delivered by SAP as Business Content

� Adjust the layouts delivered by SAP as Business Content

� Create unrestricted customer-specific layouts

You also have extended print options

4. The Crystal Reports are stored in the BW system and managed in the Administrator Workbench.They are integrated into the BW system infrastructure in such a way that they can be transportedwith BW. The Crystal Reports are published on the Crystal Enterprise server component at thesame time as they are saved in BW.



5. By activating Business Content, you publish those Crystal Reports that are delivered with SAPBusiness Content on the Crystal Enterprise server component. This means that any user with therelevant authorization can then execute these Crystal Reports in the browser.

A Crystal Report that is scheduled in Crystal Enterprise is called a report instance. Unlike aCrystal Report, data is saved in a report instance. There can be several report instancesexecuted at different times for any report. These instances are managed on the CrystalEnterprise server.

For further information, see Crystal Reports Administration [Extern]

RestrictionsIn order to create a new formatted report yourself, you need the complete Crystal Enterprise – SAPEdition solution.

Opening and Saving Objects in BWUseYou use this function to open, save, find and delete BW objects in the BEx Analyzer, in the WebApplication Designer and in formatted reporting. The function is divided into the open and save dialogboxes. The functions in and the titles of the dialog boxes differ depending on where the open and savedialog boxes appear.

FeaturesThe following dialog boxes are available:

The open dialog [Seite 481] for queries, query views, workbooks, exception and alerts, as well as forCrystal Reports (formatted reporting) and Web templates from the history, favorites, roles orworkbooks view.

The object types Query, Workbooks and Alerts have their own dialog box when you openthem from the Business Explorer.

You can search easily for BW objects in the search [Seite 483] dialog, which is a sub-function of theopen dialog.

The save dialog [Seite 483] for queries, workbooks, exceptions and alerts, as well as for CrystalReports and Web templates.

In all three dialogs, you can sort entries in the display window exclusively by their description byclicking on the Description header. The entries are sorted hierarchically according to the tree structure(from left to right, by the description of the folder and then by the descriptions of the objects in thefolder). If you click once on Description, the objects are sorted in ascending order, if you click again,the objects are sorted in descending order. You return to the original view only when you leave thedialog box or when you cancel the dialog.

The Open DialogUseIn the open dialog, you can open BW objects from different views. You can also store BW objects indifferent views, search for objects, delete objects or remove them, and display the properties of theobjects.



FeaturesThe open dialog contains different views which you can change between using the applicationtoolbar in the left area of the dialog box.

� (History)

In the history view the last 15 objects that you used are displayed (user and system-dependent).

� (Favorites)

In the Favorites view, your favored objects are displayed in a tree structure.

� (Roles)

In the Roles view, your role-based objects are displayed in a tree structure.

The objects query, query view and exceptions also have an InfoAreas view in the application toolbar:

� (InfoAreas)

In the InfoAreas view, all InfoObjects (InfoAreas, InfoCubes, queries and query views) are displayed ina tree structure.

The Web Template object also has a Workbooks view in the application toolbar.

� (Workbooks)

In the workbooks view you can open Web templates from earlier releases that could not be assignedto a role.

In the upper right area of the dialog box, the following single functions are available:

� (Find) calls up the search dialog [Seite 483].� (Add to Favorites) adds the current object to your favorites and to store it in a freely-definable

hierarchical tree structure. You can create a new folder for your new favorite.

� (Enter in Role) stores the current object in a role. You cannot change the tree structure of therole view in the open dialog. This means that you cannot create any new folders or delete any oldones.

� (Delete) deletes objects.

� (Technical Name On/Off) displays the technical name of the object.

� (Properties On/Off) displays the properties of the object (creator, date, and so on).

In the query open dialog, you can also:

� (New) creates a new query and

� (Change) is for changing a query.

Some of these single functions are not available for all object types. If they are not available, thesymbol is grayed out.

As well as calling up these single functions using the toolbar, you can also call some of them up (forexample, Delete or Properties On) using the context menu of an object (right mouse click). Dependingon the type of object, you can also call up other functions from the context menu.

In the lower area of the dialog box, you can enter the description or technical name of the objectsand open it directly.

Object-dependent Features and General RemarksDepending on the object for which you are using the open dialog, the following special features apply:

� The objects Query, Workbooks and Alerts have a tree structure that is known by BW 2.0.

� The objects Alerts, Query Views and InfoCubes cannot be used in the favorites or roles view.



� The objects Query, Workbooks, Web Templates and Query Views can use the favorites and rolesviews where the objects are displayed in a tree structure.

� If you want to delete objects from your favorites or roles, you can choose whether you want toDelete Object or whether you only want to Delete Only the Object Reference from theRoles/Favorites.

� If you want to open an object directly from the input field and the text you enter is not clear, a list ofpossible objects is displayed, from which you can select the required entry. This service is notavailable for the Alerts object.

The Search DialogUseYou can search for BW objects in the search dialog, which is a sub-function of the open dialog box.Using the various search criteria, which you can combine with one another in any way you choose,you can restrict the search to your requirements.

IntegrationSince the search dialog is a sub-function of the open dialog, you can call it from there by choosing (Find).

FeaturesIn the upper area of the dialog box, you determine whether the search text is defined as thedescription and/or the name of the BW object for which you are searching.

You can select search criteria using user-specific and temporal entries to restrict your search further.

� In the dropdown box, select whether you want to search by created (Created by), changed(Changed) or by created or changed (Created or Changed) objects. The selection of this criteriaeffects the user and time-specific criteria.

� In the area that contains No User-Specific Restriction, By Me or By User (input user name), youspecify the user.

� You determine the temporal restrictions by selecting No Time Restriction, Time Interval (you canselect the time interval from the list in the dropdown box), or From ...To ... (you enter the timeinterval manually here).

For the object Query, the additional InfoProvider search criterion is available. To use this criterion,select Only Queries from the InfoProvider and enter the description or the technical name of theInfoProvider in the input field.

The Save DialogUseThe save dialog enables you to save BW objects in a specific folder in your favorites or roles. You cancreate folders in which to save your BW objects. You can also delete folders from your favorites orroles.



FeaturesThe save dialog contains the favorites view and the roles view. You can change between these viewsusing the application toolbar on the left side of the dialog box.

� (Favorites)

In the Favorites view, your favored objects are displayed in a tree structure.

� (Roles)

In the Roles view, your role-based objects are displayed in a tree structure.

In the upper right area of the dialog box, the following functions are available:

� Use (Create Folder) to create a new folder in the tree structure in your favorites or roles.

� Use (Delete Folder) to delete an existing folder from the tree structure in your favorites or roles.

Deleting a folder in the Save dialog box does not delete the objects contained within thisfolder. However, deleting a folder does delete the references to all of the objectscontained in this folder. As a result, you can no longer reach objects of different types,which are not displayed in the save dialog, from this folder. The objects themselvesremain and are not deleted.

� Use (Technical Name On/Off) to display the technical name of the object.

� As well as calling the functions Create Folder and Delete Folder using the corresponding symbols,you can also call these functions from the context menu of a folder (right mouse click).

In the lower area of the dialog box, you enter a descriptive name and a technical name for the objectin order to save it.

Organizing: BEx BrowserUseThe Business Explorer Browser (BEx Browser) makes it possible for you to access all document typesof the Business Information Warehouse that are assigned to your role or that you have stored in yourfavorites. You can select and open documents assigned to you in the BEx Browser or store andmanage new documents in the BEx Browser.

Document types that you can work with in the BEx Browser are:

� BW workbooks

� Documents that are stored in the Business Document Service (BDS)

� Links (references to file system, shortcuts)

� Links to internet sites (URLs)

� SAP transaction calls

� Web applications and Web templates

� Crystal reports



IntegrationWorkbooks from the Business Explorer Analyzer (see also: Evaluating Query Data [Seite 444]), aswell as links and documents from the Business Document Server, are managed in the BusinessExplorer Browser.

The Business Explorer Browser displays all of a user’s roles and favorites.

The term Role (from Release 2.0B) was called Activity Group in Release 2.0A, andChannel in Release 1.2B.

A user’s roles are assigned in the role maintenance screen [Extern] (transaction PFCG) or inthe user maintenance screen (transaction SU01), (see also the documentation on theAdministrator Workbench: Setting up Authorizations with Role Maintenance [Extern]).

The user can maintain favorites either directly in the BEx Browser, or in the SAP Easy Access menu.

Note that roles can be shown or hidden in the SAP Easy Access menu.

If your roles are not displayed in the SAP Easy Access menu:

� From SAP Easy Access, choose Menu � User Menu

� Choose Extras � Settings � Show First Level

The names of your roles are also shown in your user menu.

FeaturesWith the help of the Business Explorer Browser you can access all workbooks and other documentsthat are assigned to you using your roles and tasks (activity groups). You also work in the BusinessExplorer Browser with all workbooks and other documents that you have saved in your favorites (SAPEasy Access menu).

ActivitiesTo start the BEx Browser, choose Start ��Programs ��SAP Frontend Business InformationWarehouse ��SAP Business Explorer Browser.You can also get to the BEx Browser from the BEx Analyzer in the main menu bar Business Explorer� Browser

Selecting and Opening DocumentsUseWith the help of the browser you can open any workbooks, internet sites, programs, and transactions.

Procedure1. Start the Business Explorer Browser. Select Start � Programs � SAP Frontend Business

Information Warehouse � SAP Business Explorer Browser.



It is also possible to start the Business Explorer Browser from the Business ExplorerAnalyzer. In the main menu for Microsoft Excel in the BEx Analyzer, choose SAPBusiness Explorer � Business Explorer Browser.

2. Choose one of the folders (one of the folders in the Favorites, for example) by clicking with themouse on the folder name on the left-hand side of the screen.

3. All the workbooks and other document types that are in the file you selected are displayed for youon the right side of the screen. The workbooks and other document types are usually collectedtogether into groups that are represented by graphical symbols (folder symbols).

Note that the last two hierarchy levels of a folder are only displayed on the right side of thescreen. This means that all pages and all files that have no subfolders appear only on theright side of the screen in the BEx browser. All levels, however, are displayed in the SAPEasy Access Menu.

If you create a new folder on the left side of the screen in the BEx browser, this folder onlyappears on the left side of the screen and is not displayed on the right side of the screen.

It is also possible to create your own folder symbols [Seite 488].

4. To display the document, choose Open from the context menu (right mouse click). It is possible,for example, to open a BW workbook in the Business Explorer Analyzer.

ResultThe document is opened. If you have opened a workbook, you can display all the queries contained init and analyze the query data using navigation.

See also:Evaluating Query Data [Seite 444]

Working with the Business Explorer BrowserUseYou can select and organize documents in the BEx Browser. You can work with the following types ofdocument in the BEx Browser:

� BW workbook

� Document

� Link

� Internet address

� SAP transaction

� Web template

� Web application

� Crystal Report

You can determine the spatial (positioning on the screen) and graphical (colors, symbols) presentationof all folders and their contents. You can maintain your Favorites and add new folders or objects toyour favorites. These favorites then also appear in your user-specific initial menu (SAP Easy AccessUser Menu).



Functions/ActivitiesInserting New Folders or DocumentsSelect the right-hand area of the BEx Browser (folders), and choose New from the context menu (rightmouse click). You can create new objects (folders, workbooks, Internet addresses, SAP transactions,documents or links).

Arranging Documents SpatiallySelect a document and, using drag and drop, move it to the position you want. You can also assign adocument to a folder using drag and drop. The document symbol then adjusts itself to match the colorof the folder.

You can also determine the sequence of the documents in the folder using drag and drop.

Arranging Folders SpatiallySelect a folder and, using drag and drop, move it to the position you want.

Changing the Graphical Display of FoldersSelect a folder, and choose Select Symbol and Color from the context menu (right mouse click). Selectthe folder symbol or color for the object symbols that you want to use.

You can replace the folder symbols with company-specific images, and create your ownlogos (see Creating Logos and Folder Symbols [Seite 488]).

Copying Folders and DocumentsYou can copy individual documents and entire folders, along with all their assigned documents, toother roles or tasks in the favorites and roles. To do this, select the folder or document and, using dragand drop, move it onto the tree structure in the left-hand area of the BEx Browser. If there areadditional hierarchy levels, the tree structure opens up automatically to the position where you dragthe folder or object.

It is not possible to copy a folder or an object to a folder in the tree structure, this is displayed (thesymbol changes accordingly), for example, if you are not authorized to copy an object to a particularfolder.

Creating LinksYou can create links (shortcuts) to any files on your PC. You can also store BEx Browser objects aslinks on your Windows Desktop (using drag and drop).

Storing DocumentsYou can manage any number of files in the BEx Browser. These files are then stored in the BusinessDocument Service. Using the context menu, select New in the right-hand area of the BEx Browser.Document. Select the document you want. It is then loaded into the BW system, and you can access itat any time using the BEx Browser.

BEx Browser: AdministrationUseWith the Business Explorer Browser, you can access workbooks and other object types that areassigned to you using role maintenance (transaction PFCG) in your roles and tasks, or that youyourself have created in your favorites (either in the BEx Browser or in the menu of SAP Easy Access,transaction SESS).



FunctionsAdministration of the Business Explorer Browser has changed completely from Release 2.0. With thehelp of the reports available in BW Customizing, you can convert existing channels and favorites to thelatest technological developments. You can also convert those channels and favorites from beforeRelease 2.0A that are maintained in the InfoCatalog.

The following task distribution is valid from Release 2.0 for managing the contents displayed in theBusiness Explorer Browser.

� You select and organize documents in the BEx Browser. You determine the spatial (positioningon the screen) and graphical (colors, symbols) presentation of all folders and their contents. Youcan maintain your favorites, and add new folders or objects to your favorites (similar to thefunctions in the SAP Easy Access menu).

See also:Working with the Business Explorer Browser [Seite 486]

� Role maintenance (activity group maintenance) is the basis for administration of the roles andtasks displayed in the BEx Browser. In role maintenance (transaction PFCG) you can create newroles (activity groups), assign users to these roles (activity groups), and maintain authorizations. Inrole maintenance, you can also create links to transactions and Internet links (URLs), or evencreate new folders. However, you can only maintain the spatial (positioning on the screen) andgraphical (colors, symbols) representation of the folders and their contents, in the BEx browser.

See also:Role Maintenance [Extern]

� In the SAP Easy Access menu (transaction SESS), users can maintain their own favorites,meaning, for example, that they can add the transactions they use the most to their list offavorites, or create new folders. However, you can only maintain the spatial (positioning on thescreen) and graphical (colors, symbols) representation of the folders and their contents, in the BExbrowser.

Make the following setting, if you want to display the names of your roles (activity groups)in your user menu (SAP Easy Access) in the same way that you do in the tree structure ofthe Business Explorer Browser: In the initial screen menu (SAP Easy Access Menu)choose Menu � User Menu. Select Extras � Settings and then the option Show firstlevel. The names of the roles (activity groups) that you are assigned to are also displayedin your user menu.

Creating Logos and Folder SymbolsUseIt is possible to replace the existing folder symbols in the BEx Browser with company-specific images and logos. The folder symbols are used to identify a foldergraphically, and are found in the right half of the BEx Browser. The logo is displayedin the upper-right corner of the white title line in the BEx Browser.

FunctionsYou can assign different folder symbols to different systems. All the users in a system are givenidentical folder symbols. There are no user-specific folder symbols.



Folder SymbolsA maximum of 32 different folder symbols are possible. Each folder has two foldersymbols assigned to it. One folder symbol is for the normal display of the folder, anda second folder symbol is used when the folder has been selected, that is when themouse pointer is positioned over the folder.Only complete pairs of folder symbols (normal and selected) that are numberedconsecutively are loaded into the system.

LogosThere must always be a logo with the file name "wdbblogo.bmp", because this file isused to check the validity of the folder symbols on the local PC. If you do not want todisplay a logo, the image used for the file "wdbblogo.bmp" can also be made‘transparent’.

Normal foldersymbol

Symbol used whenthe folder is selected

Logo

Properties Appears in the normalfolder display

Appears wheneverthe folder is selected,meaning when themouse pointer ispositioned over thefolder

Appears in the upper-right corner of thewhite title line of theBEx Browser

File name wdbbfxxn.bmp“xx” represents aconsecutive indexfrom 0 to 31

wdbbfxxs.bmp“xx” represents aconsecutive indexfrom 0 to 31

wdbblogo.bmp

Size Recommended size:150x150 pixels

Recommended size:150x150 pixels

Height = 27 pixels

The width is adjustedaccording to the sizeof the window.

Colors You can use a maximum of 256 colors that you can get from the SAPEnjoy color palette.

You find examples for folder symbols that use the SAPEnjoy color palette on the installation CD under"gui\Windows\Win32\bw\themes", or on your local PC under"c:\program files\sappc\sapgui\themes\default".

Use the color index 253 to generate a transparentbackground.You use the color settings in the SAP GUI settings to modify the colorswith indexes from 73 to 96. You the SAP GUI symbol in the start toolbarto make color settings for the SAP GUI.

Blend these colors to create interesting effects for the normal foldersymbols. It is best to use contrasting colors for the selected foldersymbols, to emphasize that the folder is selected.



ActivitiesThe folder symbols are downloaded to your local PC (client) the first time you log on,and are stored under "c:\program files\sappc\sapgui\themes\bw\<SID>" Duringloading, the logo behaves in the same way as the folder symbols. The folder symbolsare only downloaded again if they have been changed. When the system checks thevalidity of the folder symbols, it compares the date of the last change in the BWsystem with an entry in the registry(HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\SAP\Bex\Browser\<SID>). The date the foldersymbols were last changed on your local PC is not checked.

AdministrationCall "c:\program files\sappc\bw\wdbbapp.exe /Upload" to load company-specificfolder symbols into a system.

Note the spelling: There is a space between the speech marks (") after .exe and the slash(/) in front of Upload.

Choose Start � Execute. There is no specific command for loading in the BExBrowser itself. The folder symbols are loaded from the local directory for the currentsystem ("c:\program files\sappc\sapgui\themes\bw\<SID>"). The user who uploadsthe folder symbols into the system must have authorization for transaction RRMB.

It is not possible to transport folder symbols between BW systems. Upload the foldersymbols into the different systems.

Business Explorer Browser on the WebUseWith the Business Explorer Browser on the Web (BEx Browser on the Web), the contents of the BExBrowser (roles, tasks, favorites) are displayed on a web browser.

You can also use the BEx Browser on the Web if no BEx Frontend has been installed.

You can call up HTML pages or Web applications from the BEx browser in the Web that you createdusing the BEx Web Application Designer and that contain one or more tables, charts, maps and so on.You can also call up any other intranet or Internet sites from the BEx browser on the Web. You cansearch for objects within the browser.

Note that you have to release the function module for Web-based reporting to use the BExbrowser in the Web You can find notes on the necessary settings via the transactionSPRO. Then choose SAP Reference IMG � BW Customizing Implementation Guide �Business Information Warehouse � Reporting-relevant settings � Web-based settings.

RestrictionsFolders and objects cannot be repositioned using drag and drop. It is not possible to maintain user BWfavorites in the BEx Browser on the Web.



In contrast to the Business Explorer Browser, on the Frontend, URLs that are not assigned to a folderare also displayed in the tree structure.

BW 3.0B Business Explorer Documentation

Documents

Transcript of BW 3.0B Business Explorer Documentation